The Consort Music of William Lawes, 1602-1645 (Music in Britain, 1600-1900)

William Lawes:Layout 1 18/12/2009 16:11 Page 1

R E L AT E D T I T L E S

Hermann Pötzlinger’s Music Book IAN RUMBOLD WITH PETER WRIGHT

A study of one of the most significant medieval manuscripts containing music, and its owner, sheds light on many aspects of contemporary culture. This is an excellent book. EARLY MUSIC REVIEW

Medieval Liturgical Chant and Patristic Exegesis EMMA HORNBY

A sensitive and detailed investigation of the complex relationship between text and music in medieval chant.

William Lawes is arguably one of the finest English composers of the early seventeenth century. Born in Salisbury in 1602, he rose to prominence in the early 1630s; in 1635 he gained a prestigious post among the elite private musicians of Charles I (the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’). With the outbreak of civil war in 1642, Lawes took arms in support of the king; he died during the Siege of Chester in September 1645.

This book will be of interest to scholars working on English music in the Early Modern period, but also to those interested in source studies, compositional process and the function of music in the Early Modern court. J O H N C U N N I N G H A M is a Postdoctoral Fellow at the School

of Music, University College Dublin.

an imprint of Boydell & Brewer Ltd PO Box 9, Woodbridge, Suffolk IP12 3DF and 668 Mt Hope Ave, Rochester NY 14620, USA www.boydell.co.uk www.boydellandbrewer.com

John Cunningham

This book is divided into three sections. The first is a contextual examination of music at the court of Charles I, with specific reference to the arcane group of musicians known as the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’; much of Lawes’s surviving consort music appears to have been written for performance of this group. The remainder of the book deals with William Lawes the composer. The second section is a detailed study of Lawes’s autograph sources: the first of its kind. It includes 62 black and white facsimile images, and complete inventories of all the autographs, and presents ground-breaking new research into Lawes’s scribal hand, the sources and their functions, and new evidence for their chronology. The third section comprises six chapters on Lawes’s consort music; in these chapters various topics are examined, such as chronology, Lawes’s compositional process, and the relationship between Lawes’s music and the court context from which it arose.

The Consort Music of William Lawes 1602–1645

MUSIC IN BRITAIN SERIES 1600 –1900

The Consort Music of William Lawes 1602–1645

John Cunningham

Jacket: Circle of Pieter Jacobsz Codde (1599–1678), Portrait of a young man (believed to be William Lawes), c.1635–40, oil on canvas. © The Sullivan Collection/The Bridgeman Art Library. JACKET DESIGN: SIMON LOXLEY

THE CONSORT MUSIC OF WILLIAM LAWES 1602–1645

LAWES.indb 1

19/03/2010 10:57

Music in Britain, 1600–1900 issn╇ 1752–1904 Series Editors:

rachel cowgill & peter holman (Leeds University Centre for English Music)

This series provides a forum for the best new work in this area; it takes a deliberately inclusive approach, covering immigrants and emigrants as well as native musicians. Contributions on all aspects of seventeenth-, eighteenth- and nineteenth-century British music studies are welcomed, particularly those placing music in its social and historical contexts, and addressing Britain’s musical links with Europe and the rest of the globe. Proposals or queries should be sent in the first instance to Professor Rachel Cowgill, Professor Peter Holman or Boydell & Brewer at the addresses shown below. All submissions will receive prompt and informed consideration. Professor Rachel Cowgill, Faculty of Arts and Humanities, Liverpool Hope University, Hope Park, Liverpool, l16 9jd email: [email protected] Professor Peter Holman, School of Music, University of Leeds, Leeds, ls2 9jt email: [email protected] Boydell & Brewer, PO Box 9, Woodbridge, Suffolk, ip12 3df email: [email protected] already published Lectures on Musical Life William Sterndale Bennett edited by Nicholas Temperley, with Yunchung Yang John Stainer: A Life in Music Jeremy Dibble The Pursuit of High Culture: John Ella and Chamber Music in Victorian London Christina Bashford Thomas Tallis and his Music in Victorian England Suzanne Cole

LAWES.indb 2

19/03/2010 10:57

THE CONSORT MUSIC OF WILLIAM LAWES 1602–1645

John Cunningham

the boydell press

LAWES.indb 3

19/03/2010 10:57

© John Cunningham 2010 All Rights Reserved. Except as permitted under current legislation no part of this work may be photocopied, stored in a retrieval system, published, performed in public, adapted, broadcast, transmitted, recorded or reproduced in any form or by any means, without the prior permission of the copyright owner The right of John Cunningham to be identified as the author of this work has been asserted in accordance with sections 77 and 78 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 First published 2010 The Boydell Press, Woodbridge isbn╇ 978-0-95468-097-8 The Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer Ltd PO Box 9, Woodbridge, Suffolk ip12 3df, UK and of Boydell & Brewer Inc. 668 Mt Hope Avenue, Rochester, ny 14620, USA website: www.boydellandbrewer.com A catalogue record of this publication is available from the British Library The publisher has no responsibility for the continued existence or accuracy of URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this book, and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate. This publication is printed on acid-free paper Designed and typeset in Adobe Minion Pro by David Roberts, Pershore, Worcestershire Printed in Great Britain by CPI Antony Rowe, Chippenham and Eastbourne

LAWES.indb 4

19/03/2010 10:57

For My Parents

❧

LAWES.indb 5

19/03/2010 10:57

LAWES.indb 6

19/03/2010 10:57



❧ Contents

Prefaceâ•… ix Acknowledgementsâ•… xvi List of Abbreviationsâ•… xviii Editorial Conventionsâ•… xxiii

Chapter 1 The ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’â•… 1



Chapter 2 The Autograph Manuscriptsâ•… 23



Chapter 3 The Music for Lyra-Violâ•… 92



Chapter 4 The Royall Consortâ•… 126



Chapter 5 The Viol Consortsâ•… 150



Chapter 6 The Fantasia-Suitesâ•… 177



Chapter 7 The Harp Consortsâ•… 213



Chapter 8 The Suites for Two Bass Viols and Organâ•… 249



Chapter 9 Conclusionsâ•… 273



Appendix 1 Source Descriptionsâ•… 278

GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61â•… 279 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40â•… 285 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229â•… 290 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798â•… 295 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2â•… 297 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3â•… 305 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432â•… 308 US-CAh, MS Mus. 70â•… 315

Appendix 2 Index of Watermarksâ•… 319

Bibliographyâ•… 324 Discographyâ•… 336 Index of Lawes↜’↜s Works Citedâ•… 339 General Indexâ•… 342

LAWES.indb 7

19/03/2010 10:57

LAWES.indb 8

19/03/2010 10:57

Preface

I

n 1603 James VI of Scotland acceded to the English throne, becoming James I ╇ of England.1 With his accession many aspects of court life changed. Unlike Elizabeth I, his predecessor, James was married, with children. The court structure had to change slightly to accommodate this, with the establishment of separate households for the Queen and the royal children. The musical establishment at court was also changing. James’s accession coincided with the coming of age of many of the best native composers of the early seventeenth century, such as John Coprario, Alfonso Ferrabosco II, Thomas Ford, Orlando Gibbons and Thomas Lupo. (According to contemporary writers Coprario was originally John Cooper, who adopted the Italianate form after a visit to Italy; Ferrabosco and Lupo were English, of Italian descent.) Within the first decade or so of the new century musical fashions had moved on from the Elizabethan period, and James’s court became the centre of musical innovation and development. James’s sons, Henry and Charles, were more interested in music than was their father. Henry, Â�created Prince of Wales in 1610, amassed an impressive retinue of musicians, mostly singer-lutenists and viol players; however, he died unexpectedly of typhoid in 1612.2 Charles, Â�created Duke of York in 1605, inherited many of Henry’s musicians when he became Prince of Wales in 1616. Most of the major scoring and formal innovations of the period were conceived and developed between the households of Prince Henry and Prince Charles. English music at the time was embracing many Italian traits; exploration of Italianinfluenced musical forms was especially fostered in Prince Henry’s household.3 Composers such as Coprario were experimenting with instrumentally conceived music for viols; also being developed were scoring and formal innovations such as lyra-viol trios and fantasia-suites with violins. Indeed, the introduction of the violin to serious consort music (which would find full expression in the consort music of William Lawes and John Jenkins in the 1630s and 1640s), was one of the most important musical developments of the period. Many of these musical innovations were developed in Prince Charles’s household. His musicians were to form ╇ 1 Probably the best general introduction to the period is B. Coward, The Stuart Age:

England, 1603–1714 (3/2003).

╇ 2 For Prince Henry’s household, see R. Strong, Henry, Prince of Wales and England’s

Lost Renaissance (1986).

╇ 3 See HolmanFTF, 197–224.

LAWES.indb 9

19/03/2010 10:57

x

the consort music of william lawes

the basis of the group generally known as the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ (LVV) after his accession in 1625. The LVV was not a fixed ensemble; rather it was a group of some of the most distinguished performers and composers in England at the time. William Lawes secured a place in the LVV in 1635.

W

illiam Lawes, son of Thomas (d. 1640) and Lucris [Lucretia] (née Shepherd), was baptized in the Close at Salisbury Cathedral on 1 May 1602.4 Thomas was a lay-vicar at the Cathedral (and vicar-choral from 1632); this suggests that William may have been brought up as a chorister. His brother Henry (baptized on 5 January 1595/6) may also have been a chorister there; he joined the Chapel Royal in January 1625/6 (first as an epistoler, then promoted to gentleman in the following year), and received a prestigious appointment to the LVV in January 1630/1.5 We know little of William’s early life. According to Thomas Fuller, he was taught by (if not apprenticed to) Coprario in the household of Edward Seymour, Earl of Hertford.6 David Pinto has plausibly suggested that this apprenticeship could have been from c.â•‹1619–26: ‘Owing to the guild system, artisans were apprenticed for a long period, customarily between the ages of 17 and 24 … Until [completion of the apprenticeship], rules bound them from plying their skills (and hence earning real money) separately from their masters. Any performing beforehand, and a fortiori composing, would have been pointless for any budding performers.↜’↜7 This may largely explain why so little information exists of Lawes’s early life. The first official record of a court post for Lawes is dated 30 April 1635. It is likely that he participated in the Royal Music for several years before this in an unofficial capacity; he appears to have contributed music to Ben Jonson’s Entertainment at Welbeck performed for the Earl of Newcastle on 21 May 1633, and was well enough known to receive the prestigious commission later that year to compose some of the music for the elaborate Inns of Court masque The Triumph of Peace, performed in February 1633/4. Part of Lawes’s remuneration for the masque included £5 for ╇ 4 The following biographical summary is based on that in LefkowitzWL. See also

A. Ashbee, ‘Lawes, William’↜, BDECM, ii. 710–12; D. Pinto, ‘Lawes, William’↜, GMO and ODNB (accessed 10 August 2009); I. Spink, Henry Lawes: Cavalier Songwriter (Oxford, 2000), 1–6. Little new information has been uncovered since Â�LefkowitzWL. For an excellent discussion of the supposed portrait of Lawes in the Music School Collection at Oxford University, see C. V. R. Blacker and D. Pinto, ‘Desperately Seeking William: Portraits of the Lawes Brothers in Context’↜, EM 37 (2009), 157–74. ╇ 5 See A. Ashbee, ‘Lawes, Henry’↜, BDECM, ii. 706–9. ╇ 6 FullerW (‘Wiltshire’), 157. ╇ 7 See PintoFyV, 9–10, at 9. Edward Seymour died in 1621, so the apprenticeship may not have continued under the auspices of the Seymour family.

LAWES.indb 10

19/03/2010 10:57

preface

xi

‘my Lord Chamberlains boy’↜, a servant of Philip Herbert possibly apprenticed to him, though no other records of this are known. Although his modern reputation is founded on his instrumental music, Lawes was a respected song composer. No later than 1636 he was the main composer of vocal music for the royal theatre companies and ‘Beeston’s Boys’ at the Cockpit-in-Court of Whitehall and BlackÂ� friars. Lawes also contributed music to the court masques The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour (1636) and Britannia Triumphans (1638), as well as William Cartwright’s The Royal Slave, a play presented in Oxford during the summer progress of 1636. By the early 1640s the country was veering towards political meltdown. By 1639 court life was becoming increasingly disrupted by forced migrations within the kingdom brought about by Charles’s increasing resort to military measures; by the autumn of 1642 the king had fled London and set up court in Oxford. Around this time Lawes enlisted as a soldier. David Pinto has persuasively suggested that Lawes was present at the Siege of York in April–June 1644.8 He met his untimely death on 24 September 1645 during the Battle of Chester.9 Charles I is reputed to have instituted a special mourning for Lawes, ‘the Father of Musick’↜.↜10 His death was lamented by the poets Robert Herrick, Robert Heath and John Tatham; Henry Lawes published Choice Psalmes in William’s memory in 1648. Some of Lawes’s consort music remained popular well after his death: pieces from the Royall Consort are found in manuscripts until around 1680. By the last quarter of the seventeenth century, however, his music had become old-fashioned in the face of strong Italian influences. In the late eighteenth century his reputation received no favours from Charles Burney’s disparaging analysis of the Royall Consort.11 Burney’s opinion of Lawes and his contemporaries did much to silence the repertoire for the next century or so. The modern revival of Lawes began in the 1890s with performances by Arnold Dolmetsch and his circle.12 Dolmetsch was ╇ 8 PintoY. ╇ 9 RingD.

10 FullerW (‘Wiltshire’), 157.

11 C. Burney, A General History of Music (1776–89), ed. F. Mercer (1935; r/1957), ii.

309–10; in that passage Burney famously described the Royall Consort as ‘one of the most dry, aukward [sic], and unmeaning compositions I ever remember to have had the trouble of scoring’↜. 12 For example, at a public lecture at Gresham College given by Professor J. FredÂ�erick Bridge on ‘The Anniversary of the death of Sir Thomas Gresham, 1579, and of Henry Purcell, 1695’↜, Professor Bridge ‘assisted by Mr. dolmetsch and his pupils’ performed ‘Some Instrumental Music from the time of Sir Thomas Gresham to that of Purcell’↜, which included a ‘Movement from the Royal Consort’↜. The lecture took place on 21 November 1890. There is a copy of the programme in the DolÂ� metsch family library, Haslemere.

LAWES.indb 11

19/03/2010 10:57

xii

the consort music of william lawes

an enthusiastic promoter of Lawes’s music, which regularly featured in Haslemere programmes; a performance of a six-part fantasia and ayre at the 1931 Haslemere Festival prompted Rupert Erlebach’s appraisal of Lawes in 1932.13 The Dolmetsch family was also first to record Lawes’s music. In the mid-1930s they set up Dolmetsch Gramophone Records to produce recordings of music performed at the annual Haslemere festivals. The last record (d.r.16) included two dances from the Royall Consort.14 Scholarly appreciation of Lawes reached a peak in 1960 with Murray LefÂ�koÂ� witz’s pioneering monograph on the composer,15 which stands as the most complete study of the composer’s music; after nearly half a century, however, many aspects are in need of updating. David Pinto has published the most work on Lawes in the years since Lefkowitz’s study.16 His edition of the five- and six-part viol consorts was the first complete collected edition of Lawes’s music.17 Since then Pinto has produced several articles and essays, and an edition of the fantasia-suites for the Musica Britannica series. Perhaps the crowning glory of his research on Lawes is his edition of the Royall Consort (1995), which has commendably produced an excellent text for both the Tr–Tr–T–B (‘old’) and Tr–Tr–B–B (‘new’) versions the collection.18 The edition was accompanied by a monograph in which Pinto discussed the viol consorts and elaborated on several insightful suggestions into the complex issues of the rescoring of the Royall Consort.19 In September 1995 a conference was held in Oxford to commemorate the 350th anniversary of Lawes’s death; many of the papers given were published subsequently as a series of essays, William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work (Aldershot, 1998), edited by Andrew Ashbee. The wide range of Lawes-related topics covered in this book exemplifies the broad appeal of Lawes’s music among modern musicologists.

M

y aim in this book has been to address several issues concerning Lawes’s music not dealt with in previous studies, and to build upon the existing body of knowledge to advance our understanding of Lawes as a composer. Underlying 13 R. Erlebach, ‘William Lawes and His String Music’↜, PRMA 59 (1932–3), 103–19.

14 The Royall Consort tracks are included on Pioneer Early Music Recordings: The

Dolmetsch Family with Diana Poulton, Volume 1. The Dolmetsch Family. The Dolmetsch Foundation and The Lute Society [c. 2005], lsdol001; d.r.16 is dated 29 September 1948. 15 LefkowitzWL. 16 See Bibliography. 17 LawesCS. 18 LawesRC. 19 PintoFyV.

LAWES.indb 12

19/03/2010 10:57

preface

xiii

these investigations is a primary research question: what can a detailed study of Lawes’s working environment and his autograph sources tell us about him as a composer, and about the function(s) and purpose(s) of the music that he composed? Chapters 1 and 2 deal with background issues relating to Lawes, namely the court and the autograph manuscripts. Chapters 6–9 comprise six shorter studies covering the entire range of Lawes’s consort music and a brief conclusion. Understanding Lawes and his music must begin with understanding the Royal Music at the early Stuart court, as this was the milieu in which he composed his most significant consort music; thus, Chapter 1 examines the ‘Private Music’ of Charles I. Many historical studies of the early modern court have given musicologists invaluable background. In particular, the late Gerald Aylmer’s studies in court administration have provided the basis not only for many historical Â�enquiries, but also for musicologists attempting to understand better the way in which musicians operated within the complex structure of the early Stuart court.20 Several architectural studies, such as Simon Thurley’s brilliant exposition of the architectural history of Whitehall Palace, Whitehall Palace: An Architectural History of the Royal Apartments, 1240–1698 (1999), have provided much valuable information on the physical structure of the palace (destroyed by fire in 1698), helping us to assess possible places of performance. In recent years much research has been done on music at the English court; several publications in particular have significantly increased our understanding of this area. The majority of the documentary evidence cited here from court records was made accessible by the pioneering work of Andrew Ashbee, whose nine-Â�volume series Records of English Court Music (RECM) and the accompanying two-volume Biographical Dictionary of English Court Musicians (BDECM) have done much to facilitate the study of music at the English court. In the early Stuart court there were three main secular divisions to the Royal Music: the violin band, the wind bands and the Private Music. The first two groups have been dealt with previously. Peter Holman’s seminal study Four and Twenty Fiddlers: The Violin at the English Court, 1540–1690 (Oxford, 2/1995) has shown what can be achieved when musical meat is put onto the bare bones of court documents; this wideranging work is essential reading for anyone researching music in early modern England and sets a high standard to which many subsequent studies will undoubtedly aspire. David Lasocki’s doctoral dissertation, ‘Professional Recorder Players in England, 1540–1740’ (University of Iowa, 1983) is an intriguing and comprehensive account of the development of the wind bands in the early Stuart court (and beyond). There is no similarly comprehensive study of the Private Music of Charles I (LVV); this is the aim of Chapter 1, which discusses the origins and 20 See Bibliography.

LAWES.indb 13

19/03/2010 10:57

xiv

the consort music of william lawes

development of the LVV, its personnel, organization, and place within the wider context of the Royal Music and the court. Chapter 2 seeks to answer general questions relating to Lawes’s autograph sources. What can the autographs reveal about the development of Lawes’s hand? What is their chronology? What was their function? Can this function be related to the handwriting style? What can they reveal about Lawes’s compositional process? There is a survey of Lawes’s known autographs, and a discussion of his handwriting. Recent studies by Jessie Ann Owens and Rebecca Herissone have brilliantly demonstrated what can be achieved when detailed source studies are used to illuminate the wider context of how composers and musicians used the manuscripts that have come down to us.21 Also influential in my assessment of Lawes’s sources has been Robert Shay and Robert Thompson’s recent study of Henry Purcell’s musical and text hands, which has led to many breakthroughs in helping to date his works and autograph manuscripts.22 A similarly comprehensive published survey of Lawes’s hand has been lacking.23 The number of holograph Lawes sources is unfortunately much fewer than those available to Purcell scholars. Nevertheless, the autographs reveal much about Lawes’s compositional process, and I will make some suggestions regarding their chronology. Despite the limitations of Lawes’s sources, there is a strong need for this kind of study. For example, in his review of Pinto’s monograph on Lawes, Ian Spink questioned the issue of chronology: ‘it seems a bit too pat; why some of this music cannot be later [than 1642] – Lawes did not die until 1645 – is not made clear’↜.24 Although my analysis of the sources yields some different results from those presented by Pinto, we do agree that much, if not all, of Lawes’s consort music dates to before 1642. Along with the evidence from the sources, the main reason for this dating is essentially bound up with the Â�reasons for its creation in the first place. The argument throughout this book is that Lawes composed the majority of his consort music for the court. Naturally this does not preclude composition after the removal of the court to Oxford; we know little of Lawes’s movements between then and his death in September 1645. We may imagine, however, that the commissioning of 21 J. A. Owens, Composers at Work: The Craft of Musical Composition, 1450–1600

(Oxford, 1997); R. Herissone, ‘To fill, forbear, or adorne’: The Organ Accompaniment of Restoration Sacred Music (Aldershot, 2006); R. Herissone, ‘↜“Fowle Â�Originalls” and “Fayre Writeing”: Reconsidering Purcell’s Compositional Process’↜, Journal of Musicology 23 (2006), 569–619. 22 ShayThompsonPM. 23 Robert Thompson has presented some preliminary findings on the paper types and watermarks found in some of the Lawes autographs: see ThompsonEMM and ThompsonP. 24 I. Spink, ‘Review: D. Pinto, For the Violls’↜, ML 79 (1998), 108–9, at 109.

LAWES.indb 14

19/03/2010 10:57

preface

xv

new consort music was some way down Charles’s list of priorities during the Civil War. More importantly, the evidence from the sources (especially the autographs) strongly suggests that the bulk of Lawes’s output as it has survived was intact by c.â•‹1640. Chapters 3–8 deal with Lawes’s music, applying the findings of the first two chapters to detailed studies of his consort music. Chapter 3 presents a short survey of the evolution and development of the lyra-viol trio (including issues concerning the instrument, nomenclature, sources and repertoire) and evaluates Lawes’s lyra-viol music, solo and ensemble. Only six of his trios survive complete; many more survive in one part and afford valuable insights into Lawes’s revision process. Chapter 4 deals with the Royall Consort. Although much has been written on this collection, some key issues are in need of re-examination. LefkoÂ�witz was the first musicologist to study the collection in detail and to recognize the existence of the two versions;25 since then the late Gordon Dodd and especially David Pinto have contributed much to our understanding of the collection:26 any subsequent discussion is greatly indebted to their work. Chapter 4 briefly assesses the importance of the Royall Consort in the repertoire, and reassesses some of the most important issues surrounding the collection, including the reasons behind rescoring. Chapter 5 discusses Lawes’s music for viol consort, focusing primarily on the issue of when they were composed, and develops further the evidence presented in Chapter 2. The following chapter discuses the fantasia-suites: when and how these pieces were composed, and their place within the consort repertoire. Despite containing some of his finest instrumental writing, Lawes’s harp consorts remain in relative obscurity. The modern neglect of the harp consort stems from the partially incomplete harp parts, and from the contentious issue of whether Lawes composed for a gut-strung triple harp or a wire-strung Irish harp, an issue discussed in Chapter 7. This chapter also looks in detail at the music of the harp consorts, and offers suggestions on issues such as internal development and chronology. Lawes’s style of division-writing is also examined, especially its relationship to Christopher Simpson’s The Division-Violist (1659). Chapter 8 explores Lawes’s music for two bass viols and organ. These pieces are highly significant in our understanding of Lawes’s development as a composer; indeed, from them much information can be gleaned of his compositional process. This chapter provides a brief consideration of the development of the genre, a thorough reassessment of the sources, and some suggestions on dates of composition. Some conclusions are briefly presented in Chapter Â� 9.

25 LefkowitzWL.

26 LawesRC; PintoNL; PintoFyV, 34–69.

LAWES.indb 15

19/03/2010 10:57

Acknowledgements

O

ver the course of writing this book I have received information, encourage╇ ment and advice from many people. I owe my greatest debt to Peter Holman, my doctoral research supervisor, who has encouraged the book from its very earliest stages. It has been my great privilege to work with Peter, from whom I continue to learn. He remains overwhelmingly generous in giving his time, encouragement and advice; without his encyclopaedic knowledge and unfailing wisdom this work would have been much the poorer. To him, my sincere thanks. My thanks are also due to Peter and his wife Tricia for their hospitality during several visits to Colchester. Another significant debt is due to Harry White. As an undergraduate at University College Dublin, his lectures on Baroque music were a revelation to me; they sparked my interest in musicology generally and seventeenth-century English music in particular. Over many years Harry has been unwaveringly generous in giving his encouragement and support; he also responded to a late draft of the book with typical wit and insightfulness. To him also, my sincere thanks. I am extremely grateful to Christopher Field, Jane Troy Johnson, Layton Ring, Jonathan Wainwright and Bryan White for reading and commenting on earlier drafts of the book in whole or part. I would especially like to thank David Pinto and Andrew Ashbee for their advice and stimulating correspondences on many Lawes-related topics, and for their comments on drafts of several of the chapters; Andrew also kindly shared his forthcoming monograph on John Jenkins ahead of publication. I am also grateful to the following for providing me with help and encouragement in various ways: Anastasia Belina, Barra Boydell, Máire Buffet, Martin Butler, Stuart Cheney, Melissa Devereux, Robin Elliott, Michael Fleming, Kerry Houston, Min Jung Kang, David Larkin, Richard Rastall, Thérèse Smith, Robert Thompson and Andrew Woolley. And, of course, any study of William Lawes inevitably owes much to the research of Murray Lefkowitz; this book is no exception. I am indebted also to the Music in Britain, 1600–1900 series editors Rachel Cowgill and Peter Holman, and to Caroline Palmer, Michael Middeke, Catherine Larner, David Roberts and the editorial staff at Boydell & Brewer for their advice, support and professionalism at every stage of this process. My thanks also to the staff of the various libraries in which my research has been conducted; I am grateful for permission to reproduce photographs of their holdings (as specified): Cambridge, MA, Houghton Library, Harvard University (Figs 2.10b, 2.13b, 2.29, 2.30a, 2.30b, 2.30c, 2.30d, 2.31, 2.32a, 2.32b, 2.32c, 2.33, 2.35, reproduced

LAWES.indb 16

19/03/2010 10:57

acknowledgements

xvii

by permission of the President and Fellows of Harvard College. Thanks to William Stoneman, Florence Fearrington Librarian of Houghton Library); Dublin, Marsh’s Library; Dublin, Trinity College; Dublin, University College Dublin; Haslemere, Dolmetsch Library (Fig. 3.4. Particular thanks to Jeanne Dolmetsch for her enthusiastic responses to my research and for her generous hospitality during several visits to Haslemere); Hatfield House, Hatfield (Fig. 2.3, reproduced by permission of the Marquess of Salisbury. Thanks to Vicki Perry, Assistant Archivist, for photographing the document at very short notice); Leeds, University of Leeds, Brotherton Library; London, the British Library (Figs 2.1c, 2.6b, 2.7a, 2.7b, 2.8b, 2.9a, 2.9b, 2.10a, 2.10d, 2.10e, 2.11a, 2.11b, 2.11c, 2.12b, 2.19b, 2.26, 2.27, 2.28, 2.34b, reproduced by permission of the Trustees); Warminster, Longleat House (Fig. 2.5, reproduced by permission of the Marquess of Bath, Longleat House, Warminster, Wiltshire. Thanks to Kate Harris, Curator); New York, New York Public Library; Oxford, the Bodleian Library (Figs 2.1a, 2.1b, 2.1d, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6a, 2.8a, 2.10c, 2.10f, 2.12a, 2.13a, 2.14, 2.15, 2.16a, 2.16b, 2.17, 2.18, 2.19a, 2.20, 2.21, 2.22a, 2.22b, 2.22c, 2.22d, 2.23, 2.24, 2.25, 2.34a, 5.1, 8.1a, 8.1b, reproduced by permission of the Bodleian Library, University of Oxford. Thanks to Martin Holmes, Music Librarian); Oxford, Christ Church Library (Figs 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, reproduced by permission of The Governing Body of Christ Church, Oxford. Thanks to Janet McMullin, Assistant Librarian). My thanks also to Susan Clermont, Senior Music Specialist (Music Division), of the Library of Congress, Washington, for providing me with a copy of the Library’s Cummings sale catalogue. The writing of the earliest drafts of this book was generously funded by a National University of Ireland Travelling Studentship in the Arts and Humanities, the final stages by an Irish Research Council for the Humanities and Social Sciences Post-Doctoral Research Fellowship, which I held at the School of Music, UCD; I am grateful to all at UCD for providing a welcoming and stimulating research environment. My thanks are also due to the trustees of the Musica Britannica Trust, from whom I received a Louise Dyer Award, which allowed me to visit the Houghton Library, Harvard University to examine Lawes’s autograph lyra-viol book. I am extremely grateful to the Music & Letters Trust for their generous subvention to help finance the publication of this book. It gives me great pleasure to record my thanks to Declan Mulligan for his many deeds well beyond the call of duty (over longer than either of us would care to admit); thanks too to my sister Siân and brother Cian. My most personal and heartfelt thanks are to Susan Jane Flynn for forbearance, support and oft-needed perspective. Finally, I would like to thank my parents for their continued support, without which this book could never have been started; to them it is dedicated. Dublin, September 2009

LAWES.indb 17

19/03/2010 10:57

List of Abbreviations general

b. d. INV. LVV n. om.

born died a portion of a MS written from the end with the volume inverted ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ (Private Music of Charles I; see Chapter 1) note omitted

A B Bar Bc BV LV T Tr v(v)

Alto Bass Baritone Continuo (unfigured, unless stated otherwise) Bass viol Lyra-viol Tenor Treble Voice(s)

instruments

library sigla (Following the RISM system as used in GMO)

austria A-ET

Ebenthal bei Klagenfurt, Privatbibliothek Goëss

france F-Pcnrs F-Pn

Paris, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France

D-Hs

Hamburg, Staats- und Universitätsbibliothek

germany great britain GB-Cfm GB-Ckc GB-Ctc GB-CHEr GB-En GB-Eu GB-HAdolmetsch GB-Lam GB-Lbl

LAWES.indb 18

Cambridge, Fitzwilliam Museum Cambridge, King’s College Cambridge, Trinity College Chester, Cheshire Records Office Edinburgh, National Library of Scotland Edinburgh, University Library Haslemere, Dolmetsch Library London, Royal Academy of Music London, British Library

19/03/2010 10:57

abbreviations GB-Lcm GB-Lpro GB-Mp GB-Ob GB-Och GB-W

London, Royal College of Music London, Public Records Office Manchester, Public Library Oxford, Bodleian Library Oxford, Christ Church Library Wells, Cathedral Library

IRL-Dm

Dublin, Marsh’s Library

xix

ireland

US-CAh US-Cn US-NH US-NHub US-NYp US-SM US-Ws

united states of america

Cambridge, MA, Harvard University Library (Houghton Library) Chicago, Newberry Library New Haven, CT, Yale University, School of Music Library New Haven, CT, Yale University, Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript Library New York, New York Public Library San Marino, CA, Huntington Library Washington, DC, Folger Shakespeare Library

frequently cited journals, series & organizations AcM AHJ CEKM ELS EM EMH FAM GSJ HLQ IMS JAMS JCAUSM JLSA JRMA JVdGSA LSJ MB ML MQ PRBVCS PRMA RES RMARC RRMBE VdGS VdGSJ

LAWES.indb 19

Acta Musicologica American Harp Journal Corpus of Early Keyboard Music English Lute Songs, 1597–1632 Early Music Early Music History Fontes Artis Musicae Galpin Society Journal Huntington Library Quarterly Irish Musical Studies Journal of the American Musicological Society Journal of the Canadian Association of University Schools of Music Journal of the Lute Society of America Journal of the Royal Musical Association Journal of the Viola da Gamba Society of America Lute Society Journal (Great Britain) Musica Britannica Music and Letters The Musical Quarterly PRB Productions, Viol Consort Series Proceedings of the Royal Musical Association The Review of English Studies Royal Musical Association Research Chronicle Recent Researches in Music of the Baroque Era Viola da Gamba Society (Great Britain) The Viola da Gamba Society Journal

19/03/2010 10:57

xx

the consort music of william lawes

other works frequently cited AshbeeHM1

A. Ashbee, The Harmonious Musick of John Jenkins, vol. 1: The Fantasias for Viols (Surbiton, 1992)

AshbeeHM2

A. Ashbee, The Harmonious Musick of John Jenkins, vol. 2: Suites, Airs and Vocal Music (forthcoming)

AshbeeJB

A. Ashbee, ‘Instrumental Music from the Library of John Browne (1608–1691), Clerk of the Parliaments’↜, ML 58 (1977), 43–59

BDECM

A Biographical Dictionary of English Court Musicians, 1485–1714, 2 vols, ed. A. Ashbee and D. Lasocki, assisted by P. Holman and F. Kisby (Aldershot, 1998)

CrumEL

M. Crum, ‘Early Lists of the Oxford Music School Collection’↜, ML 48 (1967), 23–34

CrumOMSC

M. Crum, The Oxford Music School Collection at the Bodleian Library, Oxford: A Guide and Index to the Harvester Microfilm Collection (Brighton, 1979)

CunninghamLVT

J. Cunningham, ‘↜“Let Them be Lusty, Smart-Speaking Viols”: William Lawes and the Lyra Viol Trio’↜, JVdGSA 43 (2006; published 2008), 32–68

CunninghamMPC J. Cunningham, ‘Music for the Privy Chamber: Studies in the Consort Music of William Lawes (1602–45)’ (PhD diss., University of Leeds, 2007)

LAWES.indb 20

ES1600–75

English Song, 1600–1675: Facsimiles of Twenty-Six Manuscripts and an Edition of the Texts, 12 vols, ed. E. Jorgens (1986–9)

FieldCM

C. D. S. Field, ‘Consort Music I: Up to 1660’↜, in Music in Britain: The Seventeenth Century, ed. I. Spink (Oxford, 1995), 197–244

FieldCW

C. D. S. Field, ‘The Composer’s Workshop: Revisions in the Consort Music of Alfonso Ferrabosco the Younger’↜, Chelys 27 (1999), 1–39

FieldFR

C. D. S. Field, ‘Formality and Rhetoric in English Fantasia-Suites’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 197–249

FieldJCH

C. D. S. Field, ‘Jenkins and the Cosmography of Harmony’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 1–74

FullerW

T. Fuller, A History of the Worthies of England (1662)

GMO

Grove Music Online, ed. L. Macy (www.grovemusic.com)

HawkinsGH

Sir J. Hawkins, A General History of the Science and Practice of Music, 2 vols (1776; r/1877 and 1969)

HolmanD

P. Holman, Dowland: Lachrimae (1604) (Cambridge, 1999)

HolmanFTF

P. Holman, Four and Twenty Fiddlers: The Violin at the English Court, 1540–1690 (Oxford, 2/1995)

HolmanH

P. Holman, ‘The Harp in Stuart England: New Light on William Lawes’s Harp Consorts’↜, EM 15 (1987), 188–203

19/03/2010 10:57

abbreviations

xxi

HolmanOA

P. Holman, ‘↜“Evenly, Softly, and Sweetly Acchording to All”: The Organ Accompaniment of English Consort Music’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 353–82

IMCCM1

A. Ashbee, R. Thompson and J. Wainwright (compilers), The Viola da Gamba Society Index of Manuscripts Containing Consort Music, vol. 1 (Aldershot, 2001)

IMCCM2

A. Ashbee, R. Thompson and J. Wainwright (compilers), The Viola da Gamba Society Index of Manuscripts Containing Consort Music, vol. 2 (Aldershot, 2008)

Index

Viola da Gamba Society of Great Britain: Thematic Index of Music for Viols, G. Dodd (compiler), with revisions and additions by A. Ashbee (2/2004)

LefkowitzWL

M. Lefkowitz, William Lawes (1960)

MaceMM

T. Mace, Musick’s Monument (1676)

ODNB

The Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. L. Goldman (www.oxforddnb.com)

PintoAS

D. Pinto, ‘William Lawes’ Consort Suites for the Viols, and the Autograph Sources’↜, Chelys 4 (1972), 11–16

PintoFyV

D. Pinto, For ye Violls: The Consort and Dance Music of William Lawes (Richmond, 1995)

PintoMVC

D. Pinto, ‘William Lawes’ Music for Viol Consort’↜, EM 6 (1978), 12–24

PintoNL

D. Pinto, ‘New Lamps for Old: The Versions of the Royall Consort’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 251–82

PintoY

D. Pinto, ‘William Lawes at the Siege of York, 1644’↜, MT 127 (1986), 579–83

PlayfordCC

H. Playford, ‘A Curious collection of Musick-Books, Both vocal and instrumental’ (1690) (GB-Lbl, Harl. 5936/nos. 419–20)

RECM

Records of English Court Music, 9 vols, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1986–96)

RingD

L. Ring, ‘Wednesday, 24 September, 1645 – The Death of William Lawes during the Battle of Rowton Heath at the Siege of Chester’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 155–74

RobinsonCP

A. Robinson, ‘“Choice Psalmes”: A Brother’s Memorial’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 175–98

ShayThompsonPM R. Shay and R. Thompson, Purcell Manuscripts: The Principal Musical Sources (Cambridge, 2000) SimpsonDV

C. Simpson, The Division-Violist (1659)

SpringL

M. Spring, The Lute in Britain: A History of the Instrument and its Music (Oxford, 2001)

LAWES.indb 21

19/03/2010 10:57

xxii

the consort music of william lawes

ThompsonEMM

R. Thompson, ‘English Music Manuscripts and the Fine Paper Trade, 1648–1688’ (PhD diss., London, King’s College, 1988)

ThompsonP

R. Thompson, ‘Paper in English Music Manuscripts: 1620–1645’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 143–54

TraficanteMS

F. Traficante, ‘Music for Lyra-viol: Manuscript Sources’↜, Chelys 8 (1978–9), 4–22

WainwrightCC

J. Wainwright, ‘The Christ Church Viol-Consort Manuscripts Reconsidered: Christ Church, Oxford, Music Manuscripts 2, 397–408, and 436; 417–418 and 1080; and 432 and 612–613’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 189–242

WainwrightMP

J. Wainwright, Musical Patronage in Seventeenth-Century England: Christopher, First Baron Hatton (1605–1670) (Aldershot, 1997)

WallsM

P. Walls, Music in the English Courtly Masque, 1604–1640 (Oxford, 1996)

WillettsJB

P. Willetts, ‘John Barnard’s Collections of Viol and Vocal Music’↜, Chelys 20 (1991), 28–42

WoodMfP

J. Wood, ‘William Lawes’s Music for Plays’↜, in William Lawes (1602– 1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 11–68

editions frequently cited

LAWES.indb 22

CoprarioBV

John Coprario: Twelve Fantasias for Two Bass Viols and Organ and Eleven Pieces for Three Lyra-viols, ed. R. Charteris, RRMBE 41 (Madison, WI, 1982)

FerraboscoCM

Alfonso Ferrabosco the Younger: Consort Music of Five and Six Parts, ed. C. D. S. Field and D. Pinto, MB 81 (2003)

JacobeanCM

Jacobean Consort Music, ed. T. Dart and W. Coates, MB 9 (2/1971)

LawesCS

William Lawes: Consort Sets in Five and Six Parts, ed. D. Pinto (1979)

LawesCVM1

William Lawes: Collected Vocal Music Part 1: Solo Songs, ed. G. Callon, RRMBE 120 (Madison, WI, 2002)

LawesCVM2

William Lawes: Collected Vocal Music Part 2: Dialogues, Partsongs, and Catches, ed. G. Callon, RRMBE 121 (Madison, WI, 2002)

LawesCVM3

William Lawes: Collected Vocal Music Part 3: Sacred Music, ed. G. Callon, RRMBE 122 (Madison, WI, 2002)

LawesCVM4

William Lawes: Collected Vocal Music Part 4: Masques, ed. G. Callon, RRMBE 123 (Madison, WI, 2002)

LawesFS

William Lawes: Fantasia-Suites, ed. D. Pinto, MB 60 (1991)

LawesHC

William Lawes: The Harp Consorts, ed. J. Achtman, et al., PRBVCS 62 (Albany, CA, 2007)

LawesRC

William Lawes: The Royall Consort (‘Old’ and ‘New’ Versions), 3 vols, ed. D. Pinto (1995)

LawesSCM

William Lawes: Select Consort Music, ed. M. Lefkowitz, MB 21 (2/1971)

19/03/2010 10:57

Editorial Conventions Original spelling, capitalization and punctuation have been retained in transcriptions of original written sources. Most of the archival documents cited have been transcribed from RECM, where some documents are summarized in modernized spelling; duplicate records in RECM have not been recorded. Specific titles of musical forms in Lawes’s music have been regularized (as Aire, Alman, Corant, Fantazia or Fantazy, In Nomine, Pavan and Saraband) based on his general usage: original spellings are given in the manuscript inventories. In folio numbers, the verso portion of a page is given the suffix ‘v’↜, the recto side ‘r’: e.g. fols 23v and 24r. Unnumbered folios are identified by a Roman numeral referring to the previous numbered folio, e.g. fol. 21/iii. Items on a page are indicated with a colon; thus, fol. 24v:2 indicates the second piece on folio 24v. Routine dictionary entries (GMO, ODNB, BDECM) for individuals are not referenced unless directly quoted or specific reference is required. Place of publication is London, unless otherwise stated. The music examples are intended as simple transcriptions from the sources rather than critical editions, so obvious errors have been corrected without comment; where practical, the bar numbers of music examples correspond to a modern edition(s). Original key and time signatures have been retained, except for triple time pieces where ‘3i’ signatures have been uniformly rendered as ‘3’; accidentals have been modernized and last to the end of the bar, with cautionary or editorial accidentals in round brackets; editorial additions are indicated by small font or square brackets; original clef changes have been followed, although non-standard clefs have been silently emended; barring, beaming and stem directions have been regularized. Musical pitches in the text are indicated by the Helmholtz system: c' denotes middle C on a modern keyboard, with octaves above as c", c''', etc. and octaves below as c, C, etc. Major keys are indicated by capitals, minor keys by lowercase (not italicized). Clefs are indicated using the system where the treble, alto and bass clefs are given as g2, c3 and F4. Throughout the text, numerals in curly brackets {} indicate the number accorded to the piece in the Viola da Gamba Society’s Index. Only items from the Harp Â�Consorts are not referred to by their VdGS number; instead these are referred to by their numbering in the autograph partbooks, and are prefixed by ‘HC’↜, followed by the Â�corresponding number: HC23, etc.

LAWES.indb 23

19/03/2010 10:57

xxiv the consort music of william lawes In sixteenth- and seventeenth-century England, dates in official documents were reckoned from Lady Day (25 March), not from New Year’s Day (1 January). Therefore, in the seventeenth century ‘1638’ ran from 25 March 1638 to 24 March 1639. This system has been retained throughout the book. Thus, the overlapping period receives two years: e.g. 24 February 1637/38. The old system of English currency has been retained: there were twelve pence (d.) to a shilling (s.) and twenty shillings to the pound (£ or l.)

LAWES.indb 24

19/03/2010 10:57

chapter 1

The ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’

C

harles I was one of the greatest patrons of the arts to sit on the English ╇ throne. His reign began on 27 March 1625, after the death of his father, James I; the first time an adult male had directly succeeded to the English throne since Henry VIII in 1509. Born in 1600, Charles was William Lawes’s senior by two years. By the time Lawes gained a post in the royal household in 1635 Charles had been ruling without parliament for six years. The so-called ‘personal rule’ lasted until 1640, by which time Charles – largely through a mixture of ineptitude and circumstance – managed to bring about a political climate that would result in civil war and regicide. Charles was an aesthete. He spent a king’s fortune amassing one of the most impressive art collections in Europe, and commissioned the leading artists of the day such as Peter Paul Rubens and Anthony Van Dyck. Also a lover of music, according to John Playford, Charles was taught to play the bass viol by John Coprario.1 His musical tastes were strongly influenced by his elder brother Henry, who died unexpectedly in 1612. Upon his accession, Charles inherited the existing royal musicians and their organizational structure. The changes that the Royal Music underwent during Charles’s reign were significant in many ways, but perhaps the most important innovation was the formation of the group variously known as ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ (LVV), in which Lawes was later employed.2

T

he main residence of the Tudors and early Stuarts was Whitehall Palace. Royal residences were also kept at Hampton Court, St James’s and Greenwich; wherever the monarch resided he/she brought the administrative structure with them.3 The structure of the court had to change in 1603 to accommodate the new king. Unlike Elizabeth I, James VI of Scotland (now James I of England), had a ╇ 1 J. Playford, An Introduction to the Skill of Musick (10/1683), p.â•‹[x]. The fourth to

seventh editions refer to Charles’s performing ability but not to his having been taught by Coprario; editions subsequent to 1683 repeat the version of the tenth edition.

╇ 2 The information in this chapter is largely drawn from material in RECM. ╇ 3 For a succinct background to the development of the court, see HolmanFTF, 32–57;

also N. Cuddy, ‘Reinventing a Monarchy: The Changing Structure and Political Function of the Stuart Court, 1603–88’↜, in The Stuart Courts, ed. E. Cruickshanks (Gloucestershire, 2000), 59–85.

LAWES.indb 1

19/03/2010 10:57

2

the consort music of william lawes

consort and children. The main household was now that of the king. His wife, Queen Anne of Denmark, also had her own household, as did the royal children (Henry, Charles and Elizabeth) as they came of age. Each of these establishments had its own staff, including musicians, and essentially mirrored the structure of the main household.4 In the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries the English court was divided into three main areas: the Stables, the Household (the service areas ‘below stairs’) and the Chamber (the living areas etc. ‘above stairs’).5 The Lord Chamberlain was the administrative head of the Chamber; his counterpart below stairs was the Lord Steward. For most of Charles I’s reign Philip Herbert, fourth Earl of Pembroke and first Earl of Montgomery, served as Lord Chamberlain, holding office from 1626 to 1641. As Lord Chamberlain, Montgomery controlled all musical activities at Court and all payments for them had first to be approved by him. There were no appointments made (except exceptionally by the King himself), liveries granted, instruments bought, or duties arranged without his approval and authority. In addition he acted as a mediator in any disputes concerning Court servants. His orders were conveyed by means of a written warrant, signed, stamped or sealed by his office and directed to the appropriate person or department.6 The Chamber consisted of several linked rooms proceeding from public to private: the Great Hall, the Guard Chamber, the Presence Chamber, the Privy Chamber, the Privy Apartments, and the Bedchamber. The Privy Apartments were the innermost sanctum of the court. Apart from its staff, only high-ranking courtiers and guests were usually allowed access, especially after the accession of Charles I. The Royal Music was a microcosm of this complex structure.7 It consisted of several distinct groups, all under the Lord Chamberlain’s authority. The Chapel Royal, the oldest and largest of the groups, provided the daily choral music at the court chapels, and ‘Doubtless, its members also contributed a good deal to informal music-making throughout the Tudor and Stuart period’↜.8 Secular music ╇ 4 For diagrams of the layout of Whitehall Palace etc., see S. Thurley, Whitehall

Palace: An Architectural History of the Royal Apartments, 1240–1698 (1999).

╇ 5 For a detailed discussion, see G. Aylmer, The King’s Servants: The Civil Service of

Charles I, 1625–1642 (2/1974), 26–32.

╇ 6 RECM, iii. pp.â•‹ix–xiii, at ix. ╇ 7 A good general introduction to music at the court of Charles I is provided by J.

Wainwright, ‘The King’s Music’↜, in The Royal Image: Representations of Charles I, ed. T. Corns (Cambridge, 1999), 162–75.

╇ 8 HolmanFTF, 36. For the Chapel Royal, see The Old Cheque-Book or Book of

Remembrance of the Chapel Royal from 1561 to 1744, ed. E. Rimbault (1872; r/1966); D. Baldwin, The Chapel Royal, Ancient and Modern (1990); HolmanFTF, 389–414.

LAWES.indb 2

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

3

at court was provided by three main sections of the Royal Music: the wind bands, the violin band and the Private Music. These groups were distinguished by instrumentation and function. Each group had a distinct repertoire, function and place of performance within the palace at Whitehall. The functional distinction between the public and private music groups was basic common sense, stemming from the medieval distinction between haut and bas instruments. The violin and wind bands were suited to larger and more ceremonial entertainments, and loud enough to be heard above the din at meal times. Until 1630 the wind band was divided into three sections: shawms and sackbuts; recorders; flutes and cornetts.9 The duties of the wind band, however, often led to the intermixture of members from different sections resulting in their official reorganization in 1630, although David Lasocki notes that in practice reorganization may have occurred much earlier.10 The wind bands provided music for ceremonial events, meal times, masques and for the Chapel Royal. The violin band consisted of thirteen men by 1625.11 Established during the reign of Henry VIII, its ranks grew steadily in number until the Restoration.12 Like the wind bands, the violin band was expected to provide music for social gatherings, such as meal times; its main function, however, was to provide dance music. Instruments such as lutes, viols, harps and keyboard instruments were naturally suited to more intimate settings, and were grouped into an ensemble often referred to as the ‘Private Music’ as they performed in the private and semi-private parts of the court. Although ‘Private Music’ is often applied to the earlier part of the century, it is only found in court documents and literature from the Restoration period. The earliest reference dates from 16 June 1660, noting the ‘Private Musick sworne Ju: 16th by my Lord [Chamberlain]’;13 Thomas Fuller used the term in 1662.14 For ease of reference, ‘Private Music’ will occasionally be used here to refer generally to the various incarnations of the LVV. In many court documents from the reign of James I the private music (which mostly consisted of singers and lutenists, but also a harper and several viol players) is referred to as ‘the Consorte’↜. In modern usage ‘consort’ is generally understood ╇ 9 For the wind bands at the early modern court, see D. Lasocki, ‘Professional

Recorder Players in England, 1540–1740’ (PhD diss., University of Iowa, 1983); D. Lasocki, ‘The Recorder Consort at the English Court, 1540–1673’↜, The American Recorder 25 (1984), 91–100, 131–5.

10 Lasocki, ‘Recorder Players’↜, i. 105–12. 11 RECM, iii. 2–3. 12 HolmanFTF is the definitive account of the violin at the English court. 13 RECM, i. 2. 14 FullerW (‘Wiltshire’), 157.

LAWES.indb 3

19/03/2010 10:57

4

the consort music of william lawes

as a small ensemble of instruments with usually one person to a part, and by extension the instruments played. The etymology is confused and confusing. ‘Consort’ seems to have originated from the Italian concerto meaning an ensemble of voices or instruments: the French concert appears to have had a similar meaning.15 Warwick Edwards has convincingly shown that from about 1575–1625 ‘consort’ was used to describe a mixed group of instruments.16 References to broken and whole consorts (respectively implying mixed and homogeneous ensembles) are rare and do not appear until after 1660.17 Even here the meaning is not clear. In music references in seventeenth-century England, ‘broken’ was most commonly applied to divisions where the given melody or ground was ‘broken’ into shorter notes.18 Upon his accession, Charles I retained most of his father’s musicians and simply added the musicians from his household as Prince of Wales.19 The ‘Consorte’ was modified and became generally known as the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ or the ‘Lutes and Voices’↜. ‘Consort’ is retained in some documents, where it appears to be interchangeable with LVV etc.: e.g. when Lucretia Friend (or Frend) was granted denizenship in June 1631 she was described as ‘the wife of John Frend, one of the Consort of his Majesty’s musicians’↜.20 And when Robert Tomkins replaced Robert Kindersley in March 1634 it was in ‘the office of musician for the Consort’↜.21 In June 1629, however, a warrant was granted ‘for a hayle for ye Consorte’ and ‘for the lutes & voices’↜,22 suggesting that ‘ye Consorte’ may have referred to a particular group within the LVV. (A ‘hayle’ appears to be derived from a secondary meaning of the word ‘hale’↜, in origin a doublet of ‘hall’↜, which according to the Oxford English Dictionary refers to ‘A place roofed over, but usually open at the sides; a pavilion; a tent; a booth, hut or other temporary structure for shelter’↜.)23 Friend, Tomkins and Kindersley held places as ‘Musicians for the Violls’↜, associated with the LVV but 15 W. Edwards, ‘Consort’↜, GMO (accessed 27 February 2009); HolmanFTF, 132. 16 See also W. Edwards, ‘The Sources of Elizabethan Consort Music’ (PhD diss.,

Â�University of Cambridge, 1974), i. 36–57.

17 For example, a warrant dated 13 February 1662/3 includes a reference to the

‘Broaken Consort’: RECM, v. 41.

18 For example, see SimpsonDV. 19 See also HolmanFTF, esp. 32–57; D. Pinto, ‘Music at Court: Remarks on the Per-

formance of William Lawes’ Works for Viols’↜, in A Viola da Gamba Miscellany, ed. J. Boer and G. van Oorschot (Utrecht, 1994), 27–40; A. Ashbee, ‘William Lawes and the “Lutes, Viols and Voices”↜’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 1–10.

20 RECM, iii. 61. 21 RECM, iii. 77–8. 22 RECM, iii. 45. 23 The Oxford English Dictionary (Oxford, 2/1989), vi. 1026.

LAWES.indb 4

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

5

not in the group proper. In 1625 the viols group consisted of Friend, Alfonso Ferrabosco II, Roger Major (replaced by Kindersley in 1626) and Daniel Farrant.24 It seems likely that the bowed string players (perhaps with others) were occasionally referred to as ‘the consort’↜, distinguishing them from the main body of the LVV, which mostly consisted of what can be best described as singer-Â�lutenists. At this time most singers played the lute and most lutenists sang. To what degree musicians were apt at both varied; for example, Nicholas Lanier was a talented singer and lutenist, but Robert Johnson, John Lawrence, John Kelly, Edward Â�Wormall and Jonas Wrench seem to have been primarily employed as lutenists. Many of the important singers, such as Henry and William Lawes, Anthony Robert, John Wilson and Angelo Notari, were also lutenists. The LVV was officially formed by letters patent dated 11 July 1626.25 According to the patent, each member of the group was to be paid for one year from Lady Day (25 March) 1625, and then for life from Lady Day 1626, suggesting that the group was formed upon Charles’s accession but that there was an administrative delay in granting the official patents, presumably because the group was an innovation. The patent lists seventeen musicians, most of whom were originally employed in Prince Charles’s household. In addition, Nicholas Lanier was appointed ‘Master of the Musick’↜, and Ferrabosco II received a grant to replace Coprario as ‘Composer of our musicke in ordinary’↜.26 Fourteen of the group received £40 a year. Alfonso Bales and Robert Marshe received £20 a year. They also received this sum in Prince Charles’s household, half that of most of the other musicians. Bales was also a London Wait. His salary may have been based on his ability to attend court;27 perhaps Marsh held a similar arrangement. Thomas Ford received £80 a year, ‘being £40 for his former place and £40 in place of John Â�Ballard, late deceased’↜.28 In addition to the initial places, several musicians associated with the LVV, e.g. Johnson and Nicholas Lanier, also held posts as musicians for the ‘Lutes’↜. Several new posts associated with the group were also created during Charles’s reign. Thus, the loosely defined LVV consisted of twenty-nine musicians (18 singer-lutenists, 1 harpist, 2 keyboard players, 4 viol players and 4 violinists). This number was largely maintained throughout the period 1625–42.29 The most notable aspect of the group was its capacity to perform a broad range of vocal and chamber music: 24 RECM, iii. 9. 25 RECM, iii. 19. 26 A post that added £40 per annum to Ferrabosco’s wages: RECM, iii. 21. 27 Suggested in A. Ashbee, ‘Balls, Richard’↜, BDECM, i. 57. 28 RECM, iii. 19. Thomas Day received a further £20 a year for keeping a singing boy,

and Robert Johnson the same amount extra for strings.

29 Tables listing the members of the ‘Consort’ and the main group of ‘Lutes, Viols and

LAWES.indb 5

19/03/2010 10:57

6

the consort music of william lawes

the preponderance of lutenists suggests that they would have performed in mixed consorts.30 Queens Anne (wife of James I) and Henrietta Maria (wife of Charles I) had their own musical establishments separate from the main household. Â�Henrietta Maria’s establishment was in effect a scaled-down version of that of her husband.31 Most of her musicians were French and Catholic, and generally better paid than Charles’s. The average wage of the LVV was £40 per annum, whereas the majority of Henrietta Maria’s musicians received £120. This was probably linked to attendance. It is likely that the queen demanded almost daily attendance from most of her musicians, whereas the king could afford (and needed) to operate a rota system given his large number of musicians. Foreign musicians in the king’s household generally commanded better salaries than their English colleagues. For example, Adam Vallet received a salary of £60 a year, and Jacques Gaultier started on £50 a year in 1622, which increased to £100 in 1624. The highest-paid English musician (for a single post) was Thomas Ford, who in 1634 was granted an extra £20 a year, bringing his income to £60 per annum.32 Only Lanier as Master of the Music earned more for a single post. Although Lanier’s £200 a year was considerably more than the wages of the average court musician, it is put into context when considered against the wages earned by many high-ranking officials such as the Lord Steward, who in the late 1620s earned over £2,000 annually.33 Several members of Henrietta Maria’s music (Gaultier, Richard Dering, Anthony Robert and Nicholas Duvall) also held posts in the main musical establishment. Such pluralÂ�ism was a common feature of court life. A notable example is Ferrabosco II, who held four court posts by the time of his death in 1628.

T

he historian Neil Cuddy has noted that James I was obsessive about security, and transformed the internal subtleties of access to the monarch of his Â�predecessor’s reign into hard, institutional distinctions.34 The staff and functions of the Privy Chamber and Bedchamber were separated. The Bedchamber Voices’ during the early Stuart period are given in Ashbee, ‘Lawes and the “Lutes, Viols and Voices”↜’↜, at 2–3. 30 See HolmanFTF, 197–224, esp. 200–1. 31 See I. Spink, ‘The Musicians of Queen Henrietta-Maria: Some Notes and Refer-

ences in the English State Papers’↜, AcM 36 (1964), 177–82.

32 RECM, iii. 79. 33 This was his total income; his official salary was £100: for a table of incomes of

selected court officials, see Aylmer, King’s Servants, 204–10.

34 N. Cuddy, ‘The Revival of the Entourage: The Bedchamber of James I, 1603–1625’↜,

in The English Court, from the Wars of the Roses to the Civil War, ed. D. Starkey (1987), 173–225.

LAWES.indb 6

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

7

comprised the Withdrawing Chamber, the Bedchamber itself, and the Privy Galleries and Lodgings (i.e. the private apartments consisting of libraries, closets, bathrooms, etc.).35 This left the Privy Chamber staff with only ceremonial and formal duties, while the Bedchamber staff, under the Groom of the Stool, took over the intimate aspects of attendance on the monarch. The Privy Chamber and its staff were now under the control of the Lord Chamberlain. Charles, a naturally shy and introverted person, inspired by the gravity of the Escorial, took further measures to ensure his privacy, restrict access to his person, and increase formality. A new triple lock was fitted on the Bedchamber door, with names of their holders engraved on the keys: only Bedchamber staff and invited guests were allowed access under pain of banishment from the court for a year.36 The restrictions put in place by the early Stuarts were the culmination of a trend begun with the Eltham Ordinances of 1526, which gradually created a restricted and private area of the court for the monarch and his/her guests to reside.37 The restrictions did not have a dramatic effect on musicians, as the places in which they performed were directly linked to the instruments they played. The Presence Chamber and other public areas of the court were open to anyone respectably attired, but the Privy Chamber was closed to all except its own staff and those few individuals personally chosen by the king, which included his private musicians. ‘In practice, by the early 1620s all peers and bishops also had Privy Chamber access’↜, which was officially sanctioned by Charles I.38 Although it is unclear whether the musicians were allowed access to the Bedchamber, it is likely that permission was granted as occasion demanded. This had important consequences for such privileged musicians. Power at the Stuart court was centred around the physical person of the king. The closer one was to the centre of power, the more power one could wield and the more opportunities there were for remuneration. Thus, with the accession of Charles I we find the paradoxical situation where some of the most menial employees, such as Groom of the Stool and the private musicians, were elevated in status because they personally attended the king. Ferrabosco’s post as instructor illustrates the point. When appointed as teacher to Prince Henry in 1604 Ferrabosco had to be also appointed as an ‘extraordinary groom of the Privy Chamber’↜, granting him passage to the required part of the palace usually out-of-bounds to most servants and courtiers.39 35 See also Cuddy, ‘Reinventing a Monarchy’↜, esp. 70–5. 36 See K. Sharpe, ‘The Image of Virtue: The Court and Household of Charles I, 1625–

42’↜, in English Court, ed. Starkey, 226–60.

37 See HolmanFTF, 32–57. 38 Cuddy, ‘Reinventing a Monarchy’↜, 67. 39 RECM, iv. 11.

LAWES.indb 7

19/03/2010 10:57

8

the consort music of william lawes

T

he Exchequer was responsible for all of the court’s revenue.40 Most royal musicians were paid directly from the Treasury of the Chamber, although some were paid directly from the Exchequer. The Exchequer also paid occasional lump sums to various court officials, such as the Treasurer of the Chamber, the Master of the Great Wardrobe, the Keeper of the Privy Purse, and the Cofferer of the Household, who were occasionally required to pay musicians from their own resources. The records of the Exchequer and the Treasury of the Chamber are especially valuable sources in tracing payments to musicians. In 1614 the purchase of strings and instruments was transferred from the Privy Purse to the Treasurer of the Chamber, so many records fortunately survive.41 Court finances generally appear to have been used for whatever purpose was most pressing, and payments did not always follow the same channels.42 Court posts were highly sought-after, and usually secured in one of three ways: in reversion; through the influence of a courtier; or (rarely) by direct command of the king. The admissions process was complex and expensive. Fortunately for us, during the Interregnum court officials faced the unenviable task of attempting to reconstruct the complex procedures of court administration; this necessitated documents being drawn up to instruct newly appointed officials how the system worked during a period of significant administrative disruption. The admissions process was set out in a memorandum entitled ‘The Method (and style) of issuing Instruments under the Great Seal’; here summarized by Peter Holman: A warrant was prepared by the Clerks of the Signet on behalf of the Attorney General for the sovereign’s signature, the ‘Royal Sign Manual’↜, or his signature expressed in the form of a stamp. Once this was obtained, it proceeded through the system, carried from office to office by the individual himself, the ‘party prosecutor’; he went from the Secretary of State to the Signet Office, back to the Secretary, then to the Privy Seal Office, and finally to Chancery.â•‹… Musicians, particularly those paid by the Treasury of the Chamber, were often appointed by a simpler method: the Clerk of the Signet prepared … a ‘Warrant to prepare a bill to pass the Privy Signet, thereby authorizing the Treasurer of the Chamber’ to pay fee and livery.43 40 For a succinct account of the court’s financial structure in relation to musicians

see Ashbee’s description of the court payment procedures and their relations to the surviving records: RECM, iii. pp.â•‹xii–xiii.

41 See RECM, iii. p. xii. 42 See Aylmer, King’s Servants, 32–40. 43 HolmanFTF, 42–3. Holman quotes the memorandum (GB-Lpro, State Paper Office,

18/42/5) in full; it dates to 1653 and is discussed in G. Aylmer, The State’s Servants:

LAWES.indb 8

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

9

The system of reversions further complicated the acquisition of court posts. A post could be held over, in reversion, to the holder’s heir.44 Reversion sometimes resulted in persons taking up positions at court for which they were ill-suited, although this was unlikely to have affected the musicians’ places. Musical training was usually passed down from father to son, and it seems that one had to have a high degree of competency to gain a post in the LVV. In the LVV five sons inherited their fathers’ posts: Alfonso Ferrabosco III, Henry Ferrabosco, John Taylor, Theophilus Lupo and Robert Dowland.45 Within the LVV there were also familial connections, undoubtedly used to form alliances: Henry and William Lawes, Giles and Robert Tomkins, Nicholas and John Lanier. There were also familial ties between the different music groups.46 There was intermarrying within the LVV (and within the Royal Music generally), strengthening the dominance of some families, especially the émigré Italian families, such as the Bassanos, Laniers and Lupos. This nepotistic structure was a microcosm of the court structure in general, which (as a consequence of the underlying theory of divine right) functioned on the premise that one’s birth afforded certain privileges. Connections were vital in gaining a position at court. Posts usually came available upon the death of the holder, if they were not held in reversion or promised to someone else. John Wilson, one of the foremost native lutenists of his day and later Heather Professor of Music at Oxford, was successful in gaining a place in the LVV in 1635 only after several attempts (although one must be cautious of hyperbole): Dr Wilson made great and frequent sute to K: Charles, to bee admitted to be one of his private musiq: But by the envie and opposition of some at Court, was still put by. 9 petitions hee had delivered for severall vacancies, and yet still some other was preferred before him.47 Wilson may have been the person to whom the Earl of Newcastle was referring in his advice to the young Prince Charles (II) when he noted that a merry Mutition that I knowe, desired the place of the kinges bagpiper, … The Civil Service of the English Republic, 1649–1660 (1973), 436–7. See also Aylmer, King’s Servants, 69–96. 44 See Aylmer, King’s Servants, 72–3 and 96–106. 45 Dowland’s place was extraordinary. 46 Diagrammatic tables tracing the family relationships between court musicians can

be found in BDECM, ii. 1225–7.

47 The passage is quoted in full in Ashbee, ‘Lawes and the “Lutes, Viols and Voices”↜’↜,

4; it is taken from the ‘manuscript notebook of a society man, c.â•‹1640–60’ currently housed in the Museum of London, Tangye collection (no reference no.; ibid., 9 n.â•‹6).

LAWES.indb 9

19/03/2010 10:57

10

the consort music of william lawes hee sayd therefore hee Hopte to have itt, for they always gave places, to those That were moste unfitt, for them, as a Luteneste place, to one that playd of the viole, & a violest place to one that Playd of the Lute.48

A court post did not, however, guarantee the successful acquisition of further places. Following the death of Thomas Lupo in 1628, Robert Johnson unsuccessfully petitioned for his place as composer to the ‘Lutes and voyces’↜, stating that he had served for ‘23 yeares and never obteyned any suite’:49 his two court posts notwithstanding. Occasionally new places were created in the Private Music, allowing soughtafter (usually foreign) talents to be employed: additional places were created in 1625 for the infamous French lutenist Jacques Gaultier, and again in 1631 for the singer John Fox.50 Another way to gain a court post was to work in an extraordinary capacity, often without fee, in the hopes of later securing a court post when one became available. For example, the violinist John Woodington appears to have served in the violin band of the main household from c.â•‹1618, and in the group known as ‘Cooperarios Musique’ in Prince Charles’s household from c.â•‹1622. In both cases, it seems that he served in an extraordinary capacity without remuneration.51 He did so until 1625, when he replaced Adam Vallet a violinist in the LVV; Holman has suggested that Woodington was apprenticed to Vallet.52 It was clearly advantageous to serve the court even without official remuneration. Such speculative work would have had other rewards in the form of payments from the Crown’s Privy Purse and gifts. It also allowed musicians to come to the attention of the king, and was one way of getting lucrative jobs with wealthy courtiers hoping to ape the fashionable court music. Many musicians, such as William Lawes, who replaced original members of the LVV seem to have begun their court careers in this way. Some musicians served as apprentices to court musicians, which could also lead to a court post. Lawes was taught by (if not apprenticed to) Coprario in the household of Edward Seymour, Earl of Hertford. Although this was many years before Lawes’s admission to the Royal Music, such connections would have opened doors. Lawes was also fortunate to have his brother Henry employed in the Chapel Royal 48 Ideology and Politics on the Eve of Restoration: Newcastle’s Advice to Charles II,

ed. T. Slaughter (Philadelphia, 1984), 57. I am grateful to Peter Holman for this observation.

49 RECM, viii. 99–100. Lupo also held a post as composer to the violin band. 50 Fox received £40 per annum ‘in reward of his service in his Quality of Singing’↜:

RECM, iii. 60.

51 See A. Ashbee, ‘Coprario, John’↜, BDECM, i. 296–8. 52 HolmanFTF, 214.

LAWES.indb 10

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

11

from 1626 and in the LVV from 1631, allowing William easier access to the court. There appears to have been a tradition of apprenticeship among the court harpers in the early seventeenth century. From July 1618 Philip Squire received £30 a year ‘to teach Lewis Evans, a child of great dexterity in music, to play on the Irish harp and other instruments’↜.53 Further privy seals show that Squire continued to teach Evans and provide his maintenance until Evans received his own post in 1633.54 Holman has convincingly suggested that Squire was himself apprenticed to Cormack MacDermott, whom he replaced in 1618.55 There are also several references to singing boys apprenticed to various court musicians. The boys were primarily associated with the Chapel Royal, although they also appear to have participated in secular entertainments; in the early part of the century they also acted.56 In early 1623 Thomas Day (a gentleman of the Chapel Royal) succeeded Richard Ball as instructor of a singing boy in Prince Charles’s household. Day also held a place in the LVV from its inception. In addition, on 24 January 1633/4 he replaced Nathaniel Giles as Master of the Children of the Chapel. Angelo Notari received £48 a year from Christmas 1622 for keeping and training two singing boys in Prince Charles’s household, formerly the job of Richard Ball. Notari was also on the initial list of LVV; payments for keeping the boys appear to have ended in 1625.57 A position as a singing boy could occasionally lead to a post as a professional musician in adulthood. For example, Edward Wormall was one of two singing boys appointed to Prince Henry’s household in 1610.58 He was granted a place as a musician to Prince Charles in 1622 and went on to serve in the LVV until the disbandment of the court. After the Restoration, Henry Cooke became the Master of the Children of the Chapel. In addition to his place in the LVV, he was responsible for ‘ye boyes in ye private musick’↜.59 Warrants related to Cooke give a fuller picture of what was expected of the children. Their duties were presumably similar those expected earlier in the century: Warrant to pay £115.â•‹10s.â•‹6d. to Captain Henry Cooke, master of the children of his Majesty’s Chapel Royal, for having the children taught Latin, to 53 RECM, viii. 78. 54 RECM, iii. 45; RECM, viii. 117; RECM, iii. 192; RECM, iii. 78. 55 HolmanH, 194. 56 See L. Austern, Music in English Children’s Drama of the Later Renaissance (Phila-

delphia, 1992).

57 For Notari, see HolmanFTF, esp. 200–11. 58 RECM, iv. 211–12. 59 RECM, i. 4.

LAWES.indb 11

19/03/2010 10:57

12

the consort music of william lawes write, to play on the violin, organ and lute, for stringing and penning their harpsichords, for fire and strings at the music room at the Chapel, for his disbursements for clothes for Michael Wise, late one of the children of the Chapel, and for going into the country looking after boys for the Chapel for half a year from Michaelmas 1664 to Lady Day 1665, and for nursing of three boys that were sick of the small pox.60

In the Restoration at least, the children were evidently schooled in the old bowling alley at Hampton Court.61 The likelihood is that this was only for the summer months when the king was on progress, which suggests that many of the royal musicians did not attend the king on progress (see below). A permanent base for the boys at Hampton Court is unlikely: it would have been too far from Whitehall if the boys were needed for regular duty. Although taking charge of children appears to have been another way for court musicians to increase their income, the children received food, board and an education.

T

he creation of the post of ‘Master of the Music’ was an important step in the history of the Royal Music. The post appears to have originated in Prince Charles’s household, to which Nicholas Lanier was appointed in March 1624/5.62 He was awarded £100 a year, whereas the usual rate was £40, suggesting a position of responsibility. The post was confirmed in 1626 with an annuity of £200. Lanier was responsible for all of the music groups at court, which apparently caused some friction. Indeed, on 6 May 1630, the Lord Chamberlain was forced to issue a statement confirming Lanier’s ‘freedome of diet’ among the various music groups, with refusal to co-operate leading to punishment.63 Holman notes that ‘diet’ in this case was unlikely to mean the food royal servants received when in service at court. Rather, citing a wider secondary meaning, he suggests that ‘in the present context “diet” might mean regular performances or rehearsals’↜.64 Lanier’s authority was evidently questioned beyond the LVV, which suggests that prior to 1626 the music groups were largely self-governing: this in turn suggests evidence of the demarcation between the groups. The Master of the Music post suggests that there was some need for order to be imposed on the Royal Music; the attempted 60 RECM, i. 62. See also RECM, i. 57. 61 See RECM, i. 66. For Hampton Court, see S. Thurley, Hampton Court Palace: A

Social and Architectural History (2003).

62 For a detailed account of Lanier, see M. Wilson, Nicholas Lanier: Master of the

King’s Musick (Aldershot, 1994).

63 RECM, iii. 53. 64 HolmanFTF, 232–3, at 233.

LAWES.indb 12

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

13

Â� centralization of the music groups also ties in with other court reforms and is perhaps reflective of Charles I’s controlling nature. The ‘freedom of diet’ request coincides with the reorganization of the wind bands, which presumably occurred under the auspices of Lanier who had close family ties to the wind bands. David Lasocki has shown that in 1630 the three traditional wind bands were officially reorganized as one group, divided into three companies.65 From 1630 until 1642 the three companies alternated duties. Although their instrumentation is never stated, the ‘first company seems to have been primarily cornettists, and the second and third probably players of the cornett, shawm and sackbut. The group provided music in the Chapel Royal, for masques, ceremonies and the King’s dinner table’↜.66 A warrant from the Lord Chamberlain dated 6 May 1630 outlines the way in which the three companies were employed on a weekly rota system.67 It is likely that some of the other sections of the Royal Music also operated on a rota system. For example, not all members of the violin band accompanied the king on some royal expeditions.68 The violin band, however, does not seem to have operated by rota in its daily duties, as its members appear to have all played together as a single orchestra.69 The reorganization of the wind bands appears to have prompted a reform of the violin band, with the order dated 12 April 1631 ‘for the better regulating and ordering of his Mates Musique of Violins’↜.70 Holman noted that this was directed at Stephen Nau (composer for the violins) not Lanier, implying that Nau exercised de facto control over the group and that Lanier’s ‘freedom of diet’ request a year earlier had been successfully resisted by the violin band.71 No information survives on how much attendance members of the LVV gave at court, or whether they also attended the king on progress. It was traditional for the monarch to leave the capital and embark on progresses for approximately five months from July to November, primarily to avoid the summer stench of the raw sewage and the consequent rise in the risk of disease.72 Although some court musicians accompanied the king, many did not, leaving the entertainment to local

65 See Lasocki, ‘Recorder Players’↜, i. 105–12. 66 Lasocki, ‘Recorder Players’↜, i. 112. 67 RECM, iii. 52–3. There are two similar orders: RECM, iii. 74 and 94–5. 68 See RECM, iii. 80. 69 See HolmanFTF, 234 (and passim). 70 See HolmanFTF, 234. 71 HolmanFTF, 233–5. 72 See also, P. Slack, The Impact of Plague in Tudor and Stuart England (1985; r/

Oxford, 1990).

LAWES.indb 13

19/03/2010 10:57

14

the consort music of william lawes

musicians.73 Records concerning the preparations for the summer progresses of 1628 and 1629 indicate the attendance of at least some of the LVV.74 Members of the Chapel Royal (some of whom also held posts in the LVV) appear to have been in regular attendance on the king when he left Whitehall. Despite the lack of documentary evidence, it seems likely that the members of the LVV were employed on some kind of rota system, especially as many of its members also held places in the other music groups (and occasionally as attendants or tutors). In addition, the kinds of music that the LVV are likely to have played would not have required the continuous attendance of the entire group. Although it is impossible to know for certain what music was played at the court, it is reasonable to assert that much of the music contained in court (and courtrelated) sources, composed by court musicians, was written for performance at the court as part of the duties of some of the musicians. The consort music of Coprario and Orlando Gibbons certainly appears to have been popular at Charles’s court. There is a warrant dated 15 February 1634/5 to pay the violinist John Woodington £20 ‘for a whole sett of Musicke Bookes by him p’vided & prickt wth all CoperÂ�aries & Orlando Gibbons theire Musique, by his Mats speciall Comand & warrt’↜.75 The ensemble ‘Cooperarios Musique’ appears to have been in existence from c.â•‹1622.76 Their repertoire is likely to have included Coprario’s fantasia-suites and Gibbons’s three- and four-part fantasias.77 The group also included Adam Vallet (violin) and Gibbons (organ). Coprario presumably played bass viol; Thomas (or later Theophilus) Lupo may have played violin as required. The group changed considerably around the time of Charles’s accession; Gibbons and Vallet died in 1625, Coprario in 1626. Vallet was replaced by Woodington. Although Thomas Warwick was granted the two keyboard places held by Gibbons, Richard Dering gained the prestigious post of keyboard player in the LVV (replaced by Giles Tomkins in 1630). This, and John Tomkins’s admittance to the Chapel awaiting a vacancy, suggests that Warwick’s skills left something to be desired.78 There were several viol players capable of taking over from Coprario: John Friend, Daniel Farrant, Alfonso Ferrabosco II (or Alfonso III) and Robert (or John) Taylor. Similar ensembles must have played, inter alia, Lawes’s five- and six-part viol consorts, his harp consorts, fantasia-suites, lyra-viol ensembles, and the Royall Consort. Peter Holman has observed that the way in which music was deployed in the 73 See HolmanFTF, 33–5. 74 See RECM, iii. 32, 45, 88. 75 RECM, iii. 150 and 81. 76 See RECM, v. 299. 77 The group is discussed in detail in HolmanFTF, 213–24. 78 See also A. Ashbee, ‘Warwick, Thomas’↜, BDECM, ii. 1129–31.

LAWES.indb 14

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

15

masque was a reflection of the everyday activities of the various music groups. The lutes and voices performed the songs etc., the violin band played the louder dance music, and the wind band provided aural cover for scene moves and processions.79 Wind instruments also occasionally played dance music where they were added to the violins for colour, usually in grotesque music or antimasques.80 Although specific groups may have been responsible for the performance of particular repertoires, it is most likely that the makeup of these ensembles was reasonably flexible. One suspects that part of the daily duties of the LVV was to provide entertainment for dignitaries, courtiers and members of the royal family in the innermost parts of the court. This would have necessitated portable ensembles capable of performing a wide range of music on the short notice of the Lord Chamberlain. Viols, violins, theorboes and harps are reasonably portable, and the presence of so many organs throughout Whitehall (see below) is indicative of consort music performances throughout the palace. Some of the demand for light background music at court was presumably sated by extemporized performances realized from two-part outlines (see Chapter 7). Extemporization, especially of divisions, was expected of professional musicians of the period; indeed, it will be argued throughout this book that the incorporation of divisions is an observable feature of Lawes’s consort music after his court appointment. There is little documentary evidence of where music was performed at the Stuart court.81 Peter Holman, Andrew Ashbee and David Pinto have offered convincing hypotheses on possible locations of private music performances at Whitehall: the Privy Lodgings, the Cockpit-at-Court, the Banqueting Hall, the Presence Hall and the Great Chamber.82 Although references to actual performances in specific parts of the palace are scant, one can advance some ideas about where in the palace the various music groups would have played. Various rooms in the palace were used to receive diplomats and guests. Charles would freely entertain audiences in other parts of the palace such as the Great Hall, Withdrawing Chamber, Guard Chamber or the Preaching Place; the Presence Chamber was also used for semipublic dining. Rooms such as the Great Hall or Presence Chamber were accessible to most courtiers; music was presumably used when guests were received. These rooms would also have been large enough to hold musical entertainments staged 79 P. Holman, ‘Review: P. Walls, Music in the English Courtly Masque, 1604–1640’↜,

EMH 16 (1997), 328–35.

80 See, for example, WallsM, 151. 81 The best account of possible music venues at Whitehall during the period is Pinto,

‘Music at Court’↜.

82 See HolmanFTF, esp. 104–22 and 225–81; Ashbee, ‘Lawes and the “Lutes, Viols and

Voices”↜’; Pinto, ‘Music at Court’↜.

LAWES.indb 15

19/03/2010 10:57

16

the consort music of william lawes

for the amusement of guests. Thus, the violin and wind bands probably performed in rooms such as the Banqueting House, the Presence Chamber, or the Guard Chamber. It is likely that music was provided in the private parts of the court on a regular basis, especially given the many references to organs and virginals in various parts of the royal apartments. This music would have been provided by the various incarnations of the LVV. (In the Queen’s household it was usual for ‘public visits of courtesy from diplomats’ to be held in the Privy Chamber, but otherwise audiences were held in her Withdrawing Room.83 On at least one occasion Queen Anne of Denmark held entertainments in her Privy Chamber.)84 Simon Thurley’s exposition of the architectural history of Whitehall Palace also offers possible hints regarding musical activities.85 We can glean some clues from his reconstruction of the Privy Gallery and the rooms off it. Within the Privy Apartments there were several rooms progressing from the more public to the most private: the Withdrawing Chamber, Privy Chamber and Bedchamber.86 Although Whitehall Palace physically changed little in the first half of the century, Thurley concludes that ‘it seems as if Charles devised a new arrangement at the east end of the gallery which placed his bedchamber next to the vane room, and next to that on the west three closets for his works of art and private use’↜.87 In musical terms, this is even more revealing when one notes that the room that became the Third Privy Lodging in Charles’s time was in Elizabeth’s reign filled with an organ and other musical instruments.88 This is not to say that the function of these rooms did not change: they probably did; however, it indicates precedent. We know that the various music groups performed different kinds of music related to the function of the group. This in turn allows us to present some ideas on places in which different kinds of music were performed, as each room at court was also linked to a particular function or functions. For example, the Banqueting House (before 1638) and the Presence Chamber were probably used for dancing and other (semi-)public entertainments. Compositions such as the Lawes’s suites for two bass viols and organ or some of his harp consorts were likely heard in a concert-like setting. The most likely places for such performances would be the Presence Chamber, the Privy Chamber or in the Privy Gallery. The Privy Chamber was presumably also used for dancing etc. as the king desired. 83 Ceremonies of Charles I: The Note Books of John Finet, 1628–1641, ed. A. Loomie

(New York, 1987), 30. Finet published his notebooks in 1656.

84 RECM, viii. 80. This document is discussed in Chapter 7, below, pp. 216–17. 85 Thurley, Whitehall Palace, esp. 65–98. See also Loomie, Finet, esp. 27–30. 86 See Thurley’s layout: Whitehall Palace, 93. 87 Thurley, Whitehall Palace, 93. 88 See Thurley, Whitehall Palace, 65.

LAWES.indb 16

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

17

In the early seventeenth century the most informative accounts of where certain instruments were set up come from bills for repairs or for moving instruments such as organs and virginals. The records are limited. They do not account for easily portable instruments, such as viols or lutes, responsibility for which was covered by a separate post held for most of Charles’s reign by John Taylor. A warrant issued by the Lord Chamberlain to the Surveyor General in 1663 ‘to make and erect a large organ loft by his Maties Chappell at Whitehall’ reveals that this was ‘where formerly the great Double organ stood’↜.89 Several makers, tuners and repairers of instruments were associated with the ‘Consorte’ and the LVV. Andrea Bassano served from 1603 until 1626. Bassano (who also held a post in the wind bands) initially held the post jointly with Robert Henlake.90 The pair received £60 a year, a 300 per cent increase on the wage of their predecessor. Â�Henlake died towards the end of 1610 and a new warrant was made for Bassano and Edward Norgate in 1611. Norgate assumed the post in full after Bassano’s death in 1628, serving until 1642. Norgate, a talented artist, also carried out several diplomatic missions on behalf of James I and Charles I. (Sharing of court posts was common, the place was usually held in full by the longer liver. A share in a post was a valuable commodity that could be sold for a tidy sum.)91 Thomas Craddock served as an organ maker from c.â•‹1621–36. The post appears to have been initially extraordinary. Craddock did not gain an official post until May 1626. Although he died in 1636, he was not replaced until 1661. The different instrument makers had separate duties. Norgate appears to have been responsible for the organs at Whitehall, Richmond Palace and Hampton Court.92 Craddock appears to have been responsible for the organs in the ‘Privy lodgings at Whitehall’ and those in St James’s Palace.93 In the early Restoration John Hingeston was appointed keeper of the king’s organs.94 Henrietta Maria also had her own organ makers and repairers: Robert Dallam and John Burwood. Dallam was one of the famous family of organ makers who built organs at York Minster, Oxford and Cambridge Universities, and at Whitehall. The Dallams appear to have been Catholics and left England for France in 1642. Robert described himself as ‘organist to the Queen of England’;95 his religion would have been a good introduction to Henrietta Maria’s court. On 9 July 89 RECM, i. 47–8. 90 RECM, iv. 5. 91 See Aylmer, King’s Servants, 225–39. 92 RECM, iii. 89, 94 and 101. 93 RECM, iii. 16 and 194. 94 See for example, RECM, i. 34 and 43. 95 Quoted in ‘Dallam Family’↜, BDECM, i. 330.

LAWES.indb 17

19/03/2010 10:57

18

the consort music of william lawes

1626 Burwood was sworn in as a ‘Groome of his Mats vestrey Extraordinarie for the tuninge & mendinge of his Mats Organs when hee shalbe required’↜.96 He was associated with Henrietta Maria’s household no later than June 1638.97 Henrietta Maria also employed Robert Vere as keeper of the organs from 1632. Vere appears to have been replaced by Richard Greenbury (also keeper of the Queen’s pictures) in 1635, who served until 1642.98 These records demonstrate that music featured throughout the Stuart palaces; although mostly from the Restoration, they are likely to be evidence of a well-established and continuous tradition of music-Â� making. It is reasonable to assume that there were, for example, organs in the ‘Privy lodgings at Whitehall’ during the first half of the century. The presence of so many organs at the palaces is significant, and indicative of the growing importance of the organ as an accompanying instrument in consort music of the period.

A

lthough musicians were relatively low-ranked servants, a post in the Royal ╇╇ Music was the professional pinnacle for a (secular) musician in seventeenthcentury England. There were other opportunities, such as the Waits of various towns or private positions in wealthy households. A court post was generally better paid, however; it also had the added bonus of status and had more chances for advancement.99 The best-paying musician’s post outside court (notwithstanding the private employ of some nobles) was in the London Waits, who were paid on average around £20 a year.100 Attempting to estimate the approximate modern values of wages against the cost of living is difficult, especially in the seventeenth century.101 Peter Walls’s succinct description of prices during the period puts wages into some context; the passage is worth quoting in full: Court records suggest that £10 would have bought a reasonable lute or viol in the Jacobean period, though Alfonso Ferrabosco was paid twice that for a lyra viol purchased in 1623. A treble cornett in the late Jacobean era cost less than £2. Violin prices in the period ranged from £2 paid in 1607 to £24 for ‘a Cremona violin’ bought in 1638. (Two tenor violins acquired for the 96 RECM, viii. 325. 97 RECM, v. 17. 98 See RECM, iii. 251 and 252. 99 See also Aylmer, King’s Servants, 160–82, esp. 168–73.

100 For the London Waits, see W. Woodfill, Musicians in English Society from Elizabeth

to Charles I (Princeton, NJ, 1953; r/1969). An interesting comparison can be made with C. E. C. Burch, Minstrels and Players in Southampton, 1428–1635 (Southampton, 1969). See also Lasocki, ‘Recorder Players’, i. 215–18.

101 A useful handbook in this area is L. Munby, How Much is that Worth? (Salisbury,

2/1996).

LAWES.indb 18

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

19

court at about the same time cost £12 each.) A labourer earned about 10d. a day (about £12 a year), while a yeoman working the land would have an income somewhere between £40 and £200 per annum. A pint of beer cost a halfpenny, admission to the yard in the public theatres a penny, a seat in a gallery twopence or (for a cushion and an even better view) threepence. The cheapest place in the indoor theatres cost sixpence. In 1626 [the musician] Nicholas Farnaby leased a house in the Parish of St Olave’s Jewry (where he was parish clerk) for 30s. (£1.â•‹10s.) per annum; in the 1630s the Countess of Carlisle paid an annual rent of £150 for what has been described as a modest house in the Strand.102 Some musicians were employed in the service of wealthy courtiers. Casual work was occasionally to be found in large entertainments: e.g. participation in The Triumph of Peace earned musicians between £10 and £40.103 Posts ranged from casual part-time commissions to full-time positions and could yield a musician as much as £20 per annum. The majority of court musicians were paid around £30 a year (or 20d. a day), the LVV were mostly paid £40 a year. Court musicians also received an annual allowance of £16.â•‹2s.â•‹6d. for livery. This figure was, however, only the tip of the iceberg for some court musicians. Other benefits were available to the more entrepreneurial members of the musical establishment.104 Nevertheless, wages of court musicians remained the same from the sixteenth to the sevenÂ� teenth centuries despite a sharply rising inflation meaning that by the 1630s the average court musician was worse off than his predecessors. Even so, court musicians were generally better off than many court servants were, and considerably better off than other musicians. Royal monopolies, prohibited by parliament in the early 1620s, had been unpopular in the reign of James I. To raise revenue in the 1630s, however, Charles I reintroduced monopolies under the guise of patents. Patents were frequently granted to musicians, often for non-musical enterprises.105 An associated source of income for the Crown was the encouragement of incorporations by trade associations that lacked strong guilds, such as leatherworkers. Under this initiative, a group of the king’s musicians reconstituted themselves as a corporation under a charter dated 15 July 1635. The Corporation was established due to the constant 102 P. Walls, ‘London, 1603–49’↜, in The Early Baroque Era, From the Late 16th Century

to the 1660s, ed. C. Price (1993), 270–304, at 281. Walls’s article provides a succinct introduction to musical life in London in the early seventeenth century.

103 See A. Sabol, ‘New Documents on Shirley’s Masque “The Triumph of Peace”↜’↜, ML

47 (1966), 10–26.

104 For a more detailed discussion of this point, see HolmanFTF, 32–57, esp. 44–52. 105 Holman gives examples in HolmanFTF, 49.

LAWES.indb 19

19/03/2010 10:57

20

the consort music of william lawes

dispute between the court musicians and the company of minstrel freemen of the City of London. Both groups claimed authority over the training of musicians in the city and the surrounding areas. Most members of the Corporation were royal musicians, and most of the LVV were involved; Nicholas Lanier was elected as the first marshal. Indeed, many members of the LVV (and the Royal Music generally) probably supplemented their income as teachers, especially during the Interregnum. Other benefits of being a royal musician included immunity from arrest, immunity from certain subsidies and taxes, the courtesy title of ‘gentlemen’↜, and entitlement to a coat of arms.106 Musicians were also entitled to free diet and ‘bouge’ or ‘bouche’ (bread and ale for breakfast, and firewood and candles) at court. This was a valuable benefit-in-kind, although some musicians were given more than others. A warrant of 1617 noted that ‘The Consorte’ was to be allowed ‘fower dishes’↜, whereas ‘The Musitians’ were allowed three.107 This was part of the alterations to diet proposed to reduce the household expenses to £50,000. A further warrant suggests that some problems were experienced by the household due to the sheer numbers of musicians required to be fed by 1627: a consequence of Charles I’s policy of retaining most of his father’s musicians in addition to his own. It is also clear from this warrant that the ‘Consorte’↜, now the LVV, retained a more privileged position than many of the other music groups, and that such groups were demarcated, even at mealtimes: Musicons & Consorts That there being 3 messes of 3 dishes of meate apointed for his Mats Musicons and Consorts to be eaten by them together in one Roome. Because the number of them is soe great that they cannot sitt together wth any conveniency, the matter was referred to the Consideracōn of his Mats officers of the greencloth how they might be best accomadated and to compose the difference between them. Upon whose certificate to his Lo[rdshi]P it is ordered That the Consorts for winde Instrumts to be restored to their former allowance of 4 dishes of meate and that the newe Consorts for Voyces, Lutes, &c be likewise allowed a diett of 4 dishes and the Musicons a dyett of 3 dishes to be eaten sev’ally in their owne Chambers.108 Although several sections of the Royal Music joined to form the Corporation, they remained demarcated at court. The functional and physical demarcations are important in understanding the relatively privileged status of the private 106 See also G. A. Philipps, ‘Crown Musical Patronage from Elizabeth I to Charles I’↜,

ML 58 (1977), 29–42; Lasocki, ‘Recorder Players’↜, i. 119–41; HolmanFTF, 32–57.

107 RECM, viii. 76. 108 (Undated, [1627]) RECM, v. 2–3.

LAWES.indb 20

19/03/2010 10:57

the ‘lutes, viols and voices’

21

Â� musicians in comparison to their Royal Music colleagues. This is perhaps one of the reasons behind the resentment evident from the challenge to Lanier’s authority. From the court records we can glean a reasonable account of how well the court musicians fared. Certain privileges were common to all court musicians: livery, immunity from subsidies and taxes, New Year gifts. Some privileges were, however, evidently dependant on family connections and on the entrepreneurial nature of individuals; the Bassano, Lanier and Lupo families are a case in point. Although a court post was prestigious and reasonably well paid, many musicians were often in debt, even the more favoured ones such as Thomas Lupo and Ferrabosco II.109 To supplement their income many royal musicians held posts outside the court, in cathedrals, wealthy households and the theatres. A court post, or court connection, was evidently advantageous in obtaining positions elsewhere. Giles Tomkins was involved in a dispute over his appointment as organist at Salisbury Cathedral in January 1628/9, replacing the deceased John Holmes. The dean of the cathedral preferred Tomkins, whereas Thomas Holmes was preferred by the master of the choristers, and later by the bishop. The family’s royal connections proved vital. After a long dispute upon which the king was asked to pronounce, Tomkins was appointed. Tomkins’s hectic work-schedule was, however, apparently causing some friction a few years later. In 1634 he was accused of leaving the cathedral choir without a teacher once or twice while he attended court. There was clearly some truth to the allegations, as Tomkins pledged not to do so again.110 It is unclear in what capacity Tomkins was absenting himself to attend the court, although it is likely to have been as Charles I’s main organist in the LVV, a post he obtained in 1630. This adds further weight to the suggestion that the LVV worked on some kind of rota system, similar to the Chapel Royal. Charles I has often been criticized for the extravagance of the masques staged for his court. As studies by Malcolm Smuts and Martin Butler have shown, however, these entertainments were not relatively speaking a serious drain on court finances;111 the same can be said of the Royal Music generally. Court records show that the average annual cost of the LVV from 1625 to 1642 was approximately £2,400.112 Even allowing for gaps in the records, the annual cost of the group was unlikely to have been more than around £3,000: a reasonable amount 109 HolmanFTF, 52. 110 See W. Shaw, The Succession of Organists of the Chapel Royal and the Cathedrals of

England and Wales from c.â•‹1538 (Oxford, 1991), 261–2.

111 M. Smuts, Court Culture and the Origins of a Royalist Tradition in Early Stuart Eng-

land (Philadelphia, 1987; r/1999); M. Butler, The Stuart Court Masque and Political Culture (Cambridge, 2008).

112 This figure includes instruments, strings, wages, livery, New Year gifts, and miscel-

laneous expenses.

LAWES.indb 21

19/03/2010 10:57

22

the consort music of william lawes

in Â�comparison with many other parts of the Crown’s expenditure.113 For example, in the mid-1630s the Crown spent around £7,100 on extra diets of regional Lord Presidents, Star Chamber and others; Gerald Aylmer calculated the total annual expenditure at the time as between £340,000 and £360,000.114 Musicians were generally paid on time, or within a reasonable timeframe; however, by 1635 their payments were about six months in arrears.115 Some arrears can probably be explained by absence from the court, although in times of financial crisis musicians were never going to be a priority: some things never change. In the reign of Charles II the court’s financial situation was much worse than earlier in the century, and the musicians were among those who suffered.

T

he Private Music (in its various incarnations) was the most significant �musical force in England throughout the early part of the seventeenth century. Its members were responsible for most of the musical innovations that swept English consort music in the first half of the century and into the early Restoration period. Some of the finest composers and performers in the land were employed in this group, from the old guard of Coprario, Ferrabosco II, Lupo and Gibbons, to the vanguard of Maurice Webster and William Lawes, and even to Matthew Locke in the early Restoration period. Understanding the complex working of the early Stuart court allows a greater understanding of the role of music within the court. William Lawes stands out as one of the most significant composers employed in the LVV during the reign of Charles I, and it is to him that we now turn.

113 The most expensive year in the extant records was 1632, where expenses for the

LVV rose to around £2,900.

114 Aylmer, King’s Servants, 249. 115 See RECM, iii. 161–243.

LAWES.indb 22

19/03/2010 10:57

chapter 2

The Autograph Manuscripts

W

illiam Lawes’s consort music largely survives in manuscript sources; none of it was published during his lifetime. Eight autograph sources have survived. A comprehensive survey of Lawes’s hand is lacking, although useful comments on many of the autograph sources can be gleaned from various monographs, articles, essays and modern editions.1 The autographs mostly contain instrumental music, which is usually more difficult to date than vocal music that one can often link to specific events such as masques or plays. The sources vary in material, function, date, and states of completeness (complete inventories in Appendix 1): 1╇ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798: bass partbook from a set of six 2╇ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432: songbook 3╇GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61 (the Shirley partbooks): five partbooks from a set of six 4╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2: scorebook 5╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3: scorebook 6╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229: organbook 7╇ GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40: set of three string partbooks 8╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70: lyra-viol partbook from a set of three

Several other manuscripts have also been attributed to Lawes: GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7, GB-Lbl, MS R.M.24.k.3 and GB-Ob, Tenbury MS 302; they have not been included in the present discussion as I challenge the attributions in Chapter 3. Murray Lefkowitz was the first musicologist to examine the Lawes autographs in detail. Although his pioneering work is to be commended, he also made several rash and misleading statements. For example, Lefkowitz noted that all of the autograph volumes are ‘bound exactly alike, in brown calf, with the Royal Arms of Charles I stamped in gold on the covers, and on either side of the design an initial, first W. and then L. [except B.3, which has H.â•‹L.]’↜.2 Whilst conceding that ╇ 1 Notable examples are: LefkowitzWL; PintoAS; PintoMVC; LawesCS; LawesFS; Wil-

lettsJB; PintoFyV; FieldFR, 206–7 and 244 n.â•‹54, 245–6 n.â•‹64; FieldJCH, 12–13 n.â•‹31; WainwrightCC, 206–7 (and n.â•‹98).

╇ 2 LefkowitzWL, 31. The Shirley partbooks were not mentioned by Lefkowitz; the

� earliest publications I have been able to trace to cite them as autograph are an edition by Gordon Dodd of Aire [Fantazy] {336}, VdGS Supplement, 5 (1964; r/2003)

LAWES.indb 23

19/03/2010 10:57

24

the consort music of william lawes

the manuscripts offer little assistance in determining their chronology, he further suggested that all of the volumes appear to be part of one large set which was meticulously arranged and guarded.â•‹… An examination and identification of the watermarks of the various autographs supports the claim that they were for the most part all of the same set, as well as the suggestion that the set was compiled in Oxford, c.â•‹1642–3.3 Lefkowitz’s idea of ‘one large set’ is misleading, however, as David Pinto demonstrated in a 1972 article: it is not so that ‘all nine autograph volumes are bound exactly alike’↜. Add. 17798 … has a contemporary vellum binding stamped in gold bassvs above a conventional floral design; its watermark does not seem to be an encircled peacock. It and D.229 are far smaller than B.2 and B.3. These volumes do not have printed staves, and the number of staves a page varies – and of course the organ-book has staves of six lines. Most significant of all is the diversity in binding: even the volumes bound in calf differ from one another. The stamp of Arms upon D.229 is not the same as that upon B.2 and B.3. … Furthermore the stamped initials upon D.229 differ. This in conjunction with Lefkowitz’ own findings on the watermarks is clear evidence that B.2 and B.3 are not of the same vintage as D.229.4 Nevertheless, Lefkowitz’s assessment of the autographs has remained influential. Indeed, a 1998 article by Scott Nixon primarily relied upon Lefkowitz for dating some of Lawes’s manuscripts, leading to some rather flawed conclusions; the same can be said of the introduction to the recent (2007) edition of Lawes’s Harp Â�Consorts.5 Almost half a century after Lefkowitz’s pioneering research there is a clear need for a complete and detailed examination of the autographs.

and William Lawes: Pavan and Two Aires a4 in G Minor, ed. L. Ring (1964). I am grateful to David Pinto for his advice on this matter. ╇ 3 LefkowitzWL, 31. ╇ 4 PintoAS, 12. ╇ 5 S. Nixon, ‘The Sources of Musical Settings of Thomas Carew’s Poetry’↜, RES 49

(1998), 424–60; LawesHC. See also my review of LawesHC in VdGSJâ•‹2 (2008), 84–98.

LAWES.indb 24

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

25

❧⚧ Lawes’s Hand

W

ith the exception of the Shirley partbooks and Mus. 70, Lawes’s hand (text and music) does not show signs of significant change throughout the autograph sources; where there are changes they are rarely consistent. Scholars generally agree that the Shirley partbooks represent an early stage in Lawes’s career (although opinions vary on how early) and that the songbook (MS 31432) and bass partbook (MS 17798) represent a later stage of his career, usually dated to around the end of the 1630s or early 1640s. The scorebooks (B.2–3) appear to have been compiled over several years during the 1630s. The remaining partbooks are difficult to date. The main problem with attempting to ascertain chronological changes in Lawes’s text hand is that we have too few sources giving enough datable information. The issue is compounded by the fact that the two main sources containing datable music were compiled c.â•‹1633–41 by which time Lawes was between the ages of thirty-one and thirty-nine and dramatic changes in his scribal hand were unlikely.6 Throughout the autographs Lawes’s hand is broadly consistent. For example, musical symbols: sharps are generally drawn with straight vertical lines crossed by two diagonal lines ascending rightwards, the diagonal lines will often be longer on the left than the right side of the vertical ones; flats rarely have closed loops. It is common for Lawes to add titles usually descriptive of the instrumentation such as ‘For the Organ:∙ Base Viole and Violin’ (B.2, p.â•‹76). This kind of titling is characteristic of Matthew Locke, Henry Purcell and their contemporaries. Most titles include the number of instruments, and usually takes the form of ‘Fantazy:∙ A 6’ etc. Spelling of individual forms is also generally consistent. Fantasia is usually spelt with a ‘z’ (‘Fantazy’ is used interchangeably) and Pavan as ‘Pauen’↜. Alman is used with and without a terminal ‘e’↜, though Lawes preferred the generic ‘Aire’ (to describe dances in common and triple time) which he usually spelt with an ‘i’ (not ‘y’); where he used ‘Ayre’ it does not seem to imply difference in style or metre. Like Purcell, Lawes is extremely consistent in his use of a large loop for his lowercase ‘d’ and ‘h’. The same is true of Lawes’s lowercase ‘g’↜. Lawes uses varying forms of the individual letters, most easily observed with the letter ‘e’↜. Unlike Purcell, he does not appear to have favoured secretary over italic forms of certain letters, or vice versa. The Greek (epsilon; ‘ε’) and italic forms of the letter ‘e’ can ╇ 6 In contrast, the significant changes in Purcell’s hand outlined by Shay and Thomp-

son took place when he was at the end of his teens and start of his Â�twenties (c.â•‹1678–83) (ShayThompsonPM, 26–32). A useful introduction to handwriting in seventeenth-century England is G. Dawson and L. Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, 1500–1650 (New York, 1966), 7–10 and passim; see also Â�ShayThompsonPM, esp. 23–6.

LAWES.indb 25

19/03/2010 10:57

26

the consort music of william lawes

often be found alternating in words such as ‘Aire’ or ‘Pauen’↜. There is no pattern to this. Lawes alternates between the two forms from one page to the next, and even within words, with little consistency. The previous letter, however, does largely seem to determine the form of ‘e’ used. Where a letter finishes high (such as ‘r’) it was easier to continue down with the epsilon. Where the letter finishes low (such as ‘n’) it was easier to continue upwards into the italic form. Where ‘e’ is the first letter (whether the first of the word or after lifting the pen) the epsilon is preferred. This kind of ‘consistent inconsistency’ is frustratingly common throughout the autographs, complicating the chronology of their contents. Some of Lawes’s numberings are also characteristic, especially the numbers ‘3’ and ‘6’↜. In his later manuscripts the number ‘3’ usually has an upturn at the top,

(a)

(b)

(c)

Fig.â•‹2.1╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.â•‹16r, detail: Lawes’s time signature number ‘3’; (b) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.238, fol.â•‹5r, detail: Lawes’s number ‘3’ in numeration; (c) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798, fol.â•‹13v, detail: Lawes’s number ‘6’; (d) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹3, detail: cut-common time signatures

LAWES.indb 26

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

27

varying in degrees of elaboration; it also found in Mus. 70 which dates to the early 1630s (see below). The upturn is more usually found in time signatures rather than in numeration: sometimes there is an elaborate ‘3’ with an upturn in the time signature but a plain ‘3’ with a flat top for the piece number (Figs 2.1a–b, 2.31, 2.33 and 2.35). The number ‘6’ is also more elaborate and consistent in the later manuscripts. The top curve usually arches out quite far and the lower loop rarely closes (Fig.â•‹2.1c). Only five pieces in the Shirley partbooks are in (or have passages in) triple time; however, most of the three-part pieces are labelled ‘A 3’ (Fig.â•‹2.9a). In these instances, the ‘3’ has either a straight top or curves slightly downwards. The rest of the pieces (with a time signature) are in cut-common time. There are Â�usually slight curves at either end of the vertical line through the ‘C’ resembling a long s (see Figs 2.6a, 2.8a–b, 2.9b, 2.12a, 2.16b, 2.19a, 2.34a); in some instances the lower curve is quite pronounced (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.8a). This cannot be taken as characteristic of his early hand as he uses a similar form throughout the autographs, although in later manuscripts it is interchanged with a straight vertical dash, sometimes within one system (Fig.â•‹2.1d). The straight lines are more characteristic of his hand in B.2–3 (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.1d) and thus may be related to the function of the manuscripts (see below). (d)

LAWES.indb 27

19/03/2010 10:57

28

the consort music of william lawes

❧⚧ Lawes’s Signature

F

or our purposes, the most important aspect of Lawes’s hand is his signature. ╇ The signature is broadly consistent throughout B.2–3, D.229, D.238–40 and MSS 17798 and 31432. In each of these sources the main signature is what we shall call his ‘mature’ signature, i.e. ‘Wjllawes’ (Fig.â•‹2.2); a date for this ‘maturity’ is discussed below. Lawes signed the majority of his compositions, although there are several unsigned pieces in the Shirley partbooks, and many of the organ parts to the fantasia-suites are unsigned in D.229 as are most of the five-part viol consort pieces in MS 17798. It is unclear why he did not sign these pieces. The mature signature has several distinguishing characteristics. William is abbreviated as ‘Wj’↜. The ‘j’ has a wide leftwards loop at the bottom that usually continues upwards to the right into the ‘ll’ (secretary form of the capital ‘L’), often giving the impression of being done without lifting the pen. The first ‘l’ resembles the modern lowercase form of the letter, while the second resembles the modern uppercase form. The base of the second ‘l’ curves upwards underneath the letters ‘awes’↜. The length of the curve varies. It can finish at the ‘a’ or after the ‘s’↜, or anywhere in between. The ‘ll’ is crossed with a short horizontal dash and both ‘l’s have loops at the top. Although it was common practice to cross a ‘ll’↜, the ‘ll’ and the crossing dash curved at the ends seem to only be features of Lawes’s mature hand. The joining of the ‘j’ to the ‘ll’ is a key characteristic in the development of the signature. Most of Lawes’s signatures are written in three stages: the ‘Wj’ (each letter often written separately); the ‘ll’; and the ‘awes’↜. This three-stage formation is most noticeable amongst the early signatures of the Shirley partbooks, although in many instances it is difficult to see as the stem of the ‘j’ is usually brought into the ‘ll’↜. This suggests that Lawes was consciously developing this join, giving the appearance of writing the ‘Wjll’ without lifting the pen. He became more adept at this in the later manuscripts; although there are many instances of this ‘un-joined’

Fig.â•‹2.2╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.â•‹15v, detail: Lawes’s ‘mature’ signature

LAWES.indb 28

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

29

signature, the break is usually difficult to see. In the early seventeenth century the English alphabet had twenty-four letters: ‘j’ and ‘v’ were regarded as variations of ‘i’ and ‘u’ respectively. Indeed, they did not become fully fledged letters until Noah Webster’s An American Dictionary of the English Language of 1828.7 Nevertheless, one wonders whether Lawes’s adoption of the ‘j’ form of ‘i’ in his signature was in imitation of his teacher John Coprario, who tended to use the ‘j’ form when using the first person singular and at the start of words. Coprario used a similar ‘j’ to Lawes in his forename (Fig.â•‹2.3);8 even the loop at the bottom of the stem running upwards into the next letter is the same in both hands. Lawes and Coprario also both tend to use a long ‘s’↜. Lawes often uses the long ‘s’ in words where there is a double s, the first (or both) usually being a long ‘s’. He also tends to use the long ‘s’ in the middle of words. Lawes could have adopted these imitative handwriting traits during his tenure with Coprario in Edward Seymour’s household. Although there are examples of Lawes’s mature signature with an italic ‘e’ (e.g. MS 17798, fol.â•‹1r) an epsilon is more common and seems to be indicative of his mature signature. Coprario preferred the italic ‘e’↜, which may have exerted an early influence on Lawes. The epsilon is a more natural choice for proceeding from the ‘w’↜, providing a seamless transition down from the top of the ‘w’↜, allowing a more flowing signature. Late examples of the signature with an italic ‘e’ are aberrations, perhaps subconscious remnants of prior practice. This ‘mature’ signature is the one most commonly found in the sources, although some of the later examples of Lawes’s hand contain a variation, the ‘short L’ (see below), characterized by the relatively short length of the base of the letter ‘L’↜, which points downwards at an angle rather than curving upwards (Fig.â•‹2.4). Notwithstanding the ‘short L’ variation, we only find examples of significant change or developments in Lawes’s signature in Mus. 70 and the Shirley partbooks, suggesting that they are relatively early (see below). There are unfortunately no signatures in the surviving court acquittance books to provide a useful dating tool. Court records contain several references to payments to Lawes, who usually signed for his own wages and for those of his brother Henry. These payments are recorded in the Exchequer books, known as the Auditor’s Debenture Books, GB-Lpro, E403/2187–98; they do not, however, contain original signatures.9 Two books (GB-Lpro, E405/543 and E407/10) are isolated survivors from the records of individual tellers containing original signatures, but cover a period before Lawes’s ╇ 7 See D. Sacks, The Alphabet (2003). ╇ 8 Cf. Coprario’s autograph treatise, now in the Huntington Library, San Marino,

California, published in facsimile in Giovanni Coperario: Rules How to Compose (c.â•‹1610), ed. M. Bukofzer (Los Angeles, 1952).

╇ 9 Transcribed in RECM, iii. 165–239.

LAWES.indb 29

19/03/2010 10:57

30

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.â•‹2.3╇ Autograph letter by Coprario dated 1 June 1607 to ‘Mr Billett’: Cecil Family and Estate Papers, Box U/60

LAWES.indb 30

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

31

Fig.â•‹2.4╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.240, fol.â•‹18r, detail: Lawes’s ‘short L’ signature

Fig.â•‹2.5╇ Lawes’s signature from the Longleat Papers. Reproduced by permission of the Marquess of Bath, Longleat House, Warminster, Wiltshire.

royal appointment (1628–32). Exactly when Lawes adopted his ‘mature’ signature is unclear. He certainly did so before March 1633/4, when he used this form to signed a document relating to Inns of Court masque The Triumph of Peace (Fig.â•‹2.5).10 Thus, Lawes’s signature is an important tool in distinguishing between manuscripts compiled before and after c.â•‹1634, which can in turn help cast some light on their contents.

❧⚧ GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61 (The Shirley Partbooks)

T

he Shirley partbooks (now lacking the Sextus, first bass) contain consort music in two to six parts by composers including Lawes, Coprario, Alfonso Ferrabosco II, Thomas Lupo, John Ward, William White, Claudio Monteverdi and Luca Marenzio. With the exception of Mus. 70, this is the only surviving Lawes autograph not to contain solely his own works, indicating that the partbooks were copied for their owner. 10 See M. Lefkowitz, ‘The Longleat Papers of Bulstrode Whitelocke: New Light on

Shirley’s “Triumph of Peace”↜’↜, JAMS 18 (1965), 42–60, the signature is reproduced in Plateâ•‹I; see also A. Sabol, ‘New Documents on Shirley’s Masque “The Triumph of Peace”↜’↜, ML 47 (1966), 10–26. The Longleat papers include three Lawes signatures, dated 10, 16, 17 March 1633/4.

LAWES.indb 31

19/03/2010 10:57

32

the consort music of william lawes

Four hands have been identified in the manuscript.11 Two are attributed to Lawes: one an early hand (A1), the other later (A2). Lawes’s hand is generally careful and neat with evenly spaced notes, especially the A1 hand (Fig.â•‹2.9a); the A2 hand is, in places, messier and rightwards-slanting (Fig.â•‹2.9b). David Pinto has convincingly suggested that the ‘books were probably largely in their present form by February 1632/3 when the second baronet Sir Henry Shirley died leaving an heir less than ten years of age’↜.12 We know little of Lawes’s activities before his court appointment in 1635; no connection is known between him and the Shirley family other than the partbooks. From the repertoire and careful calligraphic hand, it can be assumed that the pieces copied in Lawes’s early hand (A1) were entered when he was relatively young, perhaps around 1630 but possibly as early as c.â•‹1625. His second, later, hand (A2) is more problematic. Scholars have suggested several dates: c.â•‹1633, c.â•‹1635 and 1644.13 The third hand (B) remains unidentified, although Robert Ford has noted that the same copyist contributed to US-SM, EL 25 A 46–51.14 The fourth hand (C) is an unidentified eighteenth-century scribe who added violin parts for several dances, songs and psalms to MS 40661. Lawes appears to have had a close connection to Hand B. In several places the music was entered by Hand B and the titles by Lawes. In fact, Lawes appears to have written all the titles and composer names, even where Hand B entered the music. The men appear to have worked roughly contemporaneously. For example, Hand B copied (most of) the four-part ‘Doc: Bull’ fantasia but Lawes completed the piece, added the titling and the bass part (in his early A1 hand; MS 40660, fol.â•‹26v).15 Several characteristics of Lawes’s musical hand are evident throughout the Shirley partbooks. They can be identified as signifiers of his early hand, given that they change significantly in the later manuscripts. Several of these characteristic features are found in his clefs. There are only two types of treble clef in the autographs. Lawes appears to have adopted a standard treble clef at an early stage and used it throughout his career. It resembles a number ‘6’ with a broad arch on top usually wider than the base of the clef but which can also be the same size as the base of the clef (Fig.â•‹2.6a). In the Shirley partbooks the arch is usually of a similar width to the bottom loop of the ‘6’↜. This seems to be a characteristic of his earlier 11 IMCCM1, 69–76. See also PintoMVC; R. Charteris, ‘The Huntingdon Library Part

Books, Ellesmere MSS EL 25A 46–51’↜, HLQ 50 (1987), 59–84; WainwrightMP. The A1, A2 etc. references to the hands in the partbooks are those used in IMCCM1.

12 LawesCS, xii. 13 Respectively, FieldFR, 245–6 n.â•‹64; PintoFyV, 14–15; and Gordon Dodd, quoted in

PintoFyV, 15.

14 See IMCCM1, 70 (and 382–4 for facsimile examples). See also, PintoMVC, 21 n.â•‹3,

and LawesCS, xii.

15 IMCCM1, 73 attributes the entire piece to Hand B.

LAWES.indb 32

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

33

hand; later examples (even the A2 examples from MS 40657; Fig.â•‹2.10a) tend to have a wider arch at the top. The second treble clef is found only in the Shirley partbooks. It resembles a modern lowercase ‘g’ and is found in both the early and later hands (Fig.â•‹2.6b). This clef is only found in pieces entered in Lawes’s A2 hand. For example, Lawes used this ‘g’ clef for the five-part fantasia and ‘Iñomine’ in g {68–9} (MS 40657, folsâ•‹43v–44r; MS 40661, folsâ•‹14v–15r). (The compilers of IMCCM designated these two pieces as A1; there seems little reason for doing so, as they are comparable with the A2 four-part pieces.) These pieces complete the five-part sequence, coming directly after a series of Italian madrigals (also copied by Lawes) none of which uses this clef. It seems likely that Lawes copied his fantasia and ‘Iñomine’ from an early autograph in which he used the ‘g’ treble clef; based on the difference in the inks used, these two pieces were added together, but not with the previous five-part pieces. There is no reason to suspect that this is Lawes’s late hand. It retains many of the early hand characteristics, but it need not be as early as the rest of the five-part pieces. Lawes also used this treble clef in one of his three-part pieces and in one of his four-part pieces (all A2 hand). In the four-part piece, Aire {306} the same clef is used for both trebles: MSS 40657–8, fol.â•‹27v; this is the only instance of the clef in the four-part sequence. Lawes also used this treble clef in the three-part Aire {206} (MS 40657, fol.â•‹15r), one of the last pieces added to the sequence. The three-part piece is in a more rushed hand than the five-part pieces. It is noteworthy, however, that in MS 40658 (Tr2), Lawes reverts to his usual ‘6’ treble clef; perhaps this piece was also taken from an early source. The first (three-part piece) on fol.â•‹15r is in a different ink from the other pieces on folsâ•‹14v–15r. Whether space was left for it on fol.â•‹15r is unclear, but it was not copied at the same time as the second piece. The second piece on fol.â•‹15r appears to be in the same ink as the two pieces on fol.â•‹14v, suggesting that they were copied around the same time. Lawes’s c-clefs in the Shirley partbooks are quite distinctive, and more carefully drawn than in later sources. The clef is drawn with a vertical stroke only on the right side of the four horizontal strokes, two above and below the line denoting c' (Fig.â•‹2.7a). Later sources have two main forms of the clef (discussed in detail below). The first is similar to that in the Shirley partbooks. The second has two vertical lines bordering the horizontal ones. Later c-clefs generally have a narrow upturn, from which flats in the key signature are often drawn (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.14, staves 3–4). The upturn is also found in several pieces in the Shirley partbooks (MS 40658, folsâ•‹29r, 43v–44r; MS 40659, folsâ•‹14r, 15r–15v, 29v–30r; Fig.â•‹2.9b); in each instance the pieces were added in Lawes’s A2 hand. Lawes also uses another form of c-clef where the lines denoting c' join at angles of 45°, sometimes resulting in two triangles. This clef is used intermittently in several of his early hand pieces (MS 40658, folsâ•‹42r–43r and MS 40659, folsâ•‹11v–12r) and in some of the A2 pieces (Fig.â•‹2.11b).

LAWES.indb 33

19/03/2010 10:57

34

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.6╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.â•‹15v, detail: usual treble clef; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40658, fol.â•‹27v, detail: Lawes’s lesser-used treble clef

LAWES.indb 34

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

35

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.7╇ (a) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40661, fol.â•‹13r, detail: c-clef; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40659, fol.â•‹12v: Hand B ‘triangle’ c-clef

LAWES.indb 35

19/03/2010 10:57

36

the consort music of william lawes

Hand B also uses this form of c-clef (MS 40658, folsâ•‹26v, 31r–33v, 38v and 47v–49r, MS 40659, folsâ•‹12v, 17r–19v, 23v, 24v–25r and 33v–35r: Fig.â•‹2.7b). Some pieces mix the triangles and regular clefs: for example, MS 40661, folsâ•‹10v, 11r, 11v. The clef may have been in imitation of Hand B; however, it also seems to be linked to Lawes’s hurried hand: its development can be seen in several pieces where the denoting lines are messily drawn. Where this happens the upper lines generally go downwards, and the lower ones go upwards (Fig.â•‹2.11c). Lawes uses two main forms of bass clef. First, his elaborate form resembling a number ‘8’ with an arch on top (Fig.â•‹2.8a); this is most commonly found in the Shirley partbooks. He used the ‘8’ clef for all of the three-part pieces in MS 40660, except for stave 3 of Aire {207} on fol.â•‹14v; it was also used for most of the fourpart section: nos.â•‹1–17, 21 (staves 1–2 only of 6), 22, 26, 27, [28] and [31]. Otherwise it is found only three times, in the five-part sequence: no.â•‹7 (staves 1–3 and 5 of 5), no.â•‹8 (staves 1–3 of 5) and no.â•‹29. The clef is also found thrice in the four-part sequence of MS 40659: in the crossed-out version of Aire {110}, and in no.â•‹22 and in no.â•‹26 (staves 1–2 of 8). The second type of clef resembles a number ‘2’↜, and is found in several significant variations throughout the sources (see also below). In the Shirley partbooks the clef usually occupies two or three spaces on the system, and the tail curves back upwards towards the dots denoting f↜; where the tail begins at the bottom of the arch varies sometimes resulting in a sharp edge, sometimes a rounded edge (Fig.â•‹2.8b). This clef is found in both A1 and A2 hands, although it is more common to A2. On several occasions, however, both forms of bass clef (‘8’ and ‘2’) are used within the same piece (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.8b).16 For example, Lawes entered the first bass of Aire {110} into MS 40659 on folsâ•‹7r and 13r, the first of which was later crossed out. Interestingly these parts have a mixture of the two clefs. Bass 1 on fol.â•‹7r has the ‘8’ clef throughout, and the same piece on fol.â•‹13r has the ‘2’ clef throughout. The answer seems to lie with the second bass part (MS 40660, fol.â•‹27r), which has the ‘8’ clef for the first two staves and the ‘2’ clef for the remaining four. The solution seems to be that Lawes first entered the Bass 1 part on fol.â•‹7r, perhaps mistaking its position (putting it after no.â•‹10 rather than no.â•‹20); the part is the same as that on fol.â•‹13r except that the latter corrects an error in the cadence at the end of the first strain. He then entered the Bass 2 part and, realizing his error, crossed out the original Bass 1 part and re-entered it on fol.â•‹13r. The change in clefs could have been caused by imitating the source from which the piece was copied, though by this time Lawes was clearly favouring the ‘2’ clef as shown by the Bass 2 part. (It should also be noted that the four (not crossed-out) parts are all in 16 Both clefs are found in MS 40660: three-part Aire {207}, four-part no.â•‹21 and five-

part no.â•‹7. MS 40659: four-part no.â•‹26.

LAWES.indb 36

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

37

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.8╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.238, fol.â•‹5v, detail: ‘8’ bass clefs; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40659, fol.â•‹14v, detail: ‘2’ and ‘8’ bass clefs

LAWES.indb 37

19/03/2010 10:57

38

the consort music of william lawes

the same ink different from the ink used for the crossed-out part, which suggests that the complete version was entered some time later.) The evidence suggests that the ‘8’ clef was early, and that a change to the ‘2’ came during compilation of the main four-part sequence. The five- and six-part sequences were entered with the ‘2’ clef, suggesting that they were mostly entered after the main four-part sequence. When Lawes came back to the entering the last pieces of the four-part section (i.e. the A2 pieces), he sometimes reverted to the ‘8’ clef, either in imitation of the Shirley partbooks to that point or of the source from which he was copying. Another distinctive feature of Lawes’s early hand is the use of ‘curved’ beams for grouping quavers or semiquavers (Fig.â•‹2.9a). Although intermixed with straight beams, these are a predominant feature of his early hand not commonly found in later manuscripts. The decorative endings for pieces are largely consistent throughout manuscripts, although there are differences between manuscripts and even within manuscripts. The ending generally used in the Shirley partbooks is a (sideways) conical squiggle formed from the final barline (e.g. Figs 2.9a–b). Lawes used a similar terminal barline, usually with a dash through it, in later manuscripts such as B.2–3 and D.229 (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.23). One of the most interesting features of the Shirley partbooks is Lawes’s signature. Of his twenty-two pieces in the Shirley partbooks, Lawes signed fourteen.17 Only five signatures are from pieces in his early (A1) hand, three of which are found in the three-part section. The first is obviously a quite early and formal signature, ‘Will: Lawes:’ (MSS 40657–8 and 40660, fol.â•‹5v: Fig.â•‹2.9a). Despite the calligraphic style, many characteristic traits of his mature signature are evident. For example, the outwards descending curve on the left side of the ‘w’↜, the long base of the ‘L’ running underneath the rest of the signature, and the loop at the top of the ‘L’; the long upwards-curving horizontal base of the ‘L’ is also found in words like ‘Lupo’↜. The main signature of the A2 hand is similar to Lawes’s mature signature but lacks the crossed ‘ll’ and uses a colon to abbreviate William to ‘Wj:’ (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.9b): ‘Wj:Lawes’↜. (The colon was commonly used to signify an abbreviation; its presence in Lawes’s signatures appears to signify his early hand as it is not commonly found in later sources.) Most of the ‘Wj:Lawes’ signatures in the Shirley partbooks have an epsilon.18 These signatures are all written in two or three stages, first the ‘Wj:’ then the ‘L(awes)’↜. This is true of most of the early signatures in the Shirley partbooks. In many instances the join is difficult to see. 17 This implies a signature in at least one of the partbooks. Signatures sometimes vary

slightly between each partbook.

18 There is an italic ‘e’ in the following ‘Wj:Lawes’ signatures: MSS 40657–8, folsâ•‹14v:1,

44r; MS 40660, folsâ•‹14v:2, 44r; MS 40661, fol.â•‹15r.

LAWES.indb 38

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

39

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.9╇ (a) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40658, fol.â•‹5v, detail: Lawes’s (A1) hand; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40658, fol.â•‹29r, detail: Lawes’s (A2) hand

LAWES.indb 39

19/03/2010 10:57

40

the consort music of william lawes

In the mature signature the stem of the ‘j’ gives the appearance of joining the ‘L’ in one continuous action. Although this is not always the case, it seems that Lawes consistently made a conscious effort to give the appearance of a join (e.g. see MS 40657, fol.â•‹30r:1, MS 40659, fol.â•‹16r:2, and MS 40660, fol.â•‹30r). The signature is found in Lawes’s five-part fantasia and ‘Iñomine’ in g {68–9}, which suggests that they date to before 1633. There is a third version of his signature: ‘WLawes’ (MS 40657, fol.â•‹29r), also found in Mus.â•‹70, fol.â•‹12r; a late variant is found in B.2, p.â•‹81 and MS 31432, fol.â•‹1r (cf. Figs 2.10a–d).19 19 Similar signatures are also found in GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7, although the for-

mation of the ‘W’ is quite different and the ‘W’ is not joined to the ‘Lawes’ (see Chapter 4).

(a)

(b)

(c)

Fig.â•‹2.10╇ (a) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40657, fol.â•‹29r, detail; (b) US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, fol.â•‹12r, detail; (c) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹81, detail; (d) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, fol.â•‹1r, detail; (e) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40660, fol.â•‹30r, detail: Lawes’s initialling; (f) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹110, detail: Lawes’s initialling

LAWES.indb 40

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

41

Two of the four-part A2 pieces are initialled: ‘W:L’ and ‘Wj:L’ (Fig.â•‹2.10e); the bass of the three-part Aire {227} is also initialled ‘WjL:’ (40660, fol.â•‹14v). Lawes did not commonly sign with initials, although instances can be found in the catches and drinking songs at the end of B.2 (Fig.â•‹2.10f), on a song (‘Pleasures, Bewty, youth attend yee’) and the last lyra-viol piece in MS 31432 (Fig.â•‹2.34b), and on one of the bass viol suites in D.229 (fol.â•‹79r (INV.)). These instances indicate little in terms of chronology: in later manuscripts they appear to be convenient shorthand. Nevertheless, despite the fact that most initialling occurs in later sources, it is not sufficient evidence to date the initialled pieces in the Shirley partbooks to a late period. Two of them are similar to Lawes’s early signature but without the ‘awes’↜, which is uncharacteristic of the later initials. An important question regarding the

(d)

(e)

(f)

LAWES.indb 41

19/03/2010 10:57

42

the consort music of william lawes

Shirley partbooks clearly lies in dating this ‘later’ (A2) Lawes hand. Had Lawes completed his involvement with the manuscript around the time of Sir Henry Shirley’s death in February 1632/3? Does the later hand date (as Pinto suggests) to around the time of Lawes’s court appointment, or (as Gordon Dodd suggested) could it ‘be dated as late as the civil-war period … perhaps, in March 1644?’↜.20 The pieces entered by Lawes in what has been designated his A2 hand were added some time after the main three-, four- and five-part sequences were completed. The last nine pieces in the four-part sequence are particularly interesting examples of the A2 hand. They were evidently added in at least three stages: (1) nos.â•‹21–6 (of which nos.â•‹23–4 were on a page now removed; a page was abstracted after no.â•‹22 in MSS 40657–60); (2) nos.â•‹27 and [28]; (3) the last three pieces, which are unnumbered but for ease of reference can be designated nos.â•‹[29–31]. This section of the manuscript is, however, much more complex than it first appears. First, the four-part pieces are numbered 1–27 in MSS 40657–9; the number ‘27’ is in a different ink, which suggests that it was added after the main sequence of numbers. Second, no.â•‹27 (i.e. the piece itself) is in the same dark ink in MSS 40658–9 (both are also numbered). But this is not the same ink as used in no.â•‹27 in MSS 40657 and 40660, which are both in the same ink. Third, no.â•‹[28] is in the same ink in MSS 40568–9; this is lighter ink than on the previous page (and is different again to the same page in MS 40660). The piece is omitted from MS 40657 (the page on which it should be is unused). The solution seems to be that Lawes added nos.â•‹21–6 and then numbered the entire four-part sequence 1–26. Nos.â•‹27–8 were then added individually (as suggested by the difference in ink in MSS 40658–9). The Tr1 part of nos.â•‹27–8 seems to have been on the leaf abstracted from MS 40657 (before fol.â•‹29r), which caused Lawes to write out the part again (this time with no piece number and a different signature: ‘WLawes’); he must simply not have gotten round to recopying the Tr1 part of no.â•‹[28]. Lawes added nos.â•‹[29–31] in a rather messy hand (of MS 40657, folsâ•‹30r–30v). The ink suggests that the three pieces were added at the same time but later than the previous pieces. The pieces were hurriedly written, with a rightward slant; they lack the decorative finishes and curved beams characteristic of the earlier hand, and in Corant {339} the treble clefs are not even fully drawn (for comparison to Lawes’s hand in the rest of the Shirley partbooks, cf. Figsâ•‹2.9b, 2.11a–b). The bass partbook, MS 40660, is the only one of the books to deviate from this pattern. Here the piece numbers stop after ‘22’↜. It is also significant that in MS 40660 nos.â•‹26–8 were also entered in a rather messy hand, comparable to Lawes’s hand in nos.â•‹[29–31]: this notably deviates from the ‘presentation style’ of the other partbooks. The implication is that in MS 40660 nos.â•‹25–8 were also removed and then re-entered by Lawes around the same 20 Quoted in PintoFyV, 15; see also RingD.

LAWES.indb 42

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

43

(a)

(b)

Fig.╋2.11╇ (a) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40657, fol.╋30v, detail; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40659, fol.╋16v, detail; (c, overleaf) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 40659, fol.╋31r, detail

LAWES.indb 43

19/03/2010 10:57

44

the consort music of william lawes

(c)

time as nos.â•‹[29–31]. As noted, a leaf was abstracted after no.â•‹22 in MSS 40657–9. In MS 40660, however, two leaves seem to have been removed; a third may have been removed but this is difficult to determine due to the tightness of the binding. Two leaves (i.e. four pages) would have been enough to have originally contained nos.â•‹23–4 and nos.â•‹25–8. There would certainly have been enough room if a third leaf was removed. Although the A2 hand, and the last three four-part pieces in particular, have been argued as demonstrating Lawes’s late hand, it seems to me that they are in fact perfect examples of what may be termed Lawes’s ‘rushed’ hand. This term does not carry a chronological implication but rather reflects Lawes’s attitude towards the act of copying, which seems to be closely linked to the function of the manuscript. As the ‘rushed’ pieces in the Shirley partbooks do not exhibit the obvious characteristics of Lawes’s early hand it is tempting to give them a late date; they have more in common with the hand of, for example, later portions of D.229. Several points, however, argue against a late dating. First, there is the ‘early’ signature on Corant {339} (MS 40657, fol.â•‹30v). Second, the c-clef used in the same piece (MS 40659, fol.â•‹16v; Fig.â•‹2.11b) is consistent with the ‘triangle’ form found only in pieces in Lawes’s early hand (and Hand B). Third, despite his generally careful hand in the Shirley partbooks, Lawes occasionally entered some pieces in a messy hand clearly comparable to the four-part pieces in question. A perfect example of this is found in MS 40659, fol.â•‹31r: the tenor part of Thomas Lupo’s five-part Fantazia {11} (Fig.â•‹2.11c). We can also see in this piece a ‘double-vertical’ c-clef similar to that found in late manuscripts such as B.3 (see below); it is otherwise found in only two places in the Shirley partbooks: MS 40661, folsâ•‹13r (Fig.â•‹2.7a, stave 1) and

LAWES.indb 44

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

45

13v (stave 4). Thus, the evidence suggests that what is often considered Lawes’s late hand is actually his ‘rushed’ hand↜, which in the Shirley partbooks can further be demonstrated to be early (i.e. before c.â•‹1633). Pragmatic as this explanation may be, it is notable that Lawes’s hand does not change dramatically throughout the sources; as we shall see, however, his hand does seem to change according with the function (or with Lawes’s intended function) of the manuscript. MS 17798 and sections of D.229, D.238–40 and the Shirley partbooks are written in a careful hand, what is termed here his ‘formal’ presentation style. This ‘formal’ style suggests that the manuscript was intended for a purpose beyond personal record or use, and was what we may call a ‘presentation volume’↜, although whether such manuscripts were actually presented to patrons is debatable. This does not imply that they were not used. Rather, the ‘formal’ style was closely related to the intended function of the manuscript, which may have been copied for the benefit of someone other than Lawes. The ‘formal’ style can be contrasted with manuscripts that appear to have been for Lawes’s personal use (though in different ways), such as in B.2–3, MS 31432 and Mus. 70. The ‘formal’ style within portions of D.229, D.238–40 and MS 17798 are similar (cf. Figs Â�2.12a–b). Although these manuscripts would have fulfilled the same essential function as Mus. 70 (i.e. playing parts), it is wholly written in an ‘informal’ presentation style (discussed below). Lawes mixed the faster, ‘informal’ hand with the more careful ‘formal’ hand in manuscripts such as D.229 and D.238–40. This implies a change in (perceived) function of the manuscript, or simply an expedience, rather than instances of more and less mature hands (see below). This may help to explain why Lawes changed from a ‘formal’ style to a less careful and at times rather messy hand in the Shirley partbooks. One suspects that it was linked to a change in function or circumstance, vicissitudes that can most obviously be linked to the death of Sir Henry in February 1632/3; though the break in the manuscript’s functional continuity (and Lawes’s consequent approach) may well pre-date this. Thus, a note of caution should be raised on the designation of the A1 and A2 Lawes hands as early and later; they should not be used to imply that Lawes copied the manuscript in two separate and distinct stages. Rather, it was probably copied in several stages during which Lawes’s hand moved away from an early calligraphic style and gradually adopted many of the traits present in later manuscripts. (It should be noted that the ‘formal’ presentation style of the Shirley partbooks is similar to Lawes’s later ‘informal’ style, which suggests that (like his signature) Lawes consciously developed the ‘formal’ style typified by later sources.) Nonetheless, some chronological gap between the early calligraphic hand and the more mature hand in the Shirley partbooks is to be assumed. How much of a gap is difficult to tell. The Shirley partbooks clearly provide us with examples of Lawes’s early hand,

LAWES.indb 45

19/03/2010 10:57

46

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.12╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.238, fol.â•‹32v: Lawes’s ‘formal’ presentation style; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798, fol.â•‹25v: Lawes’s ‘formal’ presentation style

LAWES.indb 46

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

47

much of which probably dates to around the late 1620s or early 1630s. They reflect Lawes as a composer coming of age, growing in confidence and in the estimation of his patrons. This growth is represented by the gradual inclusion of his own compositions. It is also represented by Lawes’s conscious development of a distinctive signature: an increasingly confident graphic representation of the self (and of the composer).

❧⚧ GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.229 and D.238–40

T

he manuscripts D.238–40 contain the string parts for Lawes’s fantasia-suites, harp consorts, and suites for two bass viols and organ. The set is Â�generally thought to date from around the time of Lawes’s court appointment, with some later additions. The Oxford Music School catalogue of 1682 records them as ‘Mr William Laws his 3 Parts’ in four books, probably donated by Henry Lawes.21 The fourth book is likely to refer to D.229. It is unclear whether D.229 was originally intended as part of the set as the contents do not correspond exactly with D.238– 40. D.229 contains the organ parts for the fantasia-suites, most of the suites for two bass viols, and for all of the five- and six-part consorts. It also contains (Tr–B) harp parts for the first eight harp consort dances. Both manuscripts consist of similar paper. The watermark evidence suggests that D.229 was bound sometime in the 1630s; paper with the same type of watermark is found in MS 31432. Robert Thompson notes that it is commonly described as ‘Venetian’ although it was probably made in the Venetian hinterland rather than in the city itself. … The peacock paper may have been transported to England by sea, but in the small quantities in which it appears to have been supplied it could equally have been Â�carried across the Alps to join the Berne, Basle and Strasbourg papers on their Â�journey down the Rhine.22 Being an organbook, D.229 is much larger than D.238–40, which are upright quartos (a format not commonly used for string parts because of the short stave lengths). The bindings also differ. The cover stamp on D.238–40 consists of scrollwork, in a diamond shape, emanating from a centre-circle (Fig.â•‹2.13a). The D.229 cover stamp consists of the royal coat of arms enclosed by the Garter, surmounted by a crown, in a large entwining frame, flanked by the initials ‘W’ ‘L’↜. The stamp is also found on Mus. 70 (Fig.â•‹2.13b) and MS 31432.23 It is one of five main 21 CrumEL, esp. 28–9; LawesFS, xv–xxi, 115–16. 22 ThompsonP, 145–6. 23 The D.229 stamp is reproduced in LawesFS, xxx.

LAWES.indb 47

19/03/2010 10:57

48

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig.╋2.13╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.238, front cover; (b) US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, back cover, detail: SRA VII

types used in the Stuart period as identified by Mirjam Foot, who noted sixteen variants.24 The British Library has designated the stamp ‘Stuart Royal Arms’ (SRA). The variant on D.229 and Mus. 70 is similar to SRA VII, found on several bindings from the reign of Charles I, and on ‘a rather plain binding from the library of James I ([GB-Lbl,] C.83.k.1)’↜.25 In the Musica Britannica edition of Lawes’s fantasia-suites David Pinto suggested that D.238–40 contain examples of an early and a late Lawes hand. It is worth quoting Pinto in detail: There is little doubt that Lawes’s fantasia-suites had been composed before his appointment to the court in 1635. Reliable evidence of this is provided by his own playing-parts, now Oxford, Bodleian Library, Mus.Sch.MSS D.229 and D.238–240. Among the later contents of these books are the suites for division viols and for viol consort, written in a fluent cursive hand which can be dated with some certainty to c.â•‹1636–38, whereas the violin suites, and the harp consorts entered shortly after them, are in an earlier and significantly less mature hand.26 24 M. Foot, ‘Some Bindings for Charles I’↜, in Studies in Seventeenth-Century English

Literature, History and Bibliography, ed. G.â•‹A.â•‹M. Janssens and F.â•‹G.â•‹A.â•‹M. Aarts (Amsterdam, 1984), 95–106. See also PintoMVC, 21 n.â•‹6.

25 Foot, ‘Bindings for Charles I’↜, 97. 26 LawesFS, xvi–xvii.

LAWES.indb 48

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

49

The case for dating [Lawes’s] playing parts in almost their final form at c.â•‹1635 rests partly on the view that non-autograph copies were in circulation by c.â•‹1638, and partly on the relative maturity of Lawes’s hand compared with the style which he used later, probably c.â•‹1638, in copying such works as those for viols and for division viols into his organ book.27 A detailed examination of the manuscripts, however, raises questions about the reliability of this evidence. Most important, there is actually no significant difference in the handwriting used throughout the books. Rather than looking for an earlier and a later hand, it seems more useful to attempt to distinguish between the speeds at which Lawes copied the various portions of the partbooks.28 The fantasia-suites do appear to have been first entered into D.238–40, but it is more likely that they were followed by the bass viol pieces, with the harp consorts probably entered last. The first problem with the attribution of the fantasia-suites to Lawes’s early hand in D.238–40 is that Lawes mostly signed them using his mature signature: the signature he used throughout the partbooks. Only in no.â•‹22 (Fantazia {135}: D.238 and D.240) does he vary the signature to the ‘short L’ form.29 The ‘short L’ signature is most commonly found in MS 31432, especially folsâ•‹42r–53v: examples can also be found in D.238–40, D.229 and B.2–3. Apparently a late development, Lawes generally used this signature when writing his name in miniature, usually when constrained by space, though at times the signature is small for no obvious reason. Indeed, despite Pinto’s claims to the contrary, there is a close resemblance in the hands used to copy the fantasia-suites and the bass viol suites.30 The bass viol suites are written in a slightly slanted hand, but this seems to be linked to the speed at which they were copied and the amount of musical information (i.e. they include semiquavers etc; Fig.â•‹2.14), rather than when they were copied. The fantasia-suites and the bass viol pieces contain emendations and corrections, which suggests that they were used in performance (see Chapters 6 and 8); it is also worth noting that Lawes maintained his ‘formal’ presentation style in both. Perhaps one of the most significant features of D.238–40 and D.229 is Lawes’s rendering of bass clefs. In D.238 Lawes initially used the ‘8’ bass clef (nos.â•‹1–10; Fig.â•‹2.8a) that he used almost consistently throughout the Shirley partbooks. This 27 LawesFS, xx. 28 Christopher Field seemed also to be unconvinced by Pinto’s early and late designa-

tions within D.238–40: see FieldFR, 245–6 n.â•‹64.

29 This fantasia is also found in B.2, p. 76, and appears to be a later revision in the

partbooks (see Chapter 6).

30 The same conclusion was reached by Field: FieldFR, 245–6 n.â•‹64.

LAWES.indb 49

19/03/2010 10:57

50

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.╋2.14╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.238, fol.╋89v (INV.), detail: Aire {103}

would seem to cast doubt on the attribution of these parts to his mature hand.31 These apparently early bass clefs are only used, however, at the start of the staves of the first ten pieces. In the two instances in these pieces where Lawes changes from a c-clef back to the bass clef in the middle of the line (D.238, folsâ•‹9r and 9v: nos.â•‹9 and 10) he uses the small ‘2’ bass clef found in the rest of the suites. A notable recurrence of the early ‘8’ clef comes in D.229, folsâ•‹70r–69r (INV.) in the two six-part fantasias in c. Pinto has, however, pointed out that most of these two pieces are in the hand of another copyist.32 The copyist entered the first fantasia, and the first section of the second (i.e. the first six staves of D.229, fol.â•‹69r (INV.)); Lawes then completed the second piece using the ‘8’ clef (Fig.â•‹2.15). The copyist finished both pieces with a single barline (the pre-ruled barline); Lawes wrote the flourish at the end of the first piece, wrote the directs at the end of the third system of fol.â•‹69r (INV.), and numbered and titled both pieces. The copyist (who was presumably working from Lawes’s score, B.2) appears to have had close connections with Thomas Tomkins and the copyist Thomas Myriell. He also 31 A feature also noted in FieldFR, 246 n.â•‹64. 32 LawesCS, xiv.

LAWES.indb 50

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

51

Fig.â•‹2.15╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.â•‹69v (INV.): ‘Tomkins copyist’ (Hand D); Lawes’s hand begins on system 4

contributed to GB-Och, Mus. MSS 62 and 67, GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. C.93 and GB-Lbl, Add. MS 29996.33 Pinto convincingly suggested Giles Tomkins as a possible candidate, ‘who combined membership of the Tomkins family circle with assistance to Â�Myriell in Cambridge or London c.â•‹1620, and who had graduated to the royal music by 1638–40 (a probable date for the later of Lawes’s fantasies)’↜渀屮34 (see Chapter 5). Whatever the identity of the copyist, Lawes appears to have temporarily reverted to the ‘8’ clef in imitation of him. The harp consorts in D.238–40 are often in a more considered hand than the bass viol suites, but this appears to be because of the amount of musical information to be conveyed within the given space (see Figs 2.16a–b and 2.17). A noticeable aspect of these pieces is the frequent spacing between the ‘L’ and the ‘awes’ of ‘Lawes’↜, which is also a feature of Lawes’s later signature: other examples can be found in MS 31432 (fol.â•‹63r) and B.3 (pp.â•‹67 and 68). This variation on the mature signature does not appear to be of major chronological significance (Fig.â•‹2.17). The decorative endings common to B.2–3 and MS 31432 are similar to those found in the Shirley partbooks. They are formed from the final note or final bar and take the form of a conical squiggle; the squiggle is frequently found with a diagonal 33 D. Pinto, ‘Thomas Tomkins and a Copyist Associated with Him’↜, ML 72 (1991),

517–18.

34 Pinto, ‘Tomkins and a Copyist’↜, 518.

LAWES.indb 51

19/03/2010 10:57

52

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.16╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.240, folsâ•‹35v–36r; (b) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.239, folsâ•‹19v–20r: decorative ending

LAWES.indb 52

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

53

Fig.â•‹2.17╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.239, folsâ•‹21r and 21v: change from ‘formal’ to ‘informal’ presentation styles

dash through it in the later sources. This dash resembles a large fermata. These kinds of decorative endings signify Lawes’s ‘informal’ hand, and are commonly found in what appear to be Lawes’s playing parts (Mus. 70), personal manuscripts (MS 31432) and his compositional sketchbooks (B.2–3). Music manuscripts, especially partbooks, were generally compiled first from the front end; if another section of music was added, it was often entered in the rear of the book (turned upside-down, i.e. inverso).35 Subsequent sections could be added as needed on unused pages. Thus the layout alone of D.238–40 with the fantasia-suites and bass viol suites at either end suggests that they were first to be added to the books, followed by the harp consorts. This is reinforced by the fact that the harp consorts in D.238–40 mostly exemplify Lawes’s ‘informal’ presentation style, whereas the fantasia-suites and bass viol suites both retain the ‘formal’ style (and the earlier forms of bass clef). Only the first eight pieces in the violin partbook (D.239) retain the calligraphic decorative endings of the ‘formal’ style (Fig.â•‹2.17). It is unclear why Lawes began this section with the ‘formal’ style, only to abandon it several pages later. The change to the ‘informal’ style in the majority of the harp consort parts, however, implies that the function of D.238–40 changed. Lawes probably began the partbooks in a ‘formal’ style as ‘presentation’ volumes or with some similar purpose in mind. At some point, the inclination or need to complete these books as ‘presentation’ volumes ceased. The first eight harp consorts in 35 Assuming, of course, that the manuscript was compiled after binding.

LAWES.indb 53

19/03/2010 10:57

54

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.╋2.18╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.╋35v: Harp Consorts, harp parts

D.239 may simply have been in imitation of the presentation style of the rest of the volume, but equally they may record the precise moment at which the function changed. I shall argue in Chapter 8 that the bass viol suites were composed c.â•‹1638, which suggests an approximate terminus post quem for D.238–40, although the fantasia-suites are likely to have been composed earlier; this date is also supported by evidence presented below. The fantasia-suites and bass viol suites were the first entered, followed by the harp consorts. The corresponding parts in D.229 appear to have been (at least partially) compiled after the string parts. The similarities in inks and presentation styles between D.238–40 and D.229, however, suggest that there was not a large chronological gap between the corresponding sections. Both manuscripts appear to have begun life as some form of ‘presentation’ volumes, though at some point – c.â•‹1639 – Lawes, through pressures of time or circumstance, abandoned the ‘formal’ style and (especially in D.229) began to copy parts in his ‘informal’ hand. This is most evident in the viol consorts of D.229, which are in a more squashed and untidy hand than that of the other pieces in the manuscript and which seem to have been copied and revised in several stages (see Chapter 5). By contrast, the fantasia-suites were copied quite carefully in D.229, although Lawes did make some later additions resulting in an occasionally untidy appearance. The score format of D.229 would have made it difficult to maintain a clear presentation. The many palimpsests and generally untidy hand in the viol consorts

LAWES.indb 54

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

55

suggest that this portion of the manuscript was used for working out the organ parts (rather than copying them from another source: see Chapter 5); the hand is similar in style to Lawes’s hand in B.2–3 – his ‘compositional draft’ presentation style (discussed below).

❧⚧ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798

M

anuscript 17798 is a bass partbook for all the five- and six-part viol ╇ consorts. It is the surviving partbook of a set of six, perhaps Lawes’s own set of playing parts referred to in Henry Lawes’s will.36 The watermarks etc. unfortunately do not assist in dating the manuscript. I shall argue in Chapter 5 that the viol consorts were composed by 1639–40; they certainly seem to have circulated before 1642. MS 17798 shows signs of revision, postdating it from the other autograph sources. The fourth leaf, containing Fantazias {71–2}, is a replacement. The autograph score (B.2) and organ part (D.229) of Fantazy {71} have an extensive middle-section, which Lawes crossed out. There is no sign of the omission in the later sources,37 which suggests that MS 17798 is an intermediate source, datable to c.â•‹1640. The replacement leaf does not appear to be autograph, rather a copyist (Hand E) closely imitating Lawes’s hand. The signature on fol.â•‹4r is certainly not Lawes’s (and was added in an ink different from that used for the music). MS 17798 appears to have been part of a set designed for a formal purpose, given the carefully laid out and copied parts, similar to the ‘formal’ presentation style of the bass viol suites and the fantasia-suites in D.238–40 and D.229 (cf. Figs 2.19a–b). Lawes maintained his ‘formal’ style throughout MS 17798. The six-part pieces appear to have been copied some time after the five-part ones. Lawes began numbering the former at ‘23’, even though there had been only sixteen pieces in the volume; however, the last page of the five-part pieces is numbered ‘22’↜, which Lawes appears to have mistaken as the piece number. (The partly missing ‘3’ of ‘23’ on fol.â•‹12r indicates that the manuscript was cropped after copying.) All the fivepart sequence was entered using the same ink; a different ink was used for the sixpart pieces. It also seems significant that Lawes used the small ‘2’ bass clef in the five-part pieces, but used it only in the first of the six-part pieces, thereafter changing to the large form (see below). All the six-part pieces are titled and signed with the mature signature. Only the first and last pieces in the five-part section are titled 36 Probate transcribed in A. Ashbee, ‘Lawes, Henry’↜, BDECM, ii. 706–9. Lawes

bequeathed ‘the bookes of Fancies, Pavins and Almans of five and six parts for the Violls and six bookes of concert lessons bound in Blew Leather’ to Francis Sambrooke; the ‘Blew Leather’ binding refers to the second set of books, but not necessarily to the first (cf. PintoMVC, 21–2 n.â•‹11).

37 See LawesCS, xix.

LAWES.indb 55

19/03/2010 10:57

56

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig.╋2.19╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.╋78r (INV.); (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798, fol.╋11v

LAWES.indb 56

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

57

and signed. Both signatures are the mature form, the first has an italic ‘e’↜, the last an epsilon (Fig.â•‹2.19b). The close similarities between the hand in MS 17798 and the ‘formal’ pieces in D.238–40 and D.229 strongly suggest the manuscripts were compiled within a reasonably short timeframe, adding further weight to the suggested date of c.â•‹1638 for D.238–40. They also prompt us to consider the possibility that these manuscripts were compiled for a similar ‘formal’ purpose: Lefkowitz’s idea of a carefully compiled œuvre is perhaps not as fanciful as it first appears.38

❧⚧ GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. B.2 and B.3

M

anuscripts B.2 and B.3 are large folio volumes containing scores of ╇ much of Lawes’s consort music as well as some vocal music; understanding them is central to establishing a coherent chronology for much of his consort music. As with D.229 and D.238–40, B.2–3 were probably in the Music School’s collection before the death in 1681 of Edward Lowe, the late professor of music: ‘they may have been presented through Lowe by Henry Lawes c.â•‹1661, along with a donation of a theorbo as recorded by Sir John Hawkins’↜.39 B.2 contains masque music, vocal music, five- and six-part viol consorts, the lute suite and the suites for two bass viols and organ. B.3 contains six-part viol consorts, the large-scale harp consorts, and the Tr–Tr–B–B (‘new’) version of the Royall Consort. Most pieces in the volumes are titled. The volumes are almost undoubtedly compositional drafts, as suggested by the score format, the vocal music texts given in incipits only, and the large number of revisions, palimpsests and crossings-out.40 Thus, the form of presentation style in B.2–3 can be labelled as Lawes’s ‘compositional draft’ style. Both volumes bear the same Royal Arms stamp on their covers:41 ‘the coat [of arms] enclosed by the Garter, surmounted by the crown and upheld by the lion and unicorn supporters on a bracket of the royal motto’ (Fig.â•‹2.20).42 B.3 seems to have originally belonged to Henry Lawes as the initials ‘H’ ‘L’ are stamped on the 38 LefkowitzWL, 31; see also above pp.â•‹23–4. 39 LawesFS, 114; see also CrumEL. 40 For excellent background studies of autograph sources (of similar periods) and

their compilation, see J. A. Owens, Composers at Work: The Craft of Â�Musical Composition, 1450–1600 (Oxford, 1997) and R. Herissone, ‘↜“Fowle Â�Originalls” and “Fayre Writeing”: Reconsidering Purcell’s Compositional Process’↜, Journal of Â�Musicology 23 (2006), 569–619.

41 The stamp is reproduced from other books in R. Shackleton, Fine Bindings 1500–

1700 from Oxford Libraries (Oxford, 1968), no.â•‹139. See also PintoMVC, 21 n.â•‹6.

42 PintoAS, 12; Foot, ‘Bindings for Charles I’↜, 105; LawesFS, 114. The stamp is also

found on the following music manuscripts, GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17801, GB-Lbl, MS R.M. 24.k.3 and GB-Cfm, Mu. MS 734.

LAWES.indb 57

19/03/2010 10:57

58

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.╋2.20╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, cover stamp

cover: ‘W’ ‘L’ are stamped on the cover of B.2. B.3 may have been given to Henry as part of his court duties in the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ (LVV). Henry, a member of the Chapel Royal since 1626, was sworn into the LVV on 6 January 1630/1; there was a delay with the appointment and he was not officially admitted until Christmas 1631. William could have procured the manuscript from Henry before his own appointment in 1635, giving a plausible terminus post quem for B.3 of c.â•‹1631–2; as we shall see, however, the remaining contents of B.3 suggest that William did not acquire the manuscript until c.â•‹1638, if not slightly later. It is highly likely that William came into possession of B.2 before his court appointment, as it contains music composed for the Inns of Court masque The Triumph of Peace (1634).43 Henry may have acquired the volume for his brother or perhaps it was given to William for composition of the masque music. The latter seems plausible given the close association of the court with the masque. Robert Thompson has noted that ‘Lawes might well have been using a stock of old music paper, because the staves have been carefully drawn one line at a time rather than with a complex rastrum as was usual by the 1630s. … the books may perhaps have been bound in the mid- or late 1620s incorporating earlier material’↜.44 The scorebooks may have been unwanted old stock from the court stationer; indeed, Thompson has further noted that the watermark of the flyleaf is from Basle and unlikely to date any later than 1630.45 The similarities of the binding suggests that the volumes were bound around the same time. Examination of the handwriting suggests that both manuscripts were 43 For a discussion of the masque, see P. Holman, ‘Music for the Stage I: Before the

Civil War’↜, in Music in Britain: The Seventeenth Century, ed. I. Spink (Oxford, 1992), 282–305, esp. 300–2.

44 ThompsonP, 144. 45 See ThompsonP, 144–5.

LAWES.indb 58

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

59

Fig.╋2.21╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3, p.╋88, detail

compiled when Lawes’s musical and textual handwriting was sufficiently mature to not reveal any major inconsistencies: this appears to be from c.â•‹1633–4 onwards. The characters of the musical hand are generally small and often quite messy with a slight rightwards slant. Lawes’s beaming throughout B.2–3 (and D.238–40, D.229, MSS 31432 and 17798: e.g. Fig.â•‹2.21) has lost the calligraphic curves of the Shirley partbooks, although they do reappear in rare instances. The beaming in B.2–3 is either straight, arched or follows the flow of the stems. If we accept, as I think we must, that the scorebooks primarily consist of compositional drafts then much of the masque music in B.2 can be dated with certainty. Indeed, the masque (and other vocal) music confirms the status of B.2 as a volume of compositional drafts. The score format and (the large number of) palimpsests are obvious clues, although they could perhaps be explained as signs of a poorly copied anthology. A sure sign that here we have compositional drafts is, however, the texts, which are given only in incipits: this is true of all vocal music in B.2. It is unlikely that Lawes would have had made several drafts of his music. The drafts in B.2–3 are likely to have been the first and only scores Lawes made. The scores were then revised as necessary rather than fresh scores made out, except in cases (such as Fantazia {135}, discussed in Chapter 6) where complete reworking was required: the five-part viol consorts reworked from earlier versions in B.2 or the ‘new’ version Royall Consort in B.3 are cases in point. This, of course, does not preclude the possibility that Lawes occasionally made rough sketches elsewhere (especially

LAWES.indb 59

19/03/2010 10:57

60

the consort music of william lawes

on unbound folios); he certainly occasionally revised as he made out parts. As we would expect, the handwriting does not significantly change between the masque pieces (see Figs 2.22a–d↜), but this is no indication that they were compiled around the same time (i.e. retrospectively), as implied by Gordon Callon, who suggests that ‘It is likely that Lawes entered most of the music in [B.2] ca.1644–45’↜.46 Masques were ephemeral entertainments, usually performed only once or twice. If Lawes were compiling songs for an anthology, he would have been more likely to preserve a selection of songs rather than most of the entertainment; MS 31432 seems to be such an anthology (see below). B.2 may originally have contained much more masque music: as many as fourteen pages were removed in the middle of the main masque section (pp.â•‹35–44). There is music from at least three masques, dating from 1634, 1636 and 1638,47 but they are not found in chronological order. First, there is a selection of songs from Britannia Triumphans (1638) (pp.â•‹15–18). Then, after some four- and five-part viol consorts, comes the main masque section (pp.â•‹35–44) including music from The Triumph of Peace, and from the court masque The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour (1636; with music also by Henry Lawes).48 The likely explanation is that when Lawes came to enter the music for Britannia Triumphans at least some of the pages immediately following The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour had been filled (with the main five-part viol consort sequence), thus he turned to the unused pages towards the front of the manuscript. The Triumph of Peace music was probably among the first to be entered, which means that Lawes began towards the middle of the manuÂ�script perhaps leaving space at the front for instrumental music: a similar layout is observable in MS 31432 (see below). Music for masques had to be composed well ahead of the performance to allow rehearsals for musicians, and more importantly for dancers.49 For example, payment records for Oberon (1611) note that Alfonso Ferrabosco II, Nicolas Confesse and Jeremy Herne were paid £20 in ‘reward for their paines having bene imployed in the Princes late Mask by the space almost of sixe weekes’↜.50 Masque records (where they exist) are rarely so detailed, although due to the collaborative nature 46 LawesCVM4, 69. 47 Edition: LawesCVM4. 48 For a detailed discussion of Lawes’s masque music, see LefkowitzWL, 205–34, and

WallsM, 159–205; also P. Walls, ‘New Light on Songs by William Lawes and John Wilson’↜, ML 57 (1976), 55–64.

49 The masquers were generally members of the aristocracy, often joined by members

of the royal family.

50 Quoted in WallsM, 37. Ferrabosco composed the songs; Confesse and Herne

appear to have composed some of the dances and taught the choreography: see WallsM, 37–8.

LAWES.indb 60

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

61

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.22╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2: (a) p.â•‹16, detail: Britannia Triumphans (1638); (b) p.â•‹38: The Triumph of Peace (1634); (c, overleaf) p.â•‹42, detail: The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour (1636); (d, overleaf) p.â•‹36, detail: ‘Cease warring thoughts’

LAWES.indb 61

19/03/2010 10:57

62

the consort music of william lawes

(c)

(d)

LAWES.indb 62

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

63

of masques (and masque music) it seems likely that a similar preparation time was necessary for many court masques, especially the elaborate masques of the 1630s. Given the unprecedented scale of The Triumph of Peace, this timeframe may well have been increased. The first performance was given on 3 February 1633/4, so it seems reasonable to assume that much of the music was composed no later than January 1633/4, and probably before. By the same reasoning, we can also assume that Lawes began to compose his music for The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour (presented on 24 February 1635/6) no later than January 1635/6. One suspects that Lawes had begun work on the five-part viol consorts following the main masque section (i.e. after p.â•‹44) before he came to compose the music for Britannia Triumphans, probably by December 1637: the masque was performed on 7 January 1637/8. It also seems likely that by this time the six-part viol consorts and the fivepart version of Alman {38} from the Royall Consort were already composed at the start of the volume: the composition of the viol consorts in the scorebooks is discussed in detail in Chapter 5. In the midst of the main masque section there are three miscellaneous songs. The text of ‘Cease warring thoughts’ was published in 1646 by James Shirley as a song from his private masque The Triumph of Beauty (essentially an adaptation of the Judgement of Paris).51 Establishing an accurate date for the first performance of the masque is problematic. Lefkowitz was first to identify the song as from Shirley’s masque.52 The find was significant, as the composer of the masque’s music had hitherto been unknown and it implied that the first performance of the masque happened before 1645. Lefkowitz suggested a date of c.â•‹1644. This song has a significant impact on establishing dates for Lawes’s scorebooks, as ‘Cease warring thoughts’ is the latest datable piece in the manuscript if it can be associated with Shirley’s masque. This implies that B.2 was in use well into the 1640s. As Ian Spink has noted, however, there is little to suggest that Lawes’s setting of the poem in B.2 was part of the original production.53 He cautioned that ‘it is dangerous to deduce that Lawes wrote all the music for the original performance on the evidence of this single setting of the first song, particularly in this doubtful context’↜.54 The context is ‘doubtful’ presumably because ‘Cease warring thoughts’ comes directly after the four-part viol consort pieces, in a now incomplete section 51 Published with his Poems. The full title reads: ‘the trivmph of beavtie. As

it was personated by some young Gentlemen, for whom it was intended, at a private Recreation’↜.

52 M. Lefkowitz, ‘New Facts Concerning William Lawes and the Caroline Masque’↜,

ML 40 (1959), 324–33; LefkowitzWL, 230–4.

53 I. Spink, ‘Correspondence: William Lawes’↜, ML 41 (1960), 304–5. 54 Spink, ‘Correspondence’↜, 304.

LAWES.indb 63

19/03/2010 10:57

64

the consort music of william lawes

of three miscellaneous poem settings of which only the first is associated with a masque. Indeed, the composition of this sequence is reminiscent of MS 31432 where at least one masque song is juxtaposed with poem settings. Moreover, in the masque, ‘Cease warring thoughts’ is sung by Mercury, who descends to sing Paris to sleep; in Shirley’s printed text there is nothing to suggest that there is anyone other than Paris and Mercury on stage at this point, despite Lawes’s setting being for three voices. Another song, ‘Goe bleeding hart’ follows,55 but several leaves were abstracted in the middle of the piece. It is followed by a setting of Thomas Carew’s poem ‘Secresie protested’ (the text of which was published his Poems of 1640) also incomplete.56 This in turn is followed (in a different ink) by The Triumph of Peace sequence. Lawes may have followed on from these when composing The Triumph of Peace music, which perhaps suggests a date of c.â•‹1633. The setting of ‘Secresie protested’ is close enough to the printed version to suggest that Lawes had access to a fair-copy before publication. Carew (d.â•‹23 March 1639/40) was appointed as Sewer in Ordinary to Charles I in 1630 and could have known Lawes from at least the mid-1630s. Lawes’s version of ‘Cease warring thoughts’ has several variants from the printed version.57 Printed version (1646), p.â•‹13 Cease, warring thoughts, and let his braine No more discord entertaine, But be smooth and calme againe.

Lawes version (B.2, p.â•‹36) Cease, warring thoughts, and let his brayne Noe More discord Entertayne but be smooth and Calme againe

Yee Crystall Rivers that are nigh, As your streames are passing by, Teach your murmurs harmony.

you Crystall Riuers that are nigh teach your Murmours harmony as your streames ar passing by.

Yee windes that wait upon the spring, And perfumes to flowers do bring: Let your amorous whispers here Breath soft Musick to his eare.

ye winds that waite uppon the spring and perfume to the flowers bring let your Amorous whispers heere breath soft Musique to his Eare.

Yee warbling Nightingales repaire From every wood, to charme this aire, And with the wonders of your breast, Each striving to excell the rest.

yee Warbling Nightingales repaire from euerie wood to Charme this Aire fill with the Wonders of your brest Each striving to excell the rest

5

10

55 The text is also found copied by Edward Lowe (attributed to ‘Mr Will Lawes’) in

GB-Ob, MSâ•‹Mus.â•‹Sch.â•‹E.451; the piece is laid out in table format but no music was entered. The compilers of IMCCM2 suggest that Lowe copied this piece (and Â�several others by the Lawes brothers) around the time he acquired the manuscript in 1636: see IMCCM2, 212–24. Edition: LawesCVM2, 163–5.

56 Edition: LawesCVM2, 165–7. 57 Edition: LawesCVM4, 61–4. Callon also dates it to c.â•‹1640–4 (ibid., xix).

LAWES.indb 64

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

65

When it is time to wake him, close When it is tyme to wake them Close â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•… [ your parts, â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•… [ your parts 15 And drop downe from the trees with And drop downe from ye Trees wth â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•… [ broken hearts. â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•…â•… [ broken harts

Apart from the obvious differences in spelling and capitalization, Lawes makes lines 1–10 into a single stanza, and swaps the positions of lines 5 and 6 (although this does not affect the overall rhyme scheme). He also gives a slight variant for line 13. These (and the other minor discrepancies) may simply have been the result of transcription error. Lawes was, however, generally quite accurate in transcribing texts that appear to have come from printed sources (or which were later used in printed sources). The changes are likely to reflect Lawes’s adaptation of the text for setting as a song; similar alterations are found throughout the poem settings in MS 31432.58 Nevertheless, the textual differences in ‘Cease warring thoughts’ are (inter alia) enough to convincingly suggest that Lawes’s poem setting is an isolated one. Another version of ‘Cease warring thoughts’ is found in GB-Eu, MS Dc. I. 69 and GB-Ob, MS Mus. D.238, which together comprise the cantus parts of a three-part manuscript set copied by Edward Lowe; a complete version is found in US-NYp, MS Mus. Res. *MNZ (Chirk).59 The partbooks contain songs by John Wilson, as well as nine songs by Lawes, including ‘Why do you dwell’ from The Triumph of Peace and ‘Conjunction thrives’ from The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour; the latter is also in a different version in B.2. Peter Walls has suggested that the ‘partbooks contain Lawes’s revised version’ of ‘Cease warring thoughts’↜, but there is nothing to suggest that the Lawes songs are not adaptations by someone else.60 Either way, Walls does little to support his contention that ‘Cease warring thoughts’ is from an original performance of the masque. Indeed, he also notes that in 1659 John Gamble published three-part settings of all but one of the songs in Shirley’s masque, including ‘Cease warring thoughts’↜, in his Ayres and Dialogues (1659).61 Walls suggests that Gamble set these songs as part of a revival of the masque, which is unlikely. It is more likely that Gamble was the composer of the original performance, and that Lawes’s setting of ‘Cease warring thoughts’ was an isolated setting from the 1630s, the text of which Shirley incorporated into his masque. The setting is found in a group of partsongs: the abstraction of over a dozen pages from 58 For a discussion of this see M. Crum, ‘Notes on the Texts of William Lawes’s Songs

in B.M. MS. Add. 31432’↜, The Library, 5th series, 9 (1954), 122–7.

59 See Walls, ‘New Light’; and WallsM, 182–9 and 334–6. Both versions are tran-

scribed in WallsM, 183–8, and LawesCVM4, 61–8.

60 WallsM, 189: in a footnote (189 n.â•‹50) Walls notes that these may be arrangements

by John Wilson; Callon also attributes this setting to Lawes in LawesCVM4.

61 See also Spink, ‘Correspondence’↜.

LAWES.indb 65

19/03/2010 10:57

66

the consort music of william lawes

this section suggests that it was originally much larger and consisted of other partsongs rather than masque music, a repertoire perhaps similar to MS 31432. Lawes, who had worked with Shirley previously, could easily have acquired a copy of his poem (and the others) much earlier than 1644. At the end of B.2 there are several drinking songs (for which Lawes was renowned) and catches.62 ‘Some Drink, Boy’ (p.â•‹107) is from Sir John Suckling’s The Goblins, for which Julia Wood has suggested termini a quo and ad quem of 1637–41.63 Another of Lawes’s drinking partsongs from the same play, ‘A Health, … a health to the Northerne lasse’↜, is found in MS 31432 (folsâ•‹36v–37r).64 MS 31432 appears to date from c.â•‹1639–41 (see below), and seems to be roughly contemporaneous with this section of B.2. Indeed, the last of the partsongs in B.2 is the six-part catch ‘Warrs ar our delight’ (p.â•‹110), perhaps hinting at the increasing turmoil of the late 1630s.65 This was one of four of the B.2 catches published in John Hilton’s Catch that Catch Can (1652). These songs do not provide a more definite date than late 1630s for this portion of the manuscript; the inks here vary, which suggests that the songs were entered piecemeal.

L

awes maintained a consistent musical and textual hand throughout both â•… scorebooks. The terminal barlines are all finished with a similar flourish, originating from the final barline and usually finished by a (fermata-like) dash. This appears to be one of the features of Lawes’s ‘informal’ mature hand, appearing throughout B.2–3, D.229, D.238–40 and MS 31432 (e.g. Fig.â•‹2.23). The most consistent feature of Lawes’s text hand in B.3 is his capital letter ‘A’↜. Throughout much of B.3 this letter lacks the short upturn on the lower left leg characteristic of his hand. This ‘straight A’ is especially consistent throughout the Royall Consort section (pp.â•‹48–100), which was probably added c.â•‹1639 (Fig.â•‹2.21; another example is Fig.â•‹2.18). The ‘upturn A’ is a consistent feature of the autograph manuscripts (or rather portions thereof) in which he uses his ‘formal’ style, whereas the ‘straight A’ is common to his ‘informal’ style (see below). The ‘straight A’ is the only form found in songs texts in B.2 and MS 31432 (e.g. Figs 2.27–8), suggesting it was his natural formation of the letter. Both forms of ‘A’ are found in titles in B.2 and B.3. Whilst the ‘straight A’ appears to be more a feature of his later hand, Lawes is frustratingly inconsistent in his juxtaposition of both. Throughout both volumes Lawes uses the ‘6’ treble clefs. As noted earlier, there are two main forms of c-clef used throughout the later manuscripts. The first 62 Edited in LawesCVM2. 63 WoodMfP, 26, 45–6 and 55. 64 The song is transcribed in WoodMfP, 27–9; see also LawesCVM2, 8–9. 65 See also RingD, 164–5; LawesCVM2, 100–1.

LAWES.indb 66

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

67

Fig.╋2.23╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3, p.╋99, detail

consists of a single vertical stroke with a large upturn, often coming up as far as the top horizontal stroke. The four horizontal strokes vary considerably even within a single piece, but generally take one of two forms: (a) the top two lines slant downwards as the bottom two slant upwards towards the line denoting c' (Figs 2.14, 2.24); (b) the four lines are almost horizontal (also found in the Shirley partbooks: Fig.â•‹2.7a). Often both variations are found in close proximity (Fig.â•‹2.22b). The second clef consists of two vertical lines bordering the four horizontal ones, which usually all slant upwards; the upturn is found less frequently in this clef (Figs 2.1d, 2.25). This ‘double-vertical’ clef is the main form in B.3, where Lawes used it consistently; its presence in the Shirley partbooks has been noted previously. It is also found in the bass viol part of the harp consorts in D.240. It is also the main form of c-clef used throughout MS 31432. Occasionally, however, the ‘single-vertical’ clef with upturn is found juxtaposed: the ‘single-vertical’ clef becomes the main clef used from around fol.â•‹41v until fol.â•‹54v. Both forms of the clef are found in B.2. The ‘double-vertical’ clef is found especially in the six-part sequence (pp.â•‹1–9) and the first half of the main sequence of five-part consorts (pp.â•‹45–61; Fig.â•‹2.1d).66 It is also found in The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour music, which means that 66 It is the main c-clef on pages 1–8, 17–18, 42, 45–61, 87, 101, 105–7, 109–10.

LAWES.indb 67

19/03/2010 10:57

68

the consort music of william lawes

Lawes was using it by at least late 1635. The ‘double-vertical’ is also found on p.â•‹101, where we find the lament on the death of John Tomkins who died in September 1638 (see Chapter 5). Indeed, it seems to have become Lawes’s main form of the clef around this time. Earlier examples of the clef often have the lines denoting c' horizontal, whereas in later versions of the clef they mostly slant upwards to the right. The ‘single-vertical’ clef is also found in the bass viol parts of the fantasiasuites (D.238, folsâ•‹10v, 11v, 22v, 24r, 25v, 26r, 26v, 27v, 31v, 33r, 35r) and in the bass viol suites in D.238–40. The organ parts in D.229 unfortunately shed little light on the c-clef as there are relatively few examples. The ‘double-vertical’ clef is only used once: in the viol consorts section, fol.â•‹57r (INV.), stave 8. The ‘single-vertical’ (usually with an upturn) is used consistently in the right hand of the organ part for the fantasia-suites for two violins. The two forms of c-clef appear to indicate late forms of the hand, with the ‘double-vertical’ evidently the later of the two. Lawes’s use of the clefs is sometimes inconsistent in B.2 and in MS 31432, making it difficult to establish even a rough point of transition from one clef form to the other, if indeed one ever really took place. The ‘double-vertical’ is consistently used, however, in B.3 and in the sections of D.238–40 and D.229 that seem to date to the late 1630s. It should be stressed that the different c-clef forms are found at the start of systems: where Lawes changes to a c-clef in the middle of a stave he generally uses the ‘double-vertical’ form regardless of the form used at the start of the stave (e.g. Figsâ•‹2.22a, 2.24). The variations of the c-clef appear to be related to variations in Lawes’s bass clef. We saw earlier the two bass clefs used by Lawes in the Shirley partbooks. The second clef, resembling the number ‘2’ is found in several variations in the rest of the manuscripts. The first variation is the ‘small 2’↜, which usually takes up no more than two stave spaces. The tail of this clef is short and either ascends quickly forming a narrow edge between it and the end of the arch, or is drawn horizontally (Figs 2.1d, 2.6a, 2.10e, 2.12a, 2.14, 2.19a–b, 2.22a–d, 2.24, 2.28). In either case the tail does not go beyond the two dots denoting f (although they may occasionally touch). Although the straight tail is a feature of this clef, variants are found where the tail curves upwards similarly to the clef found in the Shirley partbooks, which suggests that Lawes used this basic form of clef throughout much of the 1630s. This clef is found throughout B.2, but only on the first few pages of B.3. It is also in the five-part (and the first piece of the six-part) section of MS 17798, and throughout the fantasia-suites and bass viol suites in D.238–40 and D.229.67 The clef is also found throughout most of the viol consorts in D.229, folsâ•‹66r–57v (INV.). The second bass clef variation is larger than the first, covering between three and five stave spaces (sizes vary considerably) with the top of the arch usually 67 With the exception of the ‘8’ clef in the first folios of D.238.

LAWES.indb 68

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

69

Fig.â•‹2.24╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹93, detail coming over the top line of the stave. The tail of the clef is long, curved and boldly drawn, coming out past the dots denoting f, often elaborately so (Figs 2.12b, 2.16a, 2.18, 2.21, 2.23, 2.25, 2.27). The curvature of the tail makes the clef often resemble a figure eight, similar to Purcell’s early bass clef (but not to be confused with the ‘8’ clef).68 This clef is also similar to the ‘2’ clef in the Shirley partbooks. It found throughout much of B.3. At the start of the manuscript it is juxtaposed with a smaller version (similar to that found throughout B.2 etc.), but from p.â•‹5 the large clef is predominant. There is nothing to suggest that B.3 was not compiled roughly in the order that it survives, implying that compilation probably postdated the latest material in B.2 and that much of B.3 was compiled from c.â•‹1639 onwards. The change to the larger bass clef seems to have happened around this time. Indeed, it is worth noting that the organ parts for all the viol consort pieces from B.3 were compiled in D.229 using this large bass clef (folsâ•‹57r–51v (INV.)). Further, the large bass clef is also found in the harp consort parts in D.238–40 and D.229; the ink in these sections 68 Cf. the hook bass clef used by Purcell: ShayThompsonPM, 26–7.

LAWES.indb 69

19/03/2010 10:57

70

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.╋2.25╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3, p.╋33, detail, Fantazy {191} HC30

also strongly suggests that they were copied around the same time as the B.3 viol consort organ parts (see Chapter 5). An elaborate form of the clef is found in all except the first six-part viol consort parts in MS 17798, where the tail has a broad upwards sweep (Fig.â•‹2.12b): this may be related to the ‘formal’ presentation style of the manuscript. The clef is also found in MS 31432, which seems to date to c.â•‹1639– 41; it is, however, juxtaposed with the smaller bass clef (see below). This suggests that the large clef indicates a very late Lawes hand, but alone does not confirm it. Although Lawes used the large clef inconsistently, it seems that it is strongly but not exclusively indicative of his later hand, and that most occurrences of the clef date to c.â•‹1639 and later.

I

t seems clear that Lawes used B.2 and B.3 for compositional drafts over a period ╇ of about eight years, from c.â•‹1633–c.â•‹1640. Although much of their contents is difficult to date, compilation of B.2 seems to have begun sometime in 1633. The music from The Triumph of Peace was probably among the first to be added, and may have been preceded by the miscellaneous poem settings on pp.â•‹35–6. Whether the two five-part viol consort pieces (pp.â•‹19–25) and the four-part pieces (pp.â•‹26–35) immediately preceding the poem settings were first added to B.2 is impossible to tell. It is worth noting, however, that the two five-part pieces and two of the fourpart pieces are also found in the Shirley partbooks (see Chapter 5). The position of Alman {38} immediately before the music from Britannia Triumphans suggests

LAWES.indb 70

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

71

that it too was entered by the end of 1637; quite some time before the rescoring of the Royall Consort in B.3, which seems to have occurred c.â•‹1639 (see Chapter 4). It also seems likely that Fantazia {135} and the bass viol suites were added c.â•‹1638 (see Chapters 6 and 8). The random compilation of B.2 seems to reflect Lawes’s multi-purpose professional activities around the time of his royal appointment; he evidently became more occupied with consort music towards the end of the 1630s as suggested by the relatively ordered structure of B.3. Establishing dates for B.3 is more difficult due to the lack of any datable masque music. Compilation appears to have been in order, beginning in late 1638 with the six-part viol consorts, closely followed by the harp consort pieces, with the rescored Royall Consort added last. Both volumes were probably largely filled by 1640. The many abstractions from B.2–3 unfortunately hinder our understanding. These leaves were carefully removed close to the binding; when, why and by whom, is impossible to tell.

❧⚧ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432

L

awes’s autograph songbook, MS 31432, is also bound in brown calf leather, â•… with the royal coat of arms on both covers (SRA VII: no initials).69 The watermark throughout the manuscript is similar to that in D.229 and D.238–40 (peacock in a circle). The watermark of the original flyleaves is the stylized pot type common in the 1630s. An inscription on the original flyleaf shows that it was once owned by a Richard Gibbon, ‘giuen to him by Mr William Lawes’↜.70 Gibbon may have been a pupil of Lawes who perhaps presented the manuscript to him c.â•‹1642, with the impending Civil War making teaching life less tenable. Pamela Willetts has convincingly made the case that Gibbon was a young London-based doctor, who died prematurely in 1652.71 He obviously took great pride in owning such a volume, noting on the inside flyleaf that it was ‘all of his [Lawes’s] owne pricking and composeing’↜. Gibbon presumably employed the copyist responsible for Jenkins’s lament on the death of Lawes at the start of the manuscript, entered after three solo lyra-viol pieces and a vocal canon in Lawes’s hand. Willetts has noted that although the elegy does not seem to have been copied from the printed parts in Choice Psalmes the copyist may ‘have been involved in the preparation of parts for printing’↜.72 Perhaps Gibbon himself was the copyist. 69 ES1600–75, vol. 2 includes a facsimile reproduction of MS 31432. 70 Reproduced in P. Willetts, ‘Who was Richard Gibbon(s)?’↜, Chelys 31 (2003), 3–17, at

4.

71 See Willetts, ‘Gibbon(s)?’↜. 72 Willetts, ‘Gibbon(s)?’↜, 11. Jenkins’s elegy was poorly proofread for the publication:

see RobinsonCP, 184.

LAWES.indb 71

19/03/2010 10:57

72

the consort music of william lawes

Although MS 31432 contains songs composed for plays from 1633 to 1641, it appears to have been compiled in several stages within a relatively short period between 1639–40 and 1641. The dates can be deduced from the first song, which is from Suckling’s play The Tragedy of Brennoralt performed between 1639 and 1641. This suggests a terminus a quo of c.â•‹1639.73 Conversely, as many of the datable songs were copied retrospectively, it is reasonable to assume that the initial 1639 songs may also have been retrospective, which could put a start date for the manuscript’s compilation as late 1639 or even 1640. David Pinto has convincingly suggested that the Robert Herrick portion of the manuscript (folsâ•‹47r–51r) was compiled c.â•‹1640.74 This portion is followed by the latest datable song (folsâ•‹58v– 59r), which comes from Shirley’s The Cardinal, licensed for performance on 25 November 1641. Due to plague, the theatres were closed from August to November of 1641, and on 2 September 1642 Parliament placed an interdiction on public theatre performances.75 Most of the signatures in MS 31432 are either the ‘mature’ or ‘short L’ forms. The ‘short L’ is mostly consistent in the later part of the manuscript. However, it is frequently juxtaposed with the ‘mature’ signature, and appears to have been used primarily as Lawes’s miniature signature. It seems significant that the ‘short L’ signature appears primarily in MS 31432, confirming its status as a late development of Lawes’s hand. There is a third form of signature in MS 31432: the ‘running L’ form. As with the ‘short L’↜, this signature is identical to the mature signature except for the ‘L’↜, the base of which now runs into the ‘awes’↜. This signature, apparently an aberration, occurs only twice (folsâ•‹43r and 57r). The first instance appears to lack the loops in the ‘ll’ characteristic of Lawes’s mature signatures (Fig.â•‹2.26); the loop is present on the second ‘l’ but the ink is quite faded. This form of signature appears to be early, found in one other instance: Mus. 70, fol.â•‹16v (Fig.â•‹2.30d). The positioning of the two instances of this signature amongst late signatures in MS 31432 is confusing. These aberrations are further examples of Lawes’s ‘consistent inconsistency’↜. This is not to be confused with several instances of the mature signature where there is a gap between the ‘L’ and ‘awes’↜, often with the base of the ‘L’ running into the ‘awes’ (for example, see no.â•‹10 in Fig.â•‹2.17). In general, the hand in MS 31432 can be characterized as Lawes’s ‘informal’ style, although it is often quite untidy and much of the manuscript appears to 73 The songs are edited in LawesCVM1; LawesCVM2; LawesCVM4. 74 D. Pinto, ‘The True Christmas: Carols at the Court of Charles I’↜, in William Lawes

(1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 97–120, at 102. There is also a Herrick sequence in Henry Lawes’s scorebook GB-Lbl, Add. MS 53723, folsâ•‹70r–80v.

75 See Willetts, ‘Gibbon(s)?’↜, 10.

LAWES.indb 72

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

73

Fig.â•‹2.26╇ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, fol.â•‹43r: ‘running L’

have been compiled rather hurriedly. Lawes may also have used the volume for composition. On the recto side of the (unruled) flyleaf Lawes wrote the text of an otherwise unknown song ‘Sweetest Cloris lend a kisse’↜. The text is quite difficult to make out. There are three six-line stanzas and a rhyming couplet, with the last two lines of the second stanza crossed out (for transcription, see p.â•‹308). The crossing-out was to add new lines, and not due to transcription error: perhaps the text may have been Lawes’s own. He did not set it to music, implying that it was added late to the manuscript. Two compositional drafts are also of note. On fol.â•‹25v ‘If you a Wrinkle’ is only partially composed. Lawes first set out the text between the staves before beginning to add the music, common practice for text settings; he only added music for just over one line. The compositional process is also evident in ‘O draw your Curtaines’↜, the text of which Lawes laid out between the staves on fol.â•‹40r but no music was added: a complete setting is found on fol.â•‹54r. It seems that the lyra-viol pieces at the start of the manuscript were written at some chronological remove from the songs. They are likely to have been entered first, followed by the songs, with space left for perhaps more lyra-viol music to be added; the extensive revisions and the generally untidy hand suggest that they are compositional drafts. The unused section after the lyra-viol pieces is approximately two gatherings (folsâ•‹5v–22r). The manuscript may originally have been intended to contain two (amateur) repertoires: songs and solo lyra-viol pieces; Lawes abandoned the lyra-viol pieces and concentrated on the songs. There are also several unused pages after the last song (folsâ•‹63v–71r). The similarity of the tablature hand in these lyra-viol pieces to that in the lute suite in B.2 suggests that they were copied around the same time. This too would fit with the proposed

LAWES.indb 73

19/03/2010 10:57

74

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.â•‹2.27. GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, fol.â•‹60v, detail: from ‘Cloris, I Wish that Envye were as Just’

chronology of MS 31432, as it seems that Lawes composed the lute suite c.â•‹1638 (see Chapter 3). Lawes’s hand throughout MS 31432 is quite messy at times, comparable to B.2–3 (cf. Figs 2.27–8 and 2.34b, and 2.21, 2.22a–d and 2.24). The large bass clef, apparently indicative of his late hand, is found in two sections: folsâ•‹22v–29r and folsâ•‹60v–63r (the first seven and last four songs, respectively). The large section of songs in between was compiled using the smaller type of bass clef. A further complication arises with the change of clef (from small to large) in the last section. The change occurs at the start of fol.â•‹60v: this is in the middle of the song ‘Cloris, I Wish that Envye were as Just’ (folsâ•‹60r–60v). Judging by the inks, the songs on folsâ•‹59v–63r all appear to have been entered around the same time (although the music of the last song and the signature on fol.â•‹63r were added later in a different ink). Thus, it seems that Lawes alternated between the two forms of bass clef; he tended, however, to use one form or the other throughout large sections of his manuscripts. The peculiar instance of ‘Cloris, I Wishâ•‹…’ is an otherwise unrepeated aberration. It is also possible that the three sections of MS 31432 were not compiled in order, and that the first seven songs were the last added to the manuscript (ink variants could support such a reading). One suspects that this is unlikely given the unused pages following fol.â•‹63r and the fact that much of the music in the section using the small bass clef seems to date to at least 1639, by which time Lawes is likely to have been using the large clef in B.3 (see above). Nevertheless, much of the manuscript is clearly an anthology copied from another source or sources, allowing easy estimation of pages required,

LAWES.indb 74

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

75

Fig.â•‹2.28╇ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, fol.â•‹59r, detail: end of ‘Come my Daphnee’

especially for songs (where one or two pages usually suffice). Peter Walls has noted that Lawes may have selected songs suitable for adaptation in domestic performance;76 it seems more likely, however, that he compiled the manuscript for didactic purposes in the early 1640s. If this were so it would not necessarily follow that the manuscript was compiled after the removal of the court to Oxford, when, of course, Lawes would presumably have had limited access to the court stationer. The increased political tension in the year or two before 1642 could have given Lawes the impetus (or need) to take on more private pupils (presuming he had any in the first place) to supplement his income, or indeed, to secure an income at all. The last recorded payment of wages to Lawes comes on 13 March 1639/40 when he received 20s. for the half-year to the previous Michaelmas.77 In addition to the external evidence, it seems safe to give MS 31432 a terminus a quo of c.â•‹1639–41.

76 WallsM, 182. 77 RECM, iii. 239; William also collected 10s. for his brother Henry for the same

period.

LAWES.indb 75

19/03/2010 10:57

76

the consort music of william lawes

❧⚧ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70

T

he manuscript Mus. 70 has received little scholarly attention in published literature.78 Murray Lefkowitz’s discovery of it was too late for inclusion in his monograph proper. Instead, mention of it went into the preface and footnotes; the promise of a published ‘article concerning this manuscript in the very near future’ never came to fruition.79 Mus. 70 is the sole surviving partbook of an original set of three containing lyra-viol trios. It is bound in contemporary brown reversed calf leather with giltstamped arms of Charles I on the covers; the reversed calf binding is unlike any of the other autographs. The cover stamp is the same as that on D.229 and MS 31432 (SRA VII; Fig.â•‹2.13b). The reversed calf covers incorporate an earlier vellum binding.80 On the front vellum cover Lawes wrote ‘Three Lyra Vialls’↜. It is noteworthy that this titling is significantly different from the inscription on the covers of GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7 (see Chapter 4). Two flyleaves (at either end) separate the reversed calf and vellum covers; no watermarks are visible, although the paper is different from that in the rest of the volume suggesting that they were incorporated with the outer binding. The watermarks of the ruled pages suggest that the paper dates to the 1620s or early 1630s; the vellum binding is likely to have originated around this time. A book label on the inside cover reads ‘Robert Trollap (of Yorke and Newcastle, Free-Mason) his Booke, 1657’↜. Trollap was made a freeman of York in 1647–8: joined by his brother ‘Henricus Trollopp, bricklayer’ in 1669.81 The label suggests that Trollap did not possess the other two volumes (although they could also have had the same label). Pinto has convincingly argued that Lawes was in or near York around April-July 1644, around the time of the siege,82 at which time the manuscript may have come into Trollap’s possession. W.â•‹H. Cummings (1831–1915) owned the manuscript by the late nineteenth century (for later owners, see Â�Appendix 1, pp. 316–17). The Index notes that there are two hands in the manuscript. The first, unidentified, scribe (Hand H) copied eight pieces (in tablature) at the start of the volume (Fig.â•‹2.29). There are then eighteen pieces copied by Lawes. The tablature in the Lawes portion of the manuscript shares many characteristics with the two known examples of Lawes’s tablature in B.2 and MS 31432. The first eight pieces of the 78 It is discussed in CunninghamLVT. 79 LefkowitzWL, x. 80 Cf. Music Manuscripts at Harvard, ed. B. Wolff (Cambridge, MA, 1992), 95–6. 81 Register of the Freemen of the City of York from the City Records, II: 1559–1759, ed. F.

Collins (Durham, 1900), 106, 136.

82 PintoY.

LAWES.indb 76

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

77

Fig.╋2.29╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, fol.╋6r: anonymous portion (Hand H)

LAWES.indb 77

19/03/2010 10:57

78

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.30╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70: (a) fol.â•‹13r, detail: Portion 1 (The ‘Will Lawes’ under the signature appears to have been written by Cummings.); (b) fol.â•‹14v, detail: Portion 1; (c) fol.â•‹15v, detail: Portion 1; (d) fol.â•‹16v, detail: Portion 1

manuscript are unattributed: the first five are untitled. These pieces are tentatively assigned to Lawes in the Index, but as Lawes began his group of pieces after an interval of several pages and did not sign any of them this seems unlikely. Indeed, he appears to have left the unused pages deliberately to separate the two groups. The holograph portion was compiled in two stages: folsâ•‹11v–16v (Portion 1) and folsâ•‹17r–20r (Portion 2). Both portions contain differing examples of Lawes’s

LAWES.indb 78

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

79

(c)

(d)

signature. In Portion 1 they are notably different from the mature form. The secretary ‘ll’ with the horizontal dash is present, although the second ‘l’ is not as elaborate as in the ‘mature’ signature. Instead of the base of the ‘ll’ coming under the ‘awes’ it runs into the ‘awes’ (‘running’ signature). Although this is similar to the two late examples in MS 31432 (cf. Figs 2.26 and 2.30a–d), it is significant that all of the first portion signatures lack the flowing loops characteristic of his mature hand. (The loops are only missing from the first instance of ‘running’ signature in MS 31432.) Furthermore, whereas the ‘running’ signatures of MS 31432 appear to be aberrations, there is a consistency of letter formation in this portion of Mus. 70. Also of note is the bar that crosses the ‘ll’↜. In the ‘mature’ signature this is usually an elongated loop (sometimes done without lifting the pen), whereas in Portion 1 it is an unelaborated single dash, done with one (separate) stroke. In all but one of the ‘Willawes’ signatures in Portion 1 William is abbreviated to ‘Wi’; only the last piece of the section uses ‘Wj’↜. Of the eight Portion 1 signatures, seven are

LAWES.indb 79

19/03/2010 10:57

80

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.╋2.31╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, fol.╋18v, detail: Portion 2

variations of the same basic (and early) ‘Willawes’↜. This is not found in any of the other autograph sources. There is only one significant aberration in Portion 1. Alman {564} on fol.â•‹12r is the only signature to have a capital L, a form of Lawes’s signature found in only one other instance: the Shirley partbooks, fol.â•‹29r (cf. Figs 2.10a and 2.10b),83 suggesting that it is an early form. All of the Portion 1 signatures (and titles) vary between the Greek and italic ‘e’ forms. In Portion 2 the signatures are mostly consistent with the ‘mature’ form, although the two forms of ‘e’ are again found: folsâ•‹17r, 17v, 18r and 18v have the italic ‘e’: the last four pieces have the epsilon. This suggests that there was some time difference between compilation of the two autograph portions, and that the second was later and closer to Lawes’s mature hand. Portion 2 does contain signature aberrations, implying that it is still relatively early, perhaps c.â•‹1632–3. The main aberration is on fol.â•‹18v, Saraband {444}. This is similar to the ‘WLawes’ aberration in Portion 1, but here there is a lowercase ‘l’ before the capital (Fig.â•‹2.31). This is closer to the ‘mature’ form (lacking the ‘i’ or ‘j’), whereas the Portion 1 aberration is closer to the earlier example from the Shirley partbooks. This supports the earlier suggestion that Lawes experimented with various forms of his signature, and that the secretary ‘ll’ came about gradually (see Figs 2.30a–d and 2.32a–c). It is also 83 This signature can be compared to several other examples in the Shirley partbooks.

LAWES.indb 80

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

81

(a)

(b)

(c)

Fig.â•‹2.32╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70: (a) fol.â•‹17r, detail: Portion 2; (b) fol.â•‹19r, detail: Portion 2 (The tuning legend is also in Lawes’s hand.); (c) fol.â•‹18r, detail: Portion 2

LAWES.indb 81

19/03/2010 10:57

82

the consort music of william lawes

Fig.╋2.33╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, fol.╋17r, detail

perhaps worth mentioning that the anonymous portion and the first autograph portion of Mus. 70 contain pieces exclusively in the ‘eights’ tuning popular earlier in the century, whereas the second autograph portion pieces are in the ‘harp-way’ tunings popular in the 1630s (see Chapter 3). There are two main differences in the tablature lettering from the first to the second autograph portions: the letters ‘f ’ and ‘y’↜.84 In Portion 1, the ‘f ’ has an upwards curved tail and only a slight rightwards curve at the top. In Portion 2 the ‘f ’ has a more pronounced rightwards curve at the top and a less elaborate curve at the bottom (cf. Figsâ•‹2.30a and 2.33). Indeed, the tail at the bottom often appears to have been written separately to the rest of the letter, which would leave the ‘f ’ in its basic form similar to later examples in MS 31432 and B.2. This second ‘f ’ is also found at the start of the lute suite in B.2, although in the lute suite Lawes abandons this ‘f ’ by the end of the second system in favour of a plain ‘f ’ formed by a straight vertical stroke and a straight horizontal stroke, similar to a lowercase ‘t’↜. This is the same form of ‘f ’ found in the three tablature pieces in MS 31432 (see Figs 2.34a–b). The case is similar for the letter ‘y’↜, although there are fewer instances available for comparison: ‘y’ is not used in the lute suite. In the first autograph portion of Mus. 70 the ‘y’ (like the ‘f ’) mostly has an upwards curving tail, whereas in Portion 2 the tail is less pronounced; it is similar to the letter ‘f ’↜. In the tablature of MS 31432 ‘y’ is again similar to ‘f ’↜, and again the upwards curving tail is omitted. As with the ‘f ’ 84 ‘i’ is often replaced by ‘y’ in tablature because of its separate dot, which could cause

confusion. ‘j’ was not used as it could be too easily confused with ‘i’↜, and because ‘j’ was regarded as a variant of ‘i’ until the nineteenth century.

LAWES.indb 82

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

83

(a)

(b)

Fig.â•‹2.34╇ (a) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹86, detail: Lawes lute suite; (b) GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, fol.â•‹1v: ‘Sarabd’ for solo lyra-viol

LAWES.indb 83

19/03/2010 10:57

84

the consort music of william lawes

in the lute suite, however, the less elaborate ‘y’ is found alongside the more elaborate version in Mus. 70, Portion 1 (e.g. Figs 2.30c and 2.30d). This suggests that such changes occurred over a brief period, and that the two autograph portions were copied within a relatively short space of time. The differences in the tablature letters between MS 31432 and B.2 and Mus. 70 are perhaps also related to the different functions of the manuscripts. The former appear to be compositional drafts, whereas Mus. 70 was presumably part of a set of performance parts, copied in Lawes’s ‘informal’ style. In other words, the tablature in Portion 2 of Mus. 70 is a more careful ‘informal’ version of the tablature in B.2 and MS 31432. There is an exact parallel in the harp consorts, which are in the ‘compositional draft’ style in B.3 and in the ‘informal’ style in D.238–40. This adds further weight to the theory that Lawes’s hand varied according to the function of the manuscript, and implies that Lawes’s tablature hand (like his music and text hands) did not change significantly after c.â•‹1633. The anonymous copyist (who numbered his own pieces, e.g. Fig. 2.29) also numbered the pieces (1–11) in the first Lawes portion, but did not make any annotations to Portion 2. This confirms the division of the autograph portions, and may suggest that the manuscript initially belonged to the anonymous copyist who perhaps commissioned Lawes to add some of his own pieces (Portion 1), and who subsequently numbered these pieces. Sometime thereafter, Lawes may have acquired the manuscript, or at least the first copyist no longer had access to it (as he did not add any further pieces or add numerations to Portion 2). This is supported by an analysis of the inks. The anonymous portion was copied using a light brown ink, now quite faded and difficult to make out in places. Some of the revisions (folsâ•‹4r and 6r) are in a much darker ink; these are where the copyist has entered bars he originally omitted (fol.â•‹6r; Fig.â•‹2.29, stave 4) or has removed duplicated bars (fol.â•‹4r). The first Lawes portion was written in good quality black ink, clear even today with little bleed-through. Portion 2 was also copied using a black ink, although it is of poorer quality than in Portion 1. It is still quite clear, but the ink often blotched (especially in the tails of the letter ‘f ’) resulting in much bleed-through. The differences in the tablature letters are not observable in Lawes’s handÂ� writing in the two portions. There is an inherent problem with attempting to form a link between a scribe’s text and tablature hands. Tablature and text letters are not always formed in the same way, and tablature letterforms are often highly conventional, such as the Greek gamma (Γ) denoting the letter ‘c’ to avoid confusion with ‘e’↜. There are some notable similarities however between Lawes’s tablature hand and aspects of his text hand, of which we have examples in the song texts in MS 31432 and B.2. In general, Lawes’s lowercase ‘f ’ when written in song texts is written with no tail at the bottom and a small loop at the top, especially when ‘f ’

LAWES.indb 84

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

85

is the last letter of the word. This is not always the case. Examples are found of the letter ‘f ’ with a looped tail juxtaposed with the straight-tailed ‘f ’ (Fig. 2.34a). Such inconsistencies add further difficulties to dating letterforms, but generally, looped tails do not seem to be a common feature of Lawes’s later hand. The case is similar regarding the letter ‘y’↜, which is most commonly found in song texts with no loop at the bottom but with a narrow rightward upwards tail (Fig. 2.34b). The letter ‘y’ is not used in the B.2 tablature; however, there are several examples of ‘g’ with elaborate loops (Fig.â•‹2.34a). The capital letter ‘A’ used in titles in Mus. 70 contributes further evidence that the first autograph portion was compiled relatively early. The two almans and the aire are written with a broad upwards curve flowing from the left stem of the capital ‘A’↜, more elaborate than the ‘upturn A’ discussed earlier. Elaborate upturns on the capital ‘A’ are most commonly found in the Shirley partbooks (cf. Figs 2.30a, 2.30c and 2.30d, with Fig.â•‹2.6b). In the rest of the sources the capital ‘A’ is usually written with either no left tail (‘straight A’; Figs 2.21, 2.27 and 2.28) or a rather short one (i.e. ‘upturn A’↜, which is also found in the Shirley partbooks; Figs 2.1a, 2.9a–b, 2.12a–b, 2.16b, 2.19a–b). The ‘upturn A’ is a common feature of Lawes’s ‘formal’ presentation style. The two examples of the word ‘Aire’ in the second autograph portion of Mus. 70 seem to confirm this pattern. Both are written in the style common throughout the later sources (‘upturn A’), adding further weight to the suggestion that some time elapsed between the copying of the two autograph portions. The capital ‘A’ with an elaborate upturn on p.â•‹31 of B.2 is a rare aberration in the scorebooks. The separation of the autograph portion into two sections has implications for the manuscript’s concordances, which are found in GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7 and GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3. It seems significant that all of the MSS 725–7 concordances are found in Portion 1 and all the II.B.3 concordances in Portion 2. It is likely that the first portion of Mus. 70 (which contains a divergent reading of one strain of Humour {568}) is earlier than MSS 725–7, suggesting that Lawes composed (and revised) lyra-viol trios at different times throughout his career (see Chapter 3). From their presentation style, it seems likely that Mus. 70 is from a set of performance parts; it lacks the ‘formal’ presentation style of D.238–40, D.229 and MS 17798. Given the relationship with its concordances, Mus. 70 appears to have been compiled from two separate (now lost) autograph scores containing Lawes’s lyra-viol trios, perhaps similar to B.2 and B.3. The first (lost) scorebook also appears to have been related to MSS 725–7 and to Portion 1 of Mus. 70. It is likely to have been a relatively early manuscript but slightly later than the Shirley partbooks, perhaps dating to the early 1630s. Portion 2 of Mus. 70 could have been copied from a second (lost) scorebook, explaining why II.B.3 only includes pieces from this section with no connections to the earlier part of Mus. 70 or MSS 725–7.

LAWES.indb 85

19/03/2010 10:57

86

the consort music of william lawes

Portion 2 was copied later than Portion 1 but is also relatively early, perhaps dating to between The Triumph of Peace and Lawes’s royal appointment. Another factor suggesting that the manuscript as a whole is relatively early (i.e. pre-1635) is the decorative endings, which lack the horizontal dash generally characteristic of the later sources. Examples of the decorative flourish without the dash can be found in MS 31432; nevertheless, the Mus. 70 decorative endings are identical to those of Lawes’s A1 hand in the Shirley partbooks (for example, cf. Fig.â•‹2.9a and 2.30a–d). II.B.3 seems to be a more complete copy of the phantom scorebook, implying that either the scorebook was added to after Mus. 70 (but before II.B.3), or that Mus. 70 is a selection volume. The latter seems most likely given Mus. 70’s partial relationship to both the known concordant manuscripts. Some confusion arises regarding the order in which the pieces on the last two pages were entered (folsâ•‹19v–20r; Fig.â•‹2.35). The Toy is begun on fol.â•‹19v, with the last four bars concluded on the bottom of fol.â•‹20r under the Thump, indicating that the Toy was entered after the Thump. The Thump was completed with the title and signature in the right-hand corner, a common position for Lawes to write titles and or signatures. After this Lawes began the short Toy under the Aire on fol.â•‹19v. Why he copied the Toy here is unclear; there are plenty of unused pages after fol.â•‹20r. The Toy is evenly spaced and clearly presented. This is not always the case when Lawes squeezed in pieces. The last few bars of the Toy on fol.â•‹20r are somewhat more compressed than those in the rest of the piece, confirming that the words ‘Thump Wjllawes’ were already present, forcing Lawes to make the last few bars slightly more compact. The answer seems to be that Lawes entered the Toy here because it was intended to be played between the Aire and Thump in a suite. Indeed, these three pieces, preceded by the Pavan, are all in a new tuning (and key) sequence. Mus. 70 appears to have originated in a vellum binding, probably owned by the anonymous copyist. The first autograph portion was probably compiled c.â•‹1630, and almost certainly before Lawes’s participation in The Triumph of Peace. At some later point Lawes added the second group of pieces, probably around the time of The Triumph of Peace, by which time his hand had assumed many of its ‘mature’ characteristics. Lawes’s connections to the anonymous copyist are unclear: was he a fellow musician, a patron, or a friend? Whereas one cannot entirely discount the possibility that the anonymous copyist had the volume bound in the reversed-calf covers, this seems unlikely. It is more plausible that Lawes had the volume(s) bound by the court stationer following his court appointment. Perhaps the anonymous copyist gifted Lawes the volumes to celebrate the appointment; or perhaps he was a court musician with whom Lawes supplied lyra-viol trios in the early 1630s in the hopes of getting them played at court. Of course, the fact that Mus. 70 has the royal coat of arms stamped on the cover need not imply that Lawes

LAWES.indb 86

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

87

Fig.â•‹2.35╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, folsâ•‹19v–20r

acquired the manuscript post-1635; as we have seen with B.2–3, Lawes appears to have been able to acquire such bindings before his appointment.

❧⚧ Conclusions

L

awes’s hand does not seem to have changed significantly after the early 1630s â•… or so. His earliest hand in the Shirley partbooks is readily identifiable, but even so, traits observable therein are also found in much later sources. This study has shown that previous readings of Lawes’s early and late hands are flawed, and that it is more useful to distinguish between the functions of the manuscripts. For example, there seems to be an identifiable difference between Lawes’s copying hand and his more flowing, or (to borrow Pinto’s term) ‘cursive’↜, hand present in sources that appear to be personal manuscripts or sketchbooks. Moreover, there seems to be a further distinction between Lawes’s ‘formal’ and less formal (‘informal’) copying hands. These two kinds of presentation styles appear to be closely related to the function, or intended function, of the manuscripts. The similarities between the ‘formal’ portions of D.238–40 and D.229, and MS 17798 are evidence that Lawes cultivated a mature ‘formal’ copying hand that remained consistent into the late 1630s and 1640s.

LAWES.indb 87

19/03/2010 10:57

88

the consort music of william lawes

Three main kinds of presentation style in Lawes’s manuscripts are identifiable, each of which reflects the manuscript’s function. First, the ‘compositional draft’ style evident in B.2–3, and in the viol consort sequence in D.229. In this style Lawes does not cultivate any kind of ‘formal’ script; it is characterized by frequent revisions (palimpsests etc.), a generally quite messy script often quite squashed (and rightward leaning), and by the final conical flourish; any texts are given only partially. Second, the ‘formal’ style characterized by a careful hand, evenly spaced notes and a calligraphic final barline (e.g. MS 17798, and the fantasia-suites and bass viol suites in D.238–40 and D.229). It is important to note that the ‘formal’ style is also at times slightly untidy and does contain mistakes and occasional revisions and corrections; corrections are generally inserted, however, not written as palimpsests (which suggests omissions). The third style is closely related to both the ‘formal’ and ‘compositional’ styles, and best described as the ‘informal’ style as illustrated by Mus. 70 and the harp consorts in D.238–40 and D.229. Overall, there is little difference between this and the ‘formal’ style; the lack of the calligraphic final barlines is the main distinguishing feature. The presentation style of much of the Shirley partbooks is similar to Lawes’s later ‘informal’ style, although the intention was clearly ‘formal’↜. The ‘informal’ style is also found in MS 31432, although the overall presentation style of this volume is quite untidy and has similarities with the ‘compositional draft’ style. The majority of the songs in MS 31432 are unlikely to have been composed there and overall the presentation style has most in common with the third category. The lyra-viol pieces at the start of MS 31432 are, however, in the ‘compositional draft’ style, and are unlikely to have been copied from another source: a lack of palimpsests etc. and fully written-out texts distinguish the ‘informal’ and ‘compositional draft’ styles. Identifying the presence of three presentation styles is important for understanding the function of the manuscripts. The ‘compositional draft’ is easily comprehended, although its presence in D.229 strongly suggests a change in the manuscript’s function from the ‘formal’ style of the early pieces. D.229 appears to have gone through three separate functional stages: the ‘formal’ stage of the fantasiasuites and bass viol pieces (entered at either end), the ‘informal’ presentation style of the harp consorts, and the ‘compositional draft’ style of the viol consorts. The distinction between the last two may not be clear-cut. As we have seen, the harp consorts appear to have been entered after the viol consorts in D.229 and Lawes may have been in the process of composing the harp parts therein. The case is yet more complex when one considers that the organ parts of bass viol pieces also appears to have been partially composed in D.229 (see Chapter 8), despite being written in the ‘formal’ style; they seem to represent a transitional point in the manuscript’s function. What function the ‘formal’ style represents is difficult to say, although it seems

LAWES.indb 88

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

89

likely that Lawes put such effort into the ‘formal’ manuscripts with some purpose in mind beyond performance. Presentation, or the intention to present, to a patron seems to be a reasonable suggestion. This is perhaps best illustrated by MS 17798, which although copied in two stages retained the ‘formal’ style throughout. What relation the ‘informal’ style has to the ‘formal’ style is unclear. In D.238–40, D.229 and Mus. 70 it appears to be more related to performance from an easily read text than to presentation. Mus. 70 was certainly a playing part, suggesting a tangible link between presentation style and function. Lawes appears generally to have used the ‘informal’ style in his personal manuscripts: the ‘formal’ style appears to have been used for manuscripts intended for undetermined official or non-personal functions. MS 31432 is in a similar presentation style to Mus. 70 but appears to have been a pedagogical tool; clarity of presentation was not a priority, as the manuscript did not need to be read by a group of musicians. Apart from Lawes (who evidently entered the songs quite hurriedly) those consulting MS 31432 would have used it to create their own texts. The Shirley partbooks are probably the earliest examples of Lawes’s hand and generally exhibit the ‘informal’ style, although this actually appears to be a nascent stage in the development of his ‘formal’ style proper. This manuscript was definitely copied for a patron, but the pieces in (what has been described here as) his ‘rushed’ hand again suggest that the initial function of the manuscript changed. Whether the main catalyst was the death of Sir Henry Shirley, or Lawes’s growing stature and confidence as a composer is impossible to tell. Either way, it seems highly unlikely that the change observed in Lawes’s hand throughout the Shirley partbooks was the consequence of additions in the late 1630s or early 1640s. It is frustrating that few characteristics of Lawes’s hand can be interpreted chronologically, a situation further hampered by Lawes’s ‘consistent inconsistency’↜. Nevertheless, based on the evidence discussed in this chapter, a tentative chronology of Lawes’s autograph manuscripts (with suggested periods of usage) may be advanced (Table 2.1). It seems that the cultivation of a signature written in one fluid motion was important to Lawes, and that the evolution of his ‘mature’ signature was coincident with his achievement of growing status beginning with the composition of music for The Triumph of Peace, a status consolidated by his admission to the Royal Music a year later. Mus. 70 captures part of the development of the signature, as do the Shirley partbooks. Only late in the 1630s did his signature undergo change or variation, one that seems to have been closely related to constraints of space (‘short L’). The present investigation highlights the fact that we have too few of Lawes’s autographs, from too restricted a chronological range, to make definite conclusions about them. It has been obvious for some time that we lack many of Lawes’s

LAWES.indb 89

19/03/2010 10:57

90

the consort music of william lawes Table 2.1╇ Proposed chronology of Lawes’s autograph manuscripts

Source

Previously accepted dating(s)*

Proposed dating(s)

Shirley partbooks Mus. 70 B.2 D.238–40

c.â•‹1626–early 1633, with additions in the late 1630s/ early 1640s↜渀屮a c.â•‹1620–1645↜b Various dates, from c.â•‹1634–1645 c.â•‹1635–c.â•‹1638↜c After 1640↜d Various dates, from c.â•‹1634–1645 Early 1640s↜渀屮e c.â•‹1639–41↜渀屮f

mid-late 1620s?– early 1633 c.â•‹1630–c.â•‹1633 c.â•‹1633–c.â•‹1639 c.â•‹1638–c.â•‹1641 c.â•‹1638–c.â•‹1641 c.â•‹1638–9–c.â•‹1640 c.â•‹1639–40 c.â•‹1639–c.â•‹1641

D.229

B.3 MS 17798 MS 31432

↜* No single source offers all dates. a PintoMVC; PintoFyV; D. Pinto, ‘Lawes, William’↜, GMO (accessed 7 August 2009). b TraficanteMS, 19. c LawesFS. d LefkowitzWL, 32; see also PintoMVC; LawesCS. e LawesCS; PintoFyV: this date is implied though not explicitly stated. f Various sources: see the above discussion of the manuscript.

manuscripts. Many more are hinted at by Henry Lawes’s oft-quoted remarks on his brother, ‘besides his Fancies of the Three, Foure, Five and Six Parts to the Viols and Organ, he hath made above thirty severall sorts of Musick for Voices and Instruments: Neither was there any Instrument then in use, but he compos’d to it so aptly, as if he had only studied that’↜.85 Lefkowitz suggested seven lost volumes:86 1.╇ The three-part psalms. 2.╇ The verse anthems. 3.╇ The madrigals in three, four and five parts. 4.╇ The suites for lutes. 5.╇ Additional consort ‘lessons’ or dances for instruments. 6.╇ Pieces for wind instruments (perhaps). 7.╇ Works for the keyboard (perhaps). Although one wonders how plausible nos.â•‹4, 6 and 7 are, to this list there should perhaps be added at least one and probably two (or more) score volumes. These manuscripts would perhaps contain (scores of) lyra-viol trios, the original (Tr–Tr–T–B) version of the Royall Consort, the fantasia-suites and some of the harp consorts, perhaps with complete harp parts (assuming, of course, some of these were not originally on the pages abstracted from the surviving scorebooks). 85 Choice Psalmes, ‘To the Reader’↜. 86 LefkowitzWL, 32–3 and passim: the list is from 32.

LAWES.indb 90

19/03/2010 10:57

the autograph manuscripts

91

Nevertheless, one must be somewhat cautious in attributing so many lost score volumes to Lawes. There are occasional tantalizing references to pieces and collections by Lawes that have not survived. For example, ‘Mr. Lawes Consort for 2 Lyra’s [sic], a Violin and Theorbo, prick’d in quarto’↜, his ‘Little Consort, in 4 parts’↜, or his ‘Airs of 4 parts’ listed in Henry Playford’s 1690 auction catalogue:87 the last two items are likely to have been versions of some or all of the Royall Consort. There is also the ‘Two sets of [books] in 4 parts by Jenkins, Lock, Lawes, &c.↜’ listed in Thomas Britton’s sale catalogue (1714).88 Indeed, one wonders to what pieces the Restoration biographer John Aubrey was referring in the following extract: ‘Our Vicar’s daughter, Abigail Slop, played in consort W. Lawes, his base’s three parts when she was not fully six years of age: she wanted one month of it, this to my knowledge’↜.89 Was Aubrey referring to the lyra-viol trios, or did he intend to say that the girl played the bass part of Lawes’s three-part pieces: at any rate, impressive for a six-year-old! Until such chimerical sources become a reality, the lack of Lawes holographs can be compensated for (to an extent) by a detailed study of the minutiae of the extant sources, allowing us to present a more complete context for Lawes’s surviving consort repertoire.

87 PlayfordCC, respectively, nos.â•‹60, 117 and 118. 88 ‘Instrumental Music’↜, no.â•‹2. The original catalogue is lost; it is transcribed in

HawkinsGH, ii. 792–3.

89 Aubrey on Education. A Hitherto Unpublished Manuscript by the Author of Brief

Lives, ed. J. Stephens (1972), 36–7. I am grateful to Andrew Woolley for bringing this reference to my attention.

LAWES.indb 91

19/03/2010 10:57

chapter 3

The Music for Lyra-Viol

A

lthough its repertoire includes music by some of the finest English ╇╇ composers of the early seventeenth century, the definitive account of the lyra-viol and its music has yet to be written.1 As with composers such as Coprario, Ferrabosco II and Simon Ives, music for lyra-viol forms a significant part of Lawes’s surviving output; this music is, however, understudied.2 The main reasons for this neglect seem to be because the solo repertoire is considered trivial3 and because much of the ensemble music is lost or survives incomplete. Over a quarter of a century ago, Frank Traficante described music for the lyra-viol as ‘any music from the late sixteenth to the early eighteenth centuries notated in tablature and intended for a bowed viol with a curved bridge’↜.4 From this description we can immediately see that lyra-viol music does not have to be played on a lyra-viol. The term ‘lyra-viol’↜, and the inconsistent ways in which it was applied by seventeenth-century commentators, has led to much scholarly debate.5 First, the term was applied to a specific instrument: a viol slightly smaller than the consort bass, with lighter strings (of lower action than the consort bass) and a less rounded bridge that those of the consort bass and division viol.6 The smaller dimensions and other modifications were to facilitate the performance of divisions and chords. In practice, however, a consort bass viol was often used. Second, ‘lyra-viol’ is used in sources to describe a particular tuning, known variously as ‘The leero fashion’↜, ‘Liera way’↜, ‘Lyra way’↜, ‘Leerow way’ and ‘the Bandora set’↜. Third, ‘lyra-viol’ is used to characterize the repertoire generally: i.e. the use of ╇ 1 Frank Traficante was the first musicologist to approach the topic in detail (see

Bibliography); see also J. Sawyer, ‘Music for Two and Three Lyra-Viols’↜, JCAUSM 1 (1971), 71–96; A. Otterstedt, Die Englische Lyra-Viol: Instrument und Technik (Kassel, 1989).

╇ 2 Lawes’s ensemble lyra-viol music is discussed in LefkowitzWL, 126–39, and

CunninghamLVT.

╇ 3 For example, see LefkowitzWL, 137. ╇ 4 TraficanteMS, 4: although imperfect (see F. Traficante, ‘Lyra-viol Music? A Seman-

tic Puzzle’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 325–51), this definition is understood in the following discussion. All tunings are here interpreted with the top string as a d'.

╇ 5 See Traficante, ‘Semantic Puzzle’↜. ╇ 6 SimpsonDV, 2; see also F. Traficante, ‘Lyra viol’↜, GMO (accessed 7 August 2009).

LAWES.indb 92

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

93

tablature and (usually) altered tunings, regardless of the type of viol actually used in performance (i.e. playing a viol ‘lyra-way’). This is the most useful interpretation and should be borne in mind throughout the following chapter. A largely English phenomenon, the lyra-viol (or playing the viol ‘lyra-way’) became popular among both amateur and professional musicians in the late sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries. An early indication of this popularity is found in Ben Jonson’s Cynthia’s Revels (1600), where two of the songs in Act 4 were accompanied by the ‘lyra’↜, described as ‘an instrument that (alone) is able to infuse soule in the most melancholique, and dull disposde creature vpon earth’ (4.3.236–7).7 The songs are part of Jonson’s representation of a sophisticated Italian courtly entertainment, and a ‘lyra’ was used mainly because of this newly fashionable way of playing the viol. In terms of etymology, ‘lyra’ is likely to refer to the derivation of the instrument from some form of the lira da braccio, an instrument also associated with chordal accompaniment, and often simply called ‘lira’ in contemporary literature.8 Although the lira da braccio did not travel much beyond Italy, it is likely that the word ‘lyra’ travelled with the Italian émigré musicians, such as Alfonso Ferrabosco I, who subsequently applied it to the viol. The lyra-viol repertoire demonstrates a remarkable versatility; it includes solo music, song accompaniments, and ensemble pieces for consorts of lyras and for lyras as part of a mixed ensemble.9 Music for lyra-viol is usually written in French tablature (borrowed from lute music), which was important in facilitating the various scordatura tunings.10 Nearly sixty tunings (including normal viol tuning) are known.11 Tunings are indicated by the letter (representing a fret) needed to produce a unison with the next string, from high to low: ffeff describes the intervals of a standard viol tuning (fourths with a third in the middle). Only a handful of tunings were widely used: many are variants of the most popular ones. Each tuning had its own characteristics and limitations, often harmonic. In printed sources and carefully laid out manuscripts, pieces are usually grouped together by tunings, often leading to organization by key, as many tunings are only suited to one or two keys. ╇ 7 Ben Jonson, ed. C. H. Herford, P. and E. Simpson, vol. iv (Oxford, 1932), 3–184. ╇ 8 See E. Winternitz, Musical Instruments and their Symbolism in Western Art (1967),

86.

╇ 9 For a succinct introduction to the lyra-viol, see also John Jenkins: The Lyra-viol

Consorts, ed. F. Traficante, RRMBE 67–8 (Madison, WI, 1992).

10 There are examples of lyra music in staff notation, especially later in the century;

these are beyond the scope of this discussion.

11 Over fifty tunings are listed in F. Traficante, ‘Lyra Viol Tunings: “All Ways have

been Tryed to do It”↜’↜, AcM 42 (1970), 183–205, 256.

LAWES.indb 93

19/03/2010 10:57

94

the consort music of william lawes Table 3.1╇ Main lyra-viol tunings Tuning name Viol-way Lyra-way Eights Harp-way sharp Harp-way flat High harp-way sharp High harp-way flat

Tuning ffeff fefhf fhfhf defhf edfhf fdefh fedfh

String pitches

Keys*

D–G–c–e–a–d' C–F–c–f–a–d' AA–D–A–d–a–d' D–G–d–g–b–d' D–G–d–g–b↜↜b–d' D–A–d–f↜渀屮↜渀屮#–a–d' D–A–d–f–a–d'

G/g; D/d; F/f; A/a F/f D/d; G/g G g D d

↜* Given here are the keys commonly associated with the various tunings; the list is not intended to be exhaustive.

There are over seventy-five surviving manuscript sources containing lyra-viol music: the majority are English in origin.12 In addition, eighteen books containing music for lyra-viol were printed in England between 1601 and 1682; none was printed between 1615 and 1651.13 In the early period ‘leero way’ and ‘viol way’ tunings were the most popular, certainly in the years before Alfonso Ferrabosco’s Lessons for 1. 2. and 3. Viols (1609). After 1609, ‘eights’ and ‘Alfonso way’ (ffhfh) became popular: when music publication recommenced in 1651 the popularity of ‘viol way’↜, ‘eights’ and ‘leero way’ tunings had been usurped by the various ‘harp-way’ tunings, which became established in manuscript sources in the 1630s. Lyra-viol music continued to be popular at the Restoration court, as shown by the purchase of lyra-viols for the court in 1663 and 1671 by the viol player Theodore Stoeffken.14 Perhaps the best evidence of this popularity is the success of Playford’s Musicks Recreation: on the lyra viol.15 In 1651 Playford tentatively published twenty-four pieces for solo lyra-viol as the first part of A Musicall Banquet, a publication obviously intended to gauge the potential market for printed music: the four sections of the Banquet contained the blueprint of Playford’s most successful collections.16 The lyra-viol section became Musicks Recreation, which went 12 See also TraficanteMS. Although in need of updating, Traficante’s list is the most

complete currently available; see also Otterstedt, Lyra-Viol, 250–67 (largely derived from Traficante’s lists).

13 Listed in F. Traficante, ‘Music for the Lyra-viol: The Printed Sources’↜, LSJâ•‹8 (1966),

7–24; also Otterstedt, Lyra-Viol, 243–50.

14 RECM, i. 45, 103. 15 From the second edition (1661) the title was amended to Musicks Recreation on

The viol, Lyra-way.

16 See also, S. Houck, ‘John Playford and the English Musical Market’↜, in ‘Noyses,

sounds, and sweet aires’: Music in Early Modern England, ed. J.â•‹A. Owens (Washington, DC, 2006), 48–61, esp. 50–6.

LAWES.indb 94

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

95

through four editions between 1652 and 1682. The kind of piece exemplified by the Playford lyra-viol collections is typical of the solo repertoire generally: short, relatively simple dances or popular tunes. Manuscript sources are often replete with ornament signs, which if realized can elevate simple tunes to varying degrees of technical brilliance.17 The lack of ornament signs in publications was due to the difficulty involved in replicating (a wide variety of) symbols using moveable type.

N

inety-seven lyra-viol pieces in seven tunings are attributed to Lawes,18 forty-three of which are solo pieces generally typical of the kind published by Playford.19 Like much of the repertoire, most of Lawes’s lyra-viol music is found in single sources. His solo pieces are found in ten manuscript sources and in the first two editions of Musicks Recreation; most of these sources date to after his death and imply a larger background of now lost antecedent copies (Table 3.2). Perhaps the most interesting of the solo pieces are the three simple tunes (in defhf) on folsâ•‹1r–1v of Lawes’s autograph songbook, GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432. The first saraband and the corant appear on the recto side, with the second saraband on the verso side of the page preceded by a short vocal canon. Murray Lefkowitz concluded that these pieces were ‘of no great significance’↜.20 While musically this is true, they are the only solo lyra-viol pieces surviving in Lawes’s hand; indeed, they are the only solo pieces in the repertoire so far identified as holograph. Written casually on the opening pages of his songbook, one imagines Lawes was able to throw off such tunes with ease, although there are several signs of revision. All three bear similarities to many of the lighter dance pieces Lawes composed for 17 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 59869 is a good example of a source containing pieces replete

with ornament signs.

18 This includes four arrangements of consort pieces ({73}, {343}, {345}, {346}) not

listed separately in the Index, where a further eight anonymous pieces from US-CAh, MS Mus. 70 are also tentatively attributed to Lawes (see below). Another Aire attributed to Lawes in MS 59869, fol.â•‹8r carries an attribution to Simon Ives in several other sources; listed in the Index as Ives {50}. At the time of writing, the Index does not include the three pieces in GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432 (discussed below), although they have previously been noted by scholars: see LefkowitzWL, 137; and PintoFyV, 26. All of Lawes’s lyra-viol music is edited in CunninghamMPC, ii. 390–470 (staff notation only).

19 This figure includes Ives {50}, the arrangements of consort pieces, and one

part of what is probably a duo (Corant {541}, found in IRL-Dm, MS Z3.4.13: this manuscript is discussed in detail in J. Cunningham, ‘Lyra Viol Ecclesiastica: A Neglected Â�Manuscript Source in Archbishop Marsh’s Library, Dublin’↜, VdGÂ�SJ 3 (2009), 1–54 (available at http://www.vdgs.org.uk/files/ VdGSJournal/Vol-03-1.pdf).

20 LefkowitzWL, 137.

LAWES.indb 95

19/03/2010 10:57

96

the consort music of william lawes Table 3.2╇ Lawes: solo lyra-viol sources

Source

No. of pieces

Copied

Main scribe

A-ET, Goëss MS B, seq.(93) GB-CHEr, MS DLT/B 31 GB-Lam, MS 600 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 59869 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 63852 GB-Lbl, Mus. MS 249 GB-Mp, MS BrM832Vu51 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. F.575 IRL-Dm, MS Z3.5.13

2 3 2 3 8 3 1 6 2 2 8

c.â•‹1668 c.â•‹1640–70 ?c.â•‹1620 c.â•‹1639–41 ?c.â•‹1659 mid–late 17thC late 17thC late 17thC before 1639 c.â•‹1673b c.â•‹1660s

Playford, MRLV (1652) Playford, MRLV (1661)

6 7

? Peter Leycester John Browne William Lawes Cartwright?a ? ? Henrie Read? John Merro ? Narcissus Marsh

Note: This table includes cognates; for individual concordances, see Index and CunninghamMPC, ii. 726–31. a╇ Only one of the scribes has been identified, John Lilly; Cartwright appears to have been an owner, if not the main scribe. Bound with a copy of SimpsonDV: see IMCCM1, 77–81. b╇ Dated 1673, the manuscript was donated to the Music School by William Iles; it includes ten songs from the 1630s; several of the lyra-viol pieces suggest that it was copied c.â•‹1670. Facsimile in ES1600–75, vol.â•‹6.

Example 3.1╇ Lawes, Saraband for solo lyra-viol: GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, fol.╋1r

 



3

    

   

  

      





 



  

                                                             27                                         13        20          7

LAWES.indb 96

  

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

97

three lyra-viols, most of which survive incomplete (see below). Of the three, the first saraband (Example 3.1) is the most notable, as it contains written-out divisions.21 Although the saraband should be played at a fast tempo, the divisions are technically undemanding. Whole strains with written-out divisions are uncommon in the lyra-viol repertoire, notwithstanding several printed instances by Playford in Musicks Recreation, and Thomas Mace’s claim later in the century that lyraviols ‘will serve likewise for Division-Viols very Properly’↜.22 The second saraband is also significant: it is one of the few lyra-viol pieces in Lawes’s hand to contain ornament signs. Ornaments, or ‘graces’ as they were generally known, are found in many lyra-viol sources.23 Graces were played by both the left hand and by using the bow, and were either fully written out or indicated by signs. In many sources, ornaments such as trills are often written out in full in the tablature, because improvisation in tablature is difficult for less experienced players. Ornament signs were unfortunately not codified and are rarely explained. The signs represent a dynamic tradition that was often idiosyncratic on a local level. Apart from the two signs in this piece, the other autograph sources use only slurs and dots (which indicate a pizzicato ‘thump’).24 Nine pieces attributed to Lawes were published between the first two editions of Musicks Recreation. Of these, two are unique to the first edition {421–2} and three to the second {464–6}; four were included in both editions {511–14}. Several of these pieces provide evidence of how the solo lyra-viol repertoire developed and disseminated. Only three of the Lawes pieces from Musicks Recreation are found elsewhere: all in GB-Mp, MS BrM832Vu51 (the largest single source of solo lyraviol music);25 the two sources are apparently unrelated. Saraband {466}, attributed to ‘Thomas Goodge Or trulye Mr. Willm Lawes’ in the Manchester book, is clearly corrupt in the 1661 print. Corant {465} carries a similarly corrected attribution in the Manchester book (‘Mr Roger Read Or Trulye Mr Willm Lawes’); the text again contains several variants between the two sources. Alman {511} is also found in 21 David Pinto has noted a resemblance between the opening of this piece and Royall

Consort Saraband {48}: PintoFyV, 26.

22 MaceMM, 246. 23 For lyra-viol ornaments, see P. Furnas, ‘The Manchester Gamba Book: A Primary

Source of Ornaments for the Lyra Viol’ (PhD diss., Stanford University, 1978), i. 38–84; and M. Cyr, ‘Ornamentation in English Lyra-viol Music’↜, Parts I-II, JVdGSA 34 (1997), 48–66, and 35 (1998), 16–34.

# signs in Alman {570} from Mus. 70; this sign (‘shake’) was generally used to indicate a trill, although its meaning in this instance is unclear.

24 There are also two large

25 Contains 246 pieces in tablature and 12 in staff notation: see Furnas, ‘Manchester

Gamba Book’↜, includes transcriptions in staff notation and tablature.

LAWES.indb 97

19/03/2010 10:57

98

the consort music of william lawes

both sources but with no telling variants. Apart from the printed pieces, only one other solo piece by Lawes is found in more than one source. Corant {545} from the Manchester book is also found in the Merro partbooks, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7. The most telling of the few differences between the two sources is the lack of ornament signs in the Manchester book.26 Perhaps the most interesting of Lawes’s solo pieces is ‘faire fidelia’ {346} arranged for solo lyra-viol in GB-Lbl, Add. MS 63852, a manuscript of lyra-viol music, keyboard pieces and vocal music. The lyra-viol version appears to be an arrangement of a highly popular piece also found in two- and three-part consort versions,27 and arranged for solo lute (Richard Matthew’s The Lute’s Apology (1652)) and four-course cittern (US-CAh, MS Mus. 181). The tune is set to the lyric ‘Clorinda, when I go away’ in US-NYp, Drexel MS 4027. Evidently popular, the piece appeared in all three of Playford’s two-part publications with the title ‘Elizium’↜, perhaps hinting at a masque origin. If we take this brief account of Lawes’s solo lyra-viol music to illustrate the repertoire generally, we can see that dissemination took place largely through manuscript sources and that where pieces were disseminated (and most were not) they were likely to incorporate variants. While some variants are the result of corruptions, many are linked to divergent approaches to graces and divisions. The Â�variants can often result in significant departures from the ‘original’; this will also be observed in the ensemble repertoire. Solo lyra-viol music is characteristically amateur-orientated; it is also closely linked with the music played by professionals. This is shown by the many intabulations for solo viol of consort pieces, such as {346} or {73} by Lawes. Aire {73} is best known as a five-part viol consort piece. It is also found in a widely disseminated two-part version, and in arrangements for keyboard and solo lyra-viol (see Chapter 5). Arrangements such as these demonstrate the complex relationship between the various compositional media, and also hint at a complex relationship between the amateur and professional repertoires. As we shall see, within the context of the lyra-viol ensemble this relationship between amateur and professional repertories can also be shown to be a Â�particularly flexible one. Â�

L

yra-viol ensembles appear to have developed as quickly as the solo ╇╇ repertoire. There are almost 300 surviving pieces for two lyra-viols and over 170 for three. Of the trios, the composers of forty or so are unidentified. The remainder can be attributed to a relatively small group, mostly connected to the court: Tobias Hume, Ferrabosco II, Coprario, Robert Taylor, Simon Ives, Lawes 26 Those within the Merro books (D.245 and D.246) are almost identical. 27 The tenor of the three-part version (US-NH, Filmer MS 3) was probably added by

the copyist Francis Block. See Index for sources.

LAWES.indb 98

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

99

and Jenkins. Many of the duo and trios are unique and over half lack one part (or often two in the case of the trios). There are only seven surviving sources for the trios. Five are manuscripts, dating to c.â•‹1630–50. The two printed sources date from the first decade of the century. One was published by Hume; the other is FerraÂ�bosco’s Lessons.28 The sources and repertoire suggest that the lyra-viol trio originated with, and was developed primarily by, court musicians or by composers associated with the court, such as the courtier Tobias Hume.29 Nevertheless, it is likely that FerraÂ� bosco II introduced the lyra-viol trio to the English court, and that it was quickly taken up by composers such as Hume. Like so many other scoring innovations of the Jacobean period, lyra-viol ensembles appear to have been largely developed in the households of Princes Henry and Charles (later Charles I).30 In Henry’s household there was a trio of viol players – Ferrabosco, Thomas Ford and Valentine Sawyer; Ferrabosco and Ford both published collections of lyra-viol music. Nothing is known of Sawyer after the death of Prince Henry in 1612 and the subsequent disbandment of his household. Ford was a singer-lutenist who also played the lyraviol: his Musicke of Sundrie Kindes was published in 1607. Upon the Â�creation of Prince Charles as Prince of Wales in November 1616, Ferrabosco and Ford were joined by another exponent of the lyra-viol, Robert Taylor. Coprario, another composer of lyra-viol trios, officially joined the household in 1622 but is likely to have served before this in an unofficial capacity. Andrew Ashbee has noted that ‘from lyra viol duets and trios, it was a logical step to incorporate the instrument in a mixed ensemble’↜.31 This step appears to have been taken by Hume at the same time as his duos and trios. According to its title-page, his book of Ayres includes ‘Pauines, Galliards, and Almaines for the Viole De Gambo alone, and other Musicall Conceites for two Base Viols, expressing fiue parts, … and for two Leero Viols, and also for the Leero Viole with two Treble Viols, or two with one Treble’↜. Thus, Hume was composing for a mixed ensemble of one lyra-viol and two treble viols, or two lyra-viols and one treble. 28 T. Hume, The First Part of Ayres (1605): see Traficante, ‘Printed Sources’ for details.

Hume’s Poeticall Musicke (1607) mostly contains trios with two parts given in French tablature, the third in staff notation. The tablature parts were intended for lyra-viols (ffeff), the first string tuned to g'↜: the third part was for a consort bass viol. Although essentially lyra-viol trios, they have been omitted from the present study as tablature is a requisite part of Traficante’s definition cited above.

29 Hume was probably in some way associated with James VI’s Scottish court, before

his accession to the English throne in 1603.

30 For an account of music in the princes’ households, see HolmanFTF, 197–224. 31 A. Ashbee, ‘John Jenkins, 1592–1678, and the Lyra Viol’↜, MT 119 (1978), 840–3, at

842.

LAWES.indb 99

19/03/2010 10:57

100

the consort music of william lawes

He was more detailed in his recommendations of instruments to play his Poeticall Musick (1607). Although ‘Principally made for two Basse-Viols’ Hume’s title-page suggests various mixed consort combinations as an alternative, such as: two lutes and a bass viol, two orpharions and a bass viol, and two tenor viols and a bass viol, and finally ‘all these Instruments together with the Virginals, or rather with a winde Instrument [organ?] and the voice’↜. This last suggestion appears to hint at some form of mixed consort. Indeed, the recommendation to replace the viol with the lute may indicate that the lyra-viol consort partly developed by substituting the lyra-viol for the lute in similar mixed consorts. It was not until around the middle of the century that the instrumentation of the ‘lyra consort’ became more or less standardized: one or two violins or treble viols, lyra-viol, bass viol (or theorbo) and keyboard continuo (usually harpsichord).32 In 1676 Thomas Mace was still advising the addition of a trio of lyra-viols to complete the gentleman’s music collection, although he seems to be referring also to some form of the lyraviol consort: And now to make your Store more Amply-Compleat; add to all These 3 FullSciz’d Lyro-Viols; there being most Admirable Things made, by our Very Best Masters, for That Sort of Musick, both Consort-wise, and Peculiarly for 2 and 3 Lyroes. Let Them be Lusty, Smart-Speaking Viols; because, that in Consort, they often Retort against the Treble; Imitating, and often Standing instead of That Part, viz. a Second Treble.33 Whatever the connections to the mixed consort, lyra consorts are essentially two-part music, easily arranged from treble and bass parts by the addition of a second treble part (if desired) and a tenor-range lyra-viol part, filled out by the continuo:34 the lyra-viol had the advantageous ability to perform melodic and continuo parts simultaneously. Peter Holman has suggested that Jenkins probably invented the lyra consort.35 Jenkins certainly appears to have 32 For more on the lyra consort, see Ashbee, ‘Jenkins and the Lyra-viol’; Jenkins: Lyra-

viol Consorts, Introduction; AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹13. The lyra consort is the main subject of I. Stoltzfus, ‘The Lyra Viol in Consort with Other Instruments’ (PhD diss., Louisiana State University, 1982): this dissertation is primarily descriptive of the extant (complete) repertoire and does not adequately discuss the origins or development of the genre.

33 MaceMM, 246. There are several examples of this in Jenkins’s lyra consorts. 34 See HolmanFTF, 244–5. The case for a similar development from two-part origins

for the harp consort will be argued in Chapter 6, below.

35 John Jenkins: Late Consort Music, Parley of Instruments, dir. Holman, cda66604,

liner notes, 4.

LAWES.indb 100

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

101

been the leading contributor to the genre. Over sixty of his lyra consorts have survived complete and many more are known to have been lost or survive incomplete;36 they are difficult to date, however, and survive in late sources mostly connected with the North family.37 An annotation by Nicholas Le Strange on the flyleaf of a bass book of some of Jenkins’s three-part airs significantly suggests that the lyra-viol part was a later addition by Jenkins:38 The Lyra pt … is forced, and was only made for filling the Musicke of a private Meeting for they were originally composed for 1 Ba: 2 TR: and are compleate without the Lyra pt.39 Whether or not he invented the genre, Jenkins certainly pioneered the ensemble as it became known by the middle of the century. The other large collection of lyra consorts to have survived is Christopher Simpson’s Little Consort.40 We know from various sale catalogues from the late seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, such as those of Henry Playford (1690) and Thomas Britton, as well as a seventeenth-century catalogue found in Gloucester Cathedral, that Lawes and others composed music for lyra consort.41 It is frustrating that many of the items listed in these catalogues have not survived: none of Lawes’s lyra consorts are known. The Playford and Britton catalogues also provide evidence that lyra-viol duos and trios were still known (and possibly performed) in the last decades of the seventeenth century.42 36 See Jenkins: Lyra-viol Consorts, Introduction; see also Index. Jenkins’s lyra consorts

are discussed in AshbeeHM2, 219–33.

37 Jenkins: Lyra-viol Consorts, Introduction. 38 See AshbeeHM2, 219–33. 39 US-Cn, MS VM.1.A.18.J.52c., quoted in AshbeeHM2, 226; see IMCCM1, 210–26 for

a description and inventory of the manuscript.

40 Christopher Simpson: The Little Consort, ed. I. Stoltzfus, PRBVCS 43, 3â•‹vols (Albany,

CA, c.â•‹2001–2).

41 PlayfordCC; ‘Britton Catalogue’↜, reproduced in HawkinsGH, ii. 792–3; R. Andrewes,

‘Hidden Treasure in Gloucester?’↜, VdGS Bulletin 28 (January, 1968), 13–14. For Playford catalogues see: W. C. Smith, ‘Playford: Some Hitherto Unnoticed Catalogues of Early Music’↜, MT 67 (1926), 636–9, 701–4; L. Coral, ‘A John Playford Advertisement’↜, RMARC 5 (1965), 1–12; and R. Thompson, ‘Manuscript Music in Purcell’s London’↜, EM 23 (1995), 605–18.

42 An appendix containing a list references to the lyra-viol in English sources 1593–

1749 can be found in Traficante, ‘Semantic Puzzle’↜, 335–51. To this list should be added nos.â•‹113–15 and 126 of the Britton catalogue; and ‘A set of Musick in four Books with black leather Covers in 4º. filletted with gold, Containing Six Consorts entituled within (The Violin part) (The Theorbo part) (The first Lyra part) (The Harpsichord and 2d Lyra part) the Musick is composed by Mr. William Lawes,

LAWES.indb 101

19/03/2010 10:57

102

the consort music of william lawes

Like the lyra consort, our understanding of the lyra-viol trio is hampered by the poor survival of sources: many more sources of duos have survived. It is difficult to account for the paucity of sources for trios, especially as the form appears to have remained reasonably popular into the early Restoration period (although trios do not appear to have been composed after the mid-1640s or so). Although three-part consort music in staff notation continued to be copied until the late seventeenth century, lyra-viol trios were not. The reasons for this are not hard to understand. By the early 1660s most of the leading contributors to the genre in the Caroline period were dead. Furthermore, even by Mace’s day the lyra-viol trio must have seemed arcane, whereas consort trio scorings were at least still current. Indeed, the very texts of the intabulated viol trio must have contributed heavily to the loss of manuscript sources in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries; many tablature manuscripts may simply have been thrown away during this period because owners did not know what they were or how to read the tablature. One, now lost, manuscript in particular perfectly illustrates this point. The bookseller Thomas Osborne (d.â•‹1767) listed a pair of folio lyra-viol manuscripts in several sale catalogues from 1749 to 1754:43 ‘↜A catalogue of Thirty Thousand Volumes, (With the Prices printed) of Several libraries Just purchas’d; Particularly the library of William Kynaston, Esq; … Mr. josiah martin, … W. Glanvil, Esq; the Revd. Mr. Jackson, And several others … to be sold, at t. osborne’s … On Tuesday the 9th of May, 1749, and … every Day till the first of August’↜.44 • ‘Letter L. English Folio’↜, no.â•‹1401: ‘Lawes’s and Jenkins’s Airs for two and three Lyra Viols of the new Tuning in MSS. 2 vol. bound in blue Turkey, gilt leaves, 1lâ•‹11sâ•‹6d’↜. ‘↜A catalogue of the libraries of richard graham, Esq; … Mr. thomas day, .… Rev. Mr. cawley, … And several others .… The whole containing above thirty Thousand volumes .… to be sold … At t. osborne’s … On monday, the 11th of december, and … every Day, till lady-day, 1750’↜.45 Mr. Jenkins and Mr. Simpson’ from ‘Musick Books belonging to the Cathedral of GloucR’: see Andrewes, ‘Gloucester’↜, 13. 43 All available through Eighteenth Century Collections Online, www.galenet.galen-

group.com. The reference from the December 1749 catalogue is also found in L. Coral, ‘Music in English Auction Sales, 1676–1750’ (PhD diss., University of London, 1974), 190; and Traficante, ‘Semantic Puzzle’↜, 351.

44 GB-Ob, Bookstack 2593 e.2(8). 45 GB-Ob, Bookstack 2593 e.2(9).

LAWES.indb 102

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

103

• ‘Musick, Print and Manuscript. folio’↜, no.â•‹2740: ‘Aires composed by Lawes and Jenkins for the 2. and 3. Lyra Violls of the New Tunings, as also for 3 Lyra Violls, by John Taylor, in MSS. 2 vol. bound in blue Turkey, gilt leaves, 1lâ•‹11sâ•‹6d’↜. ‘↜A catalogue of the libraries Of the Late Dr. cromwell mortimer, … edmund pargiter, Esq; And many Others .… to be sold … At t. osborne’s, … On the 26th Day of November 1753; and … every Day till November 1754. vol. i’46 • ‘Poetry and Translations. folio’↜, no.â•‹4527: ‘Laws’s Airs, composed for the 2d and 3d Lyra Viols, 2 vol. MSS. bound in blue Turkey, gilt Leaves, 1lâ•‹11sâ•‹6d’↜. ‘↜A catalogue Of the libraries of The late right honourable henry, Lord Viscount Colerane, The Honble Mr. Baron clarke, The Rev. samuel dunster, d.d. … And many others: Containing near two-Â� hundred thousand volumes … to be sold … at t. osborne’s and j. shipton’s … On the Eleventh of November 1754; … they will continue daily selling for Two Years, viz. to the First of November 1756’↜. • Vol. 2, ‘Poetry and Translations. folio’↜, no.â•‹19206: ‘Law’s Airs, composed for the 2d and 3d Lyra Viol, 2â•‹vol. Mss. 1lâ•‹1s’↜.47 Evidently the second and third books of an original set of three (although one of the books may have contained two parts on facing pages), they contained duos and trios ‘of the new Tuning’ (i.e. harp-way tunings) by Lawes, Jenkins and John Taylor (recte Robert?). One suspects that the sale catalogue description was found in the manuscript (cf. GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3, below), though it bears no resemblance to any known source. Osborne clearly found the manuscript difficult to sell, reflected in the diminishing description (which perhaps also tells us something of the comparative reputations of Lawes, Jenkins and Taylor by the mideighteenth century), and by the reduction in price by 1754. The item was nevertheless expensive in comparison to other music items in the catalogues: e.g. no.â•‹4522 of the 1753 catalogue, ‘Locke’s 46 Airs for a Treble and a Bass, MSS’↜, was on sale for a mere ‘5s’↜. One hopes that Osborne eventually made the sale and that the books may yet turn up; the 1754 catalogue boasts availability in ‘all the Chief Cities and Noted Towns in Europe’↜. The manuscript (complete set or not) highlights the simple fact that the arcane tablature notation made such items much less desirable to collectors. Indeed, the ambiguity of the manuscript’s contents may also be reflected in its classification as ‘Musick’ in only one of the catalogues. 46 GB-Lbl, General Reference, 128.i.7. 47 GB-Lbl, General Reference, 128.i.8–9.

LAWES.indb 103

19/03/2010 10:57

104

the consort music of william lawes

H

istorical accident notwithstanding, the paucity of lyra-viol ensemble ╇ sources may also be an indication that much of the repertoire was improvised from solo pieces (or also from duos in the case of the trios) used as the basis for extemporized contrepartie settings.48 An important feature of the ensemble lyra-viol repertoire is the essentially egalitarian relationship between the parts. The individual parts of lyra-viol duos and trios are usually relatively complete harmonically and rhythmically. Many are capable of being performed as solo pieces and may have originated as such: for example, in his Musicke of Sundrie Kindes Thomas Ford described his lyra-viol duos as ‘Pavens, Galiards, Almaines, Toies, Iigges, Thumpes and such like, for two Basse-Viols, the Liera-way, so made as the greatest number may serue to play alone’↜.49 Thus, a significant problem for studying the ensemble repertoire today is that many individual parts of lyra-viol duos and trios survive unidentified as solos. Ferrabosco’s Lessons appears to contain several examples of lyra-viol contreÂ� parties. This important collection contains fifty-three solo lyra-viol pieces, twelve duos and two trios. It is also an important source for supplying missing parts to several of the nine pieces that are arrangements of his consort pieces for four or five viols.50 The book is arranged by tuning, with most of the solo pieces arranged into pairs of alman, galliard or pavan followed by a corant. The duos are similarly organized. One part of each of the six corant duos also appears earlier in the volume as a solo piece, with only minor variants. Although it is impossible to say so with certainty, it is tempting to suggest that the solo versions were composed first to complete the solo pairs and then recast with the duos, the second part added as a contrepartie. This is suggested by the fact that most of the solo corants are thematically related to the dance with which they are paired. None of the six duo versions of the corants are related to the dance with which it is paired: some are even in a different key from the preceding dance. If the Ferrabosco pieces are contreparties, they would be early examples of the technique applied to the lyra-viol. Perhaps the best-known example of a contrepartie by an English composer is by Lawes. In his scorebook GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2 (p.â•‹86) there is a short threemovement suite for two lutes, consisting of an alman and two corants. These are Lawes’s only surviving pieces for lute. The first part of the alman has been identified as an alman for solo lute by the French lutenist René Mesangeau (d.  1638) 48 Contrepartie is generally used to describe a second lute part added to a pre-Â�existing

solo lute piece, most French baroque lute duets were composed in this manner; its use here is not limited to the lute repertoire.

49 The duos are edited in Thomas Ford: Lyra Viol Duets, ed. O. Timofeyev, RRMBE 90

(Madison, WI, 1998).

50 Christopher Field (FieldCW) has convincingly argued that the lyra-viol versions

postdate the consort versions; see also FerraboscoCM.

LAWES.indb 104

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

105

published by Pierre Ballard in Tablature de luth de different autheurs, sur les accords nouveaux (Paris, 1638).51 According to Matthew Spring, ‘The version of the Mesangeau allemande used by Lawes is reasonably accurate, when compared with the published version, though a few rhythmic variants are to be found and all ornamentation is absent’;52 this suggests that Lawes used the published version (or a source derived from the print), giving a terminus a quo of 1638. Nevertheless, he may not have taken the piece directly from the printed volume, perhaps obtaining it through an English (or French) lutenist at court. The original alman was well known in Britain and is found in several manuscript sources.53 Lawes’s contrepartie (i.e. Lute 2) complements the alman perfectly. The setting pre-dates any known lute contrepartie in French sources, the earliest of which dates from the period 1650–70.54 David Pinto has suggested that Lawes may have composed the contrepartie as ‘a tombeau’ to Mesangeau, who died sometime in January 1637/8.55 Mesangeau visited England in late 1631, although we have no way of knowing whether he had any contact with Lawes, directly or indirectly. It is curious that Lawes did not attribute the alman to Mesangeau. In each of the four known examples of musical quotation by Lawes, he credited the relevant composer (see Chapters 7 and 8). This may indicate that he did not know who composed the alman, although if he took it from the printed edition this is unlikely; nevertheless, the lack of an attribution seems to weigh against Pinto’s tombeau suggestion. The two corants that follow seem to be original compositions by Lawes, although they may also be contreparties. Lawes’s lute pieces were written for twelve-course lutes; a b↜b' ‘on the eleventh [course] is consistently required, and an eleven-course lute in England c.â•‹1640 would be unlikely’↜.56 All three pieces are in the same style and show that Lawes had skilfully mastered the new brisé style popularized in England by French lutenists in the 1630s. 51 The alman was identified by Anthony Bailes: LawesFS, 114. The original is in René

Mesangeau: Œuvres, ed. A. Souris (Paris, 1971), no.â•‹34. See also D. Buch, ‘On the Authorship of William Lawes’s Suite for Two Lutes’↜, JLSA 16 (1983), 12–14; SpringL, 351–5 (includes a complete transcription, facsimile and comparison of the alman from British sources; the first strain is also transcribed in LefkowitzWL, 138–9).

52 SpringL, 353. 53 GB-Ctc, MS 0.16.2 (c.â•‹1630), p. 109; GB-En, Sutherland papers, Dep. 314 no.â•‹23

(c.â•‹1643–4), folsâ•‹32r–32v; GB-En, MS 9449 (c.â•‹1635–43), folsâ•‹26v–27v; F-Pcnrs, ‘Bullen Reymes’ lute book’ (c.â•‹1632), fol.â•‹34r. See M. Spring, ‘The Lady Margaret Wemyss Manuscript’↜, LSJâ•‹27 (1987), 5–30.

54 SpringL, 353 n.â•‹171. 55 D. Pinto, ‘Lawes, William’↜, GMO; C. Chauvel, ‘Mesangeau, René’↜, GMO (accessed

10 February 2009).

56 SpringL, 353.

LAWES.indb 105

19/03/2010 10:57

106

the consort music of william lawes

Precedent for Lawes’s lute duet is perhaps found in the ‘Sampson’ (formerly ‘Tollemache’) lute book (GB-Lam, MS 602; c.â•‹1609) where there is what appears to be a second part for John Dowland’s ‘Lord Willoughby’ for solo lute found in the ‘Folger-Dowland MS’ (US-Ws, Ms. V.b.280; c.â•‹1590). Although the arrangement is unusual in that both parts double the bass all the way through, ‘there can be no doubt that the [Sampson] half is a later addition to an already existing solo, whether by Dowland himself or not, it is hard to say’↜.57 A similar example is Giles Farnaby’s short alman for two virginals in the Fitzwilliam Virginal Book, where the first virginal plays the tune as the second adds embellished variations.58 These examples show that such arrangement techniques were used by composers in England in various genres throughout the first half of the century; the issue of authorship of the Dowland arrangement is beside the point. Such techniques, composed or extemporized, could easily be applied to the lyra-viol, especially when setting dances for lyra-viol duos and trios. Composers and performers would probably have used such techniques to expand the repertoire as required. It is doubtful that contreparties were applied to more serious and highly imitative compositions such as fantasias, which were through-composed and not commonly found for solo lyra-viol. Extemporization based on dance pieces was a common feature of viol playing in the seventeenth century, especially among professionals. Dance strains were often repeated ad lib., and performers were expected to extemporize divisions when required. In addition to historical accident, extemporized contrepartie settings go some way to explaining why so few lyra-viol trio sources have survived despite the genre’s apparent popularity in the first half of the century. After Ferrabosco’s Lessons no lyra-viol trios were printed in England. No duos were printed after 1612, and after Robert Taylor’s Sacred Hymns (1615) no lyraviol music was printed until A Musicall Banquet. The dearth of printed lyra-viol sources between 1615 and 1651 should not be interpreted as a decline in the instrument’s popularity. It was symptomatic of the general dearth of printed music in England in the second quarter of the century largely stemming from the various problems associated with the music-printing patent passed down through Byrd and Tallis to Thomas Morley and William Barley.59 From the 1620s onwards little new music was published in England. Commercial music printing in London only began with John Playford in the 1650s. Playford was an astute businessman. He 57 D. Poulton, John Dowland (2/1982), 169; edited in The Collected Lute Music of John

Dowland, ed. D. Poulton and B. Lam (3/1981), 198–203.

58 The Fitzwilliam Virginal Book, ed. J. A. Fuller Maitland and W. Barclay Squire

(1899), corrected and rev. B. Winogron, 2â•‹vols (New York, 2/1979), i. 202.

59 For a succinct overview of music publishing in early seventeenth-century England,

see HolmanD, 1–12; also D. Krummel, English Music Printing, 1553–1700 (1975).

LAWES.indb 106

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

107

did not print lengthy or complex music; the more complex the music, the more difficult it was to print clearly in movable type. The solution would have been to print such music using engraved plates, which was prohibitively expensive. The various sale catalogues show that Playford did sell complex music, but in manuscript. Scribal publication – a common form of literary transmission – was relatively inexpensive, and manuscript copies were often easier to read than printed editions.60 From the second decade of the century the lyra-viol trio was disseminated through manuscripts, many of which have not survived. Although the lack of manuscript sources is harder to account for than the decline of printed lyra-viol trios, the lacuna does not appear to be representative of a decline in the genre. We know that ensembles of lyra-viols continued to be popular at the English court into the 1620s and 1630s: duos and trios survive by Ferrabosco, Coprario, Lawes and Taylor. Indeed, in 1623 Ferrabosco received £20 for ‘a new Lyra and vyoll de Gambo’↜, and a further £20 in February 1626/7 for ‘a greate Base Vyall, and a greate Lyra’↜.61 NeverÂ�theless, there are only five surviving manuscript sources for lyra-viol trios, all of which date roughly 1620–50: 1╇ GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3 2╇ GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7 3╇ GB-Och, Mus. MSS 531–2 4╇ GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7 5╇ US-CAh, MS Mus. 70 Of these, only two survive complete, MSS 725–7 and D.245–7.62 With the exception of the earliest manuscript, MSS 531–2, Lawes’s music features prominently in each. The relationship between the sources of Lawes’s trios makes it clear that many others have simply not survived. In fact, our picture of the genre is likely to be extremely sketchy, which is lamentable given the high quality of the trios that survive. Almost half of the fifty-eight trios attributed to Lawes are in ‘eights’ (fhfhf) tuning. Only six survive complete.63 They are found in three sources: II.B.3, Mus. 70 and MSS 725–7. Only MSS 725–7 is complete. II.B.3 and Mus. 70 are each one partbook of three. MSS 725–7 is one of the most important surviving lyra-viol 60 See H. Love, The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in Seven-

teenth-Century England (Oxford, 1993), esp. 3–34.

61 RECM, iv. 114; RECM, iii. 138. 62 For D.245–7, see J. Sawyer, ‘An Anthology of Lyra Viol Music in Oxford, Bodleian

Library, Manuscripts Music School d.245–7’ (PhD diss., University of Toronto, 1972); IMCCM1, 139–66.

63 See also LefkowitzWL. {573} and {568} were published in LawesSCM. The complete

trios have been published in William Lawes: Lessons for Three Lyra-viols, ed. R. Carter and J. Valencia (Kritzendorf, 2006).

LAWES.indb 107

19/03/2010 10:57

108

the consort music of william lawes

sources. These three oblong quarto partbooks (c.â•‹280 × 190â•‹mm) are the latest surviving complete source of lyra-viol trios. Originally bound in soft cardboard, they are now bound as a single volume. In addition to the six Lawes trios, there are also two complete trios by Robert Taylor and one part for ten trios by Simon Ives (Table 3.3).64 The watermark of the ruled pages bears the typical features of Norman paper from the 1630s as described by Robert Thompson.65 Such paper is commonly found in manuscripts up to the mid-1650s, although it seems ‘to have lacked the weight considered necessary for a music book of special quality’↜.66 All titles, tempo indications and numberings appear to have been written by the copyist, who also wrote the inscription on the cover of each partbook: ‘for 3 liero violls second pte’ (MS 726).67 Judging by the difference in the inks, the books were compiled in three stages corresponding to the composers represented. None of the pieces contains ornament signs, except for a few slurs and some random signs in some of the Ives pieces. Tempo indications (‘fast’ and ‘slowe’) were added to the second Lawes Fantazy {567} and to the last strain of his Humour {568}. The copyist of MSS 725–7 is the same person as Richard Charteris’s ‘Scribe A’ and Pamela Willetts’s ‘Hand B’↜, who copied GB-Lbl, MS R.M.24.k.3, parts of GB-Ob, Tenbury MS 302, GB-Lcm, MSS 1045–51 and GB-Och, Mus. MSS 732–5.68 The attribution seems safe enough, although in the case of MSS 725–7 it hinges upon the titles and ascriptions rather than on the tablature. There has, however, been some disagreement on the identity of the copyist. David Pinto has argued that MSS 725–7 is in Lawes’s hand ‘comparable with the early work in the Shirley books (and in other possible occurrences); one can safely date them before 1635’↜.69 He has also suggested that R.M.24.k.3, which dates to the mid-1620s and contains the organ part to Coprario’s fantasia-suites, is ‘entirely in the youthful hand of Lawes’↜.70 It should be said that there are many similarities between some of the 64 The manuscript (with reconstructions of the Ives pieces) is transcribed in

Â�CunningÂ�hamMPC, ii. 406–31. See also Cunningham, ‘Lyra-Viol Ecclesiastica’.

65 IMCCM1, 297. 66 ThompsonP, 144. 67 The Harvester microfilm of the manuscript does not reproduce the covers, a

Â�significant omission as they provide further examples of the copyist’s hand; cf. the note on the vellum cover of Mus. 70 (see Chapter 2 above, p. 76).

68 R. Charteris, ‘Autographs of John Coprario’↜, ML 56 (1975), 41–6; WillettsJB. Â�Neither

uses MSS 725–7 as exemplars of the hand. Common scholarly consensus has underscored this attribution: FieldFR, 206–7 (and n.â•‹54); FieldJCH, 12–13 (and n.â•‹31); WainwrightCC, 206–7 (and n.â•‹98).

69 PintoFyV, 27. See also PintoMVC, 22 n.â•‹15; Pinto, ‘Lawes’↜, GMO. 70 LawesFS, xvi.

LAWES.indb 108

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

109

Table 3.3╇ GB-Och, Mus. MS 727: Inventory Folios No. Title ‘Eights’ 0r 0v–1r 1r 1v 2r 2v–3r 3v 4r–5v

[Unused]a ‘ffantasie first’↜b ‘Serabrand’ ‘Pauin: first’ ‘Almaine’ ‘fantasie. Second’↜e [‘Humour’]↜渀屮f [Unused]

‘Fifts’ 6r 6v 7r–19v

‘Almaine. first’ ‘2. Almaine’ [Unused]

Attribution

Key

Tuning

VdGS

‘W: Lawes’ ‘W: Lawes’ ‘W: Lawes’↜c ‘W: Lawes’↜d ‘Wj:Lawes’ ‘Wj:Lawes’

G D d d d G

fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf

{567} {569} {563} {564} {573} {568}

‘Mr Ro: Tayler’↜g ‘Mr Ro: Taylor’↜h

a a

ffhfh ffhfh

{25} {26}

D D d d D D d D d d

fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf fhfhf

{141} {142} {143} {144} {145} {146} {147} {148} {149} {150}

[Reversed end: folios are INV. MS 727 only; unused in MSS 725–6] 22v 22v 22r 22r 21v 21v 21r 21r 20v 20r

2 4 7 8 10 12 16 32 36 37

‘Mris Mary Brownes Choyce’ ‘Coranto’ ‘Mris Colliers Choyce:’ ‘The Choyce’ ‘Mris Anne fforests Choyce’ [Alman] ‘The man in ye moone’↜i ‘Sir Will Owens Choyce’ [Alman] ‘All you for saken Louers’

‘Sy: Iue’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’ ‘S:I:’

Note: The modern (pencil) foliation begins at ‘0’↜. At the time of writing, the manuscript was not available for consultation due to renovations to the library. a Opening of ‘fantasie first’ in MS 725. b ‘fantasia. first’ (MS 725); ‘fantasie. first’ (MS 726). c ‘WjLawes:’ (MS 726). d ‘Wj: Lawes’ (MSS 725–6). e ‘ffantasie: Second’ (MS 725). f Title supplied from Mus. 70; untitled in MSS 725–7. g ‘An Almaine by Mr Robert Tayler’ (MS 725); ‘Mr Robert Taylor’ (MS 726). h ‘Ro: Tay:’ (MS 725); ‘Ro: Taylor’ (MS 726). i A tune associated with Gray’s Inn Masque (1613), the music for which is presumed to have been composed by Coprario.

LAWES.indb 109

19/03/2010 10:57

110

the consort music of william lawes

letterforms used by Lawes and ‘Hand B’↜, though the formation of the letters in several instances also betrays dissimilarities. For example, the distinctive straight join between the second and third legs of the capital ‘M’ in the MSS 725–7 copyist is also not found in Lawes’s autographs. The capital ‘I’ in the Simon Ives pieces at the reverse end of MS 727 are also similar, although Lawes’s tend to lack the sharp curve at the top of the stem (formed from the top loop) (see Fig.â•‹3.1). There are also similarities among the various signatures attributed to Lawes in MSS 725–7 (and MS 302) and the autograph portions of the Shirley partbooks (and even to Lawes’s later signature in B.2 and B.3). Although many of the signatures in MSS 725–7 are similar to Lawes’s, they seem more likely to be imitative than authentic (Fig.â•‹3.2). There are several significant differences between the Shirley partbooks and MSS 725–7, such as the formation of quaver stems. Several other features suggest that MSS 725–7 is not in Lawes’s hand. First, there are distinctive signs on fol.â•‹21v (INV.) of MS 727 apparently clarifying the rhythmic durations: see the opening bars of Fig.â•‹3.1. This sign is found throughout other sources by this copyist, such as R.M.24.k.3 (e.g. fol.â•‹12v), but is not found in any of Lawes’s autographs. Second, the upwards turn of the fermatas is not characteristic of Lawes’s hand, but it is a consistently observable feature of this copyist’s hand. Third, unlike the MSS 725–7 copyist, Lawes rarely uses superscript: this is most evident in the titles of the Ives pieces (MS 727). Fourth, and most important, the tablature in MSS 725–7 is quite different from Lawes’s known examples: Mus. 70, the lute suite in B.2, and the solo

Fig.╋3.1╇ GB-Och, Mus. MS 727, fol.╋21v (INV.), detail

LAWES.indb 110

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

111

lyra-viol pieces in MS 31432. In these examples Lawes’s tablature is broadly consistent, although they appear to have been written over a period of almost a decade (see Chapter 2). Nevertheless, many traits are consistently observable, such as the looped tails on the letters ‘b’↜, ‘d’↜, ‘g’ and ‘h’↜. Such looped tails are only formed in the letter ‘b’ of MSS 725–7; here too, the ‘g’ is formed as a modern ‘y’ topped by a horizontal line. It seems unlikely that this was another aspect of Lawes’s ‘consistent inconsistency’ described in Chapter 2. MSS 725–7 and Mus. 70 appear to have been copied for a similar purpose: playing parts or fair copies for dissemination. It is unlikely that Lawes’s tablature hand would have changed so dramatically for the same type of copying, even if several years separated the two manuscripts (which is also unlikely), especially given that Lawes’s hand does not seem to have changed significantly overall from the early 1630s. What we can say is that both Lawes and

Fig.╋3.2╇ GB-Och, Mus. MS 725, fol.╋4v, detail: Humour {568}

LAWES.indb 111

19/03/2010 10:57

112

the consort music of william lawes

Willetts ‘Hand B’ share many scribal characteristics, but with several telling points of variance. Willetts established (largely through MS 302) that ‘Hand B’ was associated with John Barnard, a minor canon of St Paul’s Cathedral. Thus, she reasonably assumed that the copyist was associated with the musical establishment of St Paul’s, plausibly suggesting John Tomkins (1586–1638) of the family of court musicians as a candidate.71 Both Tomkins and Ives had strong connections to St Paul’s. John’s many familial court connections strengthened the suggestion. For example, he could have gained access to the Lawes trios through Henry Lawes, with whom he served in the Chapel Royal from 1626. Henry also served with Robert Taylor, and Giles and Robert Tomkins in the LVV from January 1630/1. Also William Lawes wrote ‘An Elegie on the death of his very worthy Friend and Fellow-servant, M. John Tomkins, Organist of his Majesties Chappell Royall’↜, who died in September 1638; the elegy was published in Choice Psalmes (1648).72 Whether the copyist can be identified, it seems likely that MSS 725–7 was compiled before Lawes’s royal appointment in 1635. This is suggested by the ascriptions in the manuscript. Of the three composers, only Robert Taylor is given the honorific title of ‘Mr’↜. This could be a reflection of his status as an established court musician, compared to Ives the city musician and up-and-coming William Lawes. It seems that the Lawes trios were selected from a larger, unknown source, perhaps similar to Mus. 70; five of them have one part concordant in the first autograph sequence of Mus. 70: ‘fantasie. Second’ is unique to MSS 725–7. The rather random assemblage of the pieces in MSS 725–7 suggests selection from a larger source; although the six Lawes pieces are arranged by tuning, they are not all grouped by key. Moreover, the pieces are not arranged as a suite, although the some of the titles (‘ffantasie first’↜, ‘Pauin: first’ and ‘fantasie. Second’) suggest that they once were: similar titles are found in R.M.24.k.3, where the first movement of Coprario’s fantasia-suites is titled ‘ffantasia first’ etc. Even the sequence of three pieces in d does not follow any coherent suite pattern, running randomly from pavan to alman to fantasia. This random pattern adds further weight against the supposition that MSS 725–7 is in Lawes’s hand. Lawes was perhaps the driving force behind the development of the Baroque suite in England. Although the autograph portions of Mus. 70 are not all arranged into coherent suites, the pieces are arranged first by tuning and then by key. The two Taylor pieces are titled similarly to the Lawes pieces: ‘Almaine. first’ and ‘2. Almaine’↜, and presumably also selected from a larger source. Although it is a consistent feature of ‘Hand B’↜, Lawes preferred ‘alman’ or ‘almane’↜. In the autographs, Lawes used ‘Almaine’ only once: a 71 See WillettsJB. 72 Edition: LawesCVM2, 53–6.

LAWES.indb 112

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

113

three-part piece by Thomas Holmes in the Shirley partbooks (GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61, fol.â•‹13v). Lawes used ‘Almaine’ in MSS 40657 and 40660 and ‘Almane’ in MS 40658. Nor is ‘ffantasie’ (as a variant of fantasia etc.) found in Lawes’s autographs; the secretary ‘ff ’ indicating a capital is also not found. Robert Taylor, a composer of sacred and secular music, was a London Wait from 1620 and a member of the LVV from 1625 until his death in 1637. His surviving output is likely to be a meagre representation of what he composed.73 Apart from his Sacred Hymns, mostly pieces for solo bass and lyra-viol survive. The two MSS 725–7 trios show Taylor to be a composer of quality.74 A consort version of the first alman also exists, in GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31423, a late seventeenth-century guardbook.75 The consort version is in g and only the treble and bass parts have survived, a third part is recoverable from the lyra-viol version. It seems likely that the piece originated as a consort piece and was later arranged for lyra-viols; it is unusual to find lyra-viol arrangements for the same number of instruments as the original, which suggests that the piece was originally for a larger consort. Much of Taylor’s writing is idiomatic and requires some technical facility in performance. Both pieces stylistically date from the first quarter of the century, probably around the time of Sacred Hymns. The imitative entries provide a subtle structural background for both almans. The interplay between the three parts shows that Taylor conceived of lyra-viol trios in much the same manner as Coprario, Ferrabosco and Lawes, i.e. almost as three solo instruments with frequent crossing of the parts: unison writing (between the parts) is rarely used, except at cadential points. Taylor introduces variety between the strains and much of the music is carried through short imitative motifs; they are quite diatonic and most of the modulations are smooth. The second piece, Alman {26}, is more effective than the first (Example 3.2). The phrases are well balanced, the harmonies clear (there is even an effective madrigalian shift from an E major to a C major chord), and the sequential motif in the tripla strain works well, although the piece gets a little stuck at the opening of the second strain. The closing triple-time strain is derived from the idiom of masque almans and is more commonly found in dances from the first quarter of the century. To what extent Taylor influenced Lawes is difficult to gauge. He (and Coprario and Ferrabosco) uses multiple stops much more frequently than Lawes does. Stylistically the two Taylor pieces are closer to the trios of Coprario than of Lawes. The suggestion that the pieces in MSS 725–7 were selected from a larger source 73 See Index. 74 Robert Taylor: Two Almaines for Three Lyra-Viols, ed. R. Carter and J. Valencia

(Kritzendorf, forthcoming).

75 See IMCCM2, 77–81; the Taylor piece is in the fifth section (of six).

LAWES.indb 113

19/03/2010 10:57

114

the consort music of william lawes Example 3.2╇ Robert Taylor, Alman {26}, opening

                                                                  5

    

 

              

                          9

 

  

   

  



    

    

            



    

                                  



 

           



 

      

              

is most clearly demonstrated by the Ives pieces. At the end of MS 727 there is a series of ten pieces by Ives in eights tuning. The title of the first piece runs as follows: ‘Mris Mary Brownes Choyce by Sy: Iue ∙ for 3 lyros; the other parts ar in the 2 violl bookes’ (Fig.â•‹3.3). The other partbooks are lost; they are unlikely to refer to MSS 725–6, as the sentence implies that that the parts were already copied. It is clear from the numbering that the copyist took a selection from a collection containing at least thirty-seven pieces. The answer seems to be that the ten pieces in MS 727 were written as contreparties (i.e. an additional third part) to an existing set of lyra-viol duos copied into a now lost set of two partbooks.76 Whether this collection also contained the pieces by Lawes and Taylor is impossible to tell; the Ives pieces are in a rather different style than those by Lawes and Taylor, and the system of numbering is different. The titles of the Ives pieces suggest that at least some of these pieces were connected to masques or other such entertainments. Six of the trios can be fully reconstructed from other sources, and one other part has been identified for the remaining pieces, facilitating an editorial reconstruction of the third part.77 The concordant parts are found in two main sources: (the Merro 76 See Cunningham, ‘Lyra Viol Ecclesiastica’↜. 77 The pieces are reconstructed in CunninghamMPC, ii. 422–31; the concordances

were identified by Peter Holman, who brought them to my attention.

LAWES.indb 114

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

115

Fig.╋3.3╇ GB-Och, Mus. MS 727, fol.╋22v (INV.), detail

partbooks) D.245–7 and IRL-Dm, MS Z3.4.13. Indeed, a second part for all ten MS 727 pieces is found in Z3.4.13.78 Lawes’s trios are probably the latest complete examples of the genre. Given the poor survival of trios it is fortunate that Lawes’s complete ones cover a variety of forms. There are two fantasias, a pavan, a saraband, an alman and a humour; they are comparable in length to Lawes’s five- and six-part viol consorts. Both fantasias are in a similar style. ‘fantasie. Second’ {573} is unique to MSS 725–7. In its variety and incorporation of dance rhythms, it is reminiscent of many of Lawes’s largescale fantasias for five or six viols and organ. The inclusion of a triple-time section in a fantasia was rare for Lawes and perhaps shows the influence of Thomas Lupo’s fantasia-airs or Coprario’s fantasia-suites (Example 3.3). A triple-time section is found in only one other Lawes fantasia: Fantazia {135} in D for violin, bass viol and organ (see Chapter 6). Although both lyra-viol fantasias are relatively early works (probably dating to the early 1630s) they show a remarkable compositional maturity and are at times highly idiomatic. The other fantasia, {567}, is stylistically similar to the first but lacks many of the dance elements. Perhaps one of the most interesting features of this piece is the tempo indications given in the last strain, but which do not 78 This is discussed in full in Cunningham, ‘Lyra Viol Ecclesiastica’↜.

LAWES.indb 115

19/03/2010 10:57

116

the consort music of william lawes Example 3.3╇ Lawes, ‘fantasie. Second’ {573}, bars 32–54 [LawesSCM: bars 53–87]

           4    4                         4

  

32

               35

          38

          42

         





  



  

   

   

  

           

 

 

    



      3  

    3            3        

       

                                                                                                                                               

                                               46

      

 

        







 

  

          





  

                                                          51

LAWES.indb 116

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

117

appear in the concordant part in Mus. 70. This may suggest that they do not come from Lawes, although they do work well; similar tempo directions are found in the Humour (see below). The alman is a wonderfully worked piece; the highly imitative sections and the asymmetrical design demonstrate its independence from functional dance music. Again, the interaction of the parts, treated almost as three solo instruments, reveals a composer at home in this idiom (Example 3.4). The imitative opening and the tutti quaver passage are reminiscent of Â�Taylor’s Alman {26}. Lawes’s ‘tutti’ passage is short and effectively worked into the composition, gradually building throughout the second strain, whereas Taylor’s Â�passage is longer and used purely for effect. The saraband is typical of many of Lawes’s two-strain sarabands: its clearly articulated rhythms and symmetrical structure are those of functional dances. The pavan is typical of many of Lawes’s consort pavans. The strains are symmetrical and replete with imitative entries. Again, the writing is idiomatic but the pavan is not as musically convincing as the fantasias. An important source of Lawes’s lyra-viol music is Mus. 70: an incomplete, Â�partial autograph source for twenty-six lyra-viol trios. I have argued in Chapter 2 that the autograph portion was copied in two phases in the early 1630s. The two autograph copying stages are significant for the manuscript’s concordances. All of the MSS 725–7 concordances are found in the first autograph portion, whereas Example 3.4╇ Lawes, Alman {564}, strain 1

                                                    5                                                                       10                                               

LAWES.indb 117

        



            



 



    





19/03/2010 10:57

118

the consort music of william lawes

the II.B.3 concordances are in the second. The relationship between Mus. 70 and the other two surviving sources for Lawes’s lyra-viol trios is complex. Four of the five individual parts common to MSS 725–7 and Mus. 70 concord closely and correspond to the same partbook: Pavan {563}, Alman {564}, Fantazy {567} and Saraband {569} all concord with MS 726 (LV2). Humour {568} is (mostly) concordant with the part in MS 727 (LV3). In the first four pieces, there are occasional discrepancies between the sources, such as notes omitted from or added to chords and occasional rhythmic differences, but overall the differences are slight and do not present major problems to the modern editor. The case of Humour {568} is different. Again, there are the usual minor variants between the two sources; however from the end of tripla section Mus. 70 gives a different ending to that in MS 727 (Examples 3.5a–d). The first three and a half bars of MS 727 are given in twice the Example 3.5╇ Lawes, Humour {568}: (a) ending from GB-Och, Mus. MS 727; (b) ending from US-CAh, MS Mus. 70; (c) ending from GB-Och, Mus. MS 726; (d) ending from GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7

(a)

    

(A)

        

        (b)

       

  

  

 













 







  



        

   

(D)







   

(A)

   





   

 

     

(B)



 (C)

      

                                                                 

LAWES.indb 118

    

   



 

     (C)

     

(c)

(B)





   

(D)





  





19/03/2010 10:57

(d)

the music for lyra-viol

19 Slowe      



 

              [Slowe]             Slowe

             23



   

  

   

   







                       27

 

Slowe

 

 





Slowe

 

   

   





    



        

 

 





  





    

    

[Slowe]

    



  

 

   

   



 

 



       

 

 Fast  

119



Fast       Fast



 

 

  





          

    

  

note values in Mus. 70 (i.e. quavers are now crotchets etc.): (A). The next two and a half bars of MS 727 are then given in half the note values in Mus. 70: (B). The next bar is similar in both sources, with rhythmic variants: (C). Mus. 70 then gives a different ending, though with only some melodic resemblances to the MS 727 version. This is actually a version of the MS 726 part (i.e. LV2), with similar rhythmic alterations: (D). The first bar of the (D) section in MS 726 is given in half the note values in Mus. 70, with the last two bars given as the same. These revisions roughly coincide with the tempo directions given in MSS 725–7.79 The direction to ‘slowe’ coincides with the first half-time section (A). The direction ‘fast’ coincides with the double-time section (B); the (C) section does not, however, fit with the tempo directions. The final half-time section (D) also roughly coincides with the ‘slowe’ direction. Despite the close relation between the revisions and the tempo directions, the revisions are not simply written-out versions of the directions, although the revisions may have come about from performance, notated in words in MSS 725–7. 79 ‘slowe’ directions not given in MS 727.

LAWES.indb 119

19/03/2010 10:57

120

the consort music of william lawes

The evidence suggests that one of these sources contains a revised version of the other. Whereas it is difficult to say with certainty which source contains the revision, it seems likely that MSS 725–7 was copied from a later and revised version of the first portion of Mus. 70. This is based on several pieces of evidence. For Â�example, the first autograph portion of Mus. 70, which contains the Humour, is written in an early Lawes hand and is likely to pre-date the copying of MSS 725–7, perhaps by several years. Moreover, on purely musical grounds, the shorter version seems likely to be the revision. In Mus. 70 the (implied) harmony gets a little stuck on the dominant in the last five or six bars before the final cadence. The MSS 725–7 version shortens the piece by six minim beats (or three bars), and while much the same harmony is retained, the version in MSS 725–7 is slightly more direct and the emphasis on the (dominant) A chord is used to greater harmonic effect. The revision of the Humour was essentially rhythmic (although it had significant harmonic implications), and involved a partial amalgamation of two of the original parts. Thus, the last strain of the original version of the Humour in Mus. 70 and its companion books must have been substantially revised. One can imagine that such a revision had somewhat radical melodic implications for (some of) the piece, suggested by the partial amalgamation of two of the parts. The simple swapping of parts within a lyra-viol trio would be a somewhat thankless task having no audible effect given that each part operated as an equal. It would have had implications for the players, but is unlikely to have been done to make one or more parts easier to perform, as the amalgams make little difference to level of difficulty. The amalgamation of parts implies a radical melodic overhaul of the part that has been supplemented by the amalgam; indeed, a similar revision technique, amalgamating lines, can be observed when the concordances between Mus. 70 and II.B.3 are examined. II.B.3 is one of the most tantalizing lyra-viol manuscripts. It was evidently once part of a set of three, judging by the inscription tertivs stamped on the cover; it is unfortunately the only one of the three books to survive. The tablature was written by three copyists, and the bulk of the manuscript appears to have been compiled in a relatively short space of time. The ascriptions are in at least two hands and appear to have been written by the tablature copyists. II.B.3 was once owned by John Cawse (1779–1862) who wrote the notes on the inside cover and on the flyleaves (Fig.â•‹3.4) and some notes throughout the manuscript. Cawse was a painter, picture restorer, book illustrator and viol player; he clearly understood what the manuscript was, although it is doubtful that he realized it was one book of three. It is not clear when the two companion books became separated from II.B.3, but it is likely to have happened before Cawse acquired it: none of his annotations indicates that it was one of a set. Cawse was evidently given II.B.3 by a John Webb. This may have been the poet, antiquary and clergyman (1776–1869), who was Rector

LAWES.indb 120

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

121

Fig.╋3.4╇ GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3, inside cover and flyleaf

of Tretire with Michaelchurch in Herefordshire.80 It is not known when or how Arnold Dolmetsch acquired the manuscript, although it is likely that he did so in Oxford in the 1890s.81 There are 101 pieces in II.B.3: 13 anonymous, 37 by Lawes, 36 by Jenkins and 15 by Ives.82 Unlike the rest of the pieces in the volume, the anonymous pieces are neither titled nor attributed. The manuscript is arranged by tuning in the following order: fhfhf (eights), edfhf (harp-way flat) and one piece in edfhh, defhf (harp-way sharp), dehfh (high harp-way sharp), and then edfhf again. This results in groups of pieces largely in the same key or in parallel major/minor pairs. Only in the initial anonymous pieces are the pieces not coherently arranged into suites via keys. Within the tuning sequences, the pieces are arranged by composer. Of the 101 pieces in II.B.3 only the six Lawes pieces also found in Mus. 70 have any known concordances. When these pieces from both manuscripts are compared they provide further evidence of revisions made to Lawes’s trios. As only one of the partbooks survives in each case, it is almost impossible to say which ‘version’ came first. The evidence (albeit meagre) suggests that II.B.3 is the later of the two sources and therefore should be seen as containing the revisions. Although II.B.3 is non-autograph, the extent of these revisions implies that they were made by the composer and are not simply the result of corruptions. At the time of writing, two of these six pieces common to Mus. 70 and II.B.3 (Pavan {441} and Saraband {444}) are listed in the Index as being copies of the same part, and the other four (Pavan {521}, Thump {527}, Corant {443} and Aire 80 P. Holman, Life after Death: The Viola da Gamba in Britain from Purcell to Â�Dolmetsch

(forthcoming), ch. 8; W. W. Webb, rev. B. Frith, ‘John Webb (1776–1869)’↜, ODNB (accessed 2 March 2009).

81 I am grateful to Jeanne Dolmetsch for her advice on this matter. 82 For an inventory and detailed description, see CunninghamMPC, i. 157–72.

LAWES.indb 121

19/03/2010 10:57

122

the consort music of william lawes

{448}) are listed as forming a different part.83 Neither description is correct. The six II.B.3 concordances are an amalgamation of the Mus. 70 part and another part, resulting in the II.B.3 part. The confusion appears to have arisen from the similarities and differences of the incipits. It is highly unlikely that the concordances in Mus. 70 and II.B.3 are complementary parts, or rather copies thereof, as when both parts are put together there are frequent passages of unison writing (i.e. duplication) between them. From a consideration of Lawes’s complete trios (and of lyra-viol trios generally) it is clear that he did not conceive of lyra-viol trios in this fashion. In the complete trios each part has, at all times, a different line, varying from the other parts melodically or rhythmically. Moreover, between the two sources, four of the pieces contain different strain lengths. Revisions are the most likely explanation. A brief examination of Aire {448} will provide a representative example.84 The first strain is almost identical in both sources (Example. 3.6). One of the parts, however, appears to have been slightly amended to allow for a revision of the order of the imitative entries. The revision, although slight, must have been significant for at least one of the other parts. The harmonic structure of the strain was evidently retained. Most of the second strain is similar in both sources, although there are some melodic differences. In II.B.3 the repeated quavers at the start of bar 27 are used to emphasize the entry of the arpeggiated point. This kind of descending, imitative figure beginning with two repeated quavers is found several times in Lawes’s consort music.85 It seems likely that the II.B.3 copyist had access to a later (now lost) source of Lawes’s lyra-viol trios post-dating Mus. 70. Regardless of which source is later a substantial revision is evident from the fact that it would have made little sense to simply redistribute the parts, as the overall aural effect would be the same. The effect of such revisions on the pieces would have been quite considerable, amounting almost to recomposition.

❧⚧ Conclusions

F

rom the slender evidence that survives of Lawes’s lyra-viol trios three main conclusions can be drawn. First, they were in the repertoire for a considerable time, probably from the mid- to late 1620s or early 1630s until Lawes’s death in 1645 and slightly beyond. Almost half of Lawes’s trios are in eights tuning, which was largely superseded by the harp-way tunings during the 1630s. This perhaps indicates that many were composed relatively early in his career, probably before 1635, 83 II.B.3: {441}, pp.â•‹330–1; {444}, p. 334; {521}, p. 374; {527}, p. 380; {443}, p. 333; {448},

p. 340.

84 The six Lawes pieces are discussed in detail in CunninghamLVT. 85 For example, Aire {10} and Fantazy {36} from the Royall Consort.

LAWES.indb 122

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

123

Example 3.6╇ Lawes, Aire {448}: comparison of sources (US-CAh, MS Mus. 70, fol.╋18r and GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3, p.╋340)

      II.B.3   



Mus. 70

          7

        12

        16

       

 

   

 





 



       

           

      











     

 

 

       

                          

                                                                   

22

  



     

 

 

 

 

                     

                                          





  



29

  



  







   

   

 

          

                 

  

although it does not imply that they were not played at the court. Second, the lyraviol trio was a dynamic genre. Lawes apparently revised several of the pieces over a period of a decade or so. We saw earlier that many of the solo pieces acquired significant variants when they were disseminated. The distinction between ‘variant’ and ‘revision’ is of course blurred, in either case something akin to recomposition occurs. Last, although the fragmentary state of the surviving sources inhibits our

LAWES.indb 123

19/03/2010 10:57

124

the consort music of william lawes

understanding of Lawes revision process, it is clear that (at least some of) his revisions were quite substantial. Without the missing companion partbooks for Mus. 70 and II.B.3 we can only glimpse Lawes’s revision process in the lyra-viol trios. Even this glimpse, however, provides some context for our understanding of his compositional process; the autograph volumes have many effacements, emendations, insertions, abstractions and palimpsests (see Chapter 2). Perhaps the most apposite comparison for Lawes’s revision process in the lyra-viol trios is his revisions of the Royall Consort, the subject of the next chapter. Here also Lawes made substantial revisions while still retaining much of the original melodic material; in rescoring many of the pieces from the Royall Consort Lawes also changed several strain lengths by the odd bar or two.86 Whereas Lawes does not appear to have laboured repeatedly over the majority of his compositions it is clear that several of them warranted revision. It is interesting to note that, as with the Royall Consort, the revisions in the lyra-viol trios were largely done to dance pieces. One would be less surprised if Lawes went through a process of revising what we consider his more serious (i.e. contrapuntal) pieces, the fantasias and pavans. This raises questions of the way in which Lawes thought about his own music, and is perhaps symptomatic of the growing stature of the dance, and the dance suite, in early Stuart England. The two aspects of Lawes’s lyra-viol repertoire discussed in this chapter, solo and trio, demonstrate two complementary aspects to the repertoire. On the one hand, the solo pieces were largely composed for and played by amateurs. On the other, the more sophisticated ensemble pieces were beyond the grasp of all but the most dedicated amateur: judging by the contents of his manuscripts, we can include John Merro in this category. Although the publications of 1601 to 1615 were available to amateurs it is unlikely that many of them would have been intended for amateur performers. There were practical reasons for this. It is unlikely that the average amateur would have had sufficient technical facility to perform many of the trios, or indeed duos. Many are of a moderate to difficult standard. A lack of sufficient viols to perform the ensembles may also have contributed to the apparent lack of demand for duos and trios amongst amateurs. The difficulties involved in keeping the ensemble in tune would have been one of the most significant barriers. The case is, however, more complex than this simple amateur/professional division suggests. As we have seen, many solo pieces also functioned as one part of an ensemble. Thus, we find a third section of the repertoire of which we can now only form a fleeting glimpse: the improvised or arranged ensemble based on contreÂ�parties. Within this medium the repertoires of amateur and professional co-habited. The very nature of lyra-viol music meant that this was possible and 86 See LawesRC, Introduction.

LAWES.indb 124

19/03/2010 10:57

the music for lyra-viol

125

ensured the popularity of the repertoire throughout the seventeenth century. This flexibility is demonstrated in equal measure by the way in which simple dance tunes could be radically transformed by the addition of ornaments according to the will (or rather, skill) of the player. The surviving lyra-viol trio sources are a meagre representation of what was a highly considered and developed medium popular, especially at the English court, for several decades. After the first generation of composers, the trio continued to be explored by court composers such as Lawes and Taylor, as well as the composers associated with the court such as Simon Ives and John Jenkins. It is no surprise that Lawes composed lyra-viol trios, given that Coprario had done so. Lawes’s trios reveal a genre that had lost none of its initial vitality. One imagines that Lawes’s trios were performed by the LVV, perhaps along with those of Taylor, Coprario and Ferrabosco. The Ives trios suggest that the genre spread to circles closely related to the court during the 1630s; those by Jenkins suggest that (like the fantasia-suite) the genre spread to the provinces during the 1640s. Of course, given the poor survival rate, it is difficult to appreciate fully Lawes’s contribution to the genre, or even the genre itself. Lawes’s two fantasias and the pavan (one of the few explorations by Lawes in this form) are especially fine pieces. They are undoubtedly earlier works than many of his five- and six-part viol consorts, but demonstrate a complete engagement with the idiomatic possibilities of the lyra-viol. It is difficult to disagree with Murray Lefkowitz’s observation that the MSS 725–7 trios (and Fantazia {573} in particular) ‘are among the very best of Lawes’ production’↜.87 Lawes’s lyra-viol trios do not outwardly differ significantly to those of Coprario, Ferrabosco and Taylor; one can certainly see a continuous line of development in the trio throughout the early seventeenth century that is coloured only by the individual styles of the composers. Lawes’s MSS 725–7 trios are, however, the latest complete examples and form a small yet significant part of his output. It is for these reasons that these trios represent, if by default, the apex of the genre. It is only regrettable that more examples have not survived of this the most egalitarian of viol ensembles.

87 LefkowitzWL, 134.

LAWES.indb 125

19/03/2010 10:57

chapter 4

The Royall Consort

T

he Royall Consort is a large and diffuse collection, the parameters of which are difficult to define. Perhaps begun as early as the 1620s, the collection was apparently well received by contemporaries. Playford also published some dances from the collection in Court-Ayres (1655) and Courtly Masquing Ayres (1662), and parts of the collection are found in manuscript sources until the 1680s.1 Murray Lefkowitz was first to recognize that the Royall Consort survives in two versions, known today as the ‘new’ (Tr–Tr–B–B with continuo) and the ‘old’ (Tr–Tr–T–B with continuo).2 Since then David Pinto has edited both versions, and has discussed the collection in several articles and in his monograph.3 Apart from the high quality of the music, the Royall Consort represents an important stage in the development of the suite and in the development of a twotreble scoring for dance music in England. Although Peter Holman has addressed both of these issues previously, a brief recapitulation will provide necessary background.4 According to Holman, both developments received much of their impetus from Germany. Common to the early seventeenth-century collections of the English expatriates William Brade and Thomas Simpson, and of Germans such as Paul Puerl and Johann Hermann Schein, was organization of movements grouped by key and the progression therein from the serious to the lighter dances.5 Several English manuscripts from the 1630s record the gradual emergence of the consort suite: GB-Lbl, Add. MS 36993 (a bass viol partbook in French tablature);6 and GB-Och, Mus. MSS 367–70 and 379–81 (two sets of partbooks owned by John Browne).7 The four groups of dances in MSS 367–70 and 379–81 by Charles ╇ 1 For sources, see Index; LawesRC. ╇ 2 LefkowitzWL, 68–87. ╇ 3 See Bibliography. ╇ 4 The following discussion of the consort suite and of two-treble scoring is primarily

based on HolmanFTF, 251–61. See also PintoNL.

╇ 5 For example, W. Brade, Newe ausserlesene Paduanen (Hamburg, 1609); P. Puerl,

Newe Padoan/Intrada. Däntz unnd Galliarda (Nürnberg, 1611); J. H. Schein, Â� Banchetto musicale (Leipzig, 1617); T. Simpson, Opus newer Paduanen (Hamburg, 1617).

╇ 6 PintoNL, 278–9 for inventory. ╇ 7 PintoNL, 275–8 for inventories; also IMCCM2, 233–7 and 241–4.

LAWES.indb 126

19/03/2010 10:57

the royall consort

127

Coleman and William Drew ‘are probably the earliest surviving English consort suites by single composers, but they still look as if they were assembled rather than planned’↜.8 The Royall Consort represents the next stage in the development of the consort suite, with the emergence of the Alman–Corant–Saraband (A–C–S) sequence at its core. Nevertheless, no single form of the consort suite dominated. Fantasia-suites continued to be composed, and Lawes’s suites for five and six viols and organ follow a different format (see Chapter 5). It seems that the developments of Coleman et al. were roughly contemporaneous with those made by Lawes in the earliest forms of the Royall Consort. The A–C–S core no doubt developed through performance, governed by a sense of climax, i.e. the gradual progression from slow to fast movements. Such tastes for progressive elements in musical design are obvious in one of the most influential treatises of the Restoration, Christopher Simpson’s The Division-Violist (1659). In that work Simpson essentially advanced a theory of progressive climax when using divisions: always begin slowly and build to a climax (see also Chapters 7 and 8). A similar guiding principle is evident in the development of the suite. The Royall Consort is one of the first collections in England to use Tr–Tr–T–B (or ‘string quartet’) scoring for dance music.9 Holman suggested that the impetus for English composers to write dance music in Tr–Tr–B or Tr–Tr–T–B is best represented by Thomas Simpson’s last anthology Taffel-Consort (Hamburg, 1621). The main link between Taffel-Consort and the English court seems to be Maurice Webster, who came to England from Germany in 1622, serving in the LVV until his death in 1635–6.10 David Pinto has rightly argued that the contribution of Richard Mico and Richard Dering in the development of two-treble scoring should also be noted.11 The pieces by Dering and Mico that use the two-treble idiom are, however, mostly fantasias or stately pavans that appear to have been composed for viols and have little to do with the growing taste at court for lighter dance music; notwithstanding the cross-attribution of a pavan to Dering and Webster. It is likely that the Tr–Tr–T–B repertoire was expanded by reducing existing five-part dance music to three or four parts.12 The old version of the Royall Consort represents the next stage in the development of the scoring in England. The origins of the Tr–Tr–B–B scoring are less clear, but probably developed from the increased use ╇ 8 HolmanFTF, 259. ╇ 9 A detailed account of the development of Tr–Tr–T–B scoring is given by

Â�HolmanFTF, 251–81, esp. 252–61.

10 See also Maurice Webster: Complete Consort Music, ed. P. Holman and J. Cunning-

ham (Launton, 2010).

11 See PintoNL, esp. 270–1; Pinto argues against the significance of Webster. 12 See HolmanFTF, 257.

LAWES.indb 127

19/03/2010 10:57

128

the consort music of william lawes

of violins and a desire to balance them with bass (rather than tenor) viols. It seems that Thomas Lupo was the first English composer to use the novel Tr–Tr–B–B scoring in three of his four-part fantasias, composed during the first quarter of the century (see Chapter 5).13 The scoring does not appear to have been further developed until the Royall Consort, although John Jenkins, Christopher Simpson, and John Hingeston cultivated it towards the middle of the century.14 Jenkins in particular explored the scoring in his thirty-two airs for two trebles, two basses and organ, which date to the 1640s.15 There is another example of the scoring in GB-Lcm, MS 1146, a set of six partbooks in the hand of Edward Lowe (c.â•‹1610–82). The lengthy, multi-sectional anonymous piece in d is titled ‘Consort For 2 Treble Viollins 2 Basses and 2 Theorboes’ and clearly modelled on parts of the Royall Consort. Â�Evidently of Oxford provenance, the piece was probably copied in the 1670s. Although the old version sources do not indicate instrumentation, Lawes specified two violins, two bass viols and two theorboes in the new version pieces in GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3. Viols or violins would be possible for the old version, although it is reasonable to suggest that Lawes originally composed for violins. The general range of the tenor part in the old version falls within the viola range, although in two separate pieces the notes A and d" are required, suggesting a tenor viol.16 The bass of the old version could be played on either a bass violin or bass viol. Given that the bass does not really change between the two versions, it is reasonable to assume that the same instruments were used in both. The single occurrence of the low A in the tenor part does not necessarily preclude the use of a viola, but the evidence suggests that viols were used for the tenor and bass parts of the old version, with theorbo continuo. One suspects that this instrumentation was flexible, and that performances by a ‘string quartet’ or by a mixture of viols and violins could have occurred. The Royall Consort has been divided by modern scholars into ten suites (or 13 Thomas Lupo: The Four-Part Consort Music, ed. R. Charteris and J. Jennings

(Clifden, 1983), nos.â•‹4, 9 and 10.

14 Hingeston has one fantasia–alman pair for two trebles, two basses and organ (only

the organ part survives); Simpson has 20 aires for two trebles and two basses, the main sources for which are GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. E.431–6 and F.568–9. In D-Hs, MS ND VI 3193 there are 113 pieces for two trebles, two basses and continuo, including concordances for Jenkins and Simpson; the first bass is lacking (see Chapter 6).

15 Published in John Jenkins: Consort Music of Four Parts, ed. A. Ashbee, MBâ•‹26

(1969; r/1975); see also AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹8.

16 Nos. 26 and 60 respectively: see the discussion of instrumentation in LawesRC,

ix–x.

LAWES.indb 128

19/03/2010 10:57

the royall consort

129

setts), comprising either six or seven movements: three in D and in d, and one in F, C, B↜b and a (‘the varied key-sequence’↜, to borrow Pinto’s phrase).17 There are ten main sources of the collection, although they are divergent enough to assume a larger background of now lost antecedent copies.18 In the two main old version sources (GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. E.431–6 and F.568–9) the pieces in D and d appear in a rather random order, followed by the varied key-sequence pieces in consistent order, suggesting that the collection began as a loose grouping of aires in d/D.19 E.431–6 is a set of six partbooks containing suites of aires in three and four parts with an unfigured bass.20 Margaret Crum has suggested that they may be the ‘Sett [of] Bookes of 3.4.5. and 6 parts in Manuscript’ referred to in a payment document dated March 1656/7, as ‘given in hand to Mr. Jackson for pricking of aires for the [Oxford Music] scooles’↜.21 Crum identifies the copyist as the bass viol player Thomas Jackson, who became a singing-man at St John’s. Coleman is credited with the doctorate he took on 2 July 1651, so it is reasonable to date the partbooks to around the mid-1650s; a terminus ante quem of 1669 can be established from the lack of reference to Benjamin Rogers’s D.Mus. According to Holman, ‘Two Â�theorboes certainly seem to have been used in performances from MSS Mus. Sch. E. 431–6, for the source includes two duplicate copies of the bass; lutenists normally read from unfigured bass at the time, while English organists either used scores or written-out parts’↜.22 F.568–9 are the second treble and tenor partbooks from an original set of five; a note on F.568, fol.â•‹2r states that the set once contained ‘2 Trebles, Tenor, Base, and thorough bass’;23 it is possible that they originally contained duplicate copies of the bass. F.568–9 contains suites of four-part aires and fantasias with continuo, and presumably has a similar provenance to E.431–6.24 The manuscript begins with a sequence of ninety-two aires loosely arranged by key into suites, numbered 1–93, 17 LawesRC, vi. 18 See Index; LawesRC, Introduction. 19 See also LawesRC, Introduction; PintoFyV, 52–3. 20 IMCCM2, 187–97. 21 CrumEL, 27. William Ellis has also been suggested as the main copyist: J. B. Clark,

‘A Re-emerged Seventeenth-Century Organ Accompaniment Book’↜, ML 47 (1966), 149–52; AshbeeHM1, 148; HolmanFTF, 260.

22 HolmanFTF, 261. For the accompaniment of consort music of the period, see

HolmanOA.

23 ‘The lessons from the first page to the 89th are Mr William Law s [sic] for 2 Trebles,

Tenor, Base, and thorough bass’↜. On fol.â•‹2r of MS 569 the same list states the same except that ‘thorough bass’ is ‘Continued Base’↜.

24 For a full description of the manuscript and its collation, see CrumOMSC, 132–4;

also LawesRC, vii–viii.

LAWES.indb 129

19/03/2010 10:57

130

the consort music of william lawes Table 4.1╇ Lawes sequence from GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. F.568–9 Folios

Nos.

Key

‘Suite’ no.

3r–5r 5v–7r 7v–11v 11v–20v 21r–24r 24v–26v 27r–28v 29r–30v 31r–32r 32v–36r 36v–38r 38v–41v 42r–44v 45r–46v

1–5 6–9 10–18 19–38 39–45↜a 46–50 51–4 55–8 59–61 62–9 70–5 76–82 83–8 89–93

g G d D g G c C F d B↜b F a C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

a Space was left for nos.â•‹36 (fol.â•‹20r) and

38 (fol.â•‹20v) but no music was entered in either partbook.

but lacking nos.â•‹36 and 38 (Table 4.1): over eighty of the aires are associated with the old version of the Royall Consort. Of these ninety-two pieces, only nos.â•‹1–9 (suites 1–2) and 39–61 (suites 5–9)25 are not found among later incarnations of the Royall Consort. Nos. 1–9 are a significant group of Tr–Tr–T–B pieces in g/G, also found in E.431–6.26 The g pieces are Pavan {101}, Aire {103}, Corant {338}, Aire {70} and Corant {339}. The G pieces are Pavan {79}, Alman {320}, Aire {80} and Corant {322–3}.27 The style of these pieces is the same as those in the Royall Consort and one could plausibly date them to the mid-1620s. In these miscellaneous pieces, however, there is a definite four-part texture. The tenor plays an important part, unlike in the old version pieces proper where it is largely non-essential. One is inclined to agree with Pinto’s suggestion that these pieces ‘number some of the composer’s earliest and probably most cherished efforts’↜.28 The functional tenor part is a significant break with the style of the old version Royall Consort pieces and points to a demarcation between the two forms of Tr–Tr–T–B scoring in 25 Attributed to Thomas Brewer in Index: see LawesRC, vi. 26 All published in LawesRC. 27 All are untitled in F.568–9. 28 PintoNL, 265.

LAWES.indb 130

19/03/2010 10:57

the royall consort

131

Lawes’s mind. They are likely to have been included with the early version because of the Tr–Tr–T–B instrumentation, but appear to have been separated from the collection quite early; the functional tenor seems to be the reason. The valued status of these pieces is suggested by the fact that Lawes later returned to them for material. He reworked two of the pieces in g for two bass viols and organ: Pavan {101} and Aire {103} (see Chapter 8). These two pieces are also found in MSS 367–70, though not as a pair. Three of the four pieces in the Lawes sequence of MSS 367–70 (nos.â•‹43–6) are, however, found in the discarded Royall Consort suite in g, although here Corant {339} is in d. Despite this, it seems significant that Corant {339} was still grouped with two of the other parts of the suite. The fact that it is in d here suggests that the piece may have originated in that key, and may have been part of the originally large set of dances in D/d that was eventually trimmed down into the Royall Consort proper. The odd-one-out in the MSS 367–70 Lawes sequence, Aire {264}, is a strange bedfellow, which does not appear in any of the Royall Consort sources. This may suggest that it was originally associated with the Royall Consort but discarded at an early stage, even pre-dating that preserved by E.431–6. It may alternatively mean that MSS 367–70 were compiled piecemeal from selections compiled from various sources; Aire {264} may not even have composed by Lawes. Pavan {103} is also found in the Shirley partbooks (GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657– 61), which also suggests that the piece is early. The Shirley partbooks version reveals some differences from the other four-part versions, which are generally quite consistent.29 The main differences are found in the inner parts, especially the tenor. The outer parts are essentially the same in the Shirley partbooks and in the Royall Consort sources with only slight rhythmic differences in the treble, but with much rhythmic alteration to the bass line and several octave transpositions. The points of imitation in the inner parts are retained. Thus, this version may be the earliest form that was subsequently revised. Pavan {103} is one of a sequence of nine holograph four-part pieces added by Lawes in the Shirley partbooks at the end of the four-part sequence. This main part of the sequence (folsâ•‹16r–26v) was copied in Lawes’s early (A1) hand; the last piece (a fantasia by John Bull) was mostly copied by Hand B, but with the bass part copied by Lawes (see Chapter 2). The pieces in this sequence were probably copied around the same time: the same black ink is used throughout folsâ•‹16r–26v. The holograph sequence (folsâ•‹27r–30v) was entered in Lawes’s A2 hand: as we have seen in Chapter 2, this need not imply that they are ‘late’ pieces. The first piece of the sequence is Aire {110}, the bass of which was entered in MS 40659, fol.â•‹7r but crossed out. The rest of the holograph sequence was apparently copied 29 LawesRC gives both versions.

LAWES.indb 131

19/03/2010 10:58

132

the consort music of william lawes Table 4.2╇ GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61, Lawes four-part sequence Folio (MS 40657) VdGS 27r 27v 28r 28v 29r 29v 30r 30r 30v

{110} {306} {336} {109} {318} {319} {337} {103} {339}

Type

Scoring

Aire Tr–Tr–B–B Aire Tr–Tr–B–B Aire Tr–Tr–T–B Aire Tr–Tr–B–B Aire Tr–Tr–T–B Aire [Tr]a–Tr–T–B Aire Tr–Tr–T–B Aire Tr–Tr–T–B Corant Tr–Tr–T–B

Hand↜* A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

↜* This follows the designations in IMCCM1, 73. a Space left, but the cantus part was not entered.

in several stages, judging by the variety of ink used. Six of Lawes’s pieces are in Tr–Tr–T–B (Table 4.2): the remaining three are in Tr–Tr–B–B, including Aire {110}, which implies that Lawes was experimenting with the scoring probably by the early 1630s. The pieces in Lawes’s ‘rushed’ hand – Aires {337}, {103} and Corant {339} – are in Tr–Tr–T–B. The presence of pieces in Lawes’s A2 hand using the Tr–Tr–B–B scoring is not enough to suggest that these pieces were copied any later than 1633; as noted in Chapter 2, the early forms of his signature in this section strongly mitigates this. Thus, it would seem likely that these pieces are among Lawes’s first explorations of Tr–Tr–B–B scoring. There are also two apparent suites for two trebles and two basses, in C/c {108–13}, by Lawes in GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2 but they seem to date to c.â•‹1634 (see Chapter 5). Aire {70} is also found in the g suite for five viols and organ. There is little difference between the four- and five-part versions, notwithstanding the second tenor part in the latter. The five-part version is probably later, although this is the only one of the ‘rearranged’ pieces in which the original tenor was not even partially recomposed. Thus, one cannot entirely rule out the possibility that the four-part version was created by omitting the second tenor part from the fivepart version, although if this were the case Lawes would perhaps have recast the part in some form. Two of the pieces in G – Pavan {79} and Aire {80} – are also found in five-part versions: both in F.30 Consideration of the two versions suggest that the five- again postdates the four-part. The two trebles and bass parts are similar in both versions. The tenor is partially retained from the five- to the four-part versions. The tenor of the four-part version is sometimes transposed (to allow for the second tenor part), and juxtaposed with new material; it is 30 LawesCS; see also PintoFyV, 27–8, 88–91.

LAWES.indb 132

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

133

significant that Â�material only from the first tenor part of the five-part version is used. If the four-part version postdated the five-part, one would expect Lawes to have included (at least some) material from both tenor parts. The third strain of the pavan underwent significant revision. In the five-part version dotted-quaver figures are pervasively worked into the texture, seemingly inspired by the addition of the second tenor. Of course, the best evidence for suggesting that all of the fivepart versions postdate the four-part ones is that the former are all found in B.2, which probably postdates any of the sources from which E.431–6 and F.568–9 were copied. Several of Lawes’s three-part pieces also have links with the Royall Consort. Lawes’s three-part consort pieces are relatively few in number and do not appear to have been widely disseminated.31 They seem to rank among his earliest compositions, and several were mined later for material in other media. The threepart consorts fall into two categories: those composed in three parts, and those apparently arranged for three instruments by others. The most important source is the Shirley partbooks, which include ten of Lawes’s three-part pieces, two of which – {75} and {83} – he later recast for five viols and organ. Most of these ten autograph pieces are unique or survive in one other source. Only Aire {321} was widely disseminated, and it seems to be related in some way to the old version of the Royall Consort as it is found in the two main sources, E.431–6 and F.568–9. It is also found in GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 31423, 31429 and 17792–6, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7 and Tenbury MS 302.32 MS 31429 is another important source for Lawes’s three-part music. The three partbooks (two trebles and a bass) date to the late seventeenth century and also contain music by Grabu, Jenkins, Lully, and Paisible: Lully’s music is not found in English sources before the 1680s. The manuscript contains eleven three-part pieces by Lawes. Two are concordant with the Shirley partbooks, {320} and {321}. Seven others are arrangements of pieces from the old Royall Consort: {10}, {11}, {12}, {13}, {17}, {26} and {28}. Corant {17} was omitted from the old Royall Consort; in MS 31429 it is in c, rather than d. Although it was included in the new version there is good reason to suspect that it was originally part of an early version of the Royall Consort, but was discarded for some reason, perhaps even by oversight. The MS 31429 versions simply lack the tenor part. MS 31429 also contain a version of Aire {80} (see above), which is found in several sources connected with the old Royall Consort, such as F.568–9 and E.410–4. These settings are in G, and in four parts. (The aire was later reworked 31 Much of Lawes’s three-part consort music has recently been edited by M. Daven-

port (Colorado, 2002); not all sources were collated and the edition excludes the seven three-part (Tr–T–B) pieces from US-NH, Filmer MS 3.

32 Also found incomplete in GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.236 and E.451.

LAWES.indb 133

19/03/2010 10:58

134

the consort music of william lawes

by Lawes for five viols and organ, transposed to F.)33 The remaining Lawes piece in this manuscript is Corant {339}, which is found in four parts in the Shirley partbooks, and in the main old version Royall Consort sources. Thus, the contents of MS 31432 appear to have links to the earliest versions of the Royall Consort, though the manuscript seems to represent the move later in the seventeenth century towards the trio sonata scoring and is unlikely to represent an authoritative setting of Lawes’s consort music. Many of the Lawes pieces appear to have been arranged by the omission of at least one part.

F

ortunately B.3 contains most of the Royall Consort pieces in d and D in the new version, thus establishing a coherent internal formal structure for the suites (largely based on the A–C–S sequence).34 Few sources preserve the sequences in their entirety, or leave the internal orders unchanged, especially in the suites in D/d. Pinto has convincingly suggested that Some pre-existing d-D sequences were revised for the newly-fashionable 2Tr–2B scoring in the later 1630s; then joined by setts in a, C, F, B flat, which were fresh-conceived in the new scoring. … Out of symmetry, and of course an anticipated residual practical use, ‘Old’ versions of the fundamentally ‘New’ setts were then concocted.35

This is suggested by the varied key-sequence suites, which seem more naturally suited to the two-treble idiom (as do the two fantasias) than do many of the D/d pieces. Further, none of the varied key-sequence pieces shows revisions in the lengths of phrases found in several of the D/d pieces.36 Thus, as Pinto suggests, it seems that, rather than the new version superseding the old, both new and old versions were available (in part at least) at around the same time. Nevertheless, why Lawes rescored such a vast collection remains unclear. There seems little to contradict the suggestion that B.3 was compiled roughly in the order in which it survives, implying that the Royall Consort pieces date to c.â•‹1639 (see Chapter 2). It is difficult to determine exactly when the collection was disseminated, although one suspects that the process of circulating the new version began soon after completion, i.e. c.â•‹1639–40. The surviving texts strongly suggest that there are several now lost copies. The main sources date to the Commonwealth and beyond. The set copied by Stephen Bing c.â•‹1653 (GB-Och, Mus. MSS 754–9) appears to be the 33 PintoFyV, 27–8. 34 Only Saraband {27} is found in the old version and not in the new, its removal

seems to have been an oversight.

35 PintoNL, 268–9. 36 PintoNL, 268–9 and 281 n.â•‹8.

LAWES.indb 134

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

135

earliest copied.37 The other main sources date to at least the 1660s (GB-Lbl, Add. MS 10445; GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.241–4), and many date to around 1670–80 (GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 31431 and 31433; GB-Och, Mus. MSS 391–6 and 479–83). Although most of these sources are difficult to date precisely, they demonstrate the continued popularity of the Royall Consort well into the Restoration and confirm an extremely complex stemma of dissemination only partly recoverable.38 Lefkowitz appeared to have solved the rescoring issue with the citation of a note written by a close contemporary of Lawes, the Oxford music professor and Chapel Royal organist, Edward Lowe. Lowe became organist at Christ Church, Oxford sometime between 1631 and 1641. He remained at Oxford during the 1640s and 1650s, becoming Heather Professor of Music at Oxford in 1661, succeeding (the royal musician, and Lawes’s colleague) John Wilson. Lowe was a meticulous copyist, responsible for organizing and extending the Music School manuscripts. On one of those manuscripts, he appeared to explain the rescoring of the Royall Consort: The followinge Royall consort, was first composd for 2 Trebles a Meane & a Base. but because the Middle part [the tenor] could not bee performd with equall aduantage, to bee heard as the trebles were. Therfore the Author, inuolued the Inner part in two breakeinge Bases: which I causd to bee transcribd for mee in the Tenor & Counter-tenor Bookes, belonginge to thes. & soe bound. Wher the two breakinge Bases are to be found. & soe many figured as agree with thes in Order/. The comments are on fol.â•‹1v of GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.236: one of a now incomplete set of partbooks, MSS D.233–6 (originally a set of six, now lacking counterÂ� tenor and tenor books). According to a note on the first flyleaf of D.233, Lowe bought the books on 6 October 1636.39 (E.451, also copied by Lowe, is the companion through-bass book to D.233–6. According to a note on the inside front cover, Lowe acquired the manuscript from a Mr Davis on 28 May 1636. It contains an unfigured bass (identical to the bass part) for many of the Royall Consort pieces. Hereafter when D.233–6 is cited E.451 is also implied.) The partbooks were probably originally prepared for a collection of vocal music before being purchased by Lowe, who added consort music by William and Henry Lawes, Coleman, Jenkins, and Matthew Locke.40 D.233–6 contains twenty-four Royall Consort pieces from 37 LawesRC, vii; IMCCM1, 205–7. 38 For the sources of the collection, see LawesRC; PintoFyV; PintoNL. 39 The note is no longer visible, as the flyleaf has been pasted to the cover. 40 For descriptions of D.233–6 and E.451, see respectively CrumOMSC, 80–3, and

IMCCM2, 212–24.

LAWES.indb 135

19/03/2010 10:58

136

the consort music of william lawes

the D/d suites. These are from the old version, although apparently ‘Lowe did later make them more comprehensive by adding the revised parts’↜.41 The Royall Â�Consort pieces appear to have been copied by Lowe post Restoration.42 Lefkowitz cited Lowe’s note suggesting that Lawes rescored the collection due to the inaudibility of the tenor part. This explanation has received much scrutiny. For example, the late Gordon Dodd remarked that the inner voices in dance music do not need to be heard distinctly.43 Moreover, Pinto has noted that the tenor parts in the old version make little attempt at independence, engaging in much parallel writing with the outer lines. This must have been a deliberate technique as it is applied to the entire collection: Pinto concluded that a ‘change in function, character, or style of performance (such as an altered place of performance), or all of these must be behind the rescoring process’↜.44 A change in function seems to be the most likely answer. This need not, however, imply that Lowe’s note misrepresented Lawes. Despite the apparently problematic connotations of Lowe’s note, it may accurately reflect Lawes’s intentions. Lawes’s rescoring of the collection does not necessarily imply his dissatisfaction with Tr–Tr–T–B scoring generally or with the tenor line as it was conceived. Modern studies have assumed that when Lowe complained that the tenor was not ‘performd with equall aduantage to bee heard as the trebles were’ he was talking about the musical implications. It is also conceivable that Lowe was not simply referring to the tenor line per se, but to the tenor viol/viola player. It seems that in its original form the collection was designed to accompany dancing, whereas its new Tr–Tr–B–B form was intended either as Tafelmusik or to be listened to in some form of concert-like setting.45 Thus, the new Royall Consort fulfilled a different function to the Tr–Tr–T–B original, and it was now to be heard in a setting closer to (for want of a better term) a concert. It was accordingly of more ‘aduantage’ to the players to be allowed to exhibit their ability to perform divisions, typically the preserve of the bass viol. The performance of divisions is exactly what the rescored ‘two breakinge Bases’ facilitate and appears to be at the heart of Lawes’s rescoring. As Simpson noted in The Division-Violist, through the performance of divisions ‘a Man may shew, the dexterity, and excellency, both, of his Hand, and Invention; to the Delight, and Admiration, of those that hear him’↜.46 This relates closely to the change in performance function, although the continued development of the old version sug41 LawesRC, vi. 42 See also LawesRC, vii–viii. 43 G. Dodd, ‘William Lawes: Royall Consort Suite No.â•‹9 in F’↜, Chelys 6 (1975–6), 4–9. 44 LawesRC, vi; see also PintoNL. 45 See HolmanFTF, 261. 46 SimpsonDV, 21.

LAWES.indb 136

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

137

gests that the functional circumstances remained. The tenor line necessitated this change: the Â�instrument, although satisfactory in a functional dance setting, was not Â�satisfactory in a concert-type setting. Revision and expansion to incorporate divisions is an observable trend throughout much of Lawes’s consort music output in the 1630s. Perhaps the most significant example of this kind of revision is Fantazia {135} in D for violin, bass viol and organ (see Chapter 6). Although divisions in the Royall Consort are not generally as demanding as those in Fantazia {135}, the harp consorts, or the bass viols pieces, they all appear to have been revised with the same basic intention of adding divisions. In the new version Royall Consort, the tenor line is distributed between the ‘two breakinge Bases’↜. When one bass viol has the tenor line, the other generally plays divisions against the bass line. Whereas in the old version the bass line was played by the theorboes and the bass viol, in the new version the theorboes are sometimes left to play the bass line alone, although one of the bass viols generally supports them. The outer parts were not significantly altered during rescoring, although some cadences were elaborated. Thus, the two trebles and the bass line are largely the same in both versions (with slight variants). The bass viol divisions are generally in descant or simple breaking bass techniques, usually moving in parallel concords with the theorbo line or providing an embellished version thereof. Gordon Dodd suggested that the theorbists may have alternated between playing the bass line and filling in the harmonies, perhaps occasionally both playing tasto solo.47 These points are perhaps best illustrated by a brief comparison of the new and old versions of one of the suites: no.â•‹6, in D.48 In the first strain there is little difference between the two versions of Aire {37}. BV1 carries the tenor part until around bar 5 where it is taken by BV2. From bar 8 BV1 begins to add simple divisions ‘breaking the ground’ with a descending octave displacement figure,49 leading to a brief descant towards the cadence. In the second strain BV2 mostly carries the tenor line, shared briefly with BV1 in the antiphonal passage (bars 19–21). As with the first strain, the old tenor part peters out towards the cadence. Throughout the second strain BV1 adds newly composed divisions, occasionally doubling the bass line. Again, the divisions are quite simple breaking of the bass, with occasional descant. In Alman {38} the ‘old’ tenor line is again distributed among the two bass viols. The new divisions begin in BV2 (bars 1–2), with a simple descant. The divisions re-enter with the ascending quaver scalar figure (bars 6–7) and continue until the end of the strain. The second strain divisions again mostly descant above the theorboes. Alman {38} is also found in 47 Dodd, ‘Royall Consort’↜, 8. 48 For musical illustrations of this chapter, see LawesRC: bar numbersâ•‹correspond. 49 SimpsonDV, 21–8 covers ‘Of Breaking the Ground’↜.

LAWES.indb 137

19/03/2010 10:58

138

the consort music of william lawes

a Tr–Tr–A-T–B arrangement in B.2 (p.â•‹15), ‘For the Violins ∙ of 2 ∙ trebles’↜. In this version the two trebles and bass are identical to those in the B.3 Royall Consort sequence. What connection the B.2 and B.3 versions share is unclear, although the latter has more divisions in the replacement lines. There are leaves abstracted before the B.2 version, which comes just before the music from Britannia Triumphans of 1638, thus a date of c.â•‹1637 can be assumed. This version was evidently not intended for the court violin band, which played with a single treble line at this time.50 The tenor line of Corant {39} is mostly contained in BV2 throughout this piece, with BV1 adding a simple descant above the theorbo, often in thirds, partially harmonizing the bass line. In the second strain BV1 adds a new point of imitation answering Violin 1 at the octave. Thereafter BV1 mostly moves in parallel thirds with the bass as BV2 plays the tenor. In Aire {41} the first strain begins with the tenor part in BV1, against which BV2 adds a simple breaking bass line above and below the theorbo. After bar 5 the theorboes are doubled by one of the bass viols. A similar layout is found in strain 2, although the tenor line is mostly in BV2; it begins and ends in BV1. Although – with Fantazy {36} and Ecco {40} – they are now designated as Sett 6, these four pieces do not appear as a group in any of the sources. They are found in a random order in one of the main old version sources F.568–9; only Aire {37} is found in E.431–6 and D.233–6. The reason for grouping them together is B.3. Here, Lawes rescored the Royall Consort in one long sequence (pp.â•‹50–100), largely organized by key. First, a sequence of (mostly) d pieces (pp.â•‹50–79), followed by a sequence of (mostly) D pieces (pp.â•‹80–100 and 48–9). Within these two key sequences Lawes ordered the pieces into suites or setts, elaborating on a basic A–C–S core. At either end of the sequence there are randomly assembled miscellaneous groups of pieces. At the start of the d sequence there are two pieces in D: Aire {37} and Corant {39}. At the end of the sequence there are four pieces – three in D, one in d – not in suite order: Alman {38}, Fantazy {36}, Saraband {14} and Aire {41}. It is unclear why the Saraband in d was included here. It is grouped with Sett 2 in most of the new version sources, and appears to have been an afterthought. The Fantazy, Alman and Aire at the sequence end are today grouped with the two pieces at the start of the sequence, and reordered into what is now designated Sett 6. Lawes evidently intended this sett but the random order suggests piecemeal composition: confirmation of Pinto’s theory regarding the initial random order of the D/d aires. The B.3 Royall Consort sequence is written in what appears to be the same ink, suggesting that it was all done within a relatively short space of time. Lawes tackled the rescoring in a logical and orderly fashion: first 50 See HolmanFTF, 225–50, esp. 234–5.

LAWES.indb 138

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

139

by key and then by suite. This suggests that the two pieces in D (that come before the sequence in d) were composed after the sequence in d as a whole was completed, on pages left unused after the harp consort pieces. Lawes may have run out of space after p.â•‹100 and finished the sequence at the start, which suggests that the pages abstracted after p.â•‹100 were removed before the rescoring. Another aberrant piece belongs to our modern Sett 6: Ecco {40}, included after the first sett in d. The explanation seems to lie with the preceding piece, also an Ecco (in d). Both Eccos are essentially stylized corants ‘devised to show off the dualism of the new scoring (two Tr–B pairs)’↜.51 They appear to have been newly composed for the new version, and are the only ecco pieces in the collection. It seems that Lawes explored the ecco idiom in the d corant and then composed another essay in the form this time in D, resulting in a temporary aberration in the key sequence. In addition to the ecco corant, Lawes also composed a fine fantasia in this motley D sett. It is one of only two fantasias in the collection: the other heads the first sett in d. The fantasia was not a particularly suitable form for the Royall Consort ensemble, which was essentially a mixed consort in many ways similar to the Elizabethan mixed consort ensemble in its unsuitability for contrapuntal music (and especially the fantasia), which depends on the relative equality of voices to be effective. Throughout the surviving mixed consort repertoire extended passages of imitative counterpoint are seldom encountered.52 Although strictly speaking the fantasia-suites of Lawes and Coprario are mixed consorts, they are ensembles of similar instruments and therefore a different case. It is perhaps telling that of the hundred or so pieces that Lawes wrote for genuinely mixed ensembles (i.e. the Royall Consort and the harp consorts) only three are fantasias. From a consideration of the style and content of the two Royall Consort fantasias, it seems that Lawes conceived them as a complementary pair, despite some chronological (and physical) separation. The d fantasia appears to have been the first piece composed in the Royall Consort sequence in B.3. Beginning with such an abstract piece clearly demonstrates that Lawes was now composing for a rather different function. The D fantasia does not have the same corresponding pride of place at the head of the D sequence. Rather, as we have seen, it was added in a somewhat piecemeal fashion at the end of the sequence. These pieces are amongst the most refined of Lawes’s consort fantasia movements. One aspect of this refinement is due to the instrumentation. The independence of the plucked 51 LawesRC, v. 52 See The First Book of Consort Lessons: Collected by Thomas Morley 1599 and 1611, ed.

S. Beck (New York, 1959); and Music for Mixed Consort, ed. W. Edwards, MBâ•‹40 (1977).

LAWES.indb 139

19/03/2010 10:58

140

the consort music of william lawes

instruments in these fantasias is exceptional in polyphonic consort music, rivalled only in Lawes’s harp consort fantasia (see Chapter 7). From the outset there is a direct tension between form and medium. The use of two unequal instrumental groups was potentially problematic for a fantasia given the unequal acoustical potential of the bowed strings against the plucked theorboes. The theorboes play from single (unfigured) bass lines and were undoubtedly expected to realize quite a full continuo accompaniment. The fantasia in d, {1}, is one of Lawes’s finest.53 It is in four clearly defined sections. The opening imitative section demands the listener’s attention from the outset, with the initial theme first presented softly in the theorbo. The first theme is built around an expression of the tonic triad; first the repeated tonic, moving by step to the mediant, and then, by leaps, back to the tonic, then to the dominant and then to the upper tonic, emphasized by the chromatic neighbour note from below. From the start Lawes incorporates division-writing into the fabric of the composition, in a similar way to Fantazia {135}. The fugal opening contrasts the timbres of the ensemble. The second theorbo is answered in the dominant by the second violin, in turn answered (in the tonic) by the second bass viol: all at the distance of a breve. This opening motif (or variations thereupon) is stated seventeen times in the opening section. The section comes to a rather abrupt close at bar 15, where Lawes modifies the repeated-note idea of the opening theme to introduce a short dialogue passage. This brief moment also contains a chromatic shift to a, via an augmented chord, a harmonic device often used by Lawes. This brief change in mood and key introduces a short dialogue section for all the instruments (bars 16–19), using melodic fragments recalling various sections of the opening theme. Lawes follows this passage with an exploration of the antiphonal possibilities of the ensemble, anticipated in the opening bars of the movement. He begins with a trio of Violin 1, Bass Viol 2 and Theorbo 2, closely answered by the alternate trio group (Violin 2, Bass Viol 2 and Theorbo 1). Lawes uses two contrasting ideas for either trio group to highlight the antiphonal effect. In the first group he establishes a ‘sighing motif ’ (Example 4.1), essentially a rhythmic gesture consisting of a dotted minim falling to a quaver or a crotchet. This motif is similar to the rhetorical figure ecphonesis or exclamatio, also found in contemporary vocal music. The introduction to Giulio Caccini’s Le nuove Musiche (1601) claims that, ‘Exclamation [esclamazione] is the principal means to move the Affection’↜.54 Exclamations (which usually begin on a weak beat) are 53 See also the discussion in FieldCM, 218. 54 The quotation is from an English translation of Caccini’s preface entitled ‘Brief

Discourse of, and Directions for Singing after the Italian manner’↜, which Playford incorporated into editions of the Introduction to the Skill of Musick from 1664 to

LAWES.indb 140

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

141

Example 4.1╇ Lawes, Royall Consort Fantasia in d, {1}, bars 16–19: ‘sighing’ motif: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3

   4  16

    

   

   4         4      4     4      4     18

 



   

   



  

 

         



 

  













 





    

  



       

 





    



  



   



 





     



   

 

further described as suitable for use in all passionate music on a suitable dotted minim or dotted crotchet quitted by a downward step or leap. To contrast the sighing motif Lawes introduces a division-based passage in the answering trio. In the section of his treatise concerning the composition of divisions in more than two instruments Simpson wrote the following: In Divisions made for Three Basses, every Viol acts the Treble, Basse, or Inward Part, by Turns. But here you are to Note, that Divisions, of Three Parts, are not usually made upon Grounds; but rather Composed in the way of Fancy [i.e. fantasia]: beginning with some Fuge; then falling into Points of Division; answering One Another; sometimes Two answering One, and 1694: (1664), 63–4; see FieldFR, 231. J. Tarling, The Weapons of Rhetoric (Hertfordshire, 2004) provides a good introduction to rhetoric and music; HolmanD, 42–6 provides an excellent model for the analysis of musico-rhetorical ideas.

LAWES.indb 141

19/03/2010 10:58

142

the consort music of william lawes

sometimes, All joyning Together in Division; But commonly, Ending in Grave, and Harmonious Musick.55 Thus, when we find examples of division techniques in these fantasias they are often without the ‘ground’↜. After these brief antiphonal passages the opening of the movement is recalled with the solo passage for Theorbo 2, now in F; the empty tonic and dominant emphasis recalls the second half of the opening motif. Moreover, the change from the Dorian mood of the opening to the pastoral key of F attempts to bring an air of calm to proceedings. This brief solo passage is followed by another trio passage for the first group, which retains the earlier sighing motif while incorporating some of the division elements of the second trio group; an affect further underlined by the chromatic bass line in the theorbo. This passage is then seemingly dismissed by a brief tutti section in the tonic (bars 30–2); the Â�earlier sighing motif has now permeated the entire ensemble. A new section begins at bar 32, which lasts until bar 35, with a new melody for solo violin and theorbo. This duet is a gently lilting melody, slowly rising from tonic to dominant. It is followed by trio group 2, and a choir of the bowed strings, both of which are based upon this gently rising duet melody. Towards the end of the bowed string choir the sighing motif reoccurs, reinforced by a four-note descending quaver motif, which builds to a concluding tutti. The tutti builds to a climactic use of divisions in the bowed strings, and includes a reminiscence of the descending chromatic bass line in both theorboes (bar 47). The overall affect of this division passage recalls that of the sighing motif, through its association with the short descending quaver motif. Just as Simpson would later advise, the entire ensemble comes together ‘Ending in Grave, and Harmonious Musick↜’↜, with the brief homophonic coda at bars 50–5 calmly rounding off the fantasia on the tonic major. The fantasia in D is imbued with a serenity rarely achieved in Lawes’s other fantasias; indeed, the key of D seems often to evoke a mood of serenity for Lawes: e.g. the fantasia-suite for two violins, no.â•‹8 in D. The bowed strings initially dominate the opening imitative section of this piece. From the start, division-writing is more prominent in this fantasia, the quaver divisions adding a rhythmic drive and momentum to the opening, continued throughout the movement. Again, Lawes answers the opening imitative section with a short dialogue passage for all the instruments, but here anapaest rhythms begin to permeate the texture as it builds to a persuasive tutti (bars 20–3). This effect is reinforced by the anapaest rhythmic motif, an idiom commonly employed by Lawes in the five- and six-part fantasias. This confident, homophonic passage climaxes with the serene coda at bars 28–30. Here Lawes adopts a spacious, almost regal, setting in stark contrast to the 55 SimpsonDV, 49.

LAWES.indb 142

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

143

impulsiveness of the preceding passage. There is, significantly, a chromatic bass similar to that of the fantasia in d, again harmonized in much the same way. (A similar chromatic passage is found in Lawes’s five-part Fantazy {81} (bars 21–2).)56 The middle section (bars 31–41) also employs an antiphonal device. The first trio group is for Violin 1, Bass Viol 2 and Theorbo 1, as they present a simple repeatednote motif. The second trio group answers the first, itself answered by a condensed repetition by the first trio group before the brief concluding tutti. The following section begins softly with a brief duet for Bass Viol 2 and Theorbo 2 in the tonic. This duet uses a similar arpeggio motif to that found in the second half of the opening theme of the fantasia in d. Now, however, the motif has moved from the weaker theorboes to the stronger tones of the bass viol. The duet quickly introduces the division idioms that dominate the concluding tutti. Although there is a brief reference to the sighing motif of the fantasia in d it is now subordinated to the division-writing. The progression to the final cadence is further ushered by the stepped repetition in the theorboes, now at the full of their expressive powers combining divisions with a reach right down to the edge of their range with the low AAs.57 The close resemblances suggest that the fantasias were conceived as a complementary pair, or that one was modelled on the other in a similar manner to the two ecco pieces discussed earlier. Both fantasias best exemplify the kind of contrapuntal division-writing employed by Lawes in the new version. The addition of these pieces gave their respective suites an added weight and importance; Lawes may have intended the suites to be complementary. The fantasias differ from the majority of the other movements given that they are both written in six real parts; the rest of the collection is in four or five real parts. The only movement that comes close is Pavan {49}, one of the new version additions. Its divisions are similarly demanding to those found in the harp consort pavans. Although Pavan {49} is not found in an autograph source the divisions appear to be authentic, and are the most elaborate and technically demanding in the Royall Consort. The pavan is in the usual form: ||A||A1||B||B1||C||C1||. There are mostly only five real parts, as both theorboes play the same line (except when performing divisions), a line which is often partially doubled by one of the bass viols. Again, Simpson’s idea of culmination and progression to a climax of divisions is evident. The first strain is typical of a stately pavan, dominated by the dotted minim and three-crotchet figure in free imitation. The theorboes play the same bass line, doubled in places by the first bass viol. For the A1 strain the 56 LawesCS, 46. 57 For a discussion of theorboes probably used in England at the time, see L. Sayce,

‘Continuo Lutes in 17th and 18th-Century England’↜, EM 23 (1995), 667–84.

LAWES.indb 143

19/03/2010 10:58

144

the consort music of william lawes

first violin holds the pavan melody as the bass viols take the bass line while the theorboes perform the divisions with the second violin, sometimes in imitation. The divisions are initially quite simple, especially in the theorboes. Although the format of the B strain is the same as the A strain, the B1 divisions are more intense and complex than in A1.58 The theorboes now take the bass line as the first violin and both bass viols perform virtuosic ‘mixt’ divisions, with fast scalar passages, chordal skips, octave leaps and written-out trills. The C strain provides relief from the explosive divisions of the previous strain. By contrast, C1 Â�demonstrates Lawes’s use of varied textures. The divisions begin imitatively in quavers in the theorboes, the motive is then taken by the bass viols (again in imitation) building to semiquaver movement. The violins take over the divisions (also imitatively) at bar 65, against bass line played in unison by the viols and theorboes for three bars; thereafter the divisions become faster and more complex, permeating throughout the ensemble and building to a rousing climax (Example 4.2).

I

t is difficult to be certain what function the Royall Consort served. Holman ╇ has noted that it ‘is certainly ideal Tafelmusik, poised midway between serious consort music – which demands to be listened to in a concert-like situation – and functional dance music’↜.59 Although the addition of the fantasias and pavans indicates that the collection in its Tr–Tr–B–B form was intended for a more concert-like performance, the generally simple style of divisions used in the Â�rescored version point to a less explicit concert function. The most common forms of divisions are descant and simple breaking bass techniques (rhythmic alteration, octave displacement, neighbour notes and passing notes). There is little of the virtuosic pyrotechnics heard in the harp consort pavans or in the bass viols duos; the only comparable movement is Pavan {49}. The lack of elaborate divisions implies that the music was not intended to distract the audience, suggesting an informal setting where music was important, but not the focal point. Nevertheless, the divisions in the Tr–Tr–B–B version would satisfy the fashionable taste for divisions which in turn reflect well on the players. Furthermore, the performers would of course be able to extemporize more complex division as the situation required, to their ‘equall aduantage’↜. Simply because Lawes did not compose elaborate divisions for the Royall Consort – Pavan {49} notwithstanding – does not mean that they were not extemporized. One could argue that Lawes was generally meticulous in composing divisions where he wished them to be played. This may, 58 Violin 2 of the B1 strain is lacking, reconstructed in LawesRC; see also C. D. S. Field,

‘Rehabilitating William Lawes’↜, EM 25 (1997), 149–52.

59 HolmanFTF, 261.

LAWES.indb 144

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort   4  

Example 4.2╇ Lawes, Pavan {49}, ending: GB-Och, Mus. MSS 754–9

71

  

      4                    4                   4         4



  

   4

73   

145





   

   

      

  

               

         



  







 



















  

                                                                                                                           75

    



                 



        

                                                                                     



however, simply indicate a relatively fixed function for the Royall Consort. The works with composed divisions are suggestive of a concert-like setting: a point addressed throughout this book. One explanation for the lack of (elaborate) composed divisions for the Royall Consort is a fluid performance function, reinforced by Pinto’s suggestion that the Tr–Tr–T–B and Tr–Tr–B–B versions must have overlapped to some degree. There is no reason to suppose that both forms were not popular contemporaneously, but in different contexts. It is unlikely that Tr–Tr–T–B scoring simply died with Lawes’s

LAWES.indb 145

19/03/2010 10:58

146

the consort music of william lawes

ambitious foray into Tr–Tr–B–B. Evidence for extemporized elaborate divisions comes from the aforementioned Pavan {49}. It survives in two main sources, only one of which contains the divisions. Thus, elaborately worked versions of several of the Royall Consort pieces – pavans would seem to be main candidates – could have existed, depending on the occasion. They were evidently extemporized, or the sources have not survived. Because these pieces are not copied into the later partbooks Pinto has suggested that the two fantasias and the pavans in a and C possibly represent Lawes’s Â�‘finishing touches’↜.60 Although this is plausible, it is also somewhat misleading. A brief overview of the sources concerned is necessary. First, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.241–4 contains both violin parts and both bass viol parts, but only of the D/d pieces. Thus, D.241–4 cannot be held as not containing either the a or the C pavans. None of these pieces was included, which suggests that they were not available to the copyist. Both pavans are omitted from F.568–9 and E.431–6, suggesting that they were composed sometime after the initial version of the collection, but that does not imply that they were conceived as ‘finishing touches’; rather, as part of a later incarnation. Apart from the autographs and D.233–6 (and E.451), there are six main sources of the new version. GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 31431 contains the violin parts and one of the bass parts for most of the collection. GB-Och, Mus. MSS 754–9,61 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 391–6 and GB-Och, Mus. MSS 479–83 survive complete. GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 31433 and 10445 can be grouped together: MS 31433 has one theorbo and one bass viol part (a ‘Didvideing B[ase]’), MS 10445 has the other bass viol part (‘A breaking Base’) and both violin parts. The two books are not from the same set, but appear to be distantly related. These four sources (grouping MSS 31433 and 10445 together) contain most of the collection (although MS 10445 contains only twenty-six of the dances). Of these sources, the fantasias and pavan in C are found in two, MSS 754–9 and 391–6. The pavan in a is found in all five (but not in MS 10445). Thus, it is not relevant to group the pavan in a with the other three movements. The pavan in C is found also in MSS 479–83, but only in the theorbo book (MS 483B, fol.â•‹13v), which suggests that either it was not fully available to the copyist or that he began the pavan and then abandoned copying it. It is curious that Pavan {49} is also omitted from MS 31431. The pages where it should be are numbered ‘48’ but unused, which suggests that it was known but not copied. It seems significant that the three pieces generally omitted from the new version sources are the fantasias and Pavan {49}. This does not necessarily imply that they 60 PintoFyV, 65; also D. Pinto, ‘The Music of the Hattons’↜, RMARC 23 (1990), 79–108,

esp. 82.

61 Copied by Stephen Bing c.â•‹1653: see WainwrightMP, 100–2, 403–5 (inventory); also

IMCCM1, 205–7.

LAWES.indb 146

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

147

were not available to later copyists: it may mean that they declined to copy them because of the six-part textures. We can draw a parallel here with the harp consort pieces. None of the large-scale harp consorts exists beyond the autograph sources, despite the apparent popularity of the rest of the collection in several later sources (see Chapter 7).62 Later copyists of the Royall Consort may not have been interested in the more abstract fantasias and the elaborate pavans. Complex contrapuntal works for large consort groups were not fashionable after c.â•‹1660. Indeed, Lawes’s exploration of large-scale forms in the 1630s is quite individual as most composers at the time were tending towards smaller-scale forms. Furthermore, the evidence from B.3 does not support the claim that these were late additions. One could argue that the fantasia in D was somewhat of an afterthought, coming as it does in a miscellaneous sequence after the main sequence. The fantasia in d (arguably the better of the two), however, comes early in the main sequence, and may have been the first one added. The issue hinges on what date one puts on the B.3 sequence, and what stage of the collection it represents. Whether the B.3 version represents a ‘final version’ of the collection is debatable. As Pinto points out, ‘the partbook copies of the “new” sometimes agree with the “old” in some small features. … Quite possibly something not totally polished had gone into circulation before Lawes got round to the intended final draft’↜.63 This implies that Lawes went through one or more drafts of all or part of the Royall Consort, which seems unlikely given the scale of the collection: the B.3 sequence alone numbers forty-one pieces. This is not to say that (now lost) corrupt copies did not circulate between the B.3 sequence and later manuscripts; this seems quite likely given Lowe’s somewhat hybrid version in D.233–6. One suspects that the B.3 sequence was a reasonably finished draft, and probably the only autograph scores of those ‘new’ version pieces. Lawes would undoubtedly have revised small details between the scorebook and his partbooks. As with the various revisions (from scorebook to partbooks) evident in the viol consorts (see Chapter 5), harp consorts (see Chapter 7) and bass viol pieces (see Chapter 8), such revisions are, however, unlikely to have been substantial. The lack of an autograph source for the varied key-sequence – including Pavans {42} and {49} – need not imply that they were late additions. The only thing we can say with certainty is that they were separated from Lawes’s main sequence in B.3. This separation may have been due to an abstraction from the scorebook, or those pieces may have been composed in another volume. B.3 ends with the Royall Â�Consort sequence, notwithstanding the several leaves abstracted after what is now the last page. 62 Index for concordances. 63 PintoFyV, 65.

LAWES.indb 147

19/03/2010 10:58

148

the consort music of william lawes

M

any questions remain concerning the Royall Consort. The rescoring issue ╇ will perhaps never be fully resolved. One wonders at the lack of autograph versions for the Tr–Tr–T–B versions and for the Tr–Tr–B–B versions of the varied key-sequence suites. Pinto has suggested that the latter were never included in autograph score, as they did not require the same revisions as did the pieces in D/d.64 Although the point is compelling, a lost autograph source (or sources) cannot be entirely discounted. For example, one wonders what were the contents of the gathering of ruled sheets abstracted from the start of B.3. The primary importance of the Royall Consort is its role in the development of the suite and in the development of the Tr–Tr–B–B scoring. Its changing function also highlights the various demands made on composers of consort music at the court of Charles I. Lawes’s incorporation of the fantasias, the increased use of division-writing and the more refined scoring of the new version of the Royall Consort demonstrates the direction in which he was attempting to bring the collection. It seems reasonable to suggest that the Royall Consort originated as functional dance music outside the court. Provision of this kind of music would have been bread and butter to a professional composer at the time, and may have helped advance Lawes’s application for a royal appointment. The need to incorporate or facilitate elaborate divisions, most of which were probably extemporized, appears to have inspired the change from Tr–Tr–T–B to Tr–Tr–B–B; the increased use of divisions is a trend that can be seen developing throughout much of Lawes’s major collections composed after his royal appointment. This suggests an increased popularity of audience-based consort music at the court of Charles I and further suggests that the original demand for functional dance music remained. Where the Royall Consort was performed at court is unknown. If the old version was used largely to accompany functional dancing, the Presence Chamber or the Banqueting House would seem to be the most likely places, although such entertainments were also presumably heard in Privy Chamber (the most likely place for the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ to perform); certainly one imagines that the Privy Chamber would provide an ideal setting for the new version. Most ambassadors and courtiers awaiting the royal summons were entertained in the Privy Chamber. The Royall Consort would seem to be the ideal background music to impress upon visitors the musical sophistication of the Caroline court: the music fashionable, the scoring innovative. Perhaps most importantly, the ensemble was highly portable, quick and easy to assemble and disassemble. The dances are never far from a cadence, which makes them eminently suited for court performances: they could be easily and promptly brought to a close on the command of the Lord Chamberlain; on the other hand, strains could be repeated as desired and complex 64 PintoNL, 268–9.

LAWES.indb 148

19/03/2010 10:58

the royall consort

149

divisions could be easily extemporized. It should come as no surprise that audience-orientated concert music was being cultivated at the Caroline court given the high quality of consort music composers employed there, in addition to Charles’s own enthusiasm for cultivating that repertoire. Further, the character of Charles I should also be taken into account. Charles was obsessed by formality and ceremony, from the greeting of ambassadors to the cleaning of the royal bottom. It is surely no great leap of faith that the audition of chamber music would be any less subject to formality and order.

LAWES.indb 149

19/03/2010 10:58

chapter 5

The Viol Consorts

L

awes’s music for viol consort is an impressive testament to his ability to â•… compose flexible and imaginative pieces within a contrapuntal framework, and perhaps best illustrates how he was able to transform traditional genres by applying his own compositional language and style. Thirty-three pieces for viol consort survive by Lawes (16 five-part and 17 six-part). They include fantasias, pavans, aires and (two six-part) In Nomines: many can be ranked with those of Orlando Gibbons, Ferrabosco II and Jenkins as among the best in the repertoire. Generally speaking, the viol consort fantasia can be seen as having developed along two main paths in early seventeenth-century England.1 On the one hand the fantasias of Coprario, Thomas Lupo and John Ward were strongly influenced by the Italian madrigal. By the turn of the century these composers were writing what were in effect textless madrigals for consorts of viols. During the first decade or so, however, they began to move away from vocally derived models and were composing more instrumentally conceived fantasias for viols.2 These composers, especially Coprario, show an affinity for the seconda prattica in their use of dissonance, chromaticisms and madrigalian textures and harmonies: they seem to have exerted the strongest influence on Lawes. The other main path is represented by Gibbons, Ferrabosco II and Jenkins. The bulk of Gibbons’s consort fantasias appear to have been composed by 1620. In them he experimented with triple-time sections and popular melodies, all interwoven within virtuosic counterÂ�point. Although Ferrabosco was largely unconcerned with madriÂ�galian techniques, his acquaintance with contemporary Italian music is demonstrated by his use of bipartite structures, fantasias built around a single theme, and use of sophisticated contrapuntal devices such as augmentation and diminution. FerraÂ� bosco’s fantasias are generally instrumental in character, and explore a greater range of modulations than his English contemporaries; a common fingerprint is   1 There is an excellent discussion of the development of the viol consort in

Â� AshbeeHM1, 108–41; see also O. Neighbour, The Consort and Keyboard Music of William Byrd (Berkeley, 1978); D. Pinto, ‘The Fantasy Manner: The SeventeenthCentury Context’↜, Chelys 10 (1981), 17–28; Music in Britain: The Sixteenth Century, ed. R. Bray (Oxford, 1995); FieldCM.

╇ 2 See Bibliography for modern editions.

LAWES.indb 150

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

151

the use of tonic major and minors for structural effect.3 All of these traits were to exert a strong influence on Jenkins.4 Gibbons too influenced Jenkins, though the main signs of this are to be found in his three-part pieces, especially in the treatment of themes.5 Of course, such summaries greatly simplify matters. Although usually discussed in opposition, Lawes and Jenkins clearly shared several influences, including each other: for example, David Pinto has noted several similarities between Jenkins’s six-part Fantazia {11} and Lawes’s six-part Fantazia in g {85}.6 Almost forty pieces by Jenkins for five and six viols have survived. They do not appear to have been widely available in manuscript copies before the late 1620s and several must have been composed around the same time as Lawes’s in the 1630s.7 Moreover, the range of possible influences is not restricted to the few composers mentioned above. Several later composers deserve mention. Five fine six-part fantasias by Charles Coleman survive; sources in which they are found appear to date from around the late 1620s.8 John Ward (d. 1638) was employed by Sir Henry Fanshawe at Ware in Hertfordshire, where he may have taught Lawes’s close contemporary Simon Ives, whose viol consorts appear to date from the first quarter of the century. Ives was one of a group of musicians working in St Paul’s in the first half of the century whose significance has yet to be fully investigated or understood. The group included William Cranford, Martin Peerson, Thomas Ravenscroft, John Tomkins and John Woodington. It seems likely that Lawes had some connection with them. He knew Ives by at least late 1633, when they collaborated on The Triumph of Peace, and both Tomkins and Woodington also held posts in the Royal Music. A handful of consorts in three to six parts survive by Cranford;9 four fivepart fantasias survive by Ravenscroft. We need only look to the Shirley partbooks to glimpse some of the repertoire Lawes was familiar with as a young man: Coprario, Ferrabosco II, Ives, Lupo, Ward, Thomas Holmes, William White, Luca Marenzio, Claudio Monteverdi, Benedetto Pallavicino and Horatio Vecchi. Lawes’s first essays in large-scale viol ╇ 3 See G. Dodd, ‘Alfonso Ferrabosco II – The Art of the Fantasy’↜, Chelys 7 (1977),

47–53.

╇ 4 See also, FieldJCH. ╇ 5 See A. Ashbee, ‘Jenkins’s Fantasias for Viols’↜, in A Viola da Gamba Miscellany, ed.

J. Boer and G. van Oorschot (Utrecht, 1994), 41–54, esp. 48–9.

╇ 6 See AshbeeHM1, 167–73 and passim; PintoFyV, 104–7. ╇ 7 See AshbeeHM1. ╇ 8 PintoFyV, 87–8. Edition: Charles Coleman: The Six-Part Fantasias for Viol Consort,

ed. J. Jeffrey, PRBVCS 46 (Albany, CA, 2003).

╇ 9 Available in four volumes by PRB Productions.

LAWES.indb 151

19/03/2010 10:58

152

the consort music of william lawes

consort writing appear to be the two five-part fantasias in the Shirley partbooks, probably composed in the late 1620s or early 1630s. Even by this time large-scale viol consorts were somewhat old-fashioned and had been superseded by scorings requiring fewer instruments; the bulk of the five- and six-part fantasy repertoire appears to have been composed by around 1625. A key development in the genre was the shift from a graded Tr–A-T–Bar–B ensemble to an emphasis on a more modern two-treble scoring, which took place in the second decade of the century; David Pinto has linked this to increased interest in the madrigal.10 The shift represents the development of more polarized textures and finds full expression in Lawes’s music. Lawes also went a step further than his Jacobean predecessors by composing dances (pavans and almans or aires) in five and six parts. Although none of the sources agree on a set order, the evident intention was to form ‘suites’ with the fantasias. One model may have been Ferrabosco, whose five-part pieces mostly consist of pavans and almans, some of which appear to have been disseminated as pairs. Dances in six parts are, however, rare. Perhaps the only other significant examples were composed by Martin Peerson of St Paul’s.11 A set of six paired fantasias and almans are preserved in GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 17786–91; in a secondary source, GB-Och, Mus. MSS 423–8, the first four fantasias are Â�acrostically titled ‘Acquaintance’↜, ‘Beauty’↜, ‘Chowse’ and ‘Delicate’↜.12 Despite his evident ambition in tackling six-part writing (challenging to most composers), Peerson’s sixpart pieces, while often charming, tend to reveal his compositional limitations. As with Lawes, there are moments of unconventional harmonies (use of dissonance, unexpected key shifts etc.), although with Peerson they are often rather unsubtle. Lawes avoids the modulations to remote keys, polished contrapuntal devices and Â�bipartite structures found in Ferrabosco (and Jenkins), and also breaks from the style of the previous generation in his liberal use of strict counterpoint. He was clearly able to compose orthodox counterpoint (as the In Nomine in B↜b demonstrates), though extended passages of strict counterpoint are generally avoided. His daring use of expressive harmonic shifts, especially in codas, was a step further than even Coprario had managed. A perfect example of this is found at the end of Fantazy {93} in F which moves from a cadence in the tonic to a short coda introduced by an augmented chord in second inversion (Example 5.1).13 10 PintoMVC, 19. 11 See A. Jones and R. Rastall, ‘Peerson, Martin’↜, GMO (accessed 6 June 2009); Pro-

fessor Rastall has edited the first two volumes of Peerson’s complete works (Antico Editions; Devon).

12 Edition: Martin Peerson: Fantasias and Almaines for Six Viols, ed. V. Brookes,

PRBVCS 39 (Albany, CA, 2000).

13 Bar nos.â•‹correspond to LawesCS. {68–71}, {74}, {96–100} are in LawesSCM: where

bar numbers differ the LawesSCM numbering is given in square brackets. Tenor 2

LAWES.indb 152

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts Example 5.1╇ Lawes, Fantazy {93}, coda

   4   47

 

     





  4 



  4 

                 

  4      4

   4

    50

    



 

   

153

    







 





 



   

  







 





          

    

       

 

 

             

    



      

  







  



  

  

         

Perhaps the most notable differences between the viol fantasias of Lawes and the Jacobean composers, and indeed those of his near contemporaries, are his use of textures and the expansion of the role played by the organ. Throughout the viol consorts Lawes divides the ensemble for textural contrasts, exploiting an essentially Tr–B structure. Especially in the six-part setts we can hear much of the concertante-style writing prominent in the Royall Consort. His mastery of texture is perfectly illustrated by the six-part Fantazy in g {85) where the textures are used for structural effect. After the opening fugal section (bars 1–11) Lawes moves to the tonic major by restating the opening theme on the dominant in a brief three-part texture (bars 12–13; Example 5.2a). The next section also begins with a textural contrast, bar 21. A repeated-note motif is heard in the basses, which play a duet for four bars. This is answered by the upper strings (bars 26–9), basses, tenors, and (i.e. line IV) of the five-part pieces and Tenor 1 (i.e. line III) of the six-part pieces were originally notated (in GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. B.2–3) in c4 and c2 clefs respectively; in the following examples both have been changed to a c3 clef. All examples in this chapter are taken from B.2–3, unless stated otherwise.

LAWES.indb 153

19/03/2010 10:58

154

the consort music of william lawes

    4

Example 5.2╇ Lawes, Fantazy {85}: (a) bars 12–15; (b) bars 20–32

12

(a)

   4   4

  4    4

   4 

      

      



   

14



 

  







              



     

     







   





   





  

   



     

 





 

                                   

    

 

     

   

    

  

  

   





finally the trebles (Example 5.2b). A brief tutti introduces another bass duet, before a final section dominated by repeated-note figures. The expressive coda is seamlessly introduced again with an augmented chord (bar 42). The traditional function of the organ in a viol consort was essentially to double the string parts.14 As we shall see below, although they are primarily reductions of the strings, many of Lawes’s organ parts (especially in the six-part pieces) include independent material to an unprecedented degree. Lawes’s scorebooks (GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. B.2–3) provide scores for all but one of his viol consorts; the scores do not include organ parts, which are found in his organbook (GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229). Although the scorebooks lack the organ part, they are not therefore incomplete:15 the organ part was never intended to be written as part of the score. English consort sources of the period do not preserve organ parts in score with string consorts unless there is some essential function that the organ fulfils beyond 14 See HolmanOA, esp. 373–4. 15 Cf. PintoFyV, 74.

LAWES.indb 154

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

       20

(b)

4         4               4     4                 4          4         23











 

 



 











155







                                                                      

                                       27                                       

  

          30

   

  

LAWES.indb 155



   

     

        



                                              



                                                                    

19/03/2010 10:58

156

the consort music of william lawes

binding the consort together, what Thomas Mace described as ‘a Holding, UnitingConstant-Friend; and is as a Touch-stone, to try the certainty of All Things; especially the Well-keeping the Instruments in Tune, &c.↜’↜16 Thus, when Lawes made scores of Fantazia {135} and the suites for bass viols he included the organ accompaniment. The organ is, however, primarily obbligato in these pieces.17 The same could be said of the large-scale harp consorts, where again the accompaniment is included in the scores. The role of the organ in the viol consorts is fundamentally different: it is generally a short-score of the strings. This also had practical implications. Even for the five-part consorts, to include a two-stave accompaniment limits one to a single system per page (given the twelve-stave pages), which would have been wasteful. A better solution was first to compose the main musical body of the piece (the strings) and then prepare the organ part by referring to the string score; a professional organist could easily have played from the scores without a separately written-out part. We can assume with reasonable certainty that Lawes composed most of his viol consorts for performance by members of the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ (LVV) (see also below, and see Chapter 9). Judging from the evidence available in the court records and from records pertaining to masques and other entertainments, it seems that when Lawes (himself a viol player) joined the LVV there were several viol players associated with the group (years of service in parenthesis): Daniel Â�Farrant (1607–42), John Friend (1615–42), Dietrich Stoeffken (1635–42), John Taylor (1628–42) and Thomas Ford (1625–42). Giles Tomkins was organist in the LVV from 1630 to 1642 and would most likely have been the accompanying organist. To this list of viol players could perhaps be added the violinists, some of whom presumably also played the viol: Robert Kindersley (1626–36), John Woodington (1618–42) and Theophilus Lupo (1625–42). Even without the violinists, there would have been just enough viol players to perform five- and six-part consorts. The group could even have been supplemented by people like Charles Coleman, who is listed among ‘The Consorte’ at the funeral of James I. No records survive of an official appointment, although Peter Holman has suggested that Coleman was associated with the household of Prince Charles (later Charles II) during the 1630s.18 Coleman, who played the treble viol and theorbo in The Triumph of Peace, was certainly active in court music circles. Lucy Hutchinson’s husband Colonel John Hutchinson studied and lodged with Coleman at his house in Richmond; in her diary Lucy noted that ‘The man [Coleman] being a skilful composer in music, 16 MaceMM, 242. 17 Lawes also included the unfigured continuo in his draft score of Psalm 71, dis-

cussed below; it includes some doubling of the vocal parts (especially the bass).

18 HolmanFTF, 252–3.

LAWES.indb 156

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

157

the King’s musicians often met at his house to practise new aires and prepare them for the King’↜.19 The tentative possibility of such a connection between Coleman and Lawes is especially interesting when one considers the apparent instances of cross-influence between them noted by Pinto.20

D

avid Pinto has done some of the most significant research into Lawes’s Â�consort music in the years since Lefkowitz’s monograph.21 Part of this research has explored the complex question of how and when Lawes’s viol consort suites came about.22 Pinto’s conclusions are founded on his interpretation of the way in which the viol consorts were added to the scorebooks (B.2–3) and the organbook (D.229); they are worth quoting in detail. Lawes’s first viol consort compositions seem to have been the two five-part fantasias in g {68–9} also in the Shirley partbooks. A revised version of these head the remainder of the five-part pieces laid out in [B.2], begun probably a couple of years later when vocal music for occasions datable 1634–8 was already present. The first four fantasies had been scored before Lawes thought of providing them with aires which, like most if not all of those following in five parts, were reworkings of older favourites. The further fantasies were doubtless new compositions. After completing the first two sets [in g and a] and probably while proceeding with the remainder in five parts, Lawes began the six-part sets in [B.3]. Only three sets were entered [in C, g and F], the last two [in c and B↜b] being included, perhaps after some interval, grouped around the fivepart sets in [B.2]. This order of composition is borne out by the composer’s organ-book [D.229]. … It further suggests in conjunction with [the John Browne partbooks] that the six-part sequence was completed and the whole circulated after 1640 and before 1642.23

This generally accepted chronology was supported by a close reading of the later non-autograph sources. The viol consorts are preserved in four main non-Â� autograph sources, which can be divided into two groups.24 First, the set of parts GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 29410–15 and US-NHub, Osborn MS 515. MSS 29410–15 are a 19 Quoted in HolmanFTF, 253. 20 PintoFyV, esp. 44–52, 87–8, 118–20. 21 See Bibliography. 22 PintoMVC; LawesCS; PintoFyV. 23 LawesCS, viii–ix. For further elaboration of this topic, see also PintoFyV, passim. 24 For a detailed discussion of the main non-autograph sources, see LawesCS, xv–xvi,

upon which much of the following paragraph is based.

LAWES.indb 157

19/03/2010 10:58

158

the consort music of william lawes

‘complete but highly corrupt’ source for all of the five- and six-part consorts, dating to the late 1650s.25 Osborn 515 is a guardbook, bound c.â•‹1700, which includes a Â�fascicle containing the bass part for all but one of Lawes’s five-part consorts.26 It is the sole survivor of the original set: a further two books were known until the mid-nineteenth century. Osborn 515 and MSS 29410–15 appear to have been copied from a common source. Second, and more importantly, there are two related manuscripts associated with John Browne, Clerk of the Parliaments 1638– 49 and 1660–91:27 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 479–83 (also a source of the ‘new’ Royall Consort) and the ‘John Browne Partbooks’ together offer a complete text for the six-part consort setts.28 Significantly, these two groups of sources agree in many places with the revised readings found in the autograph bass partbook GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798 that clearly update those in the autograph scorebooks.29 Whereas Osborn 515 and MSS 29410–15 offer little evidence for establishing a date of composition for the consorts, the Browne sources provide important evidence of the consorts’ early dissemination as he had access to the complete collection. The research of Andrew Ashbee and David Pinto suggests that it is unlikely that Browne acquired these consorts after the outbreak of Civil War in the autumn of 1642. Browne was strongly Parliamentarian, and much of his library ‘probably passed out of his ownership when his lands in Northamptonshire beyond the King’s war-time court at Oxford had become inaccessible’↜.30 Nevertheless, the evidence for this assertion, while compelling, is not conclusive. It remains possible that Browne became separated from his collection at a later time, which means that he could have copied the viol consorts later than 1642. MoreÂ� over, the terminus post quem of c.â•‹1640 is based on an erroneous dating of Lawes’s organbook.31 25 LawesCS, xvi. 26 See R. Ford, ‘Osborn 515: A Guardbook of Restoration Instrumental Music’↜, FAM

30 (1983), 174–83; PintoFyV, 173–4; P. Holman, Henry Purcell (Oxford, 1994), 63–5; ShayThompsonPM, 292–4.

27 For Browne, see AshbeeJB; N. Fortune with I. Fenlon, ‘Music Manuscripts of John

Browne (1608–91), and from Stanford Hall, Leicestershire’↜, in Source Materials and the Interpretation of Music, ed. I. Bent (1981), 155–68; A. Ashbee, ‘Manuscripts of Consort Music in London, c.â•‹1600–1625: Some Observations’↜, VdGSJâ•‹1 (2007), 1–19; D. Pinto, ‘Pious Pleasures in Early Stuart London’↜, RMARCâ•‹41 (2008), 1–24.

28 The ‘Browne Partbooks’ are owned by Professor Franklin Zimmerman: microfilm

copy at the Pendlebury Library of Music, University of Cambridge.

29 Although independent, many of the variants and revisions found in the Browne

manuscripts are also found in Osborn 515 and MSS 29410–15.

30 LawesCS, xvi. See also AshbeeJB and PintoFyV, 160–70. 31 See PintoMVC, 14.

LAWES.indb 158

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

159

A

s with much of Lawes’s music, our understanding of the function of the â•… autograph manuscripts is fundamental in establishing a chronology for the viol consorts. If we accept B.2–3 as compositional drafts, as I think we must, Â�several sections of B.2 can be dated with reasonable accuracy and in turn provide clues for dating much of the rest of the manuscript. I argued in Chapter 2 that The Triumph of Peace section was probably among the first music to be added to B.2, no later than January 1634; see Chapter 2 also for a discussion of the time needed for the composition of masque music. This implies that Lawes began composing the masque music almost half way into B.2 (on p.â•‹38), and suggests that he planned to have another type of music at the start of B.2; there is a gathering of ruled sheets missing before what is now p.â•‹1. The Triumph of Peace music is followed by music for another masque, The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour presented on 24 February 1635/6 (pp.â•‹41–4). Again, we can assume that this music would have been composed by the end of the previous year. The next datable music (pp.â•‹16–18) is for another masque, Britannia Triumphans, presented on 7 January 1637/8. Here we can assume that composition of the music began during December 1637. Much, if not all, of the five-part sequence on pp.â•‹45–75 was probably also in place by the time Lawes came to compose the Britannia Triumphans music, prompting him to fill up unused pages towards the front of B.2 (see Chapter 2). The two five-part fantasias in g {68–9} reworked from the Shirley partbooks,32 the four-part consorts {108–13} in C/c, and some miscellaneous vocal music separate it from The Triumph of Peace (pp.â•‹38ff). The implication is that the music on pp.â•‹19–37 – {68–9} and {108–13} – was already entered by the end of 1637. After the Prince d’Amour music there is a partsong on p.â•‹44, the end of which is missing due to the abstraction of two gatherings. Thus, a substantial amount of music may have occupied the pages between this partsong and the main sequence of five-part viol consorts beginning on what is now p.â•‹45. Unlike the five- and six-part pieces, which achieved limited circulation, none of the six four-part viol consorts {108–13} are found outside B.2.33 As with nearly all of the 32 Fantazia {69} is titled ‘Iñomine’ (which it is not) in the Shirley partbooks; in B.2 it

is more accurately titled ‘On the Playnsong’ (seemingly a newly composed one). A single leaf was abstracted after p. 18. Both fantasias in g (B.2, pp.â•‹19ff) have the second tenor part written in a c3 clef (as have these pieces in the Shirley partbooks), whereas the next aire in g (pp.â•‹45ff) has this part in a c4 clef which is used for the second tenor thereafter, suggesting the use of a slightly larger instrument, either a large tenor or a small bass: see PintoMVC, 21 n.â•‹8; and PintoFyV, 165–6. This perhaps suggests an early stage in Lawes’s move towards a two-bass scoring, which finds full expression in the revised ‘new’ version of the Royall Consort (see Chapter 4).

33 Edition: William Lawes: Suite No. 1 in C minor and Suite no.â•‹2 in C major for Two

Treble and Two Bass Viols, ed. R. Taruskin (Ottawa, 1983). See also PintoFyV, 157–9.

LAWES.indb 159

19/03/2010 10:58

160

the consort music of william lawes

five-part dances, however, two of the six were reworked from earlier versions.34 Aires {109–10} in g are also found (also in four parts) in the Shirley partbooks. The Shirley versions (also Tr–Tr–B–B) are close to those in B.2, although {110} is in d; the revisions are mostly in the basses, with some swapping of material in the trebles. Their position in B.2 and their association with the Shirley partbooks implies that the four-part pieces were among the first to be added to B.2. They are not explicitly grouped as two suites, but it would seem that Lawes intended them as such.35 Each ‘suite’ comprises a fantasia followed by two aires. (Although ‘Fantasia’ is not used in B.2 to describe these pieces they are through-composed imitative compositions.)36 The fantasias are stylistically similar to Lawes’s large-scale viol consort fantasias. They are sectional in structure, mixing imitative counterpoint with homophonic passages; both fantasias are built around engaging dance rhythms. Although not well known today they are well worth investigating (Example 5.3).37 The Tr–Tr–B–B fantasias of Thomas Lupo mentioned in Chapter 4 may have provided Lawes with a model. Despite the scoring and some passages that anticipate the Royall Consort fantasias (cf. Fantazia {108} bars 37–9 and Royall Consort Fantazia {36} bars 22–4), they do not appear to have any connections with the Royall Consort. The aires are highly imitative. The most interesting are the pair in C. The first aire has a passage with a melodic idiom also found in Lawes’s fivepart Fantazy {72} and in Fantazy {191} for harp consort (see Chapter 7, Example 7.10a-c). The second is a three-strain alman, with the second strain in triple time, followed by a duple-time close; such time changes are unusual in Lawes’s aires. These pieces are more episodic than, say, the Royall Consort or in the larger-scale viol consorts. The texture is mostly four-part throughout, only occasionally are parts of the ensemble contrasted against each other. Most typically either the two trebles or basses are in pairs; there are also some passages pairing one treble and one bass. We can tentatively date the four- and five-part viol consorts on pp.â•‹19–35 of B.2 to c.â•‹1634–7, although one is inclined to date them close to Lawes’s official appointment to the Royal Music. Stylistically there is little to suggest that they are late compositions. After reworking the five-part Fantazias {68–9} in g Lawes continued the fivepart sequence with the two fantasias in a, {71–2}. These fantasias are among Lawes’s 34 The various reworkings of the dances have been discussed in detail in PintoFyV. 35 The four-part pieces are discussed in M. Davenport, ‘The Dances and Aires of

William Lawes (1602–1645): Context and Style’ (PhD diss., University of Colorado, 2001), 250–67; Davenport’s analyses are largely anachronistic and unconvincing.

36 The fantasia in C is titled ‘Aire’↜. 37 There is an excellent recording of all six pieces by Phantasm, William Lawes:

�Consorts in Four and Five Parts. Channel Classics, CCS 15698 (2000).

LAWES.indb 160

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

       

161

Example 5.3╇ Lawes, Fantazia {108}, ‘For the Violls’↜, opening

  



 

   

  



  



      





                         3

   







    



5

      



    







           

    

 

         





    

        



       

                  

      

   

     

       

                                    



earliest essays in the form; a brief examination of {71} will be useful at this point. The fantasia is in two main sections: bars 1–34 and 35–58. The opening section recalls the double fugue favoured by Coprario.38 Lawes does not, however, strictly maintain the countersubject given in the bass (Example 5.4a). The juxtaposition of raised and natural sixths and sevenths in the opening create false relations and clashing dissonances.39 After the initial exposition the themes are fragmented and a rising figure (recalling the opening bars of the bass) is developed until the Phrygian cadence on E at bars 25–6. Throughout the first twenty-five bars, tension is maintained (in the tonic) through the melodic minor chromatic inflections and secondary dominants (including the brief use of the tonic major at bar 20). Bars 26–34 act as a transitional episode; it begins with the canonic introduction 38 See also PintoFyV, 78–9; and A New Way of Making Fowre Parts in Counterpoint by

Thomas Campion and Rules how to Compose by Giovanni Coprario, ed. C. Wilson (Aldershot, 2003), 114–15.

39 A point made in PintoFyV, 78–9; see also Pinto’s discussion of the suite ibid., 74–80.

LAWES.indb 161

19/03/2010 10:58

(a)

162

the consort music of william lawes

 

Example 5.4╇ Lawes, Fantazia {71}: (a) bars 1–8 [1–16]; (b) bars 34–9 [67–78]



       















            



   













  4         34

(b)



     4  



  4      

 4         4       37

 



LAWES.indb 162



    

 





 













  



 

     

    

  



  





  

    



        

 

 

 





    





    

   

  







               

 

 



    

 



 

 

     

 

  

















   

  





  



      









5



          



 

     

 

 





      

 



     

  





      

 

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

163

of a falling figure which begins imitatively in Treble 1 and the Bass, with each of the remaining parts entering in turn; the figure is combined with an inverted variant from bars 31–4 as the tonality prepares for a cadence on G at bar 35. This introduces the second section, which begins with an off-beat arpeggio figure on G leading to another expression of the G triad through the introduction of a falling motif (again on a weak beat) on d" (Tr1), g (T2), and b' (Tr2) respectively. This figure dominates the texture until bar 45. At bar 46 a repeated-note anapaest figure rhythmically derived from bars 26ff enters and swiftly pervades the entire texture; once again the texture is dominated by arpeggiation. This idea is continued, albeit more sparingly, until the cadence on E at bar 54. The fantasia ends with an extended cadence referencing the descending figure that opened the second section. In B.2 there is a lengthy and rather diffuse section of twenty-nine semibreves crossed out between present bars 48 and 49: excision evidently took place some time after composition of the entire series (see below). Only after composing these fantasias did Lawes decide to add the dances, first the Aire in g {70} then the Aire in a {73} (pp.â•‹52 and 53, respectively). As Pinto notes, ‘The fantasy–alman linkages were obviously a second thought, betrayed by the different key-signature for the alman in g: two flats, compared to the normal one flat as found in the fantasy movements’↜.40 Aire {73} is an excellent example of how Lawes recast some of his older compositions in many of the five-part dances; it also serves as a good example of Lawes’s approach to the five-part dances generally. The two-part version in US-NH, Filmer MS 3 appears to be an early one, later worked into the larger setting.41 The skeletal version was disseminated widely: arrangements are found for keyboard and solo lyra-viol. It is also found as the song ‘Corinna false! It cannot be’ attributed to Henry Lawes in Low and Â�Banister’s New Ayres and Dialogues (1678).42 It is difficult to say whether Lawes got the idea of linking fantasias and aires from Martin Peerson. Fantazias {68–9} are also found in the Shirley partbooks (and slightly modified in GB-Ob, Tenbury MS 302.43 These seem to be among the first stages in the compositional process. Lawes did not extensively revise the fantasias in B.2. The inner parts were occasionally refined, most notably with the exchange of tenor parts at bar 36 of {69}.44 Pinto dates these pieces in the Shirley partbooks to c.â•‹1635; based on the evidence from the signatures presented 40 PintoFyV, 74. 41 The version in Filmer 3 (fol.â•‹82v) was probably copied c.â•‹1639: a lyra-viol arrange-

ment of the famous ‘Whitelocke’s Corant’ on fol.â•‹20v is dated ‘May 9th. 1639’↜.

42 PintoFyV, 75–7: includes transcriptions of the keyboard and song settings. 43 See PintoMVC; PintoFyV, 16–17. 44 See also, PintoMVC, 13.

LAWES.indb 163

19/03/2010 10:58

164

the consort music of william lawes

in Chapter 2, however, it is more likely they date to before 1633, possibly as early as c.â•‹1630. The similarities between the Shirley and B.2 versions may suggest that relatively little time elapsed between the versions, unlike many of the reworked dances which undoubtedly were early compositions and which do contain significant variants between versions. Thus, we can perhaps slightly refine our dating of Fantazias {68–9} in B.2 to c.â•‹1634. On p.â•‹101 of B.2 there is Lawes’s three-part elegy in memory of John Tomkins, who died on 27 September 1638; there is no reason to think that this was composed any later than the winter of 1638, which assists in dating the music entered between the end of the five-part viol consorts and the elegy (pp.â•‹76–100): this was Fantazia {135} and the suites for two bass viols and organ {101–7}. It seems these pieces were entered into B.2 largely in order, implying a compositional date of c.â•‹1638; supported by the strong possibility that the lute duets on p.â•‹86 were also composed c.â•‹1638 (see Chapter 3). Assuming then that the main five-part sequence was entered sometime after the music for the Prince d’Amour (i.e. late 1635) but before Britannia Triumphans, we can tentatively date the composition of the main five-part sequence to c.â•‹1636–8. On the verso side of the page containing the crossed-out Tomkins elegy Lawes entered the six-part In Nomine in c {99}, suggesting that it also dates to around late 1638. The In Nomine finishes half-way down p.â•‹105; on the second half of that page Lawes began another (unidentified) piece: Example 5.5. The clefs, g2–c2–c4, and position on the page (one unused stave between this and the previous piece, two unused staves below it) suggest that it may have been planned in five parts. The clefs do not, however, correspond to those used otherwise used by Lawes. He uses g2–g2–c3–c4–F4 clefs throughout the five-part pieces (with the exception of Fantazias {68–9}, g2–g2–c3–c3–F4); the six-part pieces all use g2–g2–c2–c3–F4– F4. The clefs correspond to those in many of Ferrabosco II’s four-part pieces, g2– c2–c4–F4 (suggesting a Tr–T–T–B viol consort).45 Whatever the case, this gives us a strong indication that Lawes composed from the top voice(s) down or entry by entry. On p.â•‹106 is the opening of a setting of Psalm 71 for three voices and (unfigured) organ continuo.46 Lawes informs us that he took his text from ‘Mr Sands’↜, i.e. George Sandys’s Paraphrase upon the Psalms and Hymns dispersed throughout the Old and New Testaments, first published in 1636. The psalm text is given only 45 See Alfonso Ferrabosco the Younger: Four-Part Fantasias for Viols, ed. A. Ashbee

and B. Bellingham, MBâ•‹62 (1992).

46 Edition: LawesCVM3, 235–8. The continuo is written on a single bass stave and

labelled ‘Thorough Base’↜. It provides a bass line throughout (sometimes with a tenor-range line), which sometimes doubles (or gives a simplified version of) the lowest vocal part but contains much independent material.

LAWES.indb 164

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

                 

165

Example 5.5╇ Lawes, incomplete, crossed-out [four-part?] piece:

         

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹105

 

 

 

 

           

 

 

 

         

 

                          

                          [sic] [sic]                                              [erased] [erased]                                     

                  

 

     

 

 

 

 

         

 

               

               

     

in incipits and there are many signs of revisions, indicating that this was a compositional draft; it is crossed out and now lacks the ending, as at least three pages were abstracted following p.â•‹106. The Sandys attribution dates this piece to c.â•‹1636. Sandys’s volume was reprinted in 1638, in a folio edition that included tunes with ‘a thorow Base, for Voice, or Instrument’ by Henry Lawes.47 In the 1638 edition Sandys divided the text into three ‘parts’ (as he did throughout the volume).48 Lawes titled his setting as being of the ‘First Part’↜, which suggests that he was working from the folio edition (or closely related source), perhaps encouraged by his brother’s involvement. This dates the piece to c.â•‹1638.49 The six-part consorts at the start of B.2 are more difficult to date. Pinto suggests they were added after those in B.3 when Lawes ran out of room. I argued in Chapter 2 that B.3 was compiled roughly in the order it survives (probably beginning towards the end of 1638), which implies that Lawes did not run out of room. Some 47 One tune is assigned to all verses in the same metre. It has been suggested that

these pieces were ‘probably for performance by the Chapel Royal’: J. Ellison, ‘Sandys, George’↜, ODNB (accessed 29 January 2009). See also RobinsonCP.

48 In the print it is set to the tune for Psalm 34. 49 There are settings of almost 60 Sandys texts in Choice Psalmes by both William and

Henry: see also, RobinsonCP.

LAWES.indb 165

19/03/2010 10:58

166

the consort music of william lawes

aspects of Lawes’s hand (discussed below) suggest that the six-part pieces at the start of B.2 had already been entered (even in part) when Lawes came to compose the music for Britannia Triumphans. Thus, I suggest that Lawes composed the bulk of the five- and six-part pieces between c.â•‹1636 and 1639. This reinforces Pinto’s assertion that at least some of the six-part pieces were composed at the same time as the five-part pieces (Table 5.1).50 Table 5.1╇ Summary of proposed chronology of Lawes’s viol consorts in GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. B.2–3 4-part

5-part

6-part

Source Suggested dates

{108–13}

{68}, {69}

B.2 c.â•‹1634–5

{71}, {72}, {70}, {73}, {74}, {76}, {75}, {77}, {78}, {79}, {80}, {81}, {82}, {81}, {83}

B.2 c.â•‹1636–8 {97}, {98}, {94}, {96}, {95}

B.2 by end of 1637

{99}

B.2 c. late 1638

{87}, {88}, {89}, {85}, {84}, {86}, {91}, {92}, {90}, {93}

B.3 c. late 1638 to 1639

T

he only source of Lawes’s viol consort organ parts is D.229.51 They appear to have been compiled in a similar order to the scorebooks, but not at the same time. There are two main reasons for thinking this is so. First, there is the argument (presented in Chapter 2) that the function of D.229 changed over time from the ‘formal’ presentation style of the fantasia-suites and bass viol suites to the ‘informal’ and ‘compositional’ styles of the harp consorts and viol consorts. Second, the viol consort parts in D.229 largely follow the order in which they are found in the scorebooks. The organ parts ‘seem to have been added after the other autograph sources (including [MS 17798]) were complete; most of the signs of alterations to note values in them have no counterparts [in D.229]’↜.52 50 See PintoMVC; PintoFyV. 51 The only other source to refer to an organ part is MSS 29410–15, e.g. ‘5. p.ts of Mr

Will: Lawes Fantazies and aires to the Organn’ (MS 29410, fol.â•‹2r). The six-part Â�section is similarly titled but without reference to the organ.

52 LawesCS, xv; also PintoFyV, 94. The same can also be said of the six-part pieces:

e.g. in the six-part Fantasy {90} in F Lawes again halved the note-values in the scorebook, B.3, but the organ part in D.229 shows no such signs of alteration: see LawesCS, xxiii and PintoFyV, 122–3.

LAWES.indb 166

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

167

All the five-part pieces appear to have been added to D.229 around the same time, and with one exception follow the order found in B.2 (cf. the inventories in Appendix 1). First there are the two early fantasias in g {68–9}. The next five-part consorts in B.2 are the suite in a {71, 72 and 73}. In B.2 the last two pieces are interrupted by Aire {70} from the preceding suite in g. In D.229 Lawes added {70} to the suite in g, followed by the suite in a. As previously mentioned, a lengthy section in Fantazia {71} was crossed out in both B.2 and D.229; there is no sign of the omitted section in later sources.53 The page containing Fantazia {71} in MS 17798 is a replacement, which suggests that before the collection circulated this manuscript set also contained the excised section. B.2 and D.229 continue with the five-part suite in c. Again, D.229 slightly revises the order found in the scorebook: {74, 76, 75, 77} to {74, 75, 76, 77}.54 The next two suites – in F and C, {78–83} – are in the same order in scorebook and organbook. In B.2 Lawes began the Fantasy in C {81} on p.â•‹69 and completed it on pp.â•‹72–4, with the five-part pavan in C entered on the intervening pages. The two leaves (i.e. containing pp.â•‹69–72) were evidently joined; whether they were unopened or simply stuck together is unclear, the heaviness of the paper could have allowed this solecism go unnoticed. It is likely that Lawes only realized that several pages had been skipped after he had entered the Fantazy. Into these skipped pages he entered the pavan. (This also seems to have happened in B.3, where Royall Consort Corant {18} was begun on p.â•‹75 and continued on p.â•‹78, with two pieces entered in between.) Thus, Lawes appears to have worked out the organ part for the five-part pieces by moving systematically through B.2, after the string scores of (at least) the five-part sequence as a whole were complete. The last viol consort piece in B.2 is the six-part In Nomine in c {99}, pp.â•‹102–5. This is also the next piece in D.229 after the five-part pieces; it heads the main sequence of six-part pieces on folsâ•‹58v–51v (INV.). The In Nomine is, however, followed in D.229 by the suite in g {84–6}, after which Lawes entered Aire {100} in c and the suites in C {87, 89, 88} and F {91, 90, 92, 93}. The rest of the six-part suite in c, probably added after the In Nomine, is found at the start of B.2 (see below). After In Nomine {99}, the string scores are found in B.3, which opens with the suite in C in a slightly different order to that in D.229 {87, 88, 89}. In B.3 the opening suite in C is followed by the suites in g and F, both in slightly different orders to D.229, {85, 84, 86} and {91, 92, 90} respectively. Aire {100} is not found in either autograph scorebook (but is in D.229, MS 17798, and non-autograph sources). Its position in 53 See LawesCS, xix. Pinto (PintoFyV, 79) notes the resemblance of this passage to the

six-part fantasias in C {87} and c {97}. The omitted section is given in LawesSCM, 15–16.

54 For a discussion of this set, see PintoFyV, 80–7.

LAWES.indb 167

19/03/2010 10:58

168

the consort music of william lawes

D.229 suggests that it may originally have occupied one of the pages abstracted from B.3 (either after p.â•‹18 or before p.â•‹1). The first six-part sequence in D.229 (folsâ•‹70r–67v (INV.)) appears to have been added after the main five-part sequence but before some of the second sixpart sequence (see below). The corresponding string scores of the first six-part sequence is found at the start of B.2, in the same order as in D.229 {97, 98, 94, 96, 95}. In D.229 the sequence was begun by a second person, who entered the first and most of the second fantasia in c, {97, 98}. (The end of {98} is missing from B.2, which finishes mid-way through bar 58; the next page was removed at some point. The end of {98} would only have taken up half a page, leaving enough room for a piece the length of Aire {100}.) As we saw in Chapter 2, David Pinto convincingly suggested that this copyist may have been Giles Tomkins. It is difficult nevertheless to explain the presence of the ‘Tomkins copyist’↜. He appears to have worked closely with Lawes, who titled the pieces, finished the second and signed his name to both. It is unclear why Lawes finished-off the second fantasia (from bar 24); it may simply be that he decided on an independent organ part for the second half of the piece. Lawes also numbered the pieces ‘1’ and ‘2’↜, which simply refers to their position within the manuscript; the pieces after them are not numbered. Whether the Tomkins copyist was working under Lawes’s supervision is unclear, but the implication is that he was briefly responsible for making out the organ scores. The parts entered by the Tomkins copyist are largely a reduction of the string scores and incorporate little independent material. Assuming that these viol consorts were performed at court, Tomkins would most likely have been the accompanying organist, which would explain why the task fell to him; it also explains the inclusion of several unmanageable stretches, i.e. he was used to accompanying from scores, adapting the material in front of him in performance. After completion of {98} Lawes seems to have begun working out the organ part for the suite in B↜b, beginning with {94}. However, at the top of fol.â•‹68v (INV.) – where the B↜b suite begins – we find the last part of the third strain of Aire {89} in C crossed out. This is in the same ink as the B↜b pieces, which suggests that they were entered around the same time. Although the binding of the manuscript makes evidence of an abstracted page impossible to see, it is the only plausible answer.55 This implies that at least one of the six-part pieces in C, but probably more, was originally in this portion of the manuscript. For whatever reason, the page containing much of the Aire was removed, the end of the piece (on fol.â•‹68v (INV.)) crossed out, and below it was begun the Fantazia in B↜b followed by the In Nomine. Another possibility does emerge: Aire {89} and the pieces in B↜b were already in place before the Tomkins copyist began work on {97–8}, the leaf Â�containing Aire 55 It does not seem to have been caused by a transposed bifolium.

LAWES.indb 168

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

169

Fig.╋5.1╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229, fol.╋67r (INV.), detail

{89} was then excised, with {89} later re-entered in the main six-part sequence. This may have been done precisely to follow the layout of the pieces in the scorebooks (cf. the inventories of D.229 and B.2–3 given in Appendix 1). The last piece in B↜b, Aire {95}, was written over a large form of Lawes’s signature at the end of the Inominy on fol.â•‹67r (INV.) (Fig.â•‹5.1). This strongly suggests that the five-part Fantazy in g {68} was already entered on the next page before the suite in B↜b was completed, and that Aire {95} was an afterthought. It is worth noting that Aire {95} begins on a verso leaf in B.2: Lawes may have entered the In Nomine in D.229 and having forgotten about Aire {95} wrote his signature. Upon realizing his error (perhaps after turning the page of the scorebook) he squashed in the Aire over his signature. It is strange that the Tomkins copyist began this six-part sequence at this point in the manuscript. The first three pieces of the second six-part sequence were probably already entered into D.229 by this time. This is suggested by the change in bass clef in the fourth piece of the main six-part sequence. The last nine pieces were all written using the large ‘2’ bass clef, also found in the harp consort sequence (D.229 and D.238; see Chapter 2, Fig.â•‹2.16a); both sets of pieces were entered using the same ink. This apparently late clef is also found throughout B.3, in most of the six-part pieces in GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798, and MS 31432 (see Chapter 2). The clef, combined with the ink, strongly suggests that these pieces {88, 91, 90, 92, 93}

LAWES.indb 169

19/03/2010 10:58

170

the consort music of william lawes

were the last viol consort pieces to be added to D.229, but that they were entered before the harp parts, mirroring the structure of the scorebooks. Even if the first three pieces of the main six-part sequence were not in place, one wonders why the Tomkins copyist returned to the limited space near the end of the manuscript (between the bass viol suites and the five-part suites) when he could simply have continued making out the organ part in the unused pages after the six-part suite in F, preserving the sequence of six-part pieces. The six-part suite in F ends on fol.â•‹51v (INV.), and folsâ•‹36v–51r are unused. Pinto has suggested that the ‘lack of adjustments’ in the suite in c {97–9} may indicate that Lawes ‘had reached a new impressive level of certainty’↜, or that this, taken with the presence of the Tomkins copyist, could indicate ‘that time was running out for the composer for whatever reason, and that further revision might have taken place under the right circumstances’↜.56 One is inclined to opt for the first suggestion. Fantazia {97} is a remarkable piece, and one of Lawes’s finest achievements, but this does not necessarily imply that it was one of his last. The fantasia is in three main sections. The first (bars 1–21) is based on a theme also found in his setting of penitential Psalm 6;57 there is nothing to suggest that this setting postdates the vocal setting, based on Sandys’s 1638 text. The section ends with a perfect cadence on the tonic major, from which a new theme flows through brief tonic arpeggiations (bar 21); the descending crotchet theme quickly brings us to the relative major. The theme is treated imitatively by each of the voices before arriving back in c for the final two bars of the section. The third and final section (35–42) is a slow-moving coda full of chromaticisms; it begins on the dominant with a repeated-note motive exposed in a three-part texture (Tr1, T2, B1).58 Although the suite in c contains fewer corrections or revisions than many of the viol consorts it is not entirely free of them, especially Fantazia {98}. The pieces in B↜b that follow the suite in c in B.2 are full of emendations indicating that Lawes had both time and circumstance for revision, where necessary. For example, roughly half-way through the In Nomine Lawes revised the counterpoints to the cantus (in Tr2) to include more divisions; the original lines in Treble 1 and Tenors 1–2 were scraped off (leaving heavy indentations in the manuscript) and written over: the original lines are only partly distinguishable, see Example 5.6.59 This was 56 PintoFyV, 132. 57 Identified by Pinto: PintoMVC, 17, and PintoFyV, 133–4. 58 LawesCS, 136–7. 59 The reconstruction in Example 5.6 was done without the aid of UV-light etc. Sug-

gested notes are based on visible noteheads and stems. Most note values are estimates; indistinguishable rhythms are given as filled-in noteheads without stems. Alignment of notes/noteheads reflects that in Lawes’s score as closely as possible;

LAWES.indb 170

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

171

evidently done close to the time of composition as the ink is the same throughout the piece. The crossed-out ending of the Aire {89} begins in the same place as (and is identical in length to) the final stave of the complete piece on folsâ•‹55r–54v (INV.), suggesting that the complete version is a close reproduction of the ‘original’↜. The complete version is three (two-stave) systems long (folsâ•‹55r–54v (INV.)), implying that the piece was originally begun half-way down the abstracted page (before fol.â•‹68v (INV.)). This would have left ample room for the preceding fantasia to have also been on this abstracted page. There may have been some delay between the first entry of Aire {89} and its replacement. In the first instance it was entered using the small bass clef; the complete version is one of the nine pieces added using the large bass clef. That said, Lawes changed between the two bass clefs within a single piece in MS 31432 (folsâ•‹60r–60v). There is only one textual change in {89} from folsâ•‹68v to 54v (INV.): the first half of the right hand of bar 53 (originally doubling T1) was slightly revised to give only the harmony notes underlying the quaver figuration. Whatever the reason behind the displacement of the suite in C, it implies that at least some of the six-part suite in C was in place in the scorebooks before the organ parts for the first six-part sequence in D.229 were made out. This could in turn imply that the six-part pieces at the start of B.2 were composed after those in B.3, although this is not supported by the rest of the evidence. More likely (as with the five-part pieces), Lawes waited until most, if not all, of the six-part pieces were composed before working out the organ accompaniments.60 At the start of each of each of the viol consorts in B.2, except In Nomine {99}, there is a short horizontal short line (c.â•‹1–2â•‹mm) below the lowest line of the top stave.61 The marks are contemporary and found nowhere else in the autographs (see Chapter 2, Fig.â•‹2.1d, staves 1–2 of Fantazia {98}). Their meaning is unclear. They may represent a checking shorthand, perhaps signifying that parts had been copied out. One suspects that they refer to the organ part; if they were for string parts we would perhaps expect to see them elsewhere. It is worth noting that these pieces are the only ones in the scorebooks requiring an accompaniment based largely on the string scores. Elsewhere, the keyboard/harp accompaniments are largely obbligato and would need to be composed with the string parts rather than the original manuscript has pre-ruled barlines and vertical alignment is not always exact. 60 If an organist was using Lawes’s scorebooks to accompany, even occasionally, it

may explain why Lawes continued to revise the draft scores.

61 On pp.â•‹3 (Fantazia {98}) and 7 (Fantazia {94}) and there is a single mark below

each of the top two staves; on p. 10 (In Nomine {96}) there are two parallel marks below the top stave. For Fantasy {81} the mark is found on p. 74 (top stave) where the piece is continued. The significance, if any, of these variants is undetermined.

LAWES.indb 171

19/03/2010 10:58

172

the consort music of william lawes Example 5.6╇ In Nomine {96}, bars 29–35 [57–70]: partly recovered lines from GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹12

       29

[Treble 1 original] [TREBLE 1]

[TREBLE 2] [Tenor 1 original] [TENOR 1] [Tenor 2 original] [TENOR 2] [BASSES 1 and 2]

               

  





 ?



      

  

  

?



 



 



             

 

       

 

 



 

                       





                     

        31





            

                                                               









                      

worked out from them. The marked pieces are found in sequence from folsâ•‹70r– 59r (INV.) in D.229. Of course this sequence is interrupted by {89}, removed from that section; the string score of {89} in B.3 contains no such markings. The marks are not found in In Nomine {99} (the last viol consort piece in B.2) nor anywhere in B.3, indicating either that the shorthand system or the project it represents was abandoned.

LAWES.indb 172

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts

       

    

34

  

  





    











      

 

 



  



 

 







  

  







 





  



 

      



      

173



    



    



        

Although the organ accompaniments Lawes composed for the viol consorts largely fulfil a doubling function, one can observe throughout the suites an increasingly independent role for the organ. In a 1976 article, Pinto identified ‘not a few instances where the organ has vital independent material that makes performance without it meaningless’; the examples given are two six-part fantasias: {93} in F, bars 28–31, and {85} in g (the series of accompanied duets), bars 20–40, and the five-part pavan in C {82}, bars 28–30.62 ‘Meaningless’ perhaps overstates the case slightly, but these passages suggest that as his exploration of the genre continued, Lawes on occasion composed the string scores with independent organ material in his head. Increasingly one can see greater freedom for the organ within this traditional role, especially in the six-part pieces.63 It seems significant that this increased freedom is more pronounced in the second sequence, although it must be reiterated that two of the first sequence pieces were added by the Â�Tomkins copyÂ�ist, so we cannot take them as conclusive evidence of Lawes’s intentions. NeverÂ�theless, Lawes evidently worked closely with the copyist which gives them a good degree of ‘authority’↜. Although Lawes’s scorebooks provide little irrefutable evidence of the order in which they were compiled, it is unlikely they were compiled in quite the hapÂ�hazard 62 See PintoAS, 14; the last example is given as Fig.â•‹1 but is mislabelled as from suite

IV in F.

63 See the discussions in PintoMVC and PintoFyV.

LAWES.indb 173

19/03/2010 10:58

174

the consort music of william lawes Table 5.2╇ Proposed order of copying for Lawes’s viol consorts in GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229 Folios (INV.) No. Title

Key

VdGS Comments

[Five-part viol consorts] 66v–66r ‘Fantazy’ 66r–65v ‘Playnesong’ 65r ‘Aire’ 65r–64v ‘Fantazy’ 64r–63v ‘Fantazy’ 63v ‘Aire’ 63r–62v ‘Fantazy’ 62v ‘Aire’ 62r ‘Pauen’ 61v ‘Aire’

g g g a a a c c c c

{68} {69} {70} {71} {72} {73} {74} {75} {76} {77}

61v–61r

‘Fantazy’

F

{78}

60v 60r 60r–59v

‘Pauen’ ‘Aire’ ‘Fantazy’

F F C

{79} {80} {81}

59v–59r 59r

‘Pauen’ ‘Aire’

C C

{82} {83}

Inner parts in bars 1–2 of fol.â•‹59v added in a different ink

fashion previously suggested.64 For example, there is no evidence that Lawes ran out of room; none of the pieces are squashed in, a typical sign that a compiler worked backwards and inaccurately estimated the space required. This is less of a problem when copying than when composing. The evidence strongly suggests that Lawes used B.2–3 for compositional drafts, in which case estimating the amount of pages required would be reasonably difficult, especially with large-scale contraÂ� puntal pieces. According to the chronology tentatively suggested above, he began composition of the viol consorts in earnest c.â•‹1636; the project appears to have been complete (in the scorebooks) by c.â•‹1639. He appears to have worked out the organ parts in the rough order they are found in both scorebooks, beginning with the five-part pieces followed by the six-part suites in g, c and B↜b, ending with the last five pieces of the main six-part sequence. The organ parts were evidently worked out after much, if not all, of the string scores had been composed, and after 64 See, for example, PintoFyV.

LAWES.indb 174

19/03/2010 10:58

the viol consorts Folios (INV.) No. Title

Key

175

VdGS Comments

[Six-part viol consorts] 58v–58r ‘Inominy’ 58r–57v ‘Pauen’ 57r–56v ‘Fantazy’

c g g

{99} {84} {85}

70r 69v–69r

‘1’ ‘Fantazia’ ‘2’ ‘Fantazia’

c c

{97} {98}

68v 68v–68r 67v–67r 67r

[Aire] ‘Fantazia’ ‘Inominy’ ‘Aire’

C B↜b B↜b B↜b

{89} {94} {96} {95}

56r 55v 55r–54v 54v 54r–53v 53v 53r–52v 52v 52r–51v

‘Aire’ ‘Aire’ ‘Fantazy’ ‘Aire’a ‘Fantazy’ ‘Aire’ ‘Fantazy’ ‘Aire’ ‘Fantazy’

g c C C C F F F F

{86} {100} {87} {89} {88} {91} {90} {92} {93}

Hand D Hand D/Lawes

Note: Further copying stages implied by changes in ink colour are indicated by grey bars. a Originally titled ‘Fantazy’↜. Lawes erased this and over it wrote ‘Aire’↜.

intermediary sources (such as MS 17798) had been copied. As we saw in Chapter 2, MS 17798 was apparently copied in two main stages – first the five-part pieces then the six-part pieces – demonstrated by the change in ink and the change from the small to large bass clef, which reinforces the suggestion that D.229 was compiled in a similar manner.

T

he central issue of chronology forces us to consider briefly two other important questions: why did Lawes compose these pieces, and for whom?65 The proposed chronology suggests that they were mostly composed in the years following Lawes’s royal appointment, a time when the court was becoming more isolated and inward-looking. What little we know of the music performed at Charles’s court suggests that the court repertoire approached something like a modern canon of favoured musical works. This is demonstrated by the 1635 order 65 The issue is discussed in PintoFyV, passim.

LAWES.indb 175

19/03/2010 10:58

176

the consort music of william lawes

to recopy ‘a whole sett of Musicke Bookes … wth all Coperaries & Orlando Gibbons theire Musique, by his Mats speciall Comand’↜.66 Lawes himself contributed to this ‘canon’ through his viol consorts and fantasia-suites, which for all their innovations followed his predecessors in outward guise, if in little else. Lawes was a royal servant subject to the whims and tastes of the King. It is easy to imagine Charles playing an active role in influencing the kind of music composed and performed at court, especially when it came to chamber music. In this context one can perhaps see a motive for Lawes composing in almost every form used by Coprario. Of course, Coprario’s influence on Lawes was strong in the teacher-student sense, but Coprario’s music was also highly popular at court even if some of the forms were rapidly becoming old-fashioned by the early 1630s. Ability to contribute music in recognizable forms such as viol consorts and fantasia-suites would have been advantageous in securing a court post in the 1630s. Nevertheless, the court tastes were not entirely restrictive. New genres such as the Royall Consort and the harp consorts were evidently in demand alongside compositions in recognizable forms. The fact that Lawes was still exploring the viol consort in the late 1630s demonstrates a transition towards a more audience-centred music at court. As we shall see in the remaining chapters, this transition was the fundamental, defining characteristic of Lawes’s consort music during the 1630s, but it was multi-faceted: these contrapuntal consorts were composed hand-in-hand with the exuberant divisions of the later harp consorts. In the five- and six-part viol consorts we see strong influences of the dance suite in the juxtaposition of contrapuntal fantasy with dance forms, a juxtaposition devised for mixed consorts that included violin: the transference of this idea to the viol consort was significant. One can see possible models in the five-part pavan–alman pairs by Ferrabosco and in the fantasy–alman pairs of Peerson, but Lawes was the first to attempt to realize the implications of the dance suite in the viol consort tradition. If bolder and grander in conception, they are governed by a similar impetus shown in his fantasia-suites composed several years earlier. Both genres demonstrate Lawes’s masterful subversion of tradition and the forward-looking nature of the cultural milieu for which they were created.

66 RECM, iii. 150.

LAWES.indb 176

19/03/2010 10:58

chapter 6

The Fantasia-Suites

‘F

antasia-suite’ is a relatively modern term, first brought into common currency by Helen Joy Sleeper in the 1930s to describe a somewhat hybrid genre first developed at the English court by John Coprario.1 The model established by Coprario consisted of three movements: a fantasia, an alman and a galliard (usually ending with a common-time ‘close’), scored for one or two violins, bass viol and organ. Twenty-three fantasia-suites by Coprario survive complete: fifteen for one violin, eight for two.2 They appear to have been composed in the household of Prince Charles (later Charles I) in the early 1620s, and represent several important developments in the history of English consort music. First, the grouping together of the movements was new, and influenced the development of the dance suite. Second, they are the first English contrapuntal pieces to specify the violin, expanding the traditional use of the instrument beyond dance music. Third, they are among the first English consort pieces to include independent parts for organ: especially in the fantasias for one violin, the organ goes beyond the traditional role of doubling the strings by containing extra melodic and harmonic material; indeed, each fantasia begins with the organ, and many have solo interludes. Despite their historical importance, however, Coprario’s fantasia-suites are somewhat uneven in quality, a fact reflected by the lack of a complete modern recording. No autographs are known for Coprario’s suites. The sources suggest that he composed the one-violin suites with a fully written-out organ part. GB-Lbl, MS R.M.24.k.3, an organbook of court provenance copied c.â•‹1625, contains such an organ part;3 in Coprario’s suites the bass viol mostly doubles the organ bass and may not have been given a separate stave in his original score. The organ parts for the two-violin suites are more problematic.4 The sources suggest that Coprario wrote the suites in a three-stave string score, with essential material for organ ╇ 1 C. D. S. Field, ‘Review: Coprario: Fantasia-Suites, ed. R. Charteris’↜, ML 66 (1985),

65–7; FieldFR, 239 n.â•‹21.

╇ 2 John Coprario: Fantasia-Suites, ed. R. Charteris, MB╋46 (1980). Only the organ part

for a further one-violin suite survives.

╇ 3 See C. D. S. Field, ‘Stephen Bing’s Copies of Coprario Fantasia-Suites’↜, EM 27

(1999), 311–17.

╇ 4 This issue is discussed in Coprario: Fantasia-Suites, Introduction; see also Field’s

review in ML.

LAWES.indb 177

19/03/2010 10:58

178

the consort music of william lawes

given in cues: the manner in which the first suite is preserved in R.M.24.k.3. This was practical because in the two-violin suites the organ doubles the strings to a greater extent. As Christopher Field has noted, ‘Such “compressed” scores contained all the essential information an organist needed. They could be used to play from, and they were the basis from which all “realized” two-stave organ parts were derived’↜.5 Examples of such ‘realized’ organ parts for the two-violin suites are those made out by John Jenkins for Nicholas Le Strange (GB-Lbl, Add. MS 23779), apparently made from a lost autograph manuscript belonging to Coprario’s executor Richard Ligon. Ligon’s manuscript seems to have been a compressed score.6 According to the oft-quoted Playford anecdote, Coprario’s one-violin suites were particularly favoured by Charles I,↜7 which may partly explain the popularity of the fantasia-suite into the second quarter of the century. Of the next generation of composers, Lawes and Jenkins were the most significant contributors. Both were heavily influenced by Coprario.8 Lawes composed sixteen fantasia-suites {114–61}, eight suites for each scoring.9 Each suite follows Coprario’s three-movement plan; Lawes, however, adopted a more systematic tonal approach. Each scoring set is divided into eight keys, ascending through the Gamut, g/G, a/C, d/D, d/D: the intention was, perhaps, to be able to play them individually, as pairs or as a complete set. Coprario had a well-enough developed sense of major–minor tonality and key relationships, but he had also a random approach to key selection. His suites are in the following tonics: g, g, G, G, C, a, A, D, C, C, C, d, d, D, D.10 Three suites have almans in the relative minor; suite 7 for two violins has a fantasia in d, an alman in D (with a close in d) and a galliard in D. Lawes avoided these kinds of larger-scale tonal relationships, as well as Coprario’s fondness for modulating between tonic major and minor keys within movements. Scholars generally agree that Lawes’s fantasia-suites are early works, although estimates of an approximate date of composition vary, from the mid-1620s to ╇ 5 Field, ‘Bing’s Copies’↜, 314. ╇ 6 See Coprario: Fantasia-Suites; Field, ‘Bing’s Copies’↜. ╇ 7 J. Playford, A Brief Introduction to the Skill of Musick (4/1664), p.â•‹[xiii]. ╇ 8 For connections between the fantasia-suites of Coprario and Lawes, see FieldFR;

for Coprario and Jenkins, see AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹1.

╇ 9 Bar nos.╋correspond to LawesFS. Six of the suites are in LawesSCM: where bar-

numbers differ the LawesSCM numbering is given in square brackets. Although dated in places, for excellent stylistic overviews of the fantasia-suite, see J. T. Johnson, ‘The English Fantasia-Suite, c.â•‹1620–1660’ (PhD diss., University of California, Berkeley, 1971), ch.â•‹4, esp. 147–230 for Coprario, Lawes and Jenkins; and C. D. S. Field, ‘The English Consort Suite of the Seventeenth Century’ (PhD diss., Oxford University, 1970).

10 The incomplete suite is in C.

LAWES.indb 178

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites Example 6.1╇ Lawes, Fantazia {114}, bars 1–9 [1–18]

       

    



 

      4

  

            

     7

      

 















                                          

   

           



  

 

                                   

 



                

 

   









  

      



179





  

            





 





               

mid-1630s (see below). Some of the fantasia-suite movements can regarded, on stylistic grounds, as reasonably early compositions. Modulations are less adventurous than in some of the viol consorts, for example. Certainly some of the fantasias are simpler in conception than others. The first fantasia for one-violin in g {114} is probably the most conservative of the one-violin suites; in it we can hear the influence of Coprario, especially in the opening bars (Example 6.1).11 Each new section in Fantazia {114} is preceded by a short organ solo and cadence. Lawes flows from one theme to the next without exhausting any of them, often using quite modal harmonies. He also incorporates lots of subtle division-writing into the contrapuntal fabric, especially between the left hand of the organ and the 11 All examples of Lawes’s fantasia-suites are transcribed from GB-Ob, MSS Mus.

Sch. D.238–40 and D.229, unless stated otherwise.

LAWES.indb 179

19/03/2010 10:58

180

the consort music of william lawes

bass viol; the divisions are well worked into the composition, a feature that can be seen throughout much of his later music. The middle section (bars 25–39) contains much dissonant writing, again reminiscent of Coprario but also quite typical of Lawes’s often pungent dissonances in minor mode movements Â�(Example 6.2). Throughout, the organ plays an important role in the musical argument by providing the harmonic basis, the bass line is often embellished by the bass viol. These roles are briefly interchanged at bar 31, an extended perfect cadence in B↜b where the descending semiquaver run in the bass viol is concluded in the organ. Lawes’s use of chromaticism is also quite assured; one example will serve for several: in bars 32–8 after cadencing in B↜b he shifts chromatically back to the tonic which is then briefly flavoured with the hint of f before resolutely cadencing back on the tonic (Example 6.2). Example 6.2╇ Lawes, Fantazia {114}, bars 29–39 [57–76]

   4       29

     4  

                                           

         4                      4

                   31

      

                      

      

      

 

35

  





    



  

      





 

 



  



       





                          

       

           

  

   

                                                

LAWES.indb 180

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

181

By contrast, the second fantasia, in G {117}, is dominated by a single idea, the rising scale (Example 6.3a). Here Lawes follows a similar formal plan to the first fantasia: it too opens with the organ answered by the violin, then the bass viol. This is less sectional than the preceding fantasia, and the harmonies are much more straightforward and less dissonant (as is often the case in the major mode pieces). Gone are the interwoven divisions, but once again we can hear the concertante interplay between violin and viol. In the first half of the fantasia the strings are often used in hocket-like exchanges building up to a sustained tutti (bars 28–37) before the strings drop out for an organ interlude at bars 38–41. The final section begins at bar 42 with another variant of the rising scale motif in imitation. The basic motif remains prominent until the end, although a repeated-note figure is also introduced at bar 46 (Example 6.3b). In the two-violin suites we can hear something of the close writing for two violins found in the Royall Consort; the fantasia-suites, however, do not have the very tight canonic writing or restricted rhythms in phrases found in the Royall Consort. There is no way of telling whether there was any gap between composition of the suites for one and two violins; none is evident from the sources. Lawes’s familiarity with Coprario’s suites, not to mention their tonal symmetry, suggests that the suites were conceived, if not composed, as a (sixteen-suite) unit. The first fantasia, {138}, opens with a repeated-note theme remarkably similar to that which

(a)

   

Example 6.3╇ Lawes, Fantazia {117}: (a) bars 1–8; (b, overleaf) bars 38–49

 





  





      



     

       

    

   

      







   

   

                       5

                                      

LAWES.indb 181

19/03/2010 10:58

182

the consort music of william lawes

   4



38

(b)





  4



41

 

   



   

    44



 



 

   

 

          

 

                         



         



       



    

     

                                    





   4               4

   



 

   

                

     

  

      



 



     





 

47                                                                                        

opens Fantazia {114} (Example 6.4).12 The repeated-note opening is then answered by an arpeggiated tonic chord; the theme is first heard in the first violin reinforced by the organ. The similarity of the opening themes is undoubtedly intentional, and reflects, perhaps, Lawes’s strengthening of the existing tonal symmetry of the collection. 12 In all the two-violin suites in D.229 the organ right hand is notated in a c2 clef.

LAWES.indb 182

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

            

        

Example 6.4╇ Lawes, Fantazia {138}, bars 1–9 [1–18]

    





       



                     





  

    







       



                                

                       



7



 



                    

 





  



 



4

 

      





                   

  

183



  

   





 

       



  

     

                        

Perhaps the best illustration of the two-violin pieces is the sixth fantasia, in D {153}.13 The second half of the piece is notable for Lawes’s incorporation of divisions in the bass viol over an ascending tonic scale (itself an imitation of Violin 1). As the scale pattern is repeated in the bass Lawes introduces octave leaps over which the bass viol builds to a rapid division climax utilizing its upper range. In the autograph partbooks Lawes included a simplified version (no divisions) of the bass 13 See also LefkowitzWL, 115–18.

LAWES.indb 183

19/03/2010 10:58

184

the consort music of william lawes

viol part for bars 31–41.14 The evidence suggests that such refinements were late additions, presumably the result of performance; indeed, Lawes avoids extended divisions in all but one of the fantasias, Fantazia {135} (discussed below). In many ways Fantazia {153} is reminiscent of a Jacobean fantasia. In it, however, we hear a more Baroque harmonic language together with Lawes’s skilful use of instrumental interplay especially between the paired violins and bass viol (Example Â� 6.5). John Jenkins composed over seventy fantasia-suites and fantasia-air pairs for several combinations of instruments, generally designated in modern times as Groups I–VIII. Only the earliest fantasia-suites concern us here: Groups I (17 suites for treble, bass and organ) and II (10 suites for two trebles, bass and organ). Clearly modelled on Coprario’s suites, they seem to date from the 1630s and 1640s.15 They are relatively simple pieces, using the scorings and forms established by Coprario (and used by Lawes). Jenkins was, however, evidently keen to push the traditional boundaries of the genre by the inclusion of divisions in four of the pieces from Groups I and II (two in each); Coprario’s suites, while idiomatic, contain no virtuosic passages, nor, with the exception of a single fantasia (see below), do Lawes’s. Andrew Ashbee suggests that Jenkins Groups I–II ‘were played in the Derham and Le Strange households alongside the suites of Coprario, and perhaps also those of Lawes’↜.16 Elsewhere he cautions that ‘one senses that [Jenkins] had not really come into contact with the Lawes series (probably contemporary with his own), but only Coprario’s suites, when writing Groups I and II’↜.17 Jenkins’s copying activities mentioned earlier firmly establish his familiarity with Coprario’s suites. A direct link between the suites of Jenkins and Lawes is harder to establish. We know little about the activities of either man in the early 1630s, although The Triumph of Peace is an obvious point of contact. Jenkins is likely to have been at least an occasional visitor to London in the 1620s and 1630s. As The Triumph of Peace shows, he was connected to courtly music circles by at least late 1633. The following Roger North anecdote may date to around this time: Jenkins ‘once was brought to play upon the lyra viol afore King Charles I, as one that performed somewhat extraordinary; and after he had done the King sayd he did wonders upon an inconsiderable instrument’↜.18 14 LawesFS, 90. 15 For a detailed discussion, see AshbeeHM2. Group I are due to be published in the

MB series (ed. A. Ashbee), Group II are nos.â•‹1–10 of John Jenkins: Fantasia-Suites: I, ed. A. Ashbee, MBâ•‹78 (2001).

16 Jenkins: Fantasia-Suites: I, xxii. 17 AshbeeHM2, 28. 18 Roger North on Music, ed. J. Wilson (1959), 343–4. David Pinto has plausibly sug-

gested that Charles began to say ‘incomparable’↜, which came out as ‘inconsiderable’ due to his stammer: see D. Pinto, ‘Review: John Jenkins, Lyra Consorts, ed. F. Traficante’↜, ML 75 (1994), 129–31.

LAWES.indb 184

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites Example 6.5╇ Lawes, Fantazia {153}, bars 17–26 [34–53]

               4         4                     4              4                         4         

   

17

                                                                                20

                    23

 



    

 





 

  



   

        









          





                                                                               

      



185

                                              26

LAWES.indb 185

19/03/2010 10:58

186

the consort music of william lawes

Assuming that Lawes and Jenkins were acquainted by 1634, Lawes’s fantasiasuites may have partly inspired Jenkins to experiment with the genre. Indeed, as Ashbee has noted, Jenkins Groups I–II ‘contain interesting harmonic writing with imaginative organization of tonality, occasional progressions of a startling kind and augmented chords perhaps inspired by the works of William Lawes’↜.19 The earliest pieces, Group I, were composed on each of the tonics then in common use: F, g/G, a/A, B↜b, c/C, d/D and e/E, a similar but more extensive approach than that of Lawes. Lawes’s focus on the more traditional violin keys is indicative of regular access to court violinists. Jenkins was mostly employed in Â�country houses which necessitated a more pragmatic approach to scoring. He generally labelled the top parts ‘treble’ and composed in an idiom suitable for viol or violin; in the North household one suspects that the treble parts were played on viols, especially given Roger North’s testimony to his grandfather’s dislike of the violin.20 Two fantasias in particular from Jenkins Group I, {12} in d and {15} in D, seem to be related in some way to Lawes’s suites. Both are similar in form: opening fugal section, divisions, tripla section and close. Fantazia {15} begins with a ‘Lachrimae’ theme treated fugally in a solo organ introduction. Although settings of the ‘Lachrimae’ theme are commonplace in consort music of the period,21 the opening is remarkably similar to Lawes’s excellent Fantazia {129} from fantasia-suite no.â•‹6 (cf. Examples 6.6a and 6.6b). In Jenkins’s fantasia the opening leads to a rhythmicÂ� ally derived repeated-note figure introduced in the violin at bar 6. This kind of figure is commonly found in Lawes’s consort music (as is the figure in bars 9–10). Indeed, the opening section contains two further melodic motifs often encountered in Lawes’s consort music: the ascending stepwise figure followed by a downward leap in bar 2 (Organ, right hand);22 and the leaping figure at bars 9–10.23 The latter figure features prominently in Lawes’s Fantazia {135} in the build-up to the tripla section (cf. bars 61–7; Example 6.6c). This opening section lasts until bar 56, where the divisions begin (Example 6.6d). The divisions are introduced in imitation and continue until the tripla section (bar 49). This section serves as a graceful foil to the division section and leads to the cut-common time close, which begins 19 A. Ashbee, ‘Jenkins, John’↜, GMO (accessed 26 February 2009). 20 Peter Holman has demonstrated that ‘viol’ was sometimes used in a generic sense

meaning either viol or violin: see HolmanFTF, esp. 136–8.

21 One example: Lawes also used a ‘Lachrimae’ theme for the five-part Pavan in c

{76}, an apparent reworking of an earlier four-part version: see LawesCS, 30–2, and PintoFyV, 81–2.

22 For example, cf. LawesFS, 30 (Violin: bars 42–3, 46–9), 56 (Organ: bars 6, 13–14). 23 For example, cf. LawesFS, 72 (Organ: bars 7–9), 88 (Violin 2; Bass Viol; Organ: bars

1–3).

LAWES.indb 186

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

187

Example 6.6╇ (a) Jenkins, Fantazia {15} (Group I), bars 1–11: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. C.81, no.â•‹15; (b) Lawes, Fantazia {129}, opening; (c) Lawes, Fantazia {135}, bars 61–7; (d) Jenkins,

(a)

   



 

    



  

  

















                                              

     7

  



  



     

  

  

                                                       

                                                         10

LAWES.indb 187



                              



 







4







  



Fantazia {15} (Group I), bars 28–36

  



    



  

  

19/03/2010 10:58

188 (b)

the consort music of william lawes

   



    5



   

 



61

  4 

 

        

      4        4

    64



                                                         

   4  









                                                               

(c)



    

    





 

  



   



           

        



            









  

    

          

 

                                                                    

LAWES.indb 188

   

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

   4  28

(d)



   4



 



       4                 4  

 

       

  

189

            

  

   

                                                                             30

32                                                      

                                                           34

                                                       

                          

                     

                                                     



 

 

36

  

LAWES.indb 189







 

19/03/2010 10:58

190

the consort music of william lawes Example 6.7╇ (a) Jenkins, Fantazia {12} (Group I), bars 1–8:

(a)

      

   



  

    

   

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. C.81, no.â•‹12; (b) Lawes, Fantazia {144}, bars 1–8

   



    

    

 

 

 



 





  







  











   

    

5

  







     

   







    

 





    



 

     

    







 

 

 

   



by emphasizing the tonic minor. The organ continues to double the treble and bass throughout most of the divisions, even doubling the bass viol up an octave at bar 86, where it descants over the bowed treble. Jenkins’s Fantazia {12} follows the same formal pattern. It opens with a repeatednote figure; three of Lawes’s fantasia-suites begin with similar motives: Fantazias {114}, {138} and {144} (cf. Examples 6.1, 6.4 and 6.7a–b); such figures, however, are also relatively common, e.g. they are frequently found in Lawes’s fantasia-suites.24 Again the opening fugal section leads to paired divisions in the treble, bass viol, and organ, lasting until the tripla section (bar 74). The short and uneventful close also begins by emphasizing the parallel tonic. More importantly than thematic similarities, both Jenkins fantasias have strong parallels with another of Lawes’s fantasias, Fantazia {135}. Lawes’s Fantazia {135} from suite no.â•‹8 in D for one violin is often cited by commentators, although it is hardly typical of the collection.25 In it Lawes appears to be attempting something quite new. It is found with the rest of the fantasia-suites in the autograph partbooks (no.â•‹22 of the forty-eight-piece sequence in GB-Ob, MSS 24 See also Royall Consort fantasias discussed in Chapter 4, above. 25 For example, J. Freeman-Attwood, ‘Baroque Distractions: 17th-Century English

Instrumental Music is of a Quality We Have Yet to Appreciate’↜, MT 133 (1992), 174–8.

LAWES.indb 190

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

(b)

  







  





  4



    

     

 

  







        

 









 

 





    



  

                   













 





   

7







 



   



 

    











   



191



   

   

 



           

              

 

     

Mus. Sch. D.238–40 and D.229), but significantly is also found in score in GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2 (pp.â•‹76–81). The score comes immediately before the pieces for two bass viols and organ; no pages appear to have been abstracted either side of {135}.26 Christopher Field has noted that The lone presence of the fantasia [{135}] … in score in Mus. Sch. B.2, together with stylistic differences between it and other suites – the brilliant figuration 26 Several leaves were abstracted after p. 76, but this was apparently done before

entering Fantazia {135}.

LAWES.indb 191

19/03/2010 10:58

192

the consort music of william lawes Example 6.8╇ Lawes, Fantazia {135}, bars 69–75: comparison of GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.239 and B.2, violin parts

(Small notes: upper notes of organ, left hand, bars 69–70 are in D.229 but not in B.2) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.239        3 VIOLIN

BASS VIOL

   3

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2

       3   3 

ORGAN



 3 



  

 



  

    

                

                    

           



 



     

     

   

for violin and viol, the long tripla section – raise suspicion that it might have been composed after the rest of the group [of fantasia-suites], but there is nothing in the autograph partbooks to suggest that this was the case, and there are tell-tale signs in Mus. Sch. B.2 that Lawes’s score may have been copied from partbooks.27 David Pinto has suggested that this ‘single movement was copied some time after the other autograph parts had been made out’↜, noting that the B.2 version Â�‘discloses both omissions and additions in the organ part as well as eliminating glancing parallel octaves between lines I [Violin] and organ bass at bar 71’↜.28 Although the ‘glancing parallel octaves’ are in a score compiled from D.239 (Violin), D.240 (Bass Viol) and D.229 (Organ) but not in the B.2 score (Example 6.8), it does not necessarily follow that B.2 represents a revision post-dating the partbooks. On the contrary, as I argued in Chapter 2, Lawes’s scorebooks appear to contain compositional drafts. There would be little reason for Lawes to include the fantasia in one of these volumes purely for posterity or to correct fleeting consecutives. The consecutives simply seem have been an oversight. The quaver e" at the end of bar 71 could easily have been added for melodic reasons when the piece was copied into D.239, without realizing the harmonic implications. There are minimal differences between the B.2 score of Fantazia {135} and the autograph string parts. Most discrepancies are found between the organ parts, with several additions and omissions in both B.2 and D.229. Most common are additions found 27 FieldFR, 246 n.â•‹64; see also Field, ‘English Consort Suite’↜, 124–7. 28 LawesFS, 114.

LAWES.indb 192

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

193

in D.229 (usually as newly composed tenor-range parts). Fantazia {135} appears to have undergone revision of some kind, which seems to have been linked to Lawes’s increased preoccupation with division-writing (Example 6.9). Despite suggestions to the contrary, there are several indications that Fantazia {135} was not composed with the original fantasia-suite sequence; the evidence implies that it was composed later and added to the existing alman and galliard. It is impossible to tell whether Lawes was reworking an existing fantasia by incorporating divisions or whether he simply replaced it with Fantazia {135}. The fantasia defies easy simplification of the divisions, especially given the independence of the organ. A more likely solution is that Lawes took the opening theme as his starting point for recomposition. Of the fantasia-suite pieces in D.238–40 and D.229, it is the only one not to be copied using Lawes’s ‘formal’ presentation style (see Chapter 2). The decorative ending is the ‘informal’ style, and the extra lines written by Lawes near the end of the piece in D.229 are messy additions inconsistent with the style in the rest of this section of the manuscript. Although the initial evidence seems to suggest that no.â•‹22 (Fantazia {135}) was added later, there is no sign of abstractions or insertions in the partbooks: it is copied on the reverse sides of the pages containing nos.â•‹21 and 23. The shades of ink further suggest that Fantazia {135} was added to D.239–40 at a different time to the rest of the sequence. Throughout D.238–40 the inks in the various sections correspond. On folsâ•‹16v–17r the ink is a faded black; on folsâ•‹17v–18r (Fantazia {135}), it is brown/black, followed by a return to the ink of the previous folios on folsâ•‹18v–19r. The obvious conclusion to be drawn is that, for whatever reason, during the copying of the fantasia-suites into D.238–40 Lawes decided to revise Fantazia {135} while retaining the rest of the suite. After no.â•‹21 he appears to have left two pages for copying the revised version and continued with the copying of no.â•‹23 on the verso side of the next page. There are no obvious corresponding ink changes in D.229. NeverÂ�theÂ�less, it seems that Lawes again left two pages to copy no.â•‹22 and came back to the piece after the remainder of the fantasia-suite sequence was copied.29 It is significant that Fantazia {135} is the only piece of the D.229 fantasia-suite sequence to give the impression of running out of space. Towards the end of the piece Lawes squeezed 4/2 bars into the pre-ruled bars whereas previously he generally has only 2/2 bars in the same space; an extra bar was handwritten into the margin at the end of the second last stave. (Another line of enquiry must briefly be examined: is it possible that the eighth suite was not composed until it appears in B.2, i.e. that Lawes initially planned only seven suites for one violin? This seems highly unlikely. As noted, the alman and galliard were already copied before Lawes came to enter Â�Fantazia {135} 29 Lawes similarly left space for pieces to be copied in the Shirley partbooks (see

Chapter 2).

LAWES.indb 193

19/03/2010 10:58

194

the consort music of william lawes Example 6.9╇ Lawes, Fantazia {135}, bars 49–60: GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40, D.229 and B.2

(Small notes: bars 49–50, 52–3, organ, left hand, upper line are in D.229 but not in B.2; bar 53, notes 8–10 of the organ, right hand, are from D.229 (crotchet rest in B.2).)

   4            49



   4



   4    

       4

    52



 

  

  





          

     



         

    

 









                

      



  

  



  

       

        





                         

  

55                                        

 



 

 

     

 



                            













                                                                                      58

LAWES.indb 194

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

195

into the partbooks, which suggests that the suite was already composed. Moreover, the symmetry of the collection, even within the scoring sub-divisions, strongly suggests that Lawes intended eight suites.) Judging from the many passages containing emendations and revisions (and of course the score format), the reworking of Fantazia {135} appears to have taken place in B.2. Indeed, we can perhaps briefly glimpse the compositional process. The final bars of the right hand of the organ in the autograph score were clearly revised, with the original line erased and another written in its place; the terminal barlines were written, and also erased. The ‘original’ is only partially decipherable from the palimpsest. Lawes appears to have originally written much of the lower line of the bass viol in the right hand of the organ, transposing the pitches up a thirteenth (Example 6.10; cf. Fig. 2.10c, which shows the organ part).30 This may suggest simply that he accidentally copied the lowest line of the bass viol into the organ’s treble stave and, realizing his mistake, erased the line, placing it in the Â�correct stave above: whereas much of the line works in both clefs, note 2 of bar 139 does not fit if a treble clef applies. Another answer may be that Lawes originally intended submediant harmony later abandoned in favour of a tonic chord. If we rule out copying error the implication is that Lawes originally intended the leaping motive to be in the right hand of the organ, which would provide a contrary motion to the left hand: perhaps this was the ‘original’ version. This idea was Â�evidently abandoned in favour of putting the overlapping contrary motion between the two bass parts, thus providing a much more effective solution. The position of Fantazia {135} in B.2 suggests that it was probably entered (i.e. reworked) c.â•‹1638, around the same time as Lawes’s composition of the pieces for two bass viols and organ. Indeed, in the autograph partbooks the bass viol pieces and Fantazia {135} are all in a remarkably similar hand. This carries the further implication that most if not all of D.238–40 was copied around this time: i.e. c.â•‹1637–8. Although the use of the ‘informal’ presentation style implies that the revised Fantazia {135} was added sometime after the bass viol suites (in the ‘formal’ style), the terminal barlines do not provide conclusive evidence. For example, Lawes used his ‘informal’ terminal bar in D.240 (fol.â•‹32r) for the first violin part of Fantazia {156} (no.â•‹43), whereas the other partbooks have the ‘formal’ style: yet another apparent example of Lawes’s ‘consistent inconsistency’ discussed in Chapter 2. It is also significant that in all three partbooks (D.239, D.240 and D.229) Lawes signed Fantazia {135} with the same ‘short L’ signature consistent with later portions of the autograph sources: the surrounding pieces in all three 30 In Example 6.10 the reconstructed line (done without the aid of UV-light etc.) is

based partly on the direction of visible stems. Although the second note in bar 140 is not distinguishable, a b' or c" is implied by the stem.

LAWES.indb 195

19/03/2010 10:58

196

the consort music of william lawes Example 6.10╇ Lawes, Fantazia {135}, bars 139–47: comparison of organ original and revision from GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2, p.â•‹81

139                   VIOLIN  4    BASS     4  VIOL  ORGAN R-H (Orig.)

ORGAN

    4          4    4

           143

             



 

  



 

?



  

        



    



                

       

   



   

 

 



 



 

         

  

partbooks are variants of the ‘mature’ signature; the score is signed with an Â�unusual ‘W: Lawes’↜, the only other example of which is found in the first lyra-viol piece in GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432, a manuscript that dates to c.â•‹1639–41 (for signatures, see Chapter 2). Finally, Fantazia {135} is also the only piece in the fantasia-suite sequence to consistently use the c-clef with two vertical strokes (also found in the B.2 score). In the rest of the sequence, the c-clefs are the single-stroke form (see Chapter 2).31 To what extent Lawes recomposed Fantazia {135} is unclear: unless one could count the revised organ part discussed earlier, there is no evidence of an Â�‘unrevised’ or original version. It seems significant, however, that in this piece Lawes was exploring the possibilities of elaborate divisions in both violin and bass viol, developments that reached a climax in the harp consort pavans (see Chapter 7). Elaborate division-writing is not generally found in consort fantasias before this, especially for the violin, which was still primarily associated with simple dance 31 This only applies to clefs at the start of staves.

LAWES.indb 196

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

197

music.32 The few examples of violin divisions dating to before the 1630s are based on simple dance strains, or relate to the bastarda tradition. There are important early examples of elaborate division-writing in two six- and two five-part fantasias by Thomas Lupo and in some of William White’s six-part fantasias.33 Perhaps the closest comparisons to Fantazia {135}, however, are the fantasias from Jenkins’s nine ‘middle-period’ fantasia-suites for treble, two basses and organ (Group III), and the seven fantasia-air sets for two trebles, bass and organ (Group VI): both groups apparently composed in the 1640s and 1650s. Fantazias {12} and {15} mentioned above anticipate the developments in these fantasias, especially in terms of organ solos and tripla sections, as does the formal division into four sections (some later fantasias have five and three sections).34 As Andrew Ashbee notes, the first [section] consists of a fugal texture in duple metre and moderate tempo; the second, of light, brilliant, rapidly moving divisions, Â�flowing Â�uninterruptedly into a short movement in triple metre – a movement derived from the dance. This third section cadences in turn on the first notes of a duple-time section of homophonic texture, but with slow harmonic rhythm – a section frequently featuring chromatic progressions, and always adding breadth and dignity to the close. Short interludes for the keyboard instrument alone may separate the earlier sections.35 Although there are differences between this formal outline and that of Lawes’s Fantazia {135} there are also similarities. Fantazia {135} also begins with a fugaltype section, although the divisions flow gradually out of it, building to the short Â�‘question and answer’ passage (bars 61–7), and leading to the tripla section. The tripla section ends with a perfect cadence on the tonic, before the duple-time metre returns. The duple-time section opens with an organ solo, gradually joined by the bass viol, answered by the violin, both joining at bar 128 in mostly semiquaver divisions. The short close moves gracefully over an ascending sequence of thirds in the left hand of the organ (a common feature of both Lawes and Jenkins). It is difficult to say who first developed this kind of ‘division-fantasia’↜. Jenkins’s surviving compositions are especially difficult to date given the large quantity he 32 HolmanFTF, 262–5 and passim. 33 Thomas Lupo: The Five-Part Consort Music, vol. 2, ed. R. Charteris (1998), nos.â•‹33

and 34; Thomas Lupo: The Six-Part Consort Music, ed. R. Charteris (1993; r/1999), nos.â•‹9 and 10. William White: The Six Fantasias in Six Parts, ed. D. Beecher and B. Gillingham (Ottawa, 1982), no.â•‹2.

34 Group VI is published in John Jenkins: Seven Fancy-Air Division Suites for Two

Trebles, Bass and Organ, ed. R. Warner, rev. A. Ashbee (1993); Group III will be published as John Jenkins: Fantasia-Suites: II, ed. A. Ashbee, MBâ•‹90 (forthcoming).

35 Jenkins: Seven Fancy-Air Suites, ii.

LAWES.indb 197

19/03/2010 10:58

198

the consort music of william lawes

composed throughout his long life. Apart from several two-part pieces published by Playford, and by Banister and Low, none of his consort music was printed, and the dates in the various manuscript sources seem to relate to the copyists rather than the composer. A similar problem is found with Lawes, but within a shorter period and with fewer pieces. Fantazia {135} seems to represent a new point of departure for Lawes, one that evidently continued through the reworking of the Royall Consort, the later harp consorts (HC26–30), and the bass viol and organ suites. Lawes also incorporated elaborate divisions into his Fantazia {476} for three lyra-viols, which probably also dates to c.â•‹1637–8; unfortunately only one part survives (Example 6.11).36 It seems likely, however, that the Jenkins Group I was composed around the mid-1630s or early 1640s, by which time Lawes’s fantasia-suites are likely to have been composed. As we have seen, Jenkins began to experiment with the formal boundaries of the consort fantasia with Fantasias {12} and {15}. If a later date of c.â•‹1638 is accepted for Lawes’s ‘revised’ Fantazia {135}, is it possible that the Â�revision (and especially the formal plan) was inspired by the two Jenkins Group I division-fantasias? There are many differences between the two Group I Jenkins fantasias and Fantazia {135}: the organ is an obvious one. Lawes’s organ parts (especially in the fantasias) are much more independent than in Jenkins’s early fantasia-suites, where the organ mostly shadows both strings (even the divisions) with occasional solo interludes.37 Lawes’s organ parts, especially in the fantasias for one violin, contain a significant amount of independent material, with some doubling of the string parts (especially the viol). In Lawes’s dances (for both one and two violins) the left hand of the organ generally doubles the bass viol, with new material in the right hand; this is similar to Coprario, although with Coprario the organ essentially doubles the strings in the dances. (It should also be added that of the three composers only Jenkins incorporated divisions into the accompanying dances.) Â�Doubling of the strings (especially the viol) is more common in Lawes’s two-Â�violin fantasias. Coprario generally doubled the bass viol in all of his fantasia-suites; doubling of all string parts is more common in the two-violin suites. In Fantazia {135} (but not the accompanying alman and galliard) the organ is wholly independent with almost no doubling of the strings; in general the organ provides the foundation for the divisions, but it also plays an integral part in the contraÂ�puntal fabric. This is an entirely different approach to Jenkins. The fully independent 36 The anon. Fantazia {9424} on pp.â•‹212–13 of II.B.3 also contains similar divisions

(though less elaborate).

37 On the issue of organ accompaniment, see HolmanOA; for Lawes’s organ parts, see

LawesFS, Introduction; for Jenkins’s organ parts, see AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹1.

LAWES.indb 198

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

199

Example 6.11╇ Lawes, Fantazia {476} for three lyra-viols [incomplete; edfhf tuning], ending: GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3, pp.â•‹272–3

                                        4        44                                        47                                              40

                  55                    51

              

59

                                     

        

   



  

organ part in Fantazia {135} (unlike that in the rest of the suites) also reinforces the suggestion that the piece was composed after the entire sequence had been made out. Nevertheless, Lawes and Jenkins follow a remarkably similar formal pattern, not to mention the thematic resemblances discussed above. Apart from the overall formal pattern, two main similarities between Fantazia {135} and Jenkins’s Fantazias {12} and {15} seem to be significant. First, the divisions use similar techniques: frequent points of imitation, parallel movement, ‘question and answer’ phrases, and hocket-like interplay. Lawes’s divisions, however, are much more successfully incorporated into the compositional fabric. Jenkins uses the divisions to provide a sectional contrast and variety, whereas Lawes appears to be consciously working them into the contrapuntal framework and does not restrict them to one section. Lawes’s divisions are also more violinistic than those of Jenkins, and perhaps reflect the input of one of the court violinist such as Woodington, for whom the fantasia may have been reworked. Indeed, we may reasonably speculate that Woodington may have performed the virtuosic violin parts in Lawes’s later consort music. It may be no coincidence that in January 1638 Woodington was paid £12 ‘for a Cremona violin to play to the organ’↜.38 Second, the inclusion of a tripletime section in a fantasia is highly unusual for Lawes although it is a prominent 38 RECM, iii. 96.

LAWES.indb 199

19/03/2010 10:58

200

the consort music of william lawes

feature of many of the Jenkins fantasia-suites, especially the later ones. Only one other Lawes fantasia includes a time change: Fantazy {573} for three lyra-viols (of course, others may be lost). Jenkins may have inspired Lawes’s inclusion of a tripla section in Fantazia {135}, itself a reassertion of a common feature of Coprario’s fantasia-suite fantasias. It is unlikely that such links between Lawes and Jenkins can be established beyond doubt, and one must always be aware of a common musical language facilitating independent use of similar motifs by different composers. Nevertheless, a greater degree of cross-influence between the two men than has been generally noted seems likely.39 The following is a possible order of composition for Lawes’s and Jenkins’s fantasia-suites:40 1╇ Coprario fantasia-suites: early 1620s 2╇Lawes fantasia-suites: early 1630s? (but copied into D.238–40, D.229 c.â•‹1638) 3╇ Jenkins fantasia-suites Groups I and II: 1630s, 1640s 4╇ Lawes ‘revision’ of Fantazia {135}: c.â•‹1638 5╇Jenkins fantasia-suites (and fantasia-airs) Groups III, IV and VI: 1640s–1650s 6╇ Jenkins fantasia-suites (and fantasia-airs) Groups V, VII and VIII: 1660s This tentative chronology suggests (1) that Jenkins was initially inspired (at least partly) by Lawes’s fantasias-suites and (2) that Lawes in turn may have been inspired to revise Fantazia {135} in response to Jenkins’s Group I Fantazias in D/d; both men shared the model established by Coprario. Jenkins continued to explore the fantasia-suite in the later 1640s with his ‘middle period’ suites. The florid divisions – which are more developed than in Groups I–II – may in turn be a sign of influence from Lawes’s Fantazia {135}. Florid division-writing is also characteristic of Jenkins’s late fantasia-suites for two trebles, two basses and organ, which along with the fantasia-suites for three trebles, bass and organ, expand the scorings of the traditional fantasia-suite scorings:41 these pieces are likely to date to the 1660s.42

39 Pinto suggests several links between Lawes and Jenkins in the consort fantasia

repertoire: PintoFyV, 104ff.

40 The Jenkins chronology is based on Ashbee’s in AshbeeHM2, passim. 41 Counted with the division pieces should be Christopher Simpson’s ‘Seasons’↜,

which date to around the late 1650s or early 1660s; see also Johnson, ‘English Â� Fantasia-Suite’↜, 304–18.

42 HolmanFTF, 277–80.

LAWES.indb 200

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

201

E

stablishing a date for Lawes’s fantasia-suites is key to understanding his ╇ role in the development of the division-fantasia. David Pinto’s Musica Â�Britannica edition of Lawes’s fantasia-suites represents some of the most recent and extensive work into the collection and its sources. Pinto concluded that they are early works, largely composed before or around Lawes’s court appointment in 1635 (but perhaps dating to the late 1620s or early 1630s), with the possibility of some reworking perhaps around 1637.43 He dates the autograph parts ‘in almost their final form’ to around 1635, based ‘partly on the view that non-autograph copies were in circulation by c.â•‹1638, and partly on the relative maturity of Lawes’s hand compared with the style which he used later’↜.44 This terminus ante quem was also suggested by the earliest non-autograph sources, John Browne’s organbook, GB-Och, Mus. MS 430 and the Layton Ring violin book, which Pinto dates to c.â•‹1638. The unidentified copyist of Mus. 430 also compiled the related violin manuscript now in the possession of Layton Ring. The latter contains the second violin part for Coprario’s fantasia-suites for two violins, and the first violin part for all of Lawes’s.45 On the rear flyleaf of Mus. 430 there is the instruction ‘This for Robert Packer Esqr at Shellingford’↜. Packer, Browne’s brother-in-law, was in Paris by February/March of 1639. From this Pinto concluded that the most probable date for Browne’s fantasia-suite manuscripts is 1636–8 (further implying that Lawes composed the fantasia-suites several years earlier).46 Packer was, however, back in England by 1640, and Pinto has also advanced the possibility that Mus. 430 was copied 1640–2. Taken in conjunction with the evidence presented above, the later date – of at least late 1638, but more likely c.â•‹1640 – seems highly likely. It is worth bearing in mind that Browne had access to a substantial portion of Lawes’s music before the removal of the court to Oxford.47 He is one of the few contemporary owners of significant pieces by Lawes; in addition to the fantasia-suites, he owned copies of the five- and six-part viol consorts (see Chapter 5); several miscellaneous consort pieces by Lawes (and other court composers) are also found in other manuscripts from his library.48 As noted in Chapter 5, Browne is likely to have amassed much of his collection after his rise to prominence in 1638. It is not clear when Browne acquired copies of Lawes’s viol consorts although it must have been

43 See LawesFS. 44 LawesFS, xx; the ‘later’ hand is represented by the bass viol suites and harp consorts. 45 AshbeeJB; LawesFS, 116. 46 LawesFS, 116. 47 For source descriptions, see LawesFS, 116–17; also AshbeeJB and PintoMVC. 48 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 379–81 and 367–70: see IMCCM2, 233–7 and 241–4.

LAWES.indb 201

19/03/2010 10:58

202

the consort music of william lawes

after 1640; whenever this happened, one suspects that he acquired the fantasiasuites around the same time. If we leave aside for a moment the evidence from the dissemination of nonautograph sources, to establish in the first place a compilation date for the autograph parts of Lawes’s fantasia-suites is not straightforward. For example, the corresponding string parts of the fantasia-suite sequence in D.238–40 appear to have been (at least partially) compiled before the organ parts in D.229. The best illustration of this is Lawes’s insertion to Fantazia {144}, added to D.238–40 after the string parts had been made out but before the organ part was copied into D.229 (see below). Christopher Field has argued that this suggests ‘that these string part-books were copied by Lawes soon after composition’↜.49 In general Lawes’s autograph sources do suggest the time of composition, as compilation and composition appear to have taken place around the same time. If, however, the fantasia-suites are indeed early compositions, and if a date of c.â•‹1637–8 is accepted for compilation of the autograph parts, the implication is that (although they are the earliest surviving sources) the autographs are not the original sources. MoreÂ� over, as we have seen, the isolated presence of Fantazia {135} in B.2 highlights the problematic questions surrounding the sources and their compilation. The proposed date of c.â•‹1638 for copying of the fantasia-suites into the autograph partbooks raises further questions about their dissemination in non-autograph sources. As we can see from Table 6.1,50 the collection was generally disseminated either as a whole (suites 1–16) or divided into the suites for one or two violins (suites 1–8 or 9–16). Only the string parts for a singleton – Alman {118} from suite 2 – circulated independently of the collection. It was printed by Playford in CourtAyres and Courtly Masquing Ayres; it was also copied by Edward Lowe in GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.236 and E.451 (important Royall Consort sources; see Chapter 4), where it is the second movement of a Pavan–Aire–Corant–Saraband suite (only the bass survives).51 The Lowe and Playford versions appear to have been derived from independent sources. Playford grouped the alman with a corant and saraband from the Royall Consort, transposed from F to G.52 As Pinto notes, ‘Though showing no significant variant from the version used by Lawes, this almaine is the only dance in which he could be supposed in any way to have drawn on pre-Â�existent material for the violin suites’↜.53 Indeed, shortly after Pinto’s edition 49 Field, ‘English Consort Suite’↜, i. 119; also FieldFR, 245–6 n.â•‹64. 50 For more detailed descriptions of these sources, see LawesFS, 113–17. 51 {324}, {118}, {325}, {326}. 52 Court-Ayres, nos.â•‹70–2; Courtly Masquing Ayres, nos.â•‹22–4: {118}, {57}, {61}; the last

piece in each suite survives in two different versions.

53 LawesFS, 115.

LAWES.indb 202

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

203

Table 6.1╇ Sources of Lawes’s fantasia-suites Source

Format

Copied*

Suites†

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2

Autograph score

c.â•‹1639

8a

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229

Autograph organbook

c.â•‹1637–8

1–16

GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40

Autograph string parts

c.â•‹1638–9

1–16

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. C.90 a–c

String and organ parts

c.â•‹1650–60a

1–8

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. C.89 a–d

String and organ parts

c.â•‹1650–60

9–16

GB-Och, Mus. MS 430

Organbook

before 1642b

1–16

Layton Ring MS

Violin

before 1642

1–16

GB-Lbl, Add. MS 10445

Violin and bass viol parts

c.â•‹1655

1–8

F-Pn, MS Rés. F.770

String score

c.â•‹1654–64

9–16

GB-Lbl, Add. MS 29290

Organbook

c.â•‹1650–60

1–16

GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.236 and E.451c J. Playford, Court-Ayres (1655)

Bass viol and continuo parts

before 1682

2b

Violin and bass viol parts

2b

J. Playford, Courtly Masquing Ayres (1662) D-Hs, MS ND VI 3193

Violin and bass viol parts

2b

Alternative four-part version, parts (lacking Bass 1)

c.â•‹1683–4

2b

↜* Where applicable, the suggested copying dates refer only to fantasia-suite portions. † Following the system in LawesFS, where suites are numbered 1–16 and internal movements a–c. a See M. Crum, ‘The Consort Music from Kirtling, Bought for the Oxford Music School from Anthony Wood, 1667’↜, Chelys 4 (1972), 3–10; IMCCM1, 122–5. b Cautiously dated c.â•‹1630–45 in IMCCM2, 260–2; a date near 1642 seems most likely. c For E.451, see IMCCM2, 212–24.

appeared, Richard Charteris discovered a four-part version of {118} in D-Hs, MS ND VI 3193, folsâ•‹32v–33r (no.â•‹99) (Example 6.12a).54 The books, copied c.â•‹1683–4, contain 113 four-part pieces, described as for two trebles and two basses (a continuo Â�doubles Bass 2); the Bass 1 book is now lacking. The five Lawes pieces in the manuscript are arranged as a suite in G (Pavan–Aire–Corant–Aire–Saraband).55 The first piece is a four-part arrangement of the five-part viol consort Pavan {79} in F. 54 R. Charteris, ‘A Rediscovered Manuscript Source with Some Previously Unknown

Works by John Jenkins, William Lawes and Benjamin Rogers’↜, Chelys 22 (1993), 3–29; IMCCM2, 15–23.

55 {79, 320, 399, 118 and 400} respectively.

LAWES.indb 203

19/03/2010 10:58

204

the consort music of william lawes Example 6.12╇ Lawes, Alman {118}: (a) D-Hs, MS ND VI 3193, folsâ•‹32v–33r,

(a)

Bass 1 is lacking; (b) fantasia-suite version, strain 1

                

                                                                6                                                               11   





      



   

     

           



 

  





 



  

 





      

 







16                                                     21          

  



              







                                         







The pavan was associated with the ‘old’ Royall Consort; four other sources preserve it in G, the same key as in ND VI 3193.56 Several concordances for ND VI 3193 are found in Edward Lowe’s manuscript with music related to the ‘old’ Royall Consort, which suggests that the source from which ND VI 3193 was copied represents an 56 LawesRC.

LAWES.indb 204

19/03/2010 10:58

(b)

      

    

   4



 





  



   



   





    

 



 



the fantasia-suites



 

  



  

 







 

 

   











 









                                                             

               8

     







  

 

   

  

 

         









   



205



     

 

 

   

  []     

   





  





 

[ ]

   

early form of the pavan. The second aire, {320}, is found in two- and three-part versions in several manuscripts, including the Shirley partbooks which suggests that it too was an early composition. This is followed by two otherwise unknown pieces, {399} and {400}, between which Alman {118} is found. Only the first strain of {118} (Example 6.12b) is, however, concordant with the fantasia-suite version. As the first bass book is lacking it is impossible to determine the exact nature of the arrangement, and whether the missing part was indeed another bass as the manuscript’s contents list claims. One suspects that this is an early version of Alman {118} later recast for the fantasia-suites. Lawes frequently reused material in this manner, examples are found in the viol consorts, the Royall Consort and in the bass viol duos. Indeed, some passages of the second treble part of the ND VI 3193 version are remarkably similar to the organ of the fantasia-suite version.

LAWES.indb 205

19/03/2010 10:58

206

the consort music of william lawes

The non-autograph sources incorporate many, but not all, of the revisions and corrections found in the autograph partbooks, which implies (1) that the autograph parts were (directly or indirectly) behind all of the disseminated copies, what Pinto called the ‘archetype’; (2) that Lawes revised or amended several pieces before dissemination; and (3) that Lawes continued to amend pieces after circuÂ� laÂ�tion of the archetype.57 One example will serve for several.58 Of the pieces that show signs of significant alteration only one – Fantazia {144} for two violins – seems to have been a revision, the rest appear to be omissions or copying errors (and corrections thereof). The revision in {144} consists of an insertion of eight 4/2 bars (bars 38–46) at the end of the piece in each of the string partbooks (Example 6.13). Evidently this was done before copying the organ part into D.229, which includes the passage as do all subsequent sources. Despite the possibility of copying error, compositional revision is implied given that Lawes omitted a section in all three string partbooks at exactly the same place (and for the same duration). The bass viol part (D.238) certainly underwent revision. Lawes wrote the insertion on the last stave of the page, the last note of which was originally a breve e and semibreve E. Subsequently he erased the breve e, replacing it (in a different ink) with a semibreve e. At the same time, he also completely erased the semibreve E replacing it with the short division passage on the stave above, the first six notes of which were originally a third higher. Lawes also made some revisions to the end of the bass viol part; they are in the same ink as the written-out trill etc., which suggests that they were all done around the same time.

❧⚧ Conclusions

A

s we have seen from this detailed examination of Lawes’s fantasia-suites, the â•… evidence strongly suggests that they originated in some prior source (probably an autograph score) from which Lawes copied the string parts in D.238–40. When this source was compiled (i.e. when the fantasia-suites were composed) is open to question. Christopher Field suggests that Lawes composed his Â�fantasia-suites some time before 1635 with the knowledge of Charles’s musical tastes and in hopeful anticipation of a court appointment, and that the autograph parts may have been used for private rehearsals with the ensemble known as ‘Cooperario’s Musique’ (see Chapter 1) and were perhaps made out c.â•‹1634. D.238–40 Â�certainly bear evidence of use: e.g. in D.240 (Violin), fol.â•‹18v there are 57 See LawesFS, xx–xxi. 58 Other notable examples occur in nos.â•‹10 (4a) {123}, 27 (9c) {140}, 28 (10a) {141} and

40 (14a) {153}; see also LawesFS, xx–xxi, the Appendix (p. 112), and commentary for the individual pieces.

LAWES.indb 206

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

207

Example 6.13╇ Lawes, Fantazia {144}, inserted section (bars 38–46)

  4        4 38

  4 

 4 

    





                                    



      



            

         

40





             

 4 

 







                               

               

 

 

       





 

  



42                                                                       

   



  

   

        

  

 



 

(continued overleaf)

LAWES.indb 207

19/03/2010 10:58

208

the consort music of william lawes

                                                     Example 6.13 continued

44

   

    

 



 



 



45









                           

 



 

 



contemporary marks grouping the (unbarred) opening of the second strain into groups of four crotchet beats. Field has further asserted that ‘Well in advance of completing the copying of these playing parts, Lawes had decided to make his two groups of pieces match one another closely in layout, so that each consists of eight fantasia-suites in exactly the same sequence of alternate minor and major keys. Such self-conscious symmetry strengthens the impression that we are dealing here with a carefully prepared presentation opus’↜.59 Apart from the early dating of the autograph parts, Field’s assessment seems accurate. There is little to date the introduction of Lawes’s Â�fantasia-suites to the court from much after his official appointment; as Field suggests, it is likely that the fantasia-suites were known (in one form or another) before 1635. Nevertheless, we do not necessarily have to date D.238–40 (and D.229) to this period. It is worth noting that in 1635 an order was issued ‘for a new sett of books for Cooperarios Musique’↜,60 suggesting that some parts of the court consort repertoire were recopied because of wear and tear. 59 FieldFR, 209. 60 RECM, iii. 81.

LAWES.indb 208

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

209

Lawes’s fantasia-suites may have been initially performed from other partbooks, with Lawes making out fresh copies c.â•‹1638. This may partly explain why the ‘early’ bass clef is used in the stave margins of the first ten pieces in D.238: Lawes may have been copying from an Â�earlier source in which he used this clef; this also seems to have happened in some of the four-part pieces in the Shirley partbooks (see Chapter 2). The revisions in Fantazia {144} (and other pieces) may simply have occurred to Lawes when recopying. This interval between composition and (re)copying may also explain the impetus for the proposed reworking of Fantazia {135}, a piece evidently entered into the partbooks after the rest of the suites. Matters are complicated somewhat when we consider the organ parts, which unlike the string parts, rarely show signs of omissions or revision,61 implying that D.229 was compiled after D.238–40. The reason for this may be that the organist performed from Lawes’s original score and that any changes were made to this manuscript. Two possibilities arise as to the nature of Lawes’s score. The entire sequence of suites may have been composed in full score, similar to Fantazia {135} in B.2. Lawes may, alternatively, have used a string score with cues for the independent organ parts, perhaps similar to F-Pn, MS Rés. F.770 (a three-stave string score with cues for the organ).62 As mentioned above, Coprario appears to have used a string score for notating his two-violin suites; Lawes’s suites provide a much more independent organ part than Coprario’s and such a string score would be unnecessarily complicated. Of course, Lawes’s approach to the organ part may have changed, with the organ becoming more independent over time: hence the need for a separate organ book.63 Indeed, many of the independent inner lines may have been added during compilation of D.229, in the same way that Lawes expanded the organ inner parts of Fantazia {135} when copying the organ part from B.2 to D.229. This expansion process is also suggested by the non-autograph sources. In contrast to the organ parts for the viol consorts, Lawes’s organ parts for the fantasia-suites are relatively thin in texture, especially for the dances for one violin, which are often in Tr–B format. In general the organ parts of the two-violin pieces are fuller and more developed than those for the one-violin suites, with the exception of Fantazia {135}. This may suggest that the two-violin works were composed later than those for one violin. Of course, it may also suggest that Lawes simply 61 Fantazia no.â•‹43 (15a) {156} is the only fantasia-suite piece in D.229 to show signifi-

cant signs of addition; much of the tenor-range inner parts are in a different ink to the rest of the piece.

62 Inter alia, Rés. F.770 contains scores of the two-violin suites by Coprario and Lawes,

and Orlando Gibbons’s three-part fantasias for the double bass: see LawesFS, 116.

63 See Field, ‘Bing’s Copies’↜.

LAWES.indb 209

19/03/2010 10:58

210

the consort music of william lawes

wanted a fuller texture for the two-violin pieces, perhaps to provide an effective balance with the violins; we observed a similar impetus in the Royall Consort where Lawes replaced the tenor viol with the second bass viol. In the fantasias generally the organ is fuller but rarely are there extended passages of thick texture. Indeed, in the solo interludes for organ Lawes tends to adopt a thin texture, perhaps implying elaboration of inner parts by the performer; there is a similar tendency towards thin texture before cadences, which are usually quite full.64 The question of whether to elaborate the inner parts is a difficult one. While acknowledging that the notation should not be regarded too literally, Peter Holman has argued that non-keyboard playing composers like Lawes and Jenkins (who also tended to composed sparse organ parts) generally wrote out their organ parts much as they wished them to be played.65 Nevertheless, copyists of Lawes’s Â�fantasia-suites tended often to fill out the textures by adding organ inner parts. Pinto has noted that the organ parts seem to have been transmitted in two ways. First, Mus. 430 seems to have been compiled from a source close to D.229: the two sources generally agree apart from minor alterations, although Mus. 430 ‘omits much characteristic detail’↜.66 A separate source appears to have been behind GB-Lbl, Add. MS 29290 and the organ part of the North manuscripts (GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. C.89–90), both of which expand upon the inner lines (rather sketchily notated in D.229) of the essentially four-part texture.67 It is unclear whether these expansions came from Lawes, although some resemble his previously mentioned expansions of the organ part of Fantazia {135} in D.229. Less likely to be by Lawes is the otherwise unique accompaniment for Fantazia {150}, bars 40–5 found in MS 29290. In the autograph the organ is silent during this passage. The main copyist of MS 29290 also had rests in these bars; a later scribe added the additional accompaniment (to be substituted for the silent bars) at the bottom of the page. Thus, at least two now lost copies of the organ part circulated; both contained Fantazia {135} in its ‘revised’ state, which implies that they were copied after the fantasiasuite sequence was made out in D.229. This cannot, however, be interpreted as evidence that a prior organ part existed before D.229, and consequently that the organ part of Fantazia {135} was identical in its ‘original’ and ‘revised’ states. For example, the transmission of scant inner parts for the organ, simply suggests that Lawes augmented the organ parts after circulation of the archetype which was 64 See LawesFS, xxiii. 65 See HolmanOA. He gives the example of Fantazia {135} where there are ‘several

places that involve stretches of a tenth or more, and several others where the continuation of written lines is indicated by directs’↜, ibid., 377.

66 LawesFS, 115. 67 LawesFS, xx–xxi.

LAWES.indb 210

19/03/2010 10:58

the fantasia-suites

211

derived from D.229 (cf. the bass viol suites in Chapter 8). The manner in which the organ parts were transmitted strongly indicates that the accompanist was expected to extemporize (if to a limited extent) in performance.68 The MS 29290 expanded inner parts may also have been the work of an intermediary (or a scribe who was also a performer) and may simply reflect contemporary practice in the realization of scant inner parts (as, for example, one often finds with Jenkins).69 Finally, a comment on the survival of fantasia-suite sources generally. In MB 46 Richard Charteris lists twenty-two sources of Coprario’s suites, including some later sevenÂ�teenth-century copies; scribes include John Browne, Nicholas Le Strange and Roger North. For Lawes there are twelve, with the autographs featuring prominently; again scribes include Browne, Le Strange and North, but also Edward Lowe and a possible Salisbury source. The Jenkins Groups I–II survive in only three main sources: autograph and North for Group I, and North only for Group II. This suggests that the court circle was very important. It is immediately noticeable that the fantasia-suites of Jenkins, who worked outside the court, achieved limited circulation and exerted no influence in the first half of the seventeenth century. We can also see the important role played by John Browne in the dissemination of the genre.

T

he fantasia-suite has been often likened to the trio sonata. The parallel appears to have been first drawn by Thurston Dart, who observed that Coprario’s suites were ‘trio-sonatas in all but name’↜.70 There is, however, nothing to suggest that Coprario knew of the sonatas of, say, Salamone Rossi or Biagio Marini. Indeed, the term ‘sonata’ is misleading when discussing the fantasia-suite and betrays an unnecessary anxiety about English consort music. Only the scoring is similar. In both genres, scoring developed from the same impetus of reducing larger-scale pieces, but this apparently happened independently. The juxtaposition of contrapuntal fantasia and lighter dances was developed on a much grander scale by Lawes in the viol consorts, the Royall Consort and in the harp consorts, all Â�unfettered by Coprario’s three-movement form. Fantazia {135} seems to be a pivotal piece in this development; indeed, it is perhaps the pivotal piece in Lawes’s œuvre. In it one cannot fail to appreciate the sense of innovation and invention. Lawes’s exploration of divisions for violin and bass viol finds fullest expression 68 See also the discussion of the fantasia-suite organ parts in J. Butt, ‘Towards a

Genealogy of the Keyboard Concerto’↜, in The Keyboard in Baroque Europe, ed. C. Â�Hogwood (Cambridge, 2003), 93–110, esp. 100–2.

69 For a discussion of Lawes and Jenkins’s organ parts, see HolmanOA. 70 T. Dart, ‘Jacobean Consort Music’↜, PRMA 81 (1954–5), 63–75, at 69. Lawes’s

Â�fantasia-suites were termed ‘violin sonatas’ by Lefkowitz: LefkowitzWL, esp. 106–25.

LAWES.indb 211

19/03/2010 10:58

212

the consort music of william lawes

in the ‘new’ Royall Consort, but especially in the large-scale harp consorts. The  harp consorts can in some ways be seen as a development of the fantasiasuites, with the organ replaced by the harp and the bass viol freed from doubling the fundamental bass by being doubled by the theorbo. The fantasia-suites were disseminated (and survived) beyond the rarefied courtly environment because of their accessible scoring (a treble viol could easily be substituted for the violin) and recognizable concept. The harp consorts, as we shall see in the next chapter, were a heady wine in too new and expensive a bottle to be accepted beyond the court environment that gave rise to them.

LAWES.indb 212

19/03/2010 10:58

chapter 7

The Harp Consorts

T

he thirty-piece collection Lawes composed ‘For the Harpe, Base Violl, Violin and Theorbo’ is best known today as the Harp Consorts. This titling may be somewhat anachronistic; the earliest source referring to the collection as the ‘Harp Consort’ is Henry Playford’s Sale Catalogue of 1690.1 The Harp Consorts are unique in the English consort music repertoire. They are the only (relatively) complete extant consort music with a part specifically composed for the harp. Despite containing some of his finest instrumental writing, Lawes’s harp consorts remain in relative obscurity.2 This situation arises from two main issues: the partially incomplete harp parts; and the contentious issue of whether Lawes composed for gut-strung triple harp or wire-strung Irish harp. The latter issue is compounded by the problems surrounding the stringing of an Irish harp with a suitable range for a modern performance. The harp consorts survive complete, except that there are no harp parts for HC21–5. The violin, bass viol and theorbo parts survive in Lawes’s autograph partbooks, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40. HC26–30 are also in full score in GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3.3 There are three sources for the harp parts (Table 7.1). The first eight pieces (in Tr–B score) are in Lawes’s organ scorebook (GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229: e.g. Chapter 2, Fig. 2.18). In addition, twenty-one pieces from the collection, mostly in Tr–B score, are preserved in GB-Och, Mus. MS 5.4 The issue of ‘Lawes’s harp’ is one of the most contentious areas of debate surrounding the collection. When Murray Lefkowitz published the first indepth survey of the collection, he concluded that Lawes composed for the triple harp.5 This view was broadly accepted by scholars and performers such as Joan Rimmer and Cheryl Ann Fulton. Indeed, Rimmer asserted that ‘Close

╇ 1 PlayfordCC, no.â•‹117. ╇ 2 HC1–4 and HC27–9 are in LawesSCM; the only complete edition is LawesHC. ╇ 3 For non-autograph concordances see Index. ╇ 4 Many of the MS 5 parts also contain passages from the violin line transposed to

act as a tenor-range filler. For a detailed discussion of MS 5, see J. Cunningham, ‘↜“Some Consorts of Instruments are sweeter than others”: Further Light on the Harp of William Lawes’s Harp Consorts’↜, GSJâ•‹61 (2008), 147–76.

╇ 5 LefkowitzWL, 88–105.

LAWES.indb 213

19/03/2010 10:58

214

the consort music of william lawes Table 7.1╇ Harp sources for Lawes’s harp consorts HC Piece 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Alman Corant Corant Saraband Aire Corant Corant Saraband Alman Corant Corant Saraband Aire Aire Corant Saraband Alman Corant Corant Saraband Alman Alman Corant Corant Saraband Aire Pavan Pavan Pavan Fantazy

‘Suite’↜*

Key

VdGS

Harp Sources

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 8 9 10 11

g g g g g g g g G G G G d d d d D D D D D D D D D G G D g d

{162} {163} {164} {165} {166} {167} {168} {169} {170} {171} {172} {173} {174} {175} {176} {177} {178} {179} {180} {181} {182} {183} {184} {185} {186} {187} {188} {189} {190} {191}

D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 D.229/MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 MS 5 B.3/MS 5 B.3 B.3 B.3 B.3

↜* The ‘Suite’ designation is modern; Lawes does not use the term. It is, however, a convenient term to describe the arrangement of these pieces by key in the autograph partbooks.

examination shows that they are playable only on a triple or double harp’↜.6 There matters largely rested until Peter Holman approached the issue in ╇ 6 J. Rimmer, ‘James Talbot’s Manuscript (Christ Church Library Music MS 1187):

VI. Harps’↜, GSJâ•‹16 (1963), 63–72, at 69; also C. A. Fulton, ‘For the Harpe, Base Violl, Violin and Theorbo: The Consorts of William Lawes (1602–1645)’↜, AHJ 10 (1985), 15–20.

LAWES.indb 214

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts



215

Example 7.1╇ ‘Lawes’s harp’

        

        

                       

         

1987.7 By using a range of archival and musical sources, Holman was able to suggest convincingly that the Irish harp was the likely candidate for original performances of Lawes’s collection. The arguments for the triple harp do not hold up to much scrutiny.8 Indeed, by the 1690s, James Talbot (quoting David Lewis) noted that the triple harp was ‘seldom used in Consort generally alone’↜.9 Rimmer conceded that the ‘triple harp has a pungent tone and is difficult to play; it is therefore not surprising to find the statement by Lewis that it was seldom used in consort’↜.10 Talbot’s comments should be noted with some caution as they were made several decades after Lawes’s death, and should not be taken as evidence that the triple harp had not been used in consort music. Nevertheless, they seem to confirm (if in the negative) the sentiment recorded by Francis Bacon earlier in the century when he observed that ‘some Consorts of Instruments are sweeter than others (a thing not sufficiently yet observed;) as the Irish-Harp and Base-Vial agree well’↜.11 I have recently argued that Lawes’s harp contained at least thirty-eight strings (seven of which are Â�retuneable between keys) and was mostly chromatic throughout its four-octave range, D to d'''; there were few, if any, unison strings. Such a harp resembles the size of the Dalway harp (Example 7.1).12

P

eter Holman first suggested that the harp consort scoring developed from the substitution of the harp for a keyboard instrument in the accompaniment of divisions, noting that this transition ‘has an exact parallel in the development

╇ 7 L. Ring, ‘A Preliminary Enquiry into the Continuo Parts of William Lawes for

Organ, Harp and Theorbo’ (MA diss., University of Nottingham, 1972), also argues for a wire-strung Irish harp for Lawes’s harp consorts. See also T. Robson, ‘The Irish Harp in Art Music, c.â•‹1550–c.â•‹1650’ (PhD diss., Durham University, 1997).

╇ 8 See Fulton, ‘For the Harpe’; also LawesHC and my review in VdGSJâ•‹2 (2008), 84–98. ╇ 9 Rimmer, ‘Talbot: Harp’↜, 63. 10 Rimmer, ‘Talbot: Harp’↜, 69. 11 F. Bacon, Sylva Sylvarum (1627), Century iii, 61, no.â•‹278. 12 Slurs indicate strings that may have been re-tuned between pieces in different keys:

see Cunningham, ‘Further Light’↜. Cf. the proposed ranges given for the Dalway harp in M. Billinge and B. Shaljean, ‘The Dalway or Fitzgerald Harp (1621)’↜, EM 15 (1987), 175–87.

LAWES.indb 215

19/03/2010 10:58

216

the consort music of william lawes

of the first English mixed consort’↜, as outlined by Lyle Nordstrom.13 (NordÂ�strom convincingly argued that, during the last third of the sixteenth century, the mixed consort ensemble developed from an earlier repertoire of treble and ground lute duets.) The esoteric scoring of Lawes’s harp consorts suggests that the form originated and developed primarily at court: few other patrons could have employed such an ensemble. One of the few was Robert Cecil. He employed the court musicians Cormack MacDermott (an Irish harper), Nicholas Lanier and John Coprario on a part-time basis,14 and ‘owned at least two virginals, three organs, an Irish or wire-strung harp, a bass violin and several lutes and viols’↜.15 Although there is nothing to suggest that these instruments were played as an ensemble, a nascent form of harp consort could have developed in Cecil’s household during the first decade of the century. The main development of the harp consort is likely to have happened at court. There was a long tradition of harpers employed at the English court, stretching back several centuries. MacDermott, however (appointed in 1605), was the first of a series of Irish harpers to be appointed that performed and composed ‘art’ music. This represented a significant break with harpers of the previous century, who belonged to the minstrel tradition.16 MacDermott seems to be the key figure in the early development of the harp consort; indeed, Lawes based one of his harp consort pavans on a piece by MacDermott, hinting at his influence.17 It is likely that the harp consort developed gradually in the first decades of the century with the addition of improvised (or informally composed) treble, bass or continuo lines to a harp used to accompany divisions on the bass viol. Perhaps the most tantalizing documentary evidence for the development of the harp consort comes from a letter from Sir Gerald Herbert to Sir Dudley Carleton dated 24 May 1619: After supper they [the French Ambassador and attendants, being entertained by the Duke of Lennox] were carried to the Queenes privie chamber, where French singinge was by the Queenes musitians; after in the Queenes Bedd Chamber they hearde the Irish–harpp, a violl, & mr [Nicholas] Lanyer, excellently singinge & playinge on the lute.18 13 HolmanH, 191–2, at 192; also L. Nordstrom, ‘The English Lute Duet and Consort

Lesson’↜, LSJâ•‹18 (1976), 5–22.

14 See R. Charteris, ‘Jacobean Musicians at Hatfield House, 1605–1613’↜, RMARC 12

(1974), 115–36; L. Hulse, ‘The Musical Patronage of Robert Cecil, First Earl of Salisbury (1563–1612)’↜, JRMA 116 (1991), 24–40.

15 Hulse, ‘Cecil’↜, 30. 16 HolmanH, 188. 17 See HolmanH, 192–3. 18 RECM, viii. 80.

LAWES.indb 216

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

217

The exact ensemble described in Herbert’s letter is difficult to ascertain; was he describing an ensemble or a series of solo performers? The description of Lanier as ‘excellently singinge & playinge on the lute’ suggests that he was doing so alone. It is, however, tempting to imagine Lanier as providing a continuo on the lute to bass viol divisions by Alfonso Ferrabosco II, accompanied by Philip Squire on the Irish harp.19 The Herbert extract is ambiguous, but it shows the Irish harp, (a bass?) viol and lute being played in close proximity, lending support to Holman’s proposed development of the scoring. The harp consort may have progressed from largely improvised ensembles based around divisions to more serious consort music, where again the harp substituted for the organ. The Irish harp was traditionally played with long fingernails, producing a melting sound ‘rich and resonant, with something of both bells and guitar’↜.20 In the words of Francis Bacon, ‘no Instrument hath the Sound so melting and prolonged, as the Irish Harp’↜.21 Although it is unclear whether the Irish harpers at the English court would have used the fingernail technique, the sound of the instrument would have been quite Â�powerful. The sustaining tone of the Irish harp would have given a resonance similar to a chamber organ.22 The first documentary evidence of a harp consort dates from 1634. The group known as ‘the Symphony’↜, which provided accompaniment for the vocal music in the Inns of Court masque The Triumph of Peace, consisted of a harp, a violin, and several lutes and viols.23 The ‘Symphony’ appears to coincide roughly with the establishment of a regular ensemble of this kind in Queen Henrietta Maria’s household, ‘the consort of Mons. Le Flelle’↜. There is only one document relating to le Flelle’s consort, which was probably assembled for a masque performance.24 There is no evidence of when the group was formed, nor that it was even a harp consort: its relevance to Lawes’s harp consorts appears to be little more than coincidence. Lawes’s court appointment in 1635 made an Irish harp available to him as a regular resource. He may have been introduced to some form of harp consort before his appointment, but could not count on the harp as a regular compositional resource. Indeed, the instrumentation of Lawes’s harp consorts probably 19 Squire replaced MacDermott upon his death in 1618. 20 J. Rimmer, ‘The Morphology of the Irish Harp’↜, GSJâ•‹17 (1964), 39–49, at 41. 21 Sylva Sylvarum, Century iii, 53, no.â•‹223. 22 See J. Cunningham, ‘↜“Irish harpers are excellent, and their solemn music is much

liked of strangers”: The Irish Harp in Non-Irish Contexts in the Seventeenth Century’↜, in Music, Ireland and the Seventeenth Century, ed. B. Boydell and K. Houston, IMS 10 (Dublin, 2009), 62–80.

23 See WallsM, 172–5. 24 RECM, iii. 83. Jean le Flelle is discussed in HolmanH, 196–8.

LAWES.indb 217

19/03/2010 10:58

218

the consort music of william lawes

became fixed only after 1635. Many of the first twenty-five dances probably originated in two-part (Tr–B) versions, easily arranged for whatever instruments were available. Although there is often a tendency to ignore the authority of two-part settings, increasingly in the first half of the century composers appear to have used them as the basis for more complex arrangements, and they gradually appear to have become a distinct compositional entity. The Index currently lists over 120 miscellaneous aires by Lawes transmitted in two-part sources.25 Many of these pieces survive incomplete in sources that were originally in two parts. One of the most interesting is GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.220, a bass partbook containing over 500 pieces including several from the harp consorts.26 Its contents are similar to those published by Playford in A Musicall Banquet (1651), Court-Ayres (1655), and Courtly Masquing Ayres (1662); indeed, many Playford pieces have concordances in D.220. The title-page of D.220 states that it was ‘For the Bass & Treble Violls’ and gives the date ‘1654’↜. Lawes’s two-part aires that have survived complete are primarily preserved between three main sources: 1 Playford published 45 different aires by Lawes in four publications (not including arrangements of known consort pieces): 7 in A Musicall Banquet; 34 in Court-Ayres; 33 in Courtly Masquing Ayres; 4 in Musicks Hand-maide (1663).27 2 Edward Lowe’s partbooks (GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D233–6 and E.451): D233–6 contains 37 two-part pieces by Lawes; E.451 contains an unfigured continuo part for most of these pieces: the continuo essentially doubles the bass. Twelve of the D.233–6 pieces are incomplete (bass only). Although there is some overlap between Lowe’s partbooks and the Playford publications, the variants (usually rhythmic) between the nine concordant pieces suggest that Lowe was not copying from the prints. 3 US-NH, Filmer MS 3: Filmer 3 consists of three partbooks (‘Treble’↜, ‘Meane’ and bass), compiled by one of the Filmer family’s household musicians, Francis Block, over a substantial period in the middle of the seventeenth century.28 The manuscript contains (inter alia) 16 two-part aires by Lawes: several 25 ‘Miscellaneous’ is here used to describe pieces that do not appear to be part of a

‘collection’; it does not include two-part versions of other known consort pieces, such as the harp consorts etc. published by Playford.

26 For a detailed account of D.220, see ThompsonEMM, i. 221–6. 27 Index for concordances. The symphony from The Triumph of Peace was published

in J. Banister and T. Low, New Ayres (1678), no.â•‹27.

28 For the Filmer collection, see R. Ford, ‘The Filmer Manuscripts: A Handlist’↜, Notes,

34 (1978), 814–25; HolmanFTF, 241–3.

LAWES.indb 218

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

219

are anonymous, and one attributed to ‘D[r] Colman’↜. There are also 7 threepart aires by Lawes, the (rather incompetent) tenor part of which appears to have been added by Block. Although it is a unique source for two of the aires, {225} and {353}, most have concordances in Court-Ayres, Courtly Masquing Ayres, D.220 and D.233–6.29 Copyist error is a problem in Filmer 3. The textual variants suggest that the Filmer pieces are not derived from any of the other sources. It seems clear from Lawes’s miscellaneous aires that there was demand for twopart music and that much of this repertoire was composed as two-part music. Apart from the harp consorts, relatively few of Lawes’s consort pieces are found in two-part versions. Several of the miscellaneous aires were disseminated in versions for different numbers of instruments (generally in three parts, of questionable authority), but overall two-part versions seem to have been a distinct entity by the 1640s.30 This is demonstrated by GB-Och, Mus. MS 1005, which contains 122 two-part (and eighty-four three-part) holograph airs by Jenkins: the largest collection of holograph two-part compositions.31 The manuscript appears to have been bound in 1645, by which time most of the pieces are likely to have been copied.32 Some are found elsewhere in three- or four-part versions; others are likely to have been scored for ensembles. The important point to note is that Jenkins placed value his two-part collection; the manuscript was carefully copied in a formal calliÂ� graphic style. Further, many of the pieces appear to have been composed and disseminated only as two-part pieces. Matthew Locke’s suites ‘For Several Friends’ is perhaps the most significant collection of two-part compositions, and represents a Â�pinnacle of the Tr–B compositional form. Though difficult to date, composition may have begun in the early 1650s.33 The significance of Locke’s collection lies in his inclusion of fantasias and pavans in addition to the lighter dances that usually comprise two-part collections. ‘For Several Friends’ demonstrates the developing sophistication of two-part music and its continued importance into the second half of the century. Lawes’s two-part aires are generally short, simple dance pieces. None has 29 Index for concordances. 30 The Tr–B genre is also discussed in J. Cunningham, ‘A Meeting of Amateur and

Professional: Playford’s “Compendious Collection” of Two-Part Airs, Court-Ayres (1655)’↜, in Concepts of Creativity in Seventeenth-Century England, ed. R. Herissone (forthcoming).

31 Also IMCCM1, 210–26. 32 See AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹11: Ashbee discusses this source and gives an inventory, at

169–73.

33 See P. Holman, ‘Locke, Matthew’↜, GMO (accessed 2 March 2009).

LAWES.indb 219

19/03/2010 10:58

220

the consort music of william lawes

survived in autograph sources. This is true of most composers and suggests that they considered two-part pieces to be ephemera until they became used in fixed ensembles. It is interesting to note that Henry Lawes made no specific reference to his brother’s stock of two-part compositions in his oft-quoted appraisal (see p.â•‹90 above). The lack of autograph sources is paralleled by the solo lyra-viol repertoire (see Chapter 3). Both genres are similarly flexible; notwithstanding the Jenkins autograph Mus. 1005, neither genre appears to have been disseminated through autograph sources. This makes manuscripts such as D.220 even more significant, as it provides evidence that (like lyra-viol music) two-part pieces were anthologized and disseminated in manuscript copies by, or for, amateurs. Two-part pieces were flexible and adaptable. They could be used for several purposes, such as teaching, publication or as the basis for arrangements or divisions. Like much of the solo lyra-viol repertoire, two-part aires are generally short simple dances that could be readily mastered by amateurs, with ornaments and divisions added according to the player’s ability; again like the lyra-viol, the realization of ornaments or addition of improvised or arranged parts could transform a basic outline. Another important aspect of the popularity of two-part aires is their adaptability for performance on a variety of instruments. This would have been useful for professional ensembles which used them as the basis for improvisation or as arrangements for two or more instruments. A repertoire of easily performed music to which embellishments could be improvised would have been extremely useful at court, or in the service of any household. Large households (especially the court) required a substantial amount of music to fulfil a variety of functions: e.g. accompaniment of dancing, entertainment of visiting dignitaries, Tafelmusik, or concert-like settings. It is likely that some of this music was composed using a technique similar to parties de remplissage, where outer parts were composed by one person and inner parts arranged by another, as happened in masques of the period. As Peter Holman notes, the two-part composition would be sufficient for rehearsals as the ‘full dance band would only have been needed near the time of the performances. Someone would then have been employed to make arrangements for the required ensemble’↜.34 Similar techniques could have been used to provide some of the consort music required at court, especially music required at short notice and adaptable by whatever group of musicians was to hand: parallels with modern jazz ensembles immediately spring to mind. Such outlines may have been the basis for collections such as the Harp Consorts. Larger ensembles could be assembled with relative ease from a two-part outline: a suggestive parallel is the apparent development of the lyra-viol consort from two-part Tr–B outlines (see Chapter 3). Inner parts only fill out the harmony and could be easily composed 34 HolmanFTF, 193; for a discussion of parties de remplissage, see ibid., 193–4.

LAWES.indb 220

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

221

even by a musician with little knowledge of part-writing. Divisions could be extemporized, and if required, a second treble added; these additional parts would ‘be added to suit the ensemble at hand, sometimes by the composer, sometimes by other musicians. This explains why popular items in the two-part repertoire sometimes survive in settings with one or more extra but different parts’↜.35 Extemporized arrangements of two-part pieces provided an opportunity for composers to experiment with various instrumental combinations, such as the harp or lyra consorts. If the harp consorts originated as two-part pieces, it may help to explain why there are no harp parts for HC21–5: perhaps they were never composed. The only information omitted from the Tr–B versions is the extra melodic part usually contained in the top line of the harp, which mostly shadows the violin. The additional melodic material usually takes the form of a simple descant, which could be easily extemporized. On the first statement of a strain the theorbo (and bass line of the harp) doubles the bass viol (with only occasional minor differences), and on the repeat, the theorbo (and harp) repeat the bass line over which the bass viol usually adds divisions. (Of the first twenty-five pieces, only HC12 deviates from this format, although it retains an underlying two-part texture.) Thus, a Tr–B version does not omit a great deal, as bass viol players would have been expected to extemporize divisions, and inner parts for the harp could be realized according to the ability of the harper (or harp). An essentially extemporized (or adaptive) approach to harp parts is further implied because Irish harps of the period were not standardized. They ranged in size, and therefore in range and modulation abilities. There are several accounts of large chromatic Irish harps (‘chromatic’ is used here as shorthand to describe non-diatonic notes necessary for modulation etc.).36 The point is that rudimentary harp consorts could easily have been extemporÂ� ized from Tr–B outlines, with the harp acting as a continuo etc., according to the capabilities of the harp (although one would assume some modulating notes). The lack of standardized Irish harps probably reinforced the tradition of improvisation, resulting in few surviving harp parts, historical accident notwithstanding. The fact that Lawes was composing elaborate harp parts for HC26–30, suggests that he was familiar with and composing for a particular instrument. Another explanation may be that Lawes’s HC1–25 were originally composed in a string score with cues for the independent treble lines found in the harp. When it came to making out the string parts in D.238–40, Lawes evidently decided to make out a separate harp part in D.229. It is worth remembering that these parts appear to have been made out quite late, c.â•‹1639–40, most likely after the string scores in B.3 were completed 35 HolmanFTF, 243. 36 See Cunningham, ‘Further Light’; and Cunningham, ‘↜“Irish harpers”↜’↜.

LAWES.indb 221

19/03/2010 10:58

222

the consort music of william lawes

(or at least around the same time). Thus, Lawes may have decided to make out more complex harp parts in D.229 – perhaps in the style of those in B.3 – but for whatever reason was interrupted. It is not difficult to imagine that he had other priorities by c.â•‹1640. The basic two-part texture of Lawes’s harp consorts ensured their survival in various Playford publications. He published sixteen pieces from the collection in Tr–B versions between A Musicall Banquet (nos.â•‹8–12), Court-Ayres (nos.â•‹92–5, 97–101), Courtly Masquing Ayres (nos.â•‹5–8, 25–31, 37–9) and Musicks Hand-maide (1663; nos.â•‹7–8).37 Of course, this is not proof that the harp consorts developed from Tr–B outlines. These publications contain two-part versions of other consort pieces, several of which may have been derived from the outer parts of the originals. It is highly unlikely that the published versions of harp consorts were performed using the original instrumentation (to which Playford made no reference), but if they were, the result would probably not have been far removed from Lawes’s versions, especially if divisions were extemporized. The same Tr–B layout is used in the only published instance of a harp consort. At the end of Christopher Simpson’s A Compendium of Practical Music in Five Parts (1667; 2/1678) there are ten two-part pieces, mostly attributed to Francis Forcer (1649–1705), titled ‘lessons by Sundry Authors for the Treble, Bass-Viol, and Harp’↜. The first and last of these pieces are given in Tr–B score, suggesting that the harpist was meant to double the string parts or to realize a part based on the Tr–B outline; all the intervening pieces are laid out with the treble on one page and the bass on the opposite (and inverted) page. Thus, the harpist could only sight-read one of the lines, presumably the (unfigured) bass, suggesting that the harp functioned as a continuo. Another possibility is that a harp part circulated in manuscript, as was the case for the organ parts for Orlando Gibbons’s Â�Fantazies of III Parts.38 It is unlikely that the pieces in Simpson’s Compendium were originally composed for harp consort. As with many of the Lawes pieces, the suggested instrumentation probably applied retrospectively. Whether or not this is the case, the fact that Simpson included such compositions in both editions (1667 and 1678) is notable, given that the harp generally, and the Irish harp particularly, had declined in popularity by this time. The way in which Lawes’s harp consorts survive in the sources has led some modern commentators to assume that the collection was composed in two distinct phases. The first phase encompasses the six ‘suites’ (HC1–25), which were apparently followed later by the last five pieces of the collection (HC26–30).39 The 37 See Index. 38 See HolmanOA, esp. 372. 39 For example, see HolmanFTF, 262; and PintoFyV, 153–4.

LAWES.indb 222

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

223

evidence certainly suggests that HC26–30 were composed at some chronological remove from HC1–25. HC26–30 are more complex than the previous pieces, some with elaborate divisions composed for the bass viol and violin. There is also a change in texture. HC1–25 are composed in three real parts (Tr–B with harp), probably originating as two-part (Tr–B) pieces before 1635 (possibly as early as the mid-1620s), but only acquiring their fixed instrumentation, with fully composed divisions etc., between c. mid-1635 and c.â•‹1637. The last five pieces appear to have been composed together. They are written in four real parts (Tr–B–B with harp),40 and appear to have been specifically composed for the ensemble. In D.238–40, HC1–25 are apparently arranged into six suites (consisting of one or two almans, one or two corants and a saraband), in four keys: two in g and D, one in d and G. All suites retain a similar internal structure, fundamentally Alman–Corant–Saraband (A–C–S) progressing from the slowest to the fastest movement. In general the six suites have been grouped together due to their similarities, especially when compared to HC26–30. As the ink is broadly consistent throughout the sequence HC1–20, however, it seems that Lawes only copied the parts for the first twenty pieces (Suites 1–5) at the same time. The ink then changes with HC21–30 and is consistent throughout that sequence. This implies that they too were copied at around the same time, but after the initial twenty pieces. Judging by the hand, the chronological gap was not very great. Thus, matters are complicated. If the chronological division actually begins with HC21 (and not with HC26) we are forced to re-examine Suite 6 (HC21–5): the only group of pieces in the collection for which no harp parts survive. Although in Suite 6 Lawes was clearly still thinking along similar formal lines as in Suites 1–5, he hints at the later formal expansions of HC26–30, expansions clearly intended to incorporate more complex divisions. Thus, Suite 6 seems to represent a transitional phase in the development of the collection, which implies that HC1–20 (i.e. Suites 1–5) were composed first, followed by HC21–5 (Suite 6) and the pieces also found in B.3 (HC26–30). It is likely that Lawes composed Suite 6 and the HC26–30 around the same time, as they all appear to have been added to D.238–40 at the same time. Although apparently copied in two stages, this three-stage development of the collection is supported by an analysis of the overall structure of the collection, and by the development of the division-writing. Throughout the collection the theorbo plays the bass line, usually doubled by the bass viol on the first statement of strains. The bass viol performs divisions on the repeats. The lowest line of the harp part also doubles the bass line in the sources. The harp parts contain several passages of divisions noticeable throughout 40 Although this is not always true of the division strains of the pavans, it is true of

the A, B and C strains.

LAWES.indb 223

19/03/2010 10:58

224

the consort music of william lawes

the collection, usually in quavers and often imitating the violin or bass viol, perhaps suggesting that the harper was free to extemporize divisions on the repeated strains. Suites 1–5 are broadly consistent as a group and share some formal discrepancies with Suite 6; a comparison will prove instructive. Most of the almans in the first five suites have the same structure: ||A||A1||B||B1||, where the bass viol doubles the theorbo on the A and B strains, followed by bass viol divisions on the A1 and B1 strains. The structure of both almans in Suite 6 (HC21–2) is slightly different. In HC21 an extended structure is adopted, which had previously only been applied to the corants and sarabands: ||:A:||:B:||A1||A2||B1||B2||; Aire HC5 is in a similarly extended structure ||:A:||:B:||:A1:||:B1:||. In HC21, the bass viol doubles the theorbo on A and B, both of which are repeated. This is followed by two sets of bass viol divisions (A1–2 and B1–2) which are more complex and elaborate than in the previous pieces. The second alman (of Suite 6) acts as a foil to its predecessor. The structure is ||:A:||:B:||, the same as HC21 without the division strains. HC22 is the only alman in the collection with no divisions, prompting the suggestion that they were lost, along with the harp part. This is highly unlikely given that the source for the bass viol (D.240) is autograph, and shows no sign of such omission. In all six suites, except the fourth, there are two corants. The structure of the corants varies, even within suites. Again the ‘foil pattern’ is evident. Usually one corant has a more extended structure, to facilitate divisions. For example, in Suite 1 the first corant is in ||:A:||:B:||A1||A2||B1||B2|| form, where the bass viol doubles the theorbo on A and B and then performs two sets of divisions on either strain. This is followed by the second corant in a more condensed form: ||A||A1||B||B1||, with bass viol divisions on the A1 and B1 strains. A similar, although inconsistent, structure is found in Suites 2, 3 and 5 where one corant acts as a foil to the other. There is only one corant in Suite 4, which is in the extended corant form: ||:A:||:B:||A1||A2||B1||B2||. Suite 6 follows yet another formal pattern. Both corants are in the extended form (||:A:||:B:||A1||A2||B1||B2||), with divisions in the bass viol and, significantly, in the violin. Each of the six suites culminates with a saraband, each containing divisions to a greater or lesser extent. Three have the usual two strains (HC12, HC16 and HC25), three have three (HC4, HC8 and HC20). Three-strain sarabands are quite rare, and provided a loose model for Locke’s sarabands in the Broken Consort.41 In the harp consorts there does not appear to be much significance to the extra strain. It was probably added for balance as these sarabands are quite short and played at a fast tempo. Overall, one can discern a clear relationship between the formal layout of the first five suites, and a distinction between them collectively and the sixth suite. 41 See Matthew Locke: Chamber Music I, II, ed. M. Tilmouth, MBâ•‹31, 32 (1971–2).

LAWES.indb 224

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

225

Many of these differences may appear trivial but when taken together they are suggestive of a transitional period in the development of the collection. Although there is no corresponding expansion in strain lengths, Suite 6 was certainly conceived on a larger scale than the first five suites, where the basic AB form was elaborated through repetition and the repetition varied through divisions. The difference in internal arrangement within the suites is also reflected by the divisions in the individual movements. Lefkowitz first noted the similarities between Lawes’s division style in the later harp consorts and the division rules as exemplified in Simpson’s Division-Violist (1659): ‘So accurately do Simpson’s rules for “division” mirror Lawes’ style of writing that one might suspect that Simpson had arrived at his precepts through a thorough study of Lawes’ music’↜.42 Although possible, it is more likely that the formal and stylistic conventions behind the division style were already well established when Lawes was composing his large-scale division pieces. Lawes must have been known to Simpson, though he is not mentioned in the Division-Violist; rather Simpson singled out (his friend) John Jenkins, Daniel Norcombe (d. 1655) and Henry Butler (d.â•‹1652) for praise. This is hardly surprising. Unlike Jenkins, Butler and Norcombe, Lawes does not appear to have composed solo bass viol divisions. Further, Lawes’s consort pieces with the most elaborate divisions were not widely disseminated; the large-scale harp consorts are not found beyond the autographs. The relation between Lawes’s division style and Simpson’s precepts is evidence of a well-established and highly formulaic practice, in which both men were versed. One can see the general precepts laid out by Simpson in the music of other composers, especially Jenkins.43 A brief overview of Simpson’s main rules will be useful at this point.44 The first part of Division-Violist deals with music theory. The second part gives instructions on the practical application of division techniques.45 Simpson identiÂ� fied three main types of division: ‘breaking of the ground’↜, ‘descant’ and ‘mixt division’↜. ‘Breaking of the ground’ is the rhythmic or melodic alteration of a given line, without the use of multiple stops. Simpson’s rules for breaking the ground involve rhythmic diminution, octave displacement, scalar transitions, chordal skips, neighbour notes, arpeggiations, arpeggiations filled in with passing notes, 42 LefkowitzWL, 96. 43 Cf. Ashbee’s analysis of Simpson’s division rules in the consort music of John

Jenkins in AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹12.

44 There is a similar summary in LefkowitzWL, 96–102. A comprehensive account

of Simpson’s rules can be found in T. Conner, ‘The Groundbreaking Treatise of Christopher Simpson’↜, JVdGSA 36 (1999), 5–39.

45 In the following discussion only the 1659 edition is used, preferred over the 1665

edition because of the closer chronological proximity to Lawes.

LAWES.indb 225

19/03/2010 10:58

226

the consort music of william lawes

and scalar transitions in conjunction with chordal skips (also known as ‘running division’).46 In more rapid divisions, Simpson recommends that there should be more stepwise movement, adding a rule about avoiding consecutive octaves at cadences. This rule appears to relate to performance practice: ‘Although this running down by degrees, seem worse in Playing a Consort Basse, then in a Division to a Ground; yet, in This also, it doth not want its bad Consequence; the Organist commonly joining such Parts unto his Ground, as the Composer doth unto his Basse.↜’ Simpson then outlines his rules for ‘descant’ division, which involves the addition of a part above the bass, forming consonances with the bass while avoiding the bass notes. Descant is subject to the rules of voice-leading and must form a third, fifth or octave above the bass note; however, a sixth may also be admitted when the chord is in first inversion (this relates to Simpson’s ideas of the fundamental bass).47 ‘Mixt Division’ is the most common form of division found in compositions. It involves the admixture of descant and techniques of breaking the ground, to which are added multiple stops and dissonances. ‘This; as it is more excellent then the single wayes of Breaking the Ground, or Descanting upon it; so it is more intricate; and requires something more of Skill, and Judgement, in Composition; by reason of certain Bindings, and Intermixtures of Discords, which are as frequent in This, as in Other Figurate Musick’↜.48 To these rules, Simpson added advice on the structure of divisions, ‘Concerning the ordering, and disposing of Division’↜.49 He advises that the first set of divisions on a strain should break the ground in crotchets and quavers, or be a slowmoving descant. The next set of divisions are to be ‘of a Quicker Motion; driving on some Point, or Points’ and then ‘you may fall off to Slower Descant, or Binding Notes [suspensions], as you see cause; Playing also Sometimes Lowd, or Soft, to express Humour and draw on Attention’↜. If more divisions are required, ‘After this, you may begin to Play some Skipping Division, or Points, or Tripla’s, or what your present Fancy, or Invention shall prompt you to; changing still from one Variety to another; for, Variety it is, which chiefly pleaseth’↜. A similar cumulative build-up of divisions can be seen throughout Lawes’s harp consorts, especially in the pavans. In pieces such as almans, where the strains are usually only repeated once, the divisions are usually quite slow-paced ‘Mixt Division’↜. Where several strains are repeated the divisions become gradually more complex with each repetition. Overall, Simpson’s theory of ordering divisions can be understood as a gradual build towards a climax, which finds parallels in 46 LefkowitzWL, 96. 47 SimpsonDV, 28–9; Conner, ‘Simpson’↜, 20–2. 48 SimpsonDV, 29. 49 SimpsonDV, 47; all quotations in this paragraph are from this passage.

LAWES.indb 226

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

227

the development of the dance suite in England. The gradual building of musical intensity places emphasis on the audience. It allows the listener to become familiar with the music before it becomes obscured by the increasingly complex divisions. NeverÂ�theless, the emphasis on the audience is not solely for its enjoyment, it is to allow the virtuosity of the player to be appreciated. Simpson noted that divisions were generally played over a ground bass consisting of one or more strains, but also over ‘A Continued Ground, used for Playing, or Making Division upon, [which] is (for the most part) the Through-Basse, of some Motett, or Madrigall, proposed, or selected, for That purpose’↜.50 As noted in Chapter 4, divisions in three parts ‘are not usually made upon Grounds; but rather Composed in the way of Fancy: beginning with some Fuge; then falling into Points of Division; answering One Another; sometimes Two answering One, and sometimes, All joyning Together in Division; But commonly, Ending in Grave, and Harmonious Musick’↜.51 This description is most closely related to Pavans HC28 and HC29 where the bowed strings gradually build the intensity of their divisions, almost recomposing the piece with new contrapuntal points (in the divisions). Similar formal devices are found in many of Jenkins’s fantasias, especially those for treble and two basses and organ, and two trebles and bass.52 The layout and style of divisions in the first five harp consort suites can be illustrated by a brief description of Suite 1. Although many of the movements only have one set of divisions, they exemplify the basic structure of Simpson’s precepts. The fundamental idea of gradual progression is clear. Alman HC1 is typical of the almans in Suites 1–5. (Only Aire HC5 differs from the usual ||A||A1||B||B1|| form, Lawes instead opting for a slightly extended version with the initial A and B strains repeated initially with no variations and then with division variations in the bass viol.) HC1 is in two strains, the second slightly longer than the first. The first strains of the almans end in either the relative major (as here) or in the dominant. On the A and B strains the bass viol doubles the bass line of the theorbo, then on the repeat varies the ground with divisions. The divisions are typical of the almans in Suites 1–5. They are in ‘Mixt Division’: mostly in a slow (crotchet and quaver) descant above the bass, but with some doubling of the bass line, scalar transitions, chordal skips, repeated notes and occasional multiple stops. The divisions also occasionally cross below the bass line. Simpson noted that simple dances were also used frequently for divisions citing their similarity to ground bass patterns. Although he only names almans, it seems likely that he would have also intended other dances: ‘These Aires, or Allmains, Begin like Other Consort-Aires; after 50 SimpsonDV, 47. 51 SimpsonDV, 49; the same passage is discussed in Chapter 4, above, pp. 141–2. 52 Bibliography for modern editions.

LAWES.indb 227

19/03/2010 10:58

228

the consort music of william lawes

which they Repeat the Strains, in divers Variations of Division; One Part answering Another, as formerly mentioned’↜.53 The first corant (HC2) is an example of the extended corant discussed Â�earlier, ||:A:||:B:||A1||A2||B1||B2||. On the A and B strains the bass viol doubles the theorbo. The first sets of divisions (A1 and B1) are similar to those in the preceding alman. The A2 and B2 variations build on the first division strains and rely more heavily on ‘mixt’ divisions in a fast tempo (‘running division’); both are in almost continuous quaver movement, occasionally punctuated by multiple stops (usually minims or dotted minims). The second corant (HC3) acts as a foil, exemplifying the shorter corant type. This corant is more similar in terms of form to the alman than to the previous corant. Both strains are repeated. The bass viol doubles the bass on the A and B strains, and performs divisions on the A1 and B1 strains. The divisions are again ‘mixt’↜, mostly descanting above the bass. The suite ends with a three-strain saraband (Example 7.2).54 Each strain is repeated, with divisions on the repeats. In contrast to the previous pieces, these divisions are more heavily reliant on techniques for breaking the ground (octave displacement, scalar transitions, chordal leaps and neighbour notes) than descant and ‘mixt’ division. It is common for divisions in the sarabands to be less elaborate than in other dances because of their fast tempo. The layout of divisions exemplified by Suite 1 changes slightly in the fourth suite, where the second corant is replaced by an alman. The almans (both titled ‘Aire’) follow the same pattern as that in Suite 1. In this case it seems there was no need for contrast as neither contains extensive divisions. Corant HC15 is in the extended form described above. The significant change comes with the last movement of the suite, Saraband HC16, which Lefkowitz identified as a reworking of one of Lawes’s most famous songs, ‘O My Clarissa’↜.55 The consort version is in two repeated strains followed by four sets of variations, the most extended saraband form so far in the collection: ||A1||A2||B1||B2||A3||A4||B3||B4||. Whereas in the previous suites divisions were restricted to the bass viol, here (and in the sarabands ending Suites 5 and 6) they are shared between the bass viol and violin. As we saw in Chapter 6, extended divisions for violin were unusual in serious consort music as the violin were still primarily associated with dance music, ‘in general, rapid passage-work is conspicuous by its absence in the English violin repertoire before 53 SimpsonDV, 49. 54 Bar numbers in the music examples do not always correspond to LawesHC (due

to the format of division strains in the edition), nor do they always correspond to LawesSCM (due to the barring); for ease of reference, all examples are identified by strains A, A1 etc.: such labelling is also found in both editions.

55 LefkowitzWL, 102, 167, 287.

LAWES.indb 228

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

229

Example 7.2╇ Lawes, Saraband HC4 {165}, A strain:

VIOLIN

  

 

BASS VIOL

THEORBO



HARP

   

3



GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40 and D.229



[1st time]

3

[2nd time]   3  4

 

3

 

3

 

3









 















 









3

  





        

   

           

 



   



   

 









    







 



   





















  

    



      

 



 





  



       





 



  















Lawes’↜.56 In the A1 strain the violin performs a fast-moving descant above the bass (theorbo and harp), accompanied by a slow-moving descant in the bass viol. In A2 the divisions build on the quaver momentum gathered in the A1 strain. Again, the violin descants above the bass held by the theorbo and harp, although the bass viol now also performs (quaver) divisions. Here, Lawes introduces a concertante idiom. The violin and bass viol divide as a pair, with short antiphonal sections leading to the B1 and B2 strains. B1 and B2 follow the same pattern as A1 and A2. For the A3 strain Lawes reused the violin divisions from A1, now allowed to stand in relief as the bass viol doubles the theorbo. A4 sees the return of the concertante between bass viol and violin; the violin divisions are the same as A2, although the bass viol has new variations. The B3 and B4 strains follow the same pattern (Example 7.3). 56 HolmanFTF, 263.

LAWES.indb 229

19/03/2010 10:58

230

the consort music of william lawes Example 7.3╇ Lawes, Saraband HC16 {177}, B3 and B4 strains: GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40 and GB-Och, Mus. MS 5

                                43    3      4               43                          43              3     4      33

B3

                36







    

   

  

                                 B4

   

  

  

   

  

                 

 

  

 

   



 

  

 









39

  





 

   





  

 

 

 





  





   

         

     



 

  

    

The divisions in this saraband are the most complex in the collection hitherto. The formal extension of the movement, the violin divisions and the division partnership of the violin and bass viol anticipate many of the compositional techniques of the later pavans. Many of the formal expansions found in Suite 4 are also observable in Suite 5. Both suites have a similar layout. Although Suite 5 has two corants instead of the two aires, they fulfil the same contrasting function. Of note are the bass viol

LAWES.indb 230

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

231

divisions in Alman HC17, which become rather demanding in the B1 strain. The formal expansions are not paralleled in the strain lengths. Throughout the collection the second strains are the same length or longer than the first. Almans vary in strains of seven to fifteen (semibreve) bars and corants vary from five to nine (dotted semibreve) bars. The sarabands are mostly quite regular, having the Â�usually four-bar strains. (HC4 has six bars in its third strain, and HC12 has fiveand six-bar strains.) Also of note from Suite 5 is the extended formal structure of Saraband HC20: ||A||A1||B||B1||C||C1||A2||A3||B2||B3||C2||C3||, similar to that usually found in the corants and in the three pavans. Here, however, there are three sets of variations instead of two. In HC20 the formal expansion of the saraband from Suite 4 is continued and developed. Each of the three strains is repeated with quite simple ground breaking divisions in the bass viol on the A1, B1 and C1 strains. This is followed by a full repetition of the saraband with varied divisions in the violin and bass viol. Again, the simple divisions are complicated by the fast tempo. The formal extension of the piece clearly shows the direction in which Lawes’s compositional impetus was heading. Although Suite 6 is composed in a similar style and format, there are several subtle differences between it and Suites 1–5, differences suggestive of a transitional stage. The first alman (HC21) is in a similar form to the corants of previous suites, and to Saraband HC20: ||:A:||:B:||A1||A2||B1||B2||. Here, however, the divisions are faster and more demanding than previously. The A1 divisions are in a continuous quaver movement largely comprised of lively ‘mixt’ divisions; the A2 divisions are, for the first time in the collection, in almost continuous semiquavers (Example 7.4). There are similarly fast divisions in Alman HC17, but they are pervasive in Saraband HC20. The B1 strain is an exact repetition of B with the bass viol doubling the theorbo; in B2 Lawes introduces triplet variations in the viol. The triplets are mostly fast ‘mixt’ divisions, giving way to fast-moving semiquaver divisions and written-out trills. To Simpson, tripla divisions are a means of ‘changing still from one Variety to another; for, Variety it is, which chiefly pleaseth’↜.57 Tripla divisions are also found in the B1 strain of Pavan HC28. Alman HC22 is Spartan by comparison. It has no divisions, and thus provides an effective contrast to HC21. Both corants (HC23–4) in Suite 6 follow the same formal layout as the earlier extended corants, but the arrangement of their divisions is more similar to the extended sarabands. Here the violins also divide above the ground, developing quite simple elaborations of the previous violin Â�melodies. The terminal two-strain saraband (HC25) follows the same formal design as the corants. The violin divides with, or against, the viol. The violin divisions are elaborate figurations on their original melodies. After the exuberance of the 57 SimpsonDV, 47.

LAWES.indb 231

19/03/2010 10:58

232

the consort music of william lawes Example 7.4╇ Lawes, Alman HC21 {182}, A1 and A2 strains: editorial harp part; GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40

    

  

[Bass Viol 1st time]

  





 





















 

 



 [Bass Viol 2nd time]               

        



    3

 



 







 

 

    





  

  









 



 











 

  

 

 





  



 



  

LAWES.indb 232





















 









 

















 





   

 





   

     





 

                  

6







   

                                               





                                                               





  

  

   

 





 



19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

233

initial alman, the divisions in Suite 6 are mostly quaver-based. The quite different arrangement of divisions in the remaining pieces in this suite, however, points to a different compositional conception. Continuing from HC20, this suite anticipates the formal expansion of the suite (to incorporate more division-writing) that can be seen in HC26–30. It is unclear whether HC26–30 were intended to be played as freestanding individual pieces, or added to the initial six suites. Lefkowitz first suggested that they may have been intended to act as elaborate initial movements to the existing suites.58 Given Lawes’s development of the consort suite, it seems unlikely that he would compose elaborate freestanding movements especially by the late 1630s. Indeed, Aire HC26 is a simple two-strain alman without elaborate divisions and individually quite unremarkable. HC26–30 should rather be seen within the overall context of Lawes’s apparent favouring of larger, more elaborate forms incorporating divisions: where the divisions are intended to change or adapt the function of the pieces (or collections). This is also evident, for example, in the Royall Consort (see Chapter 4). Aire HC26 and Pavan HC27 are in G, Pavan HC28 is in D, Pavan HC29 in g, and Fantazy HC30 is in d. The pieces in G and the fantasia seem to be intended as optional extras for Suites 3 and 4 respectively, whereas HC28 and HC29 could be appended to several suites; HC26 is unlikely to have fulfilled the same role as the other four large-scale movements. This raises a question: why did Lawes not compose an elaborate first movement for each of the six suites? This line of thought implies that each of the suites was intended to be played right through as they are numbered in the partbooks. These pieces may, however, have served two formal roles. First, HC1–25 could be played as they are, in short suites, where the duplicated dances were perhaps optional. Second, larger suites could have been formed by combining pieces in the same key, while retaining a fundamental A–C–S structure (as with the Royall Consort suites in B.3). It could be said that the addition of the large-scale pieces would make the harp consort suites a little ‘top-heavy’↜. A similar pattern, however, emerges from the Royall Consort, especially in the suite in C, where Pavan {49} has elaborate divisions, whereas the rest of the movements are short, simple dances (see Chapter 4). In other words, the large-scale pieces could be seen as having added variety to the shorter dances. Textural variety was an important feature of the initial dance suites (HC1–25). For example, when there are two dances of the same type within a suite (either almans or corants), one is more extended and contains more complex divisions than the other. It is likely that the function of the harp consorts was a key factor in determining the format. HC1–25 were probably initially intended as Tafelmusik. But the 58 LefkowitzWL, 92; PintoFyV, 154.

LAWES.indb 233

19/03/2010 10:58

234

the consort music of william lawes

composition of HC26–30 clearly evinces a new function for the set. The least we can say is that the complex divisions in these movements suggest the domain of concert music. A (less likely) alternative is to read these movements as belonging to other suites, unfinished or now lost. HC26–30 are in a slightly different order in B.3 and D.238–40. They appear to have been composed in the order HC26, HC30, HC27, HC28 and HC29. In B.3, HC26 is in a different colour ink from the other four, and may even have been an afterthought placed before the group on an unused page. Although similar in form to the earlier almans, it is stylistically similar to the fantasia. HC26–30 are in four real parts, rather than three. The divisions in Aire HC26 pervade the texture of the piece in a similar style to the viol consort aires, or Fantazy HC30. HC26 is similar in length to many of the harp consort almans, but stylistically it is significantly different from any of the previous aires or almans. In HC26 there is a more imitative texture than before, and, for the first time, a solo passage for harp; the only other solo harp passage comes in the Fantazy. The change in texture reinforces the earlier suggestion that the last five pieces were specifically composed for the ‘harp consort’ ensemble, whereas the first twenty-five were adapted from two-part originals. The three pavans are all in a similar style, consisting of three repeated strains followed by two sets of divisions on each: ||:A:||:B:||:C:||A1||A2||B1||B2|| C1||C2||. In the A, B and C strains the main pavan melody is in the treble Â�register of the harp, accompanied by slow-moving countermelodies in the violin and bass viol, as the theorbo and the lowest line of the harp hold the bass. In B.3 the harp part is not rewritten for the division strains of the pavans. The harper obviously repeated the original strain on the repeats, possibly with some variation, which is suggested by the doubling of the harp bass line in the theorbo and the main pavan melody being taken by the violin, usually on the first division strain. In the three pavans, Lawes experimented with a slightly different formal approach to the division strains, developing to the full the formal expansions of Suites 4 and 6. Pavan HC27 is the only one of the pavans apparently not based on a pre-Â� existing composition. In the A1 and A2 strains the violin takes the pavan melody with the harp, against the bass viol divisions: the theorbo doubles the lowest line of the harp (Example 7.5). For A1 the bass viol performs ‘mixt’ divisions in almost continuous quavers using chordal skips, transitions, occasional double stops and passing notes. As Simpson recommends, the intensity and speed of the divisions intensifies in the A2 strain. Here the bass viol plays fast ‘mixt’ divisions in almost continuous quavers and semiquavers; most of the divisions consist of fast scalar transitions. Lawes used the same structure for B1 and B2, but a slightly different one for C1 and C2. The overall format of the C strain is the same as the division strains of the A and B sections: gradually intensified series of divisions in the bass

LAWES.indb 234

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

235

Example 7.5╇ Lawes, Pavan HC27 {188}, A1 and A2 strains: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3

   4  28



A1 and A2 ‘DiVisyon Uppon the Pauen’

[Bass Viol 1st time]

   4 

 













   





 





[Bass Viol 2nd time]

       4                    4  

  4       4 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

                                                                                                                                  29

    31

      



         

    

 









  



 









         



      





 

                    

         

 

 

 

continued overleaf

LAWES.indb 235

19/03/2010 10:58

236

the consort music of william lawes

      33







 

     



     





                    



 



Example 7.5 continued



                                                                         

    35

                                         

    



    









    



                       



viol; here the violin plays a slightly modified version of the pavan melody. HC27 is the only pavan where the violin does not have elaborate divisions. This seems to be of significance given that the other pavans are based on compositions by Cormack MacDermott and Coprario, respectively (see below). It is difficult to know what inspired Lawes to compose the ‘homage pavans’↜. In the autograph theorbo part (D.238), he attributed HC28 to ‘Cormacke’ and HC29 to ‘Coprario’ (though he signed his own name to the companion violin and bass viol parts), suggesting that they are based on pre-existing compositions.59 Â�‘Cormacke’ is undoubtedly the Irish harper Cormack MacDermott. Upon the Â�‘Cormacke’ pavan Lawes composed the most elaborate divisions of the collection. Lefkowitz suggested that the ‘Coprario’ pavan was an elaboration of Coprario’s 59 Lawes originally began to sign his own name to HC29 (D.238, fol.â•‹43r), ‘Coprario’

is written over an effaced ‘Wj’↜.

LAWES.indb 236

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

237

Fantazia {7} for two bass viols and organ.60 The opening phrases of both pieces share the same bass line (in different octaves), harmony and melodic motifs; the opening melody of the B strain of the pavan may also be derived from the opening syncopated figures of Coprario’s fantasia. As Holman suggested, however, it is more likely that Coprario composed a now lost pavan also beginning with that theme, and that it was this composition from which Lawes was quoting.61 Annette Otterstedt has identified the opening three bars of the bass viol theme of HC29 as containing ‘a stowaway Ferrabosco theme’↜.62 This seems to have been an unconscious reference. The theme is from Ferrabosco’s five-part Pavan {2} in C, which Lawes used as the organ part for one of his bass viol duos (see Chapter 8). On the subject of these attributions, Holman noted that the example of Lawes’s pavan and alman for two bass viols and organ based on Ferrabosco (ii) makes it likely that [the] harp parts [of HC28–9] contain the original pieces more or less complete. Lawes presumably attributed the theorbo parts to Cormack and Coprario because they double the bass of the harp parts, while the violin and bass viol parts consist throughout of newlycomposed descant and division material.63 The way in which Lawes attributed the parts in the harp consorts and in the bass viol duos is revealing. As in the harp consort pavans, in the ‘Ferrabosco’ pavan and alman for two bass viols and organ Lawes attributed the organ part to Ferrabosco (D.229) but signed his own name to the string partbooks (D.238 and D.240); the score in B.2 reads ‘Pauen: and Almane of Alfonso. sett to the Organ and 2 diuison BaseViolls by:∙ Wjllawes’↜. This seems to confirm Holman’s suggestion that only the theorbo part of HC29 contains the original composition. HC28 and HC29 explore slightly different approaches to structuring the divisions. In the A, B and C strains the main pavan melody is in the treble register of the harp, accompanied by slow-moving countermelodies in the bowed strings; the theorbo doubles the lowest line of the harp. For the A1 strain of HC28 the violin plays a slightly modified version of the pavan melody while the bass viol performs ‘mixt’ divisions in almost continuous quavers and semiquavers. On A2 the violin abandons the pavan melody for fast ‘mixt’ divisions using descant, scalar 60 LefkowitzWL, 103–4; PintoFyV, 154. Coprario’s fantasia for two bass viols and

organ is edited in CoprarioBV, 26–9, and in JacobeanCM, 182.

61 HolmanH, 203 n.â•‹27. 62 A. Otterstedt, ‘Lawes’s Division Viol: Pedigree of an Instrument’↜, trans. H. Reiners,

in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 307–39, at 328.

63 HolmanH, 193.

LAWES.indb 237

19/03/2010 10:58

238

the consort music of william lawes

transitions, chordal skips, dissonances and neighbour notes. The bass viol Â�doubles the bass line. In B1 the violin again plays a new melody, incorporating tripla variations. Against this, the viol plays ‘mixt’ divisions in almost continuous quaver triplets. Lawes again employs the concertante idiom as the violin and viol trade phrases. In B2 the violin begins slowly, contrasting the semiquaver scalar transitions in the bass viol (Example 7.6). After about four bars the bass viol and violin join in fast divisions (quavers, semiquavers and demisemiquavers). In C1 both violin and bass viol begin in quaver ‘mixt’ divisions (using all techniques), ending the strain by playing antiphonally. Again, the bowed strings divide together on the C2 strain, trading phrases in mostly fast ‘mixt’ divisions, using all devices but mostly scalar transitions and neighbour notes. The strain ends in fast demisemiquavers in a manner similar to what Simpson called ‘driving the point’: it renders the Division more Uniforme, and also more Delightfull: provided, you do not cloy the Eare with too much repetition of the same thing; which may be avoyded by some little Variation, as you see I have done in carrying on some of the before-going Points. Also you have liberty to Change your Point, though in the Midst of your Ground; or Mingle One Point with another, as best shall please your Fancy.64 The divisions in this pavan demonstrate a new conception of the violin and viol working as division partners, now performing in turn and simultaneously. This general idea appears to have been taken up by Simpson but his later precepts differ greatly in detail. Although the overall structure of HC29 is similar to the previous pavans, there are subtle differences. The instrumental arrangement of the A, B and C strains is the same as in the other pavans. In A1 the violin takes over the dividing role from the bass viol and performs divisions in a quite fast descant, in mostly quaver and semiquaver movement, under which the bass viol doubles the theorbo. For A2 the violin begins with the bass viol’s A strain melody up an octave but abandons this after two bars to play the pavan melody with the harp. In this section the bass viol plays quite fast divisions using chordal skips, neighbour notes, scalar transitions and consonant suspensions, mostly quavers and semiquavers. B1 is similar in style to A1, except that the bass viol now performs divisions with the violin (‘driving the point’). The violin and viol brilliantly complement each other, using imitation and parallel movement building to a (demisemiquaver) climax. The B2 strain provides relief from the duelling bass viol and violin. Here the violin doubles the pavan melody of the harp as the bass viol plays quaver and semiquaver divisions. C1 and C2 combine the division structure from the previous two division strains. C1 is the 64 SimpsonDV, 47.

LAWES.indb 238

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

239

Example 7.6╇ Lawes, Pavan HC28 {189}, opening of B2 strain: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3

      4                         4              55



  4 



  4       4

   





  

 











   





   

   

    

 

                        







  

   





  

  

57







 







   

  

58                                                                               

same as A1: the violin divides as the bass viol doubles the theorbo (Example 7.7). This violin division is quite excellent, using transitions, neighbour notes and many chordal leaps/consonant skips mostly in quavers and semiquavers. This leads brilliantly to C2, where the violin and bass viol combine to end the movement in ‘mixt’ divisions. Both instruments work well together, trading phrases and motifs, and playing antiphonally in mostly fast ‘mixt’ divisions. Simpson recommended that when two trebles are dividing together ‘they move in Quick Notes, Both Together; their most usuall passage will be in 3ds. or 6ths. to One Another; sometimes, an

LAWES.indb 239

19/03/2010 10:58

240

the consort music of william lawes Example 7.6 continued

                59







                                  



60    

 

           

 



 





   

  



 

        

                                                       





 

 

 



 



  



 



intermixture with other Concords’↜.65 Such parallel motion is not always evident in Lawes’s passages where the bass viol and violin divide together. Lawes does use parallel movement but he tends to vary the rhythms and melodies to create complementary lines. Apart from the bass viol pieces, the closest comparison (for divisions) is Pavan {49} from the Royall Consort. In the autograph partbooks the harp consorts conclude with Fantazy HC30, which in style and structure is closely related to the Royall Consort fantasias. All three explore a similar problem of form against medium. Like the Royall Consort instrumentation, the combination of violin, bass viol, theorbo and harp is rather unsuitable for a fantasia (see also Chapter 5). In HC30 Lawes does not rely upon the use of antiphonal groups, but instead often contrasts the upper strings with the harp. His textural approach to the harp in HC30 is often similar to the organ in his fantasia-suites for single violin (as are the solo introduction and solo passages for harp; cf. for example, the harp and organ parts in HC30 and Fantazia {135}). HC30 contains similarities to many of the important motivic elements that form 65 SimpsonDV, 49.

LAWES.indb 240

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

241

Example 7.7╇ Lawes, Pavan HC29 {190}, C1 strain: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3



    VIOLIN   4 62

BASS VIOL & THEORBO

HARP

    4 

         

 



    4                   4





  

  



    

              64                                                 

       

  



  

     

       

 

65                                                                                          

    67

   



 



  

 

 

                             

          69

     





 





 

           

       









      

           

   

                      

LAWES.indb 241

   

                

19/03/2010 10:58

242

the consort music of william lawes

the basis of the Royall Consort fantasias. It is also clearly sectional. In the Royall Consort fantasias, however, the sections usually correspond to textural changes or developments, whereas in HC30 the sections are clearly defined by motivic developments: each section usually indicated by an obvious cadence. HC30 can be divided into six main sections: 1

bars 1–16

Opening imitative section based on a repeated-note motif; ends clearly with imperfect cadence in d (vi–V)

2

bars 16–21

Imitative section based on a short arching motif; ends clearly with imperfect cadence in d (i63–V)

3

bars 21–9

Free-imitative section based initially on a repeated-note motif; ends with imperfect cadence in g (i–V)

4

bars 29–36 Imitative section; faster movement (quavers and semiquavers): division-esque passage; ends with inverted perfect cadence to D

5

bars 36–44 Imitative section based on a descending, repeated-note Â�chromatic motif; no clearly defined final cadence (overlaps with coda)

6

bars 45–53

Serene coda; slower, crotchet and minim movement with lots of block-chords; ends with extended plagal cadence

HC30 opens with a repeated-note motif in the bass register of the harp, which has thematic resemblance to the opening theme from the Royall Consort fantasia in D and a rhythmic resemblance to the fantasia in d (Example 7.8). Both movements in d present their opening points in the plucked strings: the fantasia in D begins in the (second) bass viol. The opening imitative section is comprised of both real and tonal answers as Lawes quickly introduces new statements of the theme. In this section (and throughout the piece) Lawes takes advantage of both hands of the harpist to create often as many as five real parts. What often results is a three-part texture in the violin, bass viol and theorbo against a three-part texture in the harp. The opening section is dominated by rhythmic motifs similar to those found in the Example 7.8╇ Comparison of opening themes: (a) Royall Consort, Fantazy {1}; (b) Royall Consort, Fantazy {36}; (c) Harp Consort, Fantazy HC30 {191} (a) (b)

  

         (c)

LAWES.indb 242

     

  

    



      

          

     



      

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

243

Royall Consort fantasia in d, especially the dotted crotchet/three-quaver motif. In addition, the ‘sighing’ motif (minim or dotted minim falling to a quaver or a crotchet; see Chapter 4, Example 4.1) so prevalent in the Royall Consort fantasias is also found in this opening section: Example 7.9. The ‘sighing’ motif is echoed in the many dotted crotchet suspension figures, notable throughout the passage. Example 7.9╇ Lawes, Harp Consort Fantazy HC30 {191}, bars 6–11:

   4  6

‘sighing’ motif: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3 (bar nos.â•‹as LawesHC)





              4            4 

  4

   4   





8

  

 





 

  



                                        

10    

   

  

     



   

 



        

  

 









   

 

    

   

            

    



 



      



  



 



   

  

   

    







                        

LAWES.indb 243



    



      



  



            













  

         

      



19/03/2010 10:58

244

the consort music of william lawes

The complexity of the counterpoint in this passage (and throughout the fantasia) is also noteworthy; it suggests a deliberately formal and learned, even retrospective, style for a cultivated audience. Section 2 begins after the imperfect cadence from bars 16–21 and opens with the violin and theorbo with just the bass of the harp. This light texture is contrasted quickly with a tutti until the end of the section with a four- and five-part texture in the harp. This brief section centres on an arching motif modulating freely through the subtonic, tonic, subdominant and tonic, ending with an inverted imperfect cadence (bar 21). The following section (section 3) explores free contrapuntal imitation, and again employs a pithy repeated-note motif. Here the ‘sighing’ motif is explored fully: especially bars 26–9. As in the two Royall Consort fantasias, the ‘sighing’ motifs are contrasted with divisions in the next section. Section 4 embraces the imitative qualities of the preceding sections and combines them with a division-based style of writing (in quavers and semiquavers). Example 7.10╇ (a) Lawes, Fantazy HC30 {191}, bars 31–4: GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3; (b) Lawes, Fantazia {156} for two violins, bass viol and organ, bars 47–9: GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40 and D.229; (c) Lawes, Fantazy {72} for five viols and organ, bars 33–5: GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. B.2 and D.229

   4  31

(a)

   4

   4    4 

 

 

  





 

                                          

    

          

                                     4     

   33



LAWES.indb 244

    

       

    

   

  

    

    

   

   

    

    

 





                                                                

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

245

                  4                            4                        4 47

(b)

     4         4

  4    

    

   

 

 

     

33

(c)

 4 

 4 

 

           4    4

 

  

                   

 

   

     

  

  

   

  



 

  

 



   

   

    





                                                     4      4    

The texture in the fourth section is wonderfully intricate, with an Â�antiÂ�phonal assemblage of the whole ensemble resulting in as many as seven contraÂ�puntal parts. The harp accompaniment at bars 31–4 is built on a figure also found in Fantazia {156} from Lawes’s fantasia-suite for two violins, and in his five-part viol consort Fantazy {72} (Example 7.10a–c).66 Section 5 begins at bar 36 (Example 7.11). Although the descending chromatic figure comprises fewer notes than the chromatic figures in the Royall Consort fantasias, it is easy to see the relationship between the two. Rather than treat the chromaticism as a bass line to be harmonized, here Lawes treats the descending chromatic figure contrapuntally and explores it imitatively, using the chromaticism to pass through keys as remote as f. The chromatic motif is shorter than those found in the Royall Consort fantasias to allow Lawes to control it imitatively without undermining the clear tonal direction. The final section is a serene coda 66 LawesFS, 96–9; and LawesCS, 17–22.

LAWES.indb 245

19/03/2010 10:58

246

the consort music of william lawes Example 7.11╇ Lawes, Fantazy HC30 {191}, bars 36–42 and 48–53:

            4       4      4     4                 4 

GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3

36

                40

  

  

      48

51

LAWES.indb 246



  





 







 

  



    

          





  

    







 

 









  



      

         

          



 

 

   

  

     



     





  

  

       

  



 

                  







                  

    

         



           

              



                  

 

  









 



 

                   

19/03/2010 10:58

the harp consorts

247

in which the rhythm slows to crotchets and minims as the gently arching counterpoint moves softly to the extended plagal cadence completing the movement. Here the chromatic theme reappears, a technique also used in the Royall Consort fantasia in the same key.

❧⚧ Conclusions

L

awes’s harp consort does not seem to have survived in its original form ╇ beyond the court environment in which it developed. Many of the first twentyfive pieces, however, remained relatively popular in two-part (Tr–B) versions until the 1670s, largely through various Playford publications.67 The poor representation of HC26–30 in non-autograph sources has been used to suggest that the addition of these five pieces to D.238–40 took place ‘when copies had already been circulated’↜.68 Of HC26–30, however, only HC26 is found in a non-autograph source: MS 5. Moreover, HC21–30 were all copied into D.238–40 around the same time, and HC21–5 are also preserved in the two-part manuscripts D.220 and GB-Och, Mus. MS 599. Thus, it seems that (much like the Royall Consort fantasias) although copyists had access to HC26–30 they chose not to copy them on purely stylistic grounds. It is also significant that the selections of the collection surviving in later sources are all Tr–B, or Tr–B arrangements for keyboard. The fact that only selections from the first twenty-five pieces are represented is probably due to the fourpart texture of the later pieces. In Aire HC26 and Fantazy HC30 four real parts are required throughout, with both pieces containing solo passages for the harp. Although these passages could have been adapted for keyboard this would not have suited the Restoration amateur taste for the kind of short, light dances popularized by the Playford collections. The presence of an obbligato accompaniment with solo passages was probably considered too cumbersome to adapt for two-part performance (presumably with a realized continuo part). A similar explanation can be advanced for the pavans, which were certainly considered old-fashioned by the 1660s. The task of arranging was made more complex by having the actual pavan in the harp part and by the countermelodies in the strings also containing essential material. The above analysis of the harp consorts suggests that the compositional process was more complex than previously thought. Lawes composed the collection in three distinct phases, which do not correspond to the way in which the collection was copied into the surviving autograph sources. Once this distinction between composition and copying is made, the evolution of the collection becomes clearer. 67 Index for individual concordances. 68 PintoFyV, 154.

LAWES.indb 247

19/03/2010 10:58

248

the consort music of william lawes

First Lawes composed Suites 1–5, followed by Suite 6 and then by the five pieces in B.3. Even within these phases Lawes’s compositional thought was gradually developing, best represented by the way in which he subtly expanded the formal boundaries of the individual pieces (and whole suites) to accommodate division-writing. This further suggests that the first phase was unlikely to have been completed all at once. The extent of the division-writing in the later harp consorts is comparable to that in the bass viol and organ suites, Fantazia {135} and in parts of the Royall Consort. The parallels between the Harp Consort and the Royall Consort are many and suggestive. One certainly notes a similar impetus behind the formal expansion of both collections: divisions. Division-writing in the harp consorts is more elaborate than in the Royall Consort (Pavan {49} notwithstanding), which suggests differing functions. I argued in Chapter 4 that the Royall Consort was Â�rescored with more divisions to bring it from the realm of functional dance music to a more concert-like situation, most likely as a form of Tafelmusik. From their inception, however, the harp consorts seem to have been composed as Tafelmusik. The inclusion of more elaborate division pieces – culminating in the homage pavans – appears to have been part of Lawes’s intention to bring the harp consorts to an audience whose main attention was the music and the performers. The exquisite Fantazy HC30 is a case point. It perfectly encapsulates this wonderfully esoteric genre: the tension between form and medium is played out, and resolved, through Lawes’s supreme handling of contrapuntal textures; the essential diatonicism brilliantly juxtaposed with a typically Lawesean feeling for chromatic colour. Were it not for the disruption of the Civil War Lawes could well have Â�developed the harp consort further; it is our loss that he did not.

LAWES.indb 248

19/03/2010 10:58

chapter 8

The Suites for Two Bass Viols and Organ

L

awes’s development of formal structures to accommodate elaborate divisions â•… is perhaps best observed in his pieces for two bass viols and organ. Seven survive, one of which is incomplete.1 Both autograph scores (GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2) and parts (GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238, D.240 and D.229) have fortunately survived. In the string partbooks the pieces appear to be arranged into suites: a suite in g (pavan and two aires); then four pieces in C, although it is unclear whether Lawes intended these as two pairs – Pavan {104} and Alman {105}, and Aire {106} and Corant {107} – or as one suite. The relationship between these pieces in the autograph sources is complex. In B.2 they are in the following order: Pavan {101}, Aire {102}, Aire {103}, Corant {107}, Pavan {104}, Alman {105} and Aire {106}, with the lute suite between Pavan {101} and Aire {102}. In the partbooks they come in the order suggested by the VdGS numbers. Moreover, the bass viol parts of Aire {106} are complete in D.238–40, but only the bass line of the first strain of the organ is in D.229; the organ and some of the second viol part is missing in B.2.

C

ompositions for two equal bass viols with organ accompaniment appear to ╇ have begun with Coprario. Although the genre is likely to have largely developed from the tradition of setting solo bass viol divisions to an organ accompaniment (see below) the equal lute duets that developed in the late sixteenth century may also have served as a model.2 Twelve pieces by Coprario for two bass viols and organ survive.3 They are through-composed, essentially bi-sectional fantasias, formally similar to many fantasias by Ferrabosco; they contain only occasional, and undemanding, division passages.4 Andrew Ashbee has suggested that Coprario probably composed the duos between 1617 and 1625 for performance in the Prince Charles’s household.5 This seems likely, given that they are ╇ 1 {101–3} published in VdGS Supplement, no.â•‹91; {104–5} published in LawesSCM.

Bar nos.â•‹of LawesSCM are given in square brackets where they differ.

╇ 2 For lute duets, see SpringL, 149–56. ╇ 3 Index for concordances. All published in CoprarioBV. ╇ 4 See CoprarioBV; also J. Richards, ‘A Study of Music for Bass Viol Written in Eng-

land in the Seventeenth Century’ (BLitt diss., Oxford University, 1961) i. 70–94.

╇ 5 AshbeeHM2, 191. Elsewhere they have been dated to as early as 1610: see, Richards,

‘Bass Viol’↜, i. 71–2; CoprarioBV, vii.

LAWES.indb 249

19/03/2010 10:58

250

the consort music of william lawes

compositionally more mature than his viol consorts or lyra-viol trios.6 Coprario’s duos also appear to be the earliest examples in England of consort music with an independent organ accompaniment conceived as a harmonic foundation.7 There are no concordances to suggest that they were arrangements of larger consort pieces; indeed, they are stylistically comparable to Coprario’s other two-part (Tr–T) pieces.8 Six fantasias for two equal trebles survive by Orlando Gibbons. They contain more divisions than the Coprario pieces, but have more in common with the Renaissance tradition as exemplified by Thomas Morley’s two-part fantasias; no organ part survives, although one was probably extemporized by Gibbons in performance. At court the bass viol duos does not seem to have been greatly developed until Lawes, although the lyra-viol duo appears to have remained quite popular throughout the period (see Chapter 3). In the years between Coprario’s death (1626) and Lawes’s royal appointment (1635) the genre appears to have flourished outside the court. There are two fantasias for two bass viols in GB-Ckc, MSS Rowe 112–13 attributed to William White (fl. c.â•‹1620). Because they have few rests and lack clearly defined sections, Janet Richards suggested they were composed before Coprario’s bass viol duos.9 Although sectional fantasias are generally later, it does not necessarily follow that all composers developed at the same pace. It is quite likely that provincial composers were composing non-sectional fantasias after the development of the more instrumentally conceived and sectional ones. The White fantasias are essentially vocally derived; no organ parts have survived, though they may have been extemporized. There are also six fine pieces for two bass viols and organ by John Ward. These mostly two-strain homophonic ayres are heavily influenced by dance forms and apparently modelled on Coprario’s.10 The viols are of equal importance, and although the parts cross frequently they are not as closely spaced as in Coprario’s fantasias. The organ is fully written out, supplying harmonies omitted from the strings. Nine bass viol duos by Simon Ives were copied in GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31423. Whether they too were originally performed with an organ accompaniment is unclear: none has survived. Although copied after 1638 they appear to be early compositions, but later than Coprario’s ╇ 6 CoprarioBV, vii–viii. ╇ 7 CoprarioBV, vii. ╇ 8 See John Coprario: The Two-, Three- and Four-Part Consort Music, ed. R. Charteris

(1991).

╇ 9 Richards, ‘Bass Viol’↜, i. 101. The second of White’s fantasias is published in

�JacobeanCM, no.╋5.

10 All six are edited in John Ward: Consort Music of Four Parts, ed. I. Payne, MBâ•‹83

(2005), see also ibid., pp.â•‹xxviii–xxix. Richards (‘Bass Viol’↜, i. 106) dates them to c.â•‹1620.

LAWES.indb 250

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

251

duos: they were perhaps composed in the mid- to late 1620s.11 Ives appears to have been one of the first to experiment with setting one viol against the other for variety. There are simple divisions in many of his pieces; more elaborate divisions may have been extemporized on repeats. There are also several (poor quality) bass viol duos by Michael East (c.â•‹1580–1648), apparently dating to the late 1630s.12 Composers continued to write pieces for two bass viols and organ around the middle of the century. Matthew Locke’s twelve bass viol duos (in four threemovement suites) are dated 1652 in his autograph scorebook (GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17801). Locke’s idiomatic viol parts are self-sufficient and do not need accompaniment; as an organist, Locke could have extemporized one in performance.13 John Hingeston also composed sixteen pieces for two bass viols, arranged in four suites of Fantasia–Alman–Alman–Corant. Hingeston’s duos are quite well composed. They do not require virtuoso technique, although elaborate divisions again may have been extemporized. As with Locke, there is no organ part for Hingeston’s bass viol duos, although he too was an organist capable of improvising one as required. John Jenkins was one of the most prolific composers of bass viol music. The Index currently attributes over fifty pieces for one or two bass viols to him, many of which are difficult to date accurately. They are mostly in a mature instrumental style, with technically demanding divisions. Several are stylistically similar to Christopher Simpson’s lessons in The Division-Violist (1659).14 Over forty pieces for two bass viols and organ are attributed to Jenkins. Many lack an organ part, but are likely to have had one originally.15 Andrew Ashbee suggests that the duos of Coprario and Ward were Jenkins’s immediate models.16 Indeed, two duos (now lacking an organ part) in Rowe MSS 112–13 (Aires {1} and {2}), ‘remain sufficiently close [in general style] to the Ward and Coprario models to imply that they were composed no later than the 1630s’↜.17 Neither piece contains any of the florid division-writing common to the pieces in the Jenkins holograph GB-Lcm, MS 921. MS 921 is one partbook of an original set of three, containing the second bass viol part to twenty-one bass viol duos, and the treble part for seventeen of his pieces 11 These pieces are discussed in Richards, ‘Bass Viol’↜, i. 113–22. See also P. Willetts,

‘Autograph Music by John Jenkins’↜, ML 48 (1967), 124–6.

12 All published by East in The Seventh Set of Bookes (1638). 13 See HolmanOA. 14 Especially those copied by Francis Withy in GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. C.59–60. 15 See AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹8; the information relating to Jenkins in this paragraph is

based primarily on Ashbee’s account.

16 AshbeeHM2, 195. 17 AshbeeHM2, 194–6, at 196.

LAWES.indb 251

19/03/2010 10:58

252

the consort music of william lawes

for treble, bass, and organ.18 Most of the pieces in MS 921 date to c.â•‹1640. The first six pieces certainly appear to have been in circulation as a group by the late 1630s. Ashbee suggests that Nicholas Le Strange probably acquired them before the arrival of Jenkins at Kirtling; annotations in MS 921 show that they Â�circulated as a group.19 As Ashbee notes, Each of the first six pieces is a two-strain air with florid divisions in place of repeats. All have a similar plan: an initial phrase of 4–6 bars, cadencing strongly (usually on the dominant), then a longer answer incorporating imitative writing and closing variously in the tonic (Nos. 38, 37, 63), the relative major (Nos. 45, 44), or the dominant (No. 46). The second strain, except in No. 38, is longer with imitative writing predominating and with little emphasis given to inner cadences.20 Lawes and Jenkins appear to have been first to compose elaborate divisions for a pair of bass viols. This is likely to be primarily an outgrowth of the solo bass divisions that developed during the first quarter of the century. Some of the earliest examples of solo bass viol divisions are found in John Merro’s partbooks, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7. Two were composed by Daniel Norcombe on a pavan and alman by the harper Cormack MacDermott. As Peter Holman notes, the unusual feature of these divisions … is that they are not written on short ground basses but on complete dances, performed with their normal repeats. … Clearly these examples tell us that when bass viol divisions were written on consort dances, the accompaniment was normally a reduction for keyboard of some or all of the parts of the original.21 The Merro partbooks also contain seven sets of bass viol divisions in bastarda style, which must be among the earliest examples. Holman has noted that at least four of them must be by English composers as they are based on madrigals and motets found in the English vocal repertoire.22 For example, there are divisions on Palestrina’s ‘Sound out my voice’ attributed to ‘Alfonso’; this is more likely to refer to Ferrabosco II than to his father. In light of these bastarda pieces, it is interesting 18 See P. Willetts, ‘Sir Nicholas Le Strange and John Jenkins’↜, ML 42 (1961), 30–43;

also IMCCM1, 85–9.

19 AshbeeHM2, 197–8. They are {45}, {46}, {38}, {37}, {63} and {44}: published in Six

Airs and Divisions for Two Bass Viols and Keyboard, ed. D. Beecher and B. Gillingham (Ottawa, 1979).

20 AshbeeHM2, 199. 21 HolmanH, 191. 22 See HolmanFTF, 207.

LAWES.indb 252

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

253

to recall Christopher Simpson’s statement that ‘the Through-Basse, of some Motett, or Madrigall’ was often used as the basis for divisions.23

A

lthough there are no surviving examples of divisions composed for bass ╇╇ viol duos before those by Lawes and Jenkins, it seems likely that elaborate divisions were improvised, especially when professional musicians performed pieces based on simple dance strains. Some of the divisions in Lawes’s bass viol duos are quite demanding; they are idiomatic and lie easily under the fingers, although often complicated by the intense speed of the rapid passages of semiquavers and demisemiquavers. The technical difficulties presented by these pieces are evidence that Lawes was composing in this medium for court performances: a list of viol players at court is given in Chapter 5; again Giles Tomkins is likely to have played the organ. In B.2 (p.â•‹93) Lawes titled Pavan {101} in g ‘For 2 Base Violls and Organ’↜. The aires follow, but without reference to instrumentation. Pavan {104} and Alman {105}, which are based on pieces by Ferrabosco, Lawes titled ‘Pauen: and Almane of Alfonso. sett to the Organ and 2 diuison BaseViolls by:∙ Wjllawes’↜. This pattern is followed in the partbooks, with slight variations. These are the earliest references to a ‘division viol’↜. It is unclear whether Lawes was describing the function of the bass viol, the smaller sized bass viol known to Simpson and later observers,24 or both. Whether referring to a specific type of viol or not, the difference in titling relates to the more complex division-writing found in the homage pieces; FerraÂ� bosco’s pavan and alman provide the basis for the most technically difficult divisions in the suites. They are perhaps Lawes’s most demanding divisions. Elaborate divisions seem to have been a way in which Lawes sought to highlight his musical tributes. The Ferrabosco pieces can be compared to the pavans from the Harp Consort based on compositions by MacDermott and Coprario. The homage pavans also stand out from the rest of the harp consorts by virtue of their elaborate divisions (see Chapter 7). Indeed, this raises the question of whether Lawes’s Fantazia {135}, discussed in Chapter 6, could also have been intended as an homage, although this seems unlikely given the lack of attribution to another composer as found in the other tribute pieces. Lawes’s composition of elaborate divisions for two bass viols seems to be closely linked to the development of the division style generally. Indeed, Murray Â�Lefkowitz noted that 23 SimpsonDV, 47. 24 SimpsonDV; J. Playford, A Brief Introduction to the Skill of Musick (4/1664), 88;

R. Donnington, ‘James Talbot’s Manuscript (Christ Church Library Music MS 1187), Part II: Bowed Strings’↜, GSJâ•‹3 (1950), 27–45, esp. 32; T. Salmon, A Proposal to Perform Musick in Perfect Mathematical Proportions (1688), 21.

LAWES.indb 253

19/03/2010 10:58

254

the consort music of william lawes

The formal scheme of [Lawes’s] ‘division’ viol suites adheres almost identically to the instructions set forth by Christopher Simpson in his DivisionViolist. … Likewise, it should be noted that the ‘division’ types, i.e. ‘breakinge base’↜, ‘descant’↜, ‘mixt’↜, ‘skipping division’↜, ‘running division’↜, ‘tripla’↜, etc., are the same as those in the ‘Harpe’ Consorts, as are the ‘ordering’ of these types in the repeated strains.25 As noted in Chapter 7, this suggests a well-established tradition, within which both composers were working. It does not imply that all divisions were of the same standard, or that composers such as Lawes and Jenkins did not push the boundaries. Rather, by the time Lawes composed his bass viols pieces the art of division had reached a sufficiently mature stage where composers were moving away from improvisation and beginning to use divisions as a compositional resource. Simpson specifically described the performance of divisions when composing for two bass viols and organ in a passage titled ‘Of two Viols Playing together to a Ground’↜.26 One can see a parallel between Lawes’s use of divisions (particularly in the harp consorts and the bass viol duos) and the precepts laid out by Simpson, especially in this passage. Nevertheless, Simpson’s examples and descriptions are quite different in their details to Lawes’s music.

❧⚧ The Suite in g

S

ix of the seven Lawes bass viol duos are arrangements of consort pieces. The ╇ suite in g has close links to the early version of Royall Consort. Pavan {101} and Aire {103} are found in four-part versions in the miscellaneous sequence in g from the two main sources for the ‘old’ version, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. E.431–6 and F.568–9 (see Chapter 4). A two-part version of Aire {102} is in a sequence of pieces in another Royall Consort source, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.233–6. This sequence comes after two suites in D from the Royall Consort and before the miscellaneous suite in g containing Pavan {101} and Aire {103}. The two-part version contains noticeable differences to the version for bass viols and organ. Playford published Aire {102} in Court-Ayres (1655); there are enough variants to suggest that the D.233–6 version was not derived from the print. Pavan {101} and Aire {103} are also found in four-part versions in GB-Och, Mus. MSS 367–70 (nos.â•‹43 and 46, respectively). Aire {103} is incomplete in MSS 367–70, as is the preceding piece, 25 LefkowitzWL, 142. 26 SimpsonDV, 48–9. The passage (from the 1667 edition) is reproduced in

Â� LefkowitzWL, 262–4; its relationship to Lawes’s division style in the bass viol and organ pieces is discussed below.

LAWES.indb 254

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

255

Corant {339}. In Corant {339}, the Altus part was not copied (MS 369), suggesting that the copyist, John Browne, was working from an incomplete or two-part source, or that he simply did not finish these pieces. Neither the Altus nor the first treble parts were copied for no.â•‹46. This only occurred for one other piece in the manuscript, no.â•‹53, Maurice Webster’s Echo {11}, where again the Altus part was not copied. In each instance, Browne numbered and titled the pieces omitting the music. Aire {103} (Example 8.1)27 appears to be a relatively early piece. With Corant {339}, it is found near the end of the four-part pieces in the Shirley partbooks (Appendix 1, p. 282). Of the consort versions of Aire {103}, the version for bass viols and organ is closer to the version from the Royall Consort sources than to that in the Shirley partbooks. However, several passages in the bass viols version seem to have derived from the Shirley partbooks. For example, the Shirley partbooks is the only source of the consort version to have dotted (not straight) quavers in the opening figure in the first bar of the treble: this is also in the organ part in D.229, but not in B.2. If (as argued in Chapter 2) Lawes were finished with the Shirley partbooks by 1633, this would be the earliest version of Aire {103}; it is the only autograph source for the consort version. In the duo arrangement of Aire {103} Lawes often has one of the viols playing the bass of the consort version (usually doubled by the organ) with the other viol and organ playing other parts from the consort version. There are, however, several bars where the treble line of the organ has newly composed lines not in the consort sources. Given that there seems to be a good deal of overlap from the two consort versions of the aire in the version for bass viols and organ, it seems probable that Lawes composed the latter version from a (now lost) source intermediate between the two consort versions.

❧⚧ The Suite in C

F

errabosco’s five-part pavan in C is one of the finest pavans in the consort repertoire. Judging from the sources, Ferrabosco’s alman also set by Lawes was originally paired with the pavan.28 Lawes’s composition of his own (organ) inner parts for the pavan and alman suggests that he may not have used the original five-part versions, and may have worked from two-part versions. It is evident from two sources copied by John Merro that Ferrabosco’s pavan and alman disseminated in two-part settings. GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7 is an important source of three-part consort music and lyra-viol music, but also contains a two-part 27 All music examples are transcribed from GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40 and

D.229, unless stated otherwise.

28 See FerraboscoCM, nos.â•‹15 and 13, and relevant commentaries.

LAWES.indb 255

19/03/2010 10:58

256

the consort music of william lawes Example 8.1╇ Lawes, Aire {103}, opening: comparison of version for two bass viols and organ and consort versions: (a) version for two bass viols and organ; (b) consort version 1: GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61 (Shirley partbooks), fol.â•‹30r; (c) consort version 2: GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. E.431–6, p.â•‹172 (concordances in GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.233–6 and F.568–9; GB-Lbl, Add. MSS

(a)

18940–4; GB-Och, Mus. MSS 376–70; GB-W, MSS Vicars Choral 5–6)

   

     

    



 



                 

4     

 

 

   

(b)

(c)

   

   

  











              

   

       

   



   

























  

    



        

 



  

          

      





 

             

       

         

    

 





           

   

      



 

        







     



         



                                               

  

LAWES.indb 256



   

 

 

                

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

257

sequence.29 The second source, GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17795 (of 17792–6), duplicates the two-part D.245–7 sequence; the pavan is also found in its five-part section.30 Merro’s two-part versions of the pavan and alman (in a section headed ‘Almains and Ayers for Base and Treble violls’; 17795, fol.â•‹65v) combine the treble part with a contrived basso seguente from the tenor and bass parts. Whereas the alman does not suffer greatly in this arrangement, much of the contrapuntal detail is inevitably lost in the arrangement of the pavan; the editors of MBâ•‹81 concluded that ‘the adaptation is clumsy, and it is very unlikely that Ferrabosco himself was responsible for it’↜.31 It is worth noting, however, that Lawes’s outer organ parts of both the pavan and alman do not differ greatly from the settings found in Merro’s partbooks. Though there is no direct connection, both men may have had access to the same source, especially as Merro’s source is likely to have had a court provenance.32 Alternatively, Lawes may have chosen to omit the original inner parts from a five-part version. Analysis of the inks in D.229 confirms that he initially copied only the treble and bass, adding his inner parts later. Most of the organ parts for the bass viol suites appear to have been copied using the same ink; on folsâ•‹78v–78r (INV.) (i.e. the pieces in C), however, the inner parts were added in a darker ink than the outer parts. When the inner parts were added some of the downward stems were redirected, most evident in the first strain of the right hand of Alman {105}. Lawes redirected the (downward) stems of the outer lines where they conflicted with his newly added inner parts. Indeed, the downwards stems suggest that Lawes did not originally intend to add inner parts, resulting in organ parts similar to the harp parts in D.229. This also suggests that the organ part in D.229 was the first draft of the piece: the implication being that it was arranged first in D.229 with inner parts subsequently added, and then the viols composed against this organ part in B.2, with the viol parts finally copied into D.238–40. There are only slight differences in the organ parts of these homage pieces between D.229 and B.2. A similar process appears to have been followed in Pavan {101} in g. In D.229 there are what look like unison doublings in the top line. These stems show that Lawes originally wrote the treble line with downwards stems, indicating that he initially did not intend to add an alto-range part. After completing the initial copying, Lawes clearly decided to create a fuller organ texture by adding extra notes in the right hand which necessitated the redirection of the treble line stems. As with the homage pieces, this inner part differs from the consort versions. The pavan is 29 IMCCM1, 139–66; also Chapter 3, above. 30 IMCCM1, 24–36. 31 FerraboscoCM, 243. 32 HolmanFTF, 205–11.

LAWES.indb 257

19/03/2010 10:58

258

the consort music of william lawes

the only one of the pieces in g to have such revisions (or additions) to the organ part. Unlike the homage pieces, however, these revisions seem to have been made around the same time as the initial copying, as the ink is the same throughout. Lawes also omitted one and a half 4/2 bars in the middle of the second strain. This kind of copying error is found several times with Lawes, where he appears to have copied the wrong bar because of the occurrence of a note of the same pitch. He appended the missing bars at the end of the piece. The error is most likely to have happened when copying from the consort version because at this point the main melody crosses between the two trebles. This again suggests that D.229 represents the first compositional stage. Although Lawes’s initially sparse organ parts are noteworthy, a thin organ part was probably more favourable in these pieces as it allows the divisions to be heard more clearly (and reduces potential harmonic conflicts). Corant {107} was also originally copied (or arranged) in two-parts, with (scant) inner parts added later. David Pinto identified the duo as a transposed version of Corant {33} from Royall Consort.33 Lawes again took the outer parts of the consort version and set them as the organ accompaniment. According to Pinto: It is true that the form of the corant (no.â•‹33) employed is apparently more primitive than that in the ‘old’ version [Royall Consort]. This in turn was worked over before inclusion in the ‘new’; but that alone is not justification for giving the bass-viol divisions an early date. It is just as probable that Lawes found the extensive treble repartee that dictates the shape of the full version a distraction from the bass dialogue he was trying to elicit from the piece, and simply cut it out peremptorily.34 Corant {107} bears closer resemblance to the version in the ‘old’ Royall Consort sources (E.431–6 and F.568–9) than to the ‘new’ version source (B.3). This may imply that the organ reduction of Corant {33} is a transitional stage of the piece, in a similar manner to Aire {103}. In other words, Lawes may have compiled the organ part by reworking his version for Tr–Tr–T–B commonly found without much variation throughout the ‘old’ Royall Consort sources. The rescoring of the piece in B.3 (see Chapter 4) was most likely done soon after composition of the bass viol suites. Lawes’s approach to compiling the organ part of Corant {107} is also interesting. He did not simply score the two outer parts of the consort version. Rather, the treble line comprises an amalgam of the two trebles of the ‘old’ Royall 33 PintoFyV, 155; and LawesRC, commentary. 34 PintoFyV, 155. Elsewhere Pinto has suggested that the organ part of the version for

bass viols and organ was ‘made from a shorter prior form, that pre-dates the extant old version’: LawesRC (‘New’ Version, vol. 1), xv.

LAWES.indb 258

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

259

Consort version, necessitated by the crossing of parts and the antiphonal passages. The consort versions of Corant {107} are all in D; Lawes transposed the piece to C for the bass viol duo, which suggests that he specifically wanted the corant to complete the suite in C.

F

rom the way in which these pieces are found in the sources some preliminary conclusions can be advanced. The evidence suggests that Lawes composed/ arranged the organ parts first in D.229. He appears to have begun with Tr–B outlines for several of the pieces; inner parts were filled-in later. These organ parts were written in Lawes’s ‘formal’ style, but this does not necessarily invalidate the idea that they were the first stages in the compositional process, especially as arrangement appears to have played a large part. Given that Lawes generally used pre-existing pieces, it suggests that this kind of arrangement was relatively common practice; for example, three of Ives’s four-part dances are also found in versions for two bass viols, which seem to pre-date the consort versions.35 The bass viol duo may have developed in the early part of the seventeenth century by using score reductions of consort pieces against which divisions were improvised. Such pieces could have been arranged and performed with relative ease, and would have been perfectly suited to performance in the private areas of the court where we know there were several small chamber organs (see Chapter 1). From Lawes’s initial organ part (or arrangement), he seems to have then made the scores in B.2, where the divisions were worked out. Last, the bass viol parts were copied (with revisions) into D.238 and D.240. A small error in B.2 (p.â•‹90), also suggests that Lawes generally began these pieces by working on the treble line of the organ. On the second to last stave Lawes erased his cadential chord (breve, g minor), complete with terminal barline flourish (boxed in Fig. 8.1a). This appears in bar 4 of the stave; it ends the first statement of the last strain, which would omit the division variations. Lawes erased the chord, went back and squeezed in the tonic chord into the previous bar, where he wrote it as a minim (probably to fit in with the other parts). Indeed, almost identical spacing can be seen on the facing page at the actual final bar. Further evidence of this process can be seen on p.â•‹93 of B.2, where Lawes entered the second staves of BV1 and BV2 under the right-hand line of the organ; he even mistakenly wrote a brace connecting the organ part and BV1. The error was realized soon thereafter. Lawes wrote the left hand of the organ 35 Simon Ives: The Four-Part Dances, ed. P. Holman and J. Cunningham (Launton,

2008), nos.â•‹9, 18 and 19. There is no conclusive proof that the consort versions are the arrangements (and not vice versa), although this does seem to be the case, especially for no.â•‹18; the consort arrangement is attributed to ‘I. W.↜’ and found elsewhere as a bass viol duo attributed to John Ward.

LAWES.indb 259

19/03/2010 10:58

260

the consort music of william lawes

(a)

(b)

Fig. 8.1╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2: (a) p.╋90, detail; (b) p.╋91, detail

below the two string parts, and connected the separated organ lines with another brace (see Chapter 2, Fig. 2.24). The exception to this pattern is Aire {106}, the only one of the bass viol duos for which no consort version is known. It survives incomplete: the B.2 score lacks the organ part (although space was left for it) and the second viol part suddenly stops mid-way through bar 33 (i.e. at the a: Example 8.3). The string parts are complete in D.238–40, but only the first strain of the organ was entered in D.229. From the string parts, we can see that the first strain of Aire {106} is well composed. There are several instances of unison or octave doubling between the viols, where the organ would presumably have supplied harmonic support, and (like the second strain) it ends with a feminine cadence (V–I, strong–weak). The carefully written

LAWES.indb 260

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

261

Example 8.2╇ Lawes, Aire {106}, A strain

                       

          



                                   

  





    



 

partial organ accompaniment doubles Bass Viol 1 (as found in D.240 and B.2) but curiously omits the fourth bar. Although this may have been the result of a copying error, the bar strengthens the bass line by the inclusion of dominant harmony (Example 8.2) and may suggest that the organ part pre-dates the other sources. The B and B1 strains present further problems. From Example 8.3 we can see that B1 contains a semibreve beat more than B. This is simply the result of Lawes writing breves rather than minims in the final bar, and easily corrected. It is harder to account for the fact that in the B1 strain the first bass viol also lacks a further minim beat. The error seems to have occurred through the omission of two crotchet beats at the start of bars 25 and 26: the first can be easily rectified by holding over or repeating the e' from the previous bar. The missing crotchet from bar 26 is harder to explain: one solution is to have the first semiquaver group of that bar as quavers, although this is not entirely satisfactory. With the varying states of Aire {106} a rather confusing picture emerges. As we have seen, the organ part is incomplete and imperfect (D.229); the string parts are complete but imperfect (D.238–40); and the score (B.2) is also incomplete and imperfect. Thus, how do we explain the omission of an organ part, the incomplete string score in B.2, and (most importantly) the transmission of the error in the B1 strain (shown in Example 8.3) from the score to the parts? An obvious explanation is that Aire {106} was completed in a now lost source from which the parts were made out in D.238–40. The missing minim beat in the B1 strain could be explained as occurring during the copying of the parts; the same could also be said of the omitted bar from the organ part in D.229. The further implication is that the B.2 score was compiled from D.238–40, as they both contain the missing minim in the B1 strain. One could also point out that the BV2 part is abandoned in B.2 roughly after the point at which the error occurs, which could suggest that when Lawes was compiling the score (from the parts) he realized the error and abandoned the score. This theory does not explain, however, why the error was not corrected in either the score or the parts. Elsewhere Lawes was quick to amend copying errors, surely if he was compiling the score from the parts (or

LAWES.indb 261

19/03/2010 10:58

262

the consort music of william lawes Example 8.3╇ Lawes, Aire {106}, comparison of B and B1 strains (BV2, B strain, bars 27–8: upper notes (small font) in B.2 but not in D.238–40) B strain

BASS VIOL 1

 21  4 

  

 4          29

B1 strain

 4   21

B strain BASS VIOL 2



B1 strain

31



29

23



 







34







 

[quavers?]

   26

  





34       





    



   

[?]

    





 



 







31       

 26   









     

 



        

  

   4

 23      

 



 

                            

  





 



 

 

        

even a related source) he would have made adjustments to them. Nor does a ‘lost source’ convincingly explain the (lack of the) organ part. Perhaps a more convincing solution is that – like many of Lawes’s other bass viol duos – Aire {106} is an arrangement of a pre-existing consort piece. This would explain how Lawes was able to compose the viol parts (including division strains) without notating the organ part in B.2. He may have been trying to save time, thinking that he had the organ part in his head. The string parts may also provide an explanation for the incomplete organ part. In the B and B1 strains there is frequent unison and octave doubling between the viols, and several instances

LAWES.indb 262

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

263

of unresolved biting dissonances (especially bar 23) and fourths requiring the harmonic context of the organ. Unlike the A strain, simply doubling one of the string parts would not suffice for a bass line, Lawes would have had to provide a sufficiently independent organ accompaniment; this may be the reason for him working directly from the consort version: i.e. planning to work out the organ part later. For whatever reason, the B.2 score was abandoned. Lawes appears to have entered the string parts into D.238–40 from B.2 and completed the second bass viol part as he copied. It is significant that the incomplete score in B.2 was not crossed out. Throughout B.2–3 Lawes consistently crossed out incomplete (and complete) pieces and fragments remaining after abstraction of leaves. The implication is that Lawes considered this a working score. It is suggestive of Lawes’s compositional process that in Aire {106} he was content to compose only the string parts in score and then copy them into partbooks. The B.2 score further suggests that Lawes worked (at least in part) on one viol at a time. The implication is that Lawes did not always compose in score; although the apparent difficulties arising from Aire {106} make it unlikely that this was his usual habit. A more general conclusion, with wider implications, can also be inferred from Aire {106}. If Aire {106} was played directly from the autograph partbooks the B1 strain would simply not have worked; despite this, there are there no signs in D.238–40 that the error in the B1 strain was corrected by performers. The conclusion to be drawn is that Aire {106} was not played from the D.238–40 parts; it was certainly not played from D.229. This fact, coupled with the ‘formal’ presentation style in this section of D.238–40 and D.229, reinforces the suggestion made in Chapter 2 that the autograph partbooks were originally planned as ‘presentation’ volumes of sorts. This does not mean that the partbooks were not used in performance – the fantasia-suites, at least, clearly were (see Chapter 6). It does, however, raise doubts that the bass viol suites were performed from the partbooks (in their entirety, at least).

T

he pavan appears to have been Lawes’s favoured form for elaborate divisions: as with the harp consorts, pavans provide the highlights of the bass viol suites. Perhaps the most notable feature of the division strains is the way in which Lawes regularly keeps one viol silent as the other divides, usually in an antiphonal style. By adopting this approach Lawes generates new points of imitation and succeeds in creating a greatly contrasting varied repeat. He also composed divisions in pairs, again with points of imitation. An important point to note of Lawes’s division style is his ability to incorporate new contrapuntal ideas into the divisions usually in faster note values than the original counterpoint, almost resulting in a different version of the piece. Pavan {101} aptly demonstrates this technique. The A, B and C strains begin with simple divisions in the bass viols, usually descanting over the

LAWES.indb 263

19/03/2010 10:58

264

the consort music of william lawes

organ bass, although much of their material is derived from the consort version of the piece. The A1 strain begins with simple quaver divisions in imitation between the viols; this gives way to development, where the rhythmic intensity gradually builds. This is mostly in fast semiquaver ‘mixt’ divisions, but again short points of imitation are employed (e.g. bar 23) and frequently the viols move in thirds and sixths (as later recommended by Simpson).36 B1 uses similar techniques to the A1 strain, although there is no gradual rhythmic build-up here; the strain begins with imitative semiquaver scalar runs. A noticeable feature is the short question-andanswer passages between the viols from bars 47–8, resulting in literal repetition of the short figures between the viols (Example 8.4). The figures are short enough for the idiom to be effective, reinforced by Lawes’s quick abandonment of the idea. The C1 strain is similar in style to A1 with the gradual build up of intensity. Again, the strain begins with well-worked imitation, even including the organ in bar 67. The ‘mixt’ divisions continue to the end with both viols coming ‘together in a Thundering Strain of Quick Division’ to conclude.37 Aire {102} effectively contrasts the brooding intensity of the pavan. The pithy aire is quite short: with divisions, it runs to only thirty-five semibreves compared to the pavan’s seventy-eight breves. The division style is the same as the pavan (generally descant and ‘mixt’ division in quavers and semiquavers). There are many technically difficult passages; they lie quite easily under the fingers, however, and multiple stops and chords are rare. The suite in g ends with Aire {103}, which is rather more substantial than {102}, providing an effective formal balance to the suite. In this piece many of the imitative points are built around repeated-note figures (commonly found in Lawes’s consort music). Much material in the viols (A and B strains) is taken from the consort versions of the piece. The divisions are again conceived largely in imitation, with both viols crossing and exchanging phrases. The pieces in g work well as a suite, the three pieces providing an overall formal balance. Lawes’s divisions are complex but idiomatic, providing an effective contrast to the undivided strains paraphrasing the consort versions. The suite in C is more difficult to understand. It is unclear whether Lawes intended the four pieces to be grouped together as one suite or as two contrasting pairs.38 The Ferrabosco divisions were clearly written for virtuosi, the originals completely transformed and rejuvenated. The divisions are technically demanding, with frequent leaps and changes in register. The pavan is similar in style and form to the pavan in g, but far excels it as a composition. The viols are composed as a 36 SimpsonDV, 49. 37 SimpsonDV, 49. 38 Lefkowitz concluded that the four pieces in C comprise two suites: see Â�LefkowitzWL,

139–46.

LAWES.indb 264

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

265

Example 8.4╇ Lawes, Pavan {101}, end of B1 strain, bars 44–50

                              4                    4                     4  44

     4





 



  

                                                              45

                                                 46



  

  

 

















 

 

                                         47

  

   





 







  

 



continued overleaf

LAWES.indb 265

19/03/2010 10:58

266

the consort music of william lawes Example 8.4 continued

   

       

48

    

    49







 



  

  

      



   

   







       

        

             



  

   

  

 



   



         

 

           



 





    

      



 

 

      

      

pair throughout. Imitation and variety are the central ingredients. Lawes’s notation is specific, with even trills written out. Antiphonal passages typically build to a studied climax. For example, in the B1 strain Lawes subtly begins the divisions in quavers and crotchets, gradually adding the (newly composed) antiphonal imitative points, building in tempo and intensity to a climax at the strain’s end (Example 8.5). Unlike the previous pieces, divisions are not demarcated to the repeat strains. The C strain begins with the slow descant in the viols, quickly taken over by semiquaver divisions. The fast divisions are shared between the viols, which alternately play a simple quaver descant and semiquaver ‘mixt’ divisions. Tripla rhythms are briefly added to the end of the strain. C1 continues the semiquaver divisions, with frequent passages of parallel movement and antiphonal exchange building to an intense climax. Lawes extended the structure of Alman {105} to include second and third division strains: ||A||A1||B||B1||A2||A3||B2||B3||. Here he appears to be trying something new. The alman stands in relief to the other bass viol pieces, which only have one division strain (as do the Royall Consort and harp consort almans). The formal extension of the alman is to allow for greater variety of divisions, and to match the structure of the pavan. The extra strains allow Lawes to explore a new texture. The B1 strain is played only by BV1, which then drops out; BV2 answers with solo divisions on A2. Both viols then join for the A3 strain, which opens

LAWES.indb 266

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

267

Example 8.5╇ Lawes, Pavan {104}, end of B1 strain and start of C, bars 33–9 [60–72]

                    4                                   4 33

               

   4        4 

     35







     

  37

C

         

     



                                                         

    

   



  

  

  

   





  

               

     

             

        

   



           

39                                                      

LAWES.indb 267

 



 



 



 

 

 



19/03/2010 10:58

268

the consort music of william lawes

imitatively with a triplet motif. Similar tripla divisions are also found in the B1 and B2 strains of Pavan HC28 and Alman HC21, respectively. The rhythmic intensity of the divisions builds in the next strain, which BV2 plays alone, introducing a descending sequential demisemiquaver motif. There is no answering solo strain for BV1. Rather, both viols join in another ‘Thundering Strain of Quick Division’ (Example 8.6)↜. The divisions in Corant {107} and Aire {106} are bland in comparison to the preceding homage pieces. This could imply that Lawes did not intend these pieces to be performed as a suite. The arrangement of these pieces in the partbooks, however, where they are laid out continuously, argues against this. On fol.â•‹78r (INV.) of D.229 Lawes entered the organ parts for Alman {105}, Aire {106} and Corant {107}. Alman {105} and Corant {107} appear to have been entered first, in two parts; this would be consistent with the apparent chronology of their composition evident from B.2, although Aire {106} may have been partially entered after Alman {105} and before Corant {107}. Lawes ran out of space for Corant {107}, which he began on the last two staves of the page. He finished it off at the end of the two staves above (see Chapter 2, Fig. 2.19a). This suggests several things. First, Lawes was working from an already composed part (probably a consort version), as he was able to judge exactly the space needed to finish Corant {107} on the staves above. Second, he was carefully trying to maintain the ‘formal’ presentation layout. Rather than write smaller notes to fit the part onto one line (as he often did when space was a consideration), Lawes retained the evenly spaced notes until the end of the piece. This also seems to have been done to allow room for Aire {106} on the same page. If Lawes had begun Corant {107} on the fifth and sixth staves (directly beneath Alman {105}) he would have taken up more room on the page, which would have left little space for entering another piece – i.e. Aire {106} – which was obviously intended to be inserted between Alman {105} and Corant {107}. When Aire {106} and Corant {107} are placed alongside the Ferrabosco pieces the contrast of styles is striking. Aire {106} is quite similar stylistically to Aire {102} from the suite in g. It is quite short (29 semibreves) and the division strains, although difficult in places, are not as elaborate as the previous pieces. Lawes again decreased the complexity of the divisions in the following piece, Corant {107}. If these four pieces were intended as a suite, it could be argued that the elaborate divisions of the first two pieces would result in a suite that was somewhat unbalanced. This is not necessarily the case. With the exception of the suite in g discussed above, we do not find whole suites by Lawes in which each piece contains elaborate divisions. It was more usual for Lawes to begin a suite with elaborate divisions, or to contrast pieces with simple (or no) divisions with elaborate division pieces. The suite in C from the (‘new’ version) Royall Consort (see Chapter

LAWES.indb 268

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ Example 8.6╇ Lawes, Aire {105}, B3 strain

 4  73

                       

B3

     4        4     4

 

 



 





 







 



             

      

  





  

















  

75                    



269





 





  



             

 

 

                                  77



 

      







 

 

 

79                



     

  



  



 

















 





 



                        

 

 



 

 continued overleaf

LAWES.indb 269

19/03/2010 10:58

270

the consort music of william lawes Example 8.6 continued

81                                  

     



 

 







 

  







  







                                     83

     

 



  

 

                

4) is a case in point. It consists of Pavan–Ayre–Alman–Corant–Corant–Saraband. Pavan {49} contains the most elaborate divisions of the collection, but is followed by five short movements containing no elaborate divisions (although they may have been extemporized in performance). Furthermore, it seems likely that Lawes intended the large-scale harp consort pieces as additional first movements for the existing suites (see Chapter 7). Again, some of these movements contain elaborate division strains, especially when compared with some of the first twenty-five pieces. Fantazia {135} is yet another example of this. It contains some complex divisions for violin and bass viol, although neither the alman nor galliard with which it is paired contains substantial divisions (see Chapter 6). Thus, variety seems to have been a major consideration in Lawes’s formal organization of suites. The elaborate divisions also hint at the function of the pieces, suggesting a formal concert-type setting where the emphasis was on the performers. Moreover, it seems unlikely that Lawes would be composing paired dances in the late 1630s, by which time English composers were generally compiling suites. If the four pieces in C were intended as two pairs, the purpose of the Aire {106} and Corant {107} is rather more difficult to understand, as they really only make sense within the context of a larger suite. It could, of course, also be argued that Aire {106} and Corant {107} were the first movements of a larger suite left incomplete

LAWES.indb 270

19/03/2010 10:58

the suites for two bass viols and organ

271

by Lawes. D.238 and D.240 suggest otherwise. In these partbooks the suite in g is physically separated from the pieces in C by several unused folios: there is no such demarcation within the pieces in C themselves. Tentative though this may be, the cumulative evidence suggests that Lawes was composing a four-movement suite.

T

he chronology of the Lawes suites is closely bound to a corollary question of whether Lawes or Jenkins was first to compose elaborate divisions in this medium. As we saw, Jenkins’s earliest bass viol duos appear to date to the 1630s; those with florid divisions seem to be slightly later, probably composed closer to c.â•‹1640. Establishing an accurate compositional date for Lawes’s bass viol pieces is difficult. From their highly developed divisions a date of late 1630s seems appropriate: David Pinto has suggested c.â•‹1638, which seems about right.39 1638 was the tenth anniversary of Ferrabosco’s death (buried 11 March 1627/8), which perhaps gave Lawes the impetus to compose the homage pieces. 1638 was also the year of John Tomkins’s death. Lawes’s elegy composed in B.2 has already been mentioned; the physical proximity of the bass viol pieces to the elegy strongly suggests a chronological proximity. Further, in B.2 the duos were entered either side of the lute duets, which also appear to have been in place c.â•‹1638 (see Chapter 3). If a compositional date of 1638 were accepted it would suggest that both Lawes and Jenkins were composing florid divisions in this medium around the same time; Jenkins’s group of six were certainly composed around this time (see above). As with the fantasia-suites, Lawes and Jenkins seem to have shared a common model in Coprario for their bass viol duos, although Jenkins seems also to have been heavily influenced by John Ward.40 It is difficult to say with certainty whether Jenkins or Lawes was the first to experiment with divisions in this form, or indeed, whether one man influenced the other. As with the fantasia-suites, however, it is unlikely to be a coincidence that both explored the same basic formal pattern in this medium: i.e. elaborate divisions replacing repeated strains. Whoever was the innovator, it seems clear that Lawes and Jenkins were increasingly interested in the use of divisions in serious consort music throughout the 1630s. The divisions used by both exemplify many of the rules later outlined by Simpson,41 suggesting that divisions were developing as a shared tradition with much cross-fertilization (see Chapter 7).42 Despite the similarities, Lawes and Jenkins used divisions in

39 See LawesFS, xx–xxi. 40 See AshbeeHM2, 190–4. 41 For the relationship between Simpson’s rules and Jenkins, see AshbeeHM2, ch.â•‹12.

For Lawes and Simpson, see also Chapter 7, above.

42 Cf. LefkowitzWL, 96.

LAWES.indb 271

19/03/2010 10:58

272

the consort music of william lawes

different ways.43 As with the fantasia-suites, divisions are generally better worked into the compositional framework of Lawes’s pieces than in those of Jenkins. For Jenkins, divisions tend to be somewhat sterile exercises in virtuosity (although often done with ingenuity and imagination). This is not true of all of his pieces, but in those he wrote during the 1630s and 1640s he tends to use divisions for sectional contrast or virtuosic display. Lawes’s divisions represent his development of this technique within serious chamber music, a development that can be traced throughout his main consort music collections. Lawes’s written-out divisions illustrate his use of divisions as a compositional resource. Divisions were staple fare for any bass viol player worth his salt and Â�generally improvised by professionals.44 When Lawes began seriously to incorporate divisions into the compositional fabric, however, improvisation was not an alternative, especially because of the way in which he often uses divisions to introduce new imitative points and contrapuntal ideas. Although the improvisation of new points was an established part of the art of division, in many of Lawes’s compositions the divisions generally add a new level to the composition. Accordingly, it is unsurprising that Lawes felt the need to compose specific divisions rather than to leave it to the performers. The notation of a once improvised idiom is a common occurrence: the English equal lute duet is another example of an improvisational medium that became a compositional genre. As the above discussion demonstrates, although Lawes composed only a handful of bass viols duos, they provide a rarely glimpsed insight into his compositional process.

43 The following remarks refer to Jenkins’s pieces that appear to be roughly contem-

poraneous with those of Lawes: fantasia-suites Groups I-II and the bass viol pieces from MS 921.

44 See HolmanD, 30.

LAWES.indb 272

19/03/2010 10:58

chapter 9

Conclusions

M

uch of the music discussed in this book dates from after Lawes’s appoint╇ ment to the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’ (LVV), and strongly suggests (1) that the music was composed for members of that group and (2) that although Lawes did not hold an official place as a composer, composition was one of his duties. Between 1625 and 1642 there were three official composer posts associated with the LVV. The first was held (until 1642) by Thomas Ford. Alfonso Ferrabosco II held the second, replacing Coprario in 1626. After his death in 1628 Ferrabosco was replaced by his son Henry. Henry served until 1642, and no music by him has survived. Thomas Lupo held posts as composer to the LVV and to the violin band until his death, also in 1628. Stephen Nau filled the latter post. Lupo’s place as composer to the LVV does not appear to have been officially filled, despite the petitions of Robert Johnson (see Chapter 1). Nevertheless, this is unlikely to have had much bearing on the duties expected of members of the LVV; the official title of a court appointment did not always accurately reflect the functions of that post. The post of composer probably implied responsibility for compiling the group’s repertoire (in addition to actual composition); to some extent the posts may have been nominal. Lawes composed in many of the forms established by Coprario, whose music was still performed at the court in the 1630s. The music composed by Lawes after 1635, however, suggests that musical tastes were gradually changing. The most obvious result of this is Lawes’s incorporation of elaborate divisions into several of his consort pieces. Divisions were not new. The way in which Lawes used divisions as a compositional tool was new, and seems to be closely related to changing functions of many of his pieces. The Royall Consort seems to have begun as functional dance music before moving towards the realms of Tafelmusik by the incorporation of the ‘two breakinge Bases’↜. The ‘new’ version Royall Consort appears to have had a flexible performance function; one can easily imagine florid divisions being extemporized in a concert-like situation, prefaced by the fine fantasias and pavans. The harp consorts also appear to have been updated to modify the original function of the collection, probably beginning as Tafelmusik and brought into the realm of ‘concert’ (or ‘audience’) music with the addition of the elaborate divisions. At the Caroline court, emphasis seems to have gradually shifted towards the performer, largely through the popularity of the art of division. The performance of Lawes’s music is crucial to understanding his growing fascination with

LAWES.indb 273

19/03/2010 10:58

274

the consort music of william lawes

division-writing, and suggests that concert-like performances were becoming the norm in the Caroline court in the late 1630s. The bass viol was the main vehicle for divisions, but with Lawes we see the development of the violin as a division instrument. As the development of the dance suite seems to have been closely linked to the ideals that governed the art of division – a build to studied climax – it is no surprise that Lawes’s development of the suite was intertwined with division-writing.

C

losely connected to these questions of stylistic development in Lawes’s music is the question of chronology. Throughout this book I have attempted to shed new light on the chronology of Lawes’s consort music, and any conclusions in this respect can be summarized as follows. With the early Royall Consort pieces, the contents of the Shirley partbooks seem to represent Lawes’s earliest surviving compositions. Apparently composed before 1633, they comprise several three- and four-part pieces, and two five-part fantasias. The majority of the fantasia-suites and the first twenty or so harp consorts are also likely to date to the early 1630s, although the autograph partbooks were not copied until c.â•‹1638–40. The harp consorts probably originated in two-part versions, and were only given their harp consort instrumentation and written-out divisions c.â•‹1635–6. Lawes then composed HC21–5 before composing the large-scale pieces, HC26–30. This seems to have happened c.â•‹1638–9, around the time of the compilation of GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40 and D.229. Arguably the most significant piece from the post-1635 period is Fantazia {135}, the suggested ‘revision’ of which appears to have taken place c.â•‹1638. For Lawes, Fantazia {135} appears to mark the beginning of his exploration of elaborate divisions. As David Pinto has suggested, the Royall Consort seems to have originated in the late 1620s in two large Tr–Tr–T–B groups in D/d. The presence of several Tr–Tr–B–B pieces in the Shirley partbooks suggests that Lawes was exploring Tr–Tr–B–B scoring by the early 1630s. The Royall Consort sequence in GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3 – roughly contemporaneous with HC26–30 – is, however, unlikely to date from before the end of 1638. The bass viol and organ pieces probably also date from around this time. The lyra-viol trios are relatively early works, probably composed during the early 1630s, and revised thereafter. Between c.â•‹1633 and 1639 Lawes also worked on the five- and six-part viol consorts, although most of the work seems to have been done towards the end of this period, especially after 1636. This suggests that much of Lawes’s surviving consort music was composed within a period of about three years, c.â•‹1637–40, implying something of a compositional lacuna for the remaining years of Lawes’s royal service. This does not, however, account for the solo lyraviol music, the (now lost) lyra consorts, and the vocal music; nor does it account for the vast number of miscellaneous pieces, in two and three parts, attributed to Lawes.

LAWES.indb 274

19/03/2010 10:58

conclusions

275

I

t seems strange that more music has not survived from court composers of ╇ Charles I’s reign. Historical accident has no doubt played its part. One should, nevertheless, be cautious in overestimating the amount of substantial new music produced at court. Charles appears to have enjoyed listening to a particular reperÂ� toire, such as Coprario’s fantasia-suites and Gibbons’s fantasias. These pieces evidently had been regularly performed during the decade or more before Lawes’s appointment, which suggests something approaching a modern musical canon. The order in February 1635 to recopy partbooks containing this repertoire implies that it was to be performed regularly in the future. There also appears to have been a distinction between these ‘canonic’ pieces and the ephemeral music that must have been required at the court on an almost daily basis. I suggested in Chapter 7 that much of this daily demand for music at the court was met by the arrangement of two-part pieces by various ensembles, usually performing extemporized divisions. Improvisation and arrangement are likely to have played an important role in musical entertainment at court; it is significant that the LVV was mostly comprised of some of the finest instrumentalists in the country, only a few of whom were composers. This perhaps forces us to consider the role played by musical notation in the performance of music at court. Although the issue is too complex to be fully explored within the context of the present discussion, a few observations can be made. Clearly much of Lawes’s music (for example) was not copied for dissemination. None of Lawes’s elaborate division-writing was widely disseminated. Performance seems to be an obvious motivation for notation. Lawes’s partbooks (D.238–40 and D.229) were undoubtedly used for performance, although they seem to represent (at least initially) an impetus to preserve. It is nevertheless rather anachronistic to suggest that the pieces therein were performed each time exactly as notated by Lawes. Indeed, the extent to which such partbooks were followed in performance is unclear. Performance was a much more variable phenomenon than perhaps we imagine today: for example, dance strains were repeated as required often with divisions, which (according to Christopher Simpson) would have become more complex with each repetition of a strain. This is not to say that the harp consorts, for instance, were not performed as written on occasion, but we should perhaps bear in mind the fluidity of performance situations at court, and be aware that this must have entailed a certain flexibility in the authority of the musical notation that has come down to us. A related issue is the role of notation in the composition of consort music. Lawes certainly appears to have used notation in the process of composition and revision; evident from the many amendments made to the autographs. By understanding Lawes’s process of revisions we can afford ourselves that rare glimpse into ‘the composer’s workshop’↜, to borrow Christopher Field’s apposite

LAWES.indb 275

19/03/2010 10:58

276

the consort music of william lawes

phrase.1 It is clear from the evidence presented throughout this book that Lawes did not compose his collections (Royall Consort, harp consorts etc.) from start to finish in one rush of creative energy. He appears to have composed quite quickly, but most of these collections were compiled in increments, and many show signs of significant stages of development and refinement (presumably through performance). Many of these increments overlapped. Thus, we find areas of cross-Â� influence from one genre to another, especially in the pieces that appear to have been composed c.â•‹1637–40. Of course, one must be cautious of applying a strictly unidirectional process to a composer like Lawes: several versions of pieces are likely to have existed in the composer’s imagination, as they must have done in performance. Indeed, Peter Holman has noted that the various settings of popular English pavans (such as ‘Lachrimae’) in the late sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries ‘usually have a common “gist” consisting of the tune, the bass, the implied harmonies in between, and any particularly striking contrapuntal or decorative features in the inner parts’↜.2 It is plausible that composers such as Lawes thought of (at least some of) their music in ‘gists’↜. The various instances of Lawes reusing pieces in different media confirms that notation in a ‘fully composed’ version was not always the final stage of a piece. Nevertheless, some of the reworkings of pieces suggest that Lawes may have worked from existing notation rather than simply a memorized ‘gist’↜. However practical the performance or arrangement of (often quite formulaic) dance forms from ‘gists’ (or two-part outlines), one suspects that it would have been generally quite impractical to approach contrapuntally complex music in the same manner. It is difficult to conclude that notation did not play some role in the composition of consort music in the early seventeenth century; the extent of that role is perhaps debatable, and closely tied to performance. Whatever the role of musical notation in the performance of music at the Caroline court, it seems clear that improvisation and arrangement played a much larger part in the composition and supply of music than the surviving sources suggest. The relationship between notated music and everyday performance was undoubtedly a fluid one; for example, the increasing use of divisions in serious consort music by the mid-1630s must have been influenced by performance practice and, to some extent, the notation of divisions must have had an influence on the standardization of what was essentially an extemporized practice. Regardless of the position occupied by surviving manuscripts within such a complex relationship, we are fortunate to have collections such as the harp consorts complete ╇ 1 FieldCW. ╇ 2 HolmanD, 29. A similar idea is also discussed in the introduction to Music for

Elizabethan Lutes, ed. J. Ward (Oxford, 1992).

LAWES.indb 276

19/03/2010 10:58

conclusions

277

with Lawes’s own divisions. They afford us valuable insight into the performance practice of the period, and allow a glimpse of how even humble two-part outlines could be transformed into some of the finest instrumental music of the period.

LAWES.indb 277

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1

Source Descriptions

T

he layout and style of this appendix largely follows that in IMCCM, to which the reader is referred for more details on watermarks etc. Each manuscript was examined in person; descriptions of the manuscripts housed in the Bodleian Library, Oxford, were also aided by those given in CrumOMSC.

The following format is used for each manuscript: Description╇ Number of leaves (Roman numerals indicate flyleaves, with modern flyleaves in italics); details of foliation, abstractions, etc.

Scribe(s)╇ Where relevant Inscriptions╇ Transcriptions of any significant inscriptions Format and Dimensions╇ Sizes of the paper and covers (height first, width second): all measurements are given in millimetres and are approximate, as paper sizes often vary slightly. Covers measurements includes spine

Watermarks╇ Where possible, watermarks are identified by names given in IMCCM, but the numbering system refers only to the Appendix given here

Rastrology╇ A = number of staves per page; B = number of staves in the rastrum; C =

overall span of the rastrum; D = width of individual staves and (in parenthesis) the distance between them (rastrum profile can be inverted). All measurements given in millimetres, variations of up to a millimetre should be allowed

Collation╇ Collations are given where possible; the tightness of the binding, however, often obscures a detailed examination of the manuscript’s structure. All signatures are editorial, and are given in the form of A, B, C etc. followed by the number of leaves, with a note of any abstractions: ‘A6 [A3 removed]’ indicates that the first signature is a gathering of six leaves of which the third has been removed

Binding and decorations Provenance Inventory╇ The following conventions are used: – Material in inverted commas is in Lawes’s hand except where indicated – Editorial additions are given in square brackets – Original numbering systems are followed where given – First lines (or text incipits) are given for vocal music – Crossed-out material is indicated thus: ‘Aire’ – ‘Unused’ indicates a ruled page (as opposed to an unused flyleaf, described as ‘Blank’) – Where appropriate, scorings are given using the abbreviations in the List of Abbreviations at the beginning of this volume – Line breaks are indicated with /

LAWES.indb 278

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

279

london, british library, add. mss 40657–61 Description1 Five partbooks from an original set of six (lacking Sextus, first bass). 40657 (‘Cantus’): i╃+╃iv╃+╃109╃+╃i╃+╃i. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–50r (first flyleaf numbered); unnumbered folios: two between fols 15v and 16r, ten between fols 30v and 31r, twenty-three between fols 44v and 45r, and twenty-five after fol. 50v. No music entered on fols 15v, 29v, 44v, nor on any unnumbered folios. One leaf abstracted before fols 16r, 28r, 29r. 40658 (‘Altus’): i╃+╃iv╃+╃100╃+╃iii╃+╃i. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–50r (first flyleaf numbered); unnumbered folios: one between fols 15v and 16r, eleven between fols 30v and 31r, twenty-two between fols 44v and 45r, and twenty-five after fol. 50v. No music entered on fols 15v, 44v, nor on any unnumbered folios. One leaf abstracted before fols 14r, 28r, 30r. 40659 (‘Countertenor’ ‘Tenor’): i╃+╃iii╃+╃68╃+╃i. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–35r (first flyleaf numbered); unnumbered folios: ten between fols 16v and 17r, twenty-four between fols 30v and 31r, twenty-three between fols 44v and 45r, and twenty-five after fol. 50v. No music entered on fol. 30v, nor on any unnumbered folios. One leaf abstracted before fols 13r, 14r, 16r. 40660 (‘Bassus’): i╃+╃iii╃+╃↜103╃+╃i. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–50r (first flyleaf numbered); unnumbered folios: two between fols 15v and 16r, eight between fols 30v and 31r, twenty-one between fols 44v and 45r, and twenty-three after fol. 50v. No music entered on fols 15v, 44v, nor on any unnumbered folios. One leaf abstracted before fols 2r, 41r; at least one leaf abstracted before fol. 28r. 40661 (‘Quintus’): i╃+╃iv╃+╃64╃+╃iii╃+╃i. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–35r (first flyleaf numbered); unnumbered folios: one between fols 21v and 22r, seven between fols 24v and 25r, twenty-two between fols 30v and 31r. No music entered on fols 15v–16r, 21v–22r, 24v, 31v, nor on any unnumbered folios. One leaf abstracted before the third unnumbered leaf after fol. 24r, another abstracted before the sixth unnumbered leaf before fol.â•‹31r.

Scribes A1: Lawes, early hand A2: Lawes, later hand B: unidentified scribe, who also contributed to US-SM, EL 25 A 46–51 C: unidentified scribe; eighteenth-century additions

Format and Dimensions Upright folios: 295 × 195–200

Watermark France and Navarre I/1

Rastrology A 10; B 5; C 119; D 13(13)13(13)14(13)13.5(13)13.5

╇ 1 The following description and inventory are largely based on IMCCM1, 69–76.

LAWES.indb 279

19/03/2010 10:58

280

the consort music of william lawes

Collation Not possible due to tightness of bindings.

Binding Brown calf with ties; gold tooling with central coat of arms of the Shirley family of Staunton Harrold, Leicestershire.

Provenance Acquired by British Museum in 1922; previously owned by Angela Burdett (later Baroness Burdett-Coutts) (1814–1906) (sale catalogue 16 May 1922, lot 366). Christopher Field has suggested that Burdett may have been given them by Robert Shirley, seventh Earl Ferrers (1756–1827); Shirley’s second wife, Elizabeth, was a granddaughter of Burdett’s great-grandfather, Sir Robert Burdett, Bt (1716–97).2

Inventory Fols 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 Scribe No. Piece / Title

Ascription*

VdGS

[Foliated flyleaf]

1r–1v 1r–1v 1r–1v 1r–1v 1r–1v [Three-part] 2r

2r

–

2r

–

A1

1 [Fantazia]

‘Tho: Lupo’

{2}

2v

2v

–

2v

–

A1

2 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{3}

3r

3r

–

3r

–

A1

3 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{10}

3v

3v

–

3v

–

A1

4 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{13}

4r

4r

–

4r

–

A1

5 [Fantazia]

‘Mr Chetwoode’

{1}

4v

4v

–

4v

–

A1

6 [Fantazia]

[Chetwoode]

{2}

4v

4v

–

4v

–

A1

7 [Fantazia]

[Chetwoode]

{3}

5r

5r

–

5r

–

A1

8 [Fantazia]

[Chetwoode]

{4}

5v

5v

–

5v

–

A1

9 ‘Ayres’

‘Will: Lawes’

{320

5v

5v

–

5v

–

A1

10 [Aire]

[Lawes]

{321}

6r

6r

–

6r

–

A1

11 [Aire]

[Lawes]

{75}

6r

6r

–

6r

–

A1

12 [Aire]

[Lawes]

{226}

6v

6v

–

6v

–

A1

13 [Aire]

[Lawes]

{83}

7r

7r

–

7r

–

A1

14 [Aire]

[Lawes]

{206}

7v

7v

–

7v

–

A1

15 ‘Ayres a 3 voc:’

‘Tho: Holmes’

8r

8r

–

8r

–

A1

16 [Aire]a

[Holmes]

{2}

8r

8r

–

8r

–

A1

17 [Aire]

[Holmes]

{3}

8v

8v

–

8v

–

A1

18 [Fantazia]

‘Jo: Coprario’

{1}

{1}

9r

9r

–

9r

–

A1

19 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{2}

9v

9v

–

9v

–

A1

20 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{3}

10r

10r

–

10r

–

A1

21 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{4}

╇ 2 See FerraboscoCM, 217. a 40658: ‘Ayres’

LAWES.indb 280

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

281

Fols 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 Scribe No. Piece / Title

Ascription*

VdGS

10v

10v

–

10v

–

A1

22 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{5}

11r

11r

–

11r

–

A1

23 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{6}

11v

11v

–

11v

–

A1

24 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{7}

12r

12r

–

12r

–

A1

25 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{8}

12v

12v

–

12v

–

A1

26 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{9}

13r

13r

–

13r

–

A1

27 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{10}

13v

13v

–

13v

–

A1

28 ‘Pavan’

‘Tho: Holmes’

{4}

13v

13v

–

13v

–

A1

29 ‘Almaine’b

‘Tho Holmes’

{5}

14r

14r

–

14r

–

A1

30 [Fantazia]

‘Nich: Guy’

–

14v

–

14v

–

A2

– [Aire]

‘Wj:Lawes’c

14v–15r 14v

–

14v

–

A2

– [Aire]

‘Wj:Lawes’

{207}

14v

{227}

15r

15r

–

15r

–

A2

– [Aire]

[Lawes]

{342}

15r

15r

–

15r

–

A2

– [Aire]

[Lawes]d

{208}

15v

15v

–

15v

–

[Unused]

[Four-part]e 16r

16r

2r

16r

–

A1

1 [Fantazia]

‘John Warde’

{1}

16v

16v

2v

16v

–

A1

2 [Fantazia]

[Ward]

{2}

17r

17r

3r

17r

–

A1

3 [Fantazia]

[Ward]

{4}

17v

17v

3v

17v

–

A1

4 [Fantazia]

[Ward]

{5}

18r

18r

4r

18r

–

A1

5 [Fantazia]

[Ward]

{3}

18v

18v

4v

18v

–

A1

6 [Fantazia]

[Ward]

{6} {8}

19r

19r

5r

19r

–

A1

7 [Fantazia]

‘Tho: Lupo’

19v

19v

5v

19v

–

A1

8 [Fantazia]

‘Tho: Foord’

–

20r

20r

6r

20r

–

A1

9 ‘Dulcis Memoriae’

[Sandrin]

–

–

A1

‘Sym: Ive’↜渀屮f

{4}

– [Aire]

‘Wj:Lawes’g

{110}

11 [Fantazia]

[Ives]

20v– 20v– 6v–7r 20v– 21r 21r 21r 7r

10 [Fantazia]

A1

21v– 21v– 7v–8r 21v– 22r 22rh 22r

–

A1 & B

{3}

22v

22v

8v

22v

–

A1

12 [Fantazia]

‘Jo: Coperario’

{1}

23r

23r

9r

23r

–

A1

13 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{2}

23v

23v

9v

23v

–

A1

14 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{3}

24r

24r

10r

24r

–

A1

15 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{4}

b 40658: ‘Almane’↜. c 40660: ‘WjL:’↜. d 40660: ‘Wj:Lawes’↜. e 40660: this section is numbered 1–22 only. f 40658: ‘Sim Ives’↜. g This is the first bass part of Aire {110}, here crossed out and re-entered on fol. 13r. h 40658, Hand B; other books, A1.

LAWES.indb 281

19/03/2010 10:58

282

the consort music of william lawes Fols

40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 Scribe No. Piece / Title

Ascription*

VdGS {5}

24v

24v

10v

24v

–

A1

16 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

25r

25r

11r

25r

–

A1

17 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{6}

25v

25v

11v

25v

–

A1

18 [Fantazia]

↜渀屮↜渀屮↜渀屮‘Alfonso:’ [Ferrabosco II]

{13} {15}

26r

26r

12r

26r

–

A1

19 [Fantazia]

[Ferrabosco II]

26v

26v

12v

26vi

–

B& A1

20 [Fantazia]

‘Doc: Bull’

–

27r

27r

13r

27r

–

A2

21 ‘Aire’

‘Wj:Lawes’

{110}

27v

27v

13v

27v

–

A2

22 ‘Aires’

‘Wj:Lawes’

{306}

28r

28r

14r

28r

–

A2 ╇ ↜25 ‘Aire’ [sic]j

‘Wj:Lawes’

{336}

28v

28v

14v

28v

–

A2

26 ‘Aire’

‘Wj:Lawes’k

{109}

29r

29r

15r

29r

–

A2

27 ‘Aire’

‘WLawes’↜渀屮l

{318}

–

29v

15v

29v

–

A2

[28] ‘Aire’

[‘Wj:Lawes’]m

{319}

30r

30r

16r

30r

–

A2

[29] [Aire]

‘Wj:L:’n

{337} {103}

30r

30r

16r

30r

–

A2

[30] [Aire]

‘Wj:L↜’↜o

30v

30v

16v

30v

–

A2

[31] [Corant]

‘Wj:Lawes’p

{339}

B

1 [Fantazia]

‘Tho: Lupo’

{11}

[Five-part]q 31r

31r

17r

31r

2r

31v

31v

17v

31v

2v

B

2 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{5}

32r

32r

18r

32r

3r

B

3 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{12}

32v

32v

18v

32v

3v

B

4 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{13}

33r

33r

19r

33r

4r

B

5 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{1}

33v

33v

19v

33v

4v

B

6 [Fantazia]

[Lupo]

{2}

34r

34r

20r

34r

5r

A1

7 [O com’e gran]

↜渀屮↜‘Cla: Mounteverdie’

{1}

34r

34r

20r

34r

5r

A1

8 [La tra’l sangue]

[Monteverdi]

{1}

34v

34v

20v

34v

5v

A1

9 [Dove il liquido argento] ‘Jo: Coprario’

{45}

35r

35r

21r

35r

6r

A1

35v

35v

21v

35v

6v

A1

11 [Io piango]

[Coprario]

{5}

36r

36r

22r

36r

7r

A1

12 [Ohime la gioia]

[Coprario]

{35}

10 [Occhi miei con viva]

[Coprario]

{46}

i 40660, Hand A1; otherwise, Hand B. j Page containing nos. 23–4 removed from 40657–60. k 40660: om. l 40658–9: ‘Wj:Lawes’; 40660: om. m From 40658–9. Fol. 29v of 40657 is unused; 40660: om. n 40659: ‘W:L∙’. o 40658: ‘W:L:’; 40659: ‘Wj:L∙’; 40660: ‘Wj∙L∙’↜. p 40658–60: om. q Numbering of the five-part sequence is taken from 40661; un-numbered in 40657–8 and

40660, and numbered 1–21 in 40659.

LAWES.indb 282

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

283

Fols 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 Scribe No. Piece / Title

Ascription*

VdGS

36v

36v

22v

36v

7v

A1

13 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{49}

37r

37r

23r

37r

8r

A1

14 [O voi che sospirate]

[Coprario]

{48}

37v

37v

23v

37v

8v

A1

15 [Fantazia]

‘Jo: ward’

{2}

38r

38r

24r

38r

9r

A1

16 [Fantazia]

[Ward?]

{4}

38v

38v

24v

38v

9v

B

17 [Fantazia]

[Anon.]

–

39r

39r

25r

39r

10r

B

18 [Fantazia]

‘Will: White’

{1}

39v

39v

25v

39v

10v

A1

19 ‘Arda: pur:’

‘Luca Maurenzio’

–

39v

39v

25v

39v

10v

A1

20 ‘Rimonti in pace’

[Marenzio]

–

‘Ond’ei di mortier

[Marenzio]

–

40r

40r

26r

40r

11r

A1

21

40r

40r

26r

40r

11r

A1

22 ‘Caro dolce’

[Marenzio]

–

40v

40v

26v

40v

11v

A1

23 ‘Che se[’]tu:’ [se’l cor mio]s

[Marenzio]

–

40v

40v

26v

40v

11v

A1

24 ‘Clorind’hai Vinto’

‘Horatio. Vecchi’

–

41r

41r

27r

41r

12r

A1

25 ‘Saura tenere herbette’t

‘Monteuerdio’

–

41v

41v

27v

41v

12v

A1

26 ‘Deh poi ch’era:’

[Marenzio]

–

41v

41v

27v

41v

12v

A1

27 ‘Com Viuro:’

‘Be: Pallauicino’

–

42r

42r

28r

42r

13r

A1

28 ‘Quell[’]augellin’

‘Luca. Maurenzio’

–

42r

–

–

–

–

A1

42v

42v

28v

42v

13v

A1

43r

43r

29r

43r

14r

A1

43v

43v

29v

43v

14v

44r

44r

30r

44r

15r

– [Textless; Cantus only]

[Anon.]

–

↜渀屮↜‘↜Alfonso Ferobosco’

{1}

– [Solo e pensoso]

‘Luca Maurenzio’v

–

A2

– [Fantazia]

‘Wj:Lawes’

{68}

A2

–

‘Wj:Lawes’

{69}

29 ‘Pauen’u

‘Iñomine’

[First & second violin parts] –

–

–

–

16v–21r C

– [18th-century addition: dances, songs & psalms]

22v–24r C [Six-part]w 45r

45r

31r

45r

25r

A1

1 [Fantazia]

‘Tho: Lupo’

{1}

45v

45v

30v

45v

25v

A1

2 [Fantazia]

‘Alfonso:’ [Ferrabosco II]

{2}

46r

46r

32r

46r

26r

A1

3 [Fantazia]

‘Will: White’

{3}

46v

46v

32v

46v

26v

A1

4 [Fantazia]

[White]

{4}

47r

47r

33r

47r

27r

A1

5 ‘In nomine’

‘Jo: warde’

{2}

r Recte ‘morte’↜. s 40659: nos. 23–5 were originally given the titles and attributions of nos. 26–8; these were

crossed out and corrected.

t Recte ‘Sovra’↜. u 40659: title and attribution om.; 40660: title om. v 40659: om. w 40659: all attributions om. from the five-part section.

LAWES.indb 283

19/03/2010 10:58

284

the consort music of william lawes Fols

40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 Scribe No. Piece / Title

Ascription*

VdGS

47v

47v

33v

47v

27v

A1 & B↜x

6 [Fantazia]

‘Alfonso:’ [Ferrabosco II]

{3}

48r

48r

34r

48r

28r

A1 & B

7 ‘In nomine’

‘Alfonso:’ [Ferrabosco II]

{1}

48v

48v

34v

48v

28v

A1 & B

8 [Fantazia]

‘Will: White’z

{1}

49r

49r

35r

49r

29r

A1 & B

9 [Fantazia]

[White]

{2}

49v

49v

35v

49v

29v

A1

10 [Fantazia]

[White]

{6}

50r

50r

–

50r

30r

A1

11 [Fantazia]

[White]

{5}

50v

50v

–

50v

30v

A1

12 [Fantazia]

‘Jo Coperario’

{2}

[Reversed end; from here all folios are INV.] [Two-part] –

–

–

–

35v

A1

1 ‘Duo’

‘Jo: Coperario

{5}

–

–

–

–

35r

A1

2 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{1}

–

–

–

–

34v

A1

3 [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{2}

–

–

–

–

34r

A1

– [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{6}

–

–

–

–

33v

A1

– [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{4}

–

–

–

–

33r

A1

– [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{3}

–

–

–

–

32v

A1

– [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{7}

–

–

–

–

32r

A1

– [Fantazia]

[Coprario]

{8}

–

–

–

–

31r

C

– [Fragment; melody instrument]

[Anon.]

–

↜* Titles and ascriptions are taken from MS 40657, with variants noted; minor variants in spelling, capitalization and punctuation have not been recorded. x In the following four pieces 40657 and 40660–1 were copied by A1, 40658–9 by Hand B. z 40658: om.

LAWES.indb 284

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

285

oxford, bodleian library, mss mus. sch. d.238–40 Description Each partbook repaired. D.238: ii╃+╃89╃+╃i. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–92r (flyleaves foliated). No music entered on fols 1r–2v, 44v–84r, 88r–89r, 92r–92v. Leaves abstracted: one after fol. 89v. Fol.â•‹3r contains unidentified tune, in pencil (later hand) (Example A.1). D.239: ii╃+╃40╃+╃ii. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–44r (flyleaves foliated). No music entered on fols 1r–3r, 35v–44v. Leaves abstracted: at least three after fol. 28v. D.240: ii╃+╃82╃+╃ii. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–86r (flyleaves foliated). No music entered on fols 1r–3r, 57v–76r, 80r–82r, 85r–86v.

Format and Dimensions Upright quarto: c. 224 × 173â•‹mm (paper); c. 230 × 182 (covers). Coloured edges.

Watermarks Full measurements not possible because of the upright quarto format. Ruled pages: Peacock 1 (pair identified) Flyleaves: Grapes surmounted by crown with fleur-de-lys [Grapes 2]

Rastrology Marginal rulings on both sides. Extra hand-drawn staves: D.240, fol. 54v; D.238, fol. 90v (INV.). A 7 (1╃+╃3╃+╃3): Rastrum 1: B 1; C 12 Rastrum 2: B 3; C 66; D 12(15)12.5(15)11.5

Collation Difficult to determine due to tightness of binding and repairs; probably quired mainly in eights.

Binding Repaired. Uniformly bound in brown calf leather with a gold central ornament (diamond shape; floral designs emanating from a central oval), enclosed within blind and gold filets and corner decorations on both covers; central ornament flanked by initials ‘W’ and ‘L’↜. Gold tooling bordered by blind tooling at outer edges.

Example A.1╇ GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.238, fol. 3r: unidentified tune in later hand



  

 



      

6

12

 

LAWES.indb 285



 

  



 

   

  



 





 





    



 





     



  



19/03/2010 10:58

286

the consort music of william lawes

Provenance Presumably given to the Music School by Henry Lawes, with GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229; in 1682 catalogue with D.229 (Music School A.4.31–3; Hake no. CVI).

Inventory Fols D.238

D.239

D.240

1r–2v

1r–2v

1r–2v

No. Piece / Title*

Signature†

Key

VdGS

[Blank pages: foliated flyleaves]

[Fantasia-suites for violin, bass viol & organ] [Ruled page] ‘For One Violin / the Basse Viole / and Organ’↜渀屮a

3r

–

3r

3v–4r

–

3v–4r

1

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{114}

4v

–

4v

2

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{115}

5r

–

5r

3

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{116}

5v–6r

–

5v–6r

4

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{117}

6v

–

6v

5

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{118}

7r

–

7r

6

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{119}

7v–8r

–

7v–8r

7

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{120}

8v

–

8v

8

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{121}

9r

–

9r

9

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{122}

9v–10r

–

9v–10r

10

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{123}

10v

–

10v

11

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{124}

11r

–

11r

12

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{125}

11v–12r

–

11v–12r

13

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{126}

12v

–

12v

14

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{127}

13r

–

13r

15

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{128}

13v–14r

–

13v–14r

16

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{129}

14v

–

14v

17

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{130}

15r

–

15r

18

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{131}

15v–16r

–

15v–16r

19

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{132}

16v

–

16v

20

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{133}

17r

–

17r

21

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{134}

17v–18r

–

17v–18r

22

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{135}

18v

–

18v

23

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{136}

19r

–

19r

24

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{137}

a D.240 has an ampersand.

LAWES.indb 286

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

287

Fols D.238

D.239

D.240

No. Piece / Title*

Signature†

Key

VdGS

[Fantasia-suites for two violins, bass viol & organ] –

–

20v

4v

20v

21r

5r

21r

21v–22r 5v–6r 21v–22r 22v 23r

[Ruled page] ‘For 2 Violins / one Basse Viol / & Organ’

3r

19v–20r 3v–4r 19v–20r

6v

22v

7r

23r

23v–24r 7v–8r 23v–24r

25

‘For 2 Violins’ / ‘Fantazia’↜渀屮b

‘Wjllawes’

g

{138}

26

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{139}

27

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{140}

28

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{141}

29

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{142}

30

‘Aire’c

‘Wjllawes’

G

{143}

31

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{144}

24v

8v

24v

32

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{145}

25r

9r

25r

33

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{146}

25v–26r 9v–10r 25v–26r

34

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{147}

26v

10v

26v

35

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{148}

27r

11r

27r

36

[Aire]d

‘Wjllawes’

C

{149}

37

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{150}

27v–28r 11v–12r 27v–28r 28v

12v

28v

38

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{151}

29r

13r

29r

39

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{152}

40

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{153}

29v–30r 13v–14r 29v–30r 30v

14v

30v

41

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{154}

31r

15r

31r

42

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{155}

43

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{156}

44

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{157}

31v–32r 15v–16r 31v–32r 32v

16v

32v

33r

17r

33r

33v–34r 17v–18r 33v–34r

45

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{158}

46

‘Fantazia’e

‘Wjllawes’

D

{159}

34v

18v

34v

47

‘Aire’↜f

‘Wjllawes’

D

{160}

35r

19r

35r

48

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{161}

[Harp Consorts] 35v

19v

35v

1

‘For the Harpe, Base Violl / Violin, and Theorbo / Almane’↜g

‘Wjllawes’

g

{162}

35v

19v

36r–36v

2

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{163}

36r

20r

37r

3

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{164}

36r

20r

37v

4

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{165}

36v

20v

38r

5

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{166}

36v

20v

38v

6

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{167}

b D.239: ‘Fantazia’↜. c D.239: om. d D.239–40: ‘Aire’↜. e D.239–40: om. f D.239: om. g D.240 lacks the serial comma.

LAWES.indb 287

19/03/2010 10:58

288

the consort music of william lawes Fols Signature†

Key

VdGS

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{168}

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{169}

9

‘Almane’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{170}

10

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{171}

41r

11

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{172}

41v

12

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{173}

42r

13

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{174}

23r

42v

14

‘Aire’h

‘Wjllawes’i

d

{175}

39r

23r

42v–43r

15

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{176}

39r

23v

43v

16

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{177}

39v

24r

44r

17

‘Almane’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{178}

39v

24r

44v–45r

18

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{179}

40r

24v

45v

19

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’k

D

{180}

20

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{181}

21

‘Almane’l

‘Wjllawes’

D

{182}

No. Piece / Title*

D.238

D.239

D.240

37r

21r

38v–39r

7

37r

21r

39v

8

37v

21v

40r

37v

21v

40v–41r

38r

22r

38r

22r

38v

22v

38v

40r 40v 40v

24v–25r 45v–46r 25v

46v–47r

26r

47v

22

‘Almane’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{183}

41r

26v–27r 47v–48r

23

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{184}

41r

27v–28r 48v–49r

24

[Corant]m

‘Wjllawes’

D

{185}

25

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{186}

26

‘Aire’n

‘Wjllawes’

G

{187}

41v 41v

28v–29r 49v–50r 29r

50r

42r

29v–30r 50v–52r

27

‘Pauen’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{188}

42v

30v–32r 52v–54r

28

‘Pauen’

‘Cormacke’o

G

{189}

32v–34r 54v–56r

29

‘Pauen’

‘Coprario’p

g

{190}

43v–44r 34v–35r 56v–57r

30

‘Fantazy’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{191}

43r

44v–84r 35v–42v 57v–76r

[Unused]

[Reversed end; folios are INV.] [Suites for two bass viols & organ] 92v–92r 44v–43r 86v–85r

[Blank pages: foliated flyleaves]

91v–90v

–

84v–83v

‘For the Organ:∙ and 2 Base Viols / Pauen’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{101}

90r

–

83r

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{102}

h D.240: ‘Almane’↜. i D.240: ‘short L’ signature. k D.240: om. l D.239: ‘Alman’↜. m D.239–40: ‘Corant’↜. n D.239–40: om. o D.239–40: ‘Wjllawes’↜. p D.239–40: ‘Wjllawes’↜.

LAWES.indb 288

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

289

Fols D.238

D.239

D.240

No. Piece / Title*

Signature†

Key

VdGS

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{103}

89v

–

82v

89r–88r

–

82r–80r

[Unused]

87v–86v

–

79v–78v

‘Pauen’↜q

–

C

{104}

86r–85v

–

78r–77v

[Alman]

–↜渀屮r

C

{105}

85r

–

77r

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{106}

84v

–

76v

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{107}

↜* Titles and ascriptions are taken from D.238, with variants noted; minor variants in capitalÂ�ization and punctuation have not been recorded. † Signatures in bold indicate the ‘short L’ form, the rest are in the ‘mature’ form.

q D.240: ‘Pauen:∙ Sett for 2 Deuision Basses / to the Organ by Wjllawes’↜. r D.240: ‘Alman:∙ Set for 2 Deuision / Basses to the Organ. By / Wjllawes’↜.

LAWES.indb 289

19/03/2010 10:58

290

the consort music of william lawes

oxford, bodleian library, ms mus. sch. d.229 Description Much repaired (binding and leaves). ii╃+╃77╃+╃ii. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–81r (flyleaves foliated). No music entered on fols 1r–3r, 36v–51r, 70v–77v, 80r–81v. Leaves abstracted: ‘a number of leaves were removed and cancels were pasted to their stubs during copying’↜,1 abstractions difficult to determine due to repairs and binding.

Additional Scribes Hand D (?Giles Tomkins): fols 70r–69v (INV.)

Inscriptions Fol. 81v (INV.): ‘I haue’ (Lawes)

Format and Dimensions Oblong folio; c. 225 × 343â•‹mm (paper); 230 × 350â•‹mm (cover). Coloured edges.

Watermarks Ruled pages: Peacock 2 Flyleaves: Arms of France and Navarre I/2

Rastrology Marginal rulings on both sides; staves grouped in pairs by pre-ruled barlines, nine bars per stave. A 8; B 2 (6-line staves); C 38; D 12(14)12

Collation Difficult to determine due to tightness of binding and repairs; seems to have been originally quired in mainly sheets of six; several abstractions.

Binding Repaired. Calf leather with blind and gold filets, gold corner decorations and the royal arms (SRA VII) on both covers; arms flanked by the initials ‘W’ and ‘L’↜. Gold tooling bordered by blind tooling at outer edges.

Provenance Presumably given to the Music School by Henry Lawes, with D.238–40: in 1682 catalogue with D.238–40 (Music School A.4.10; Hake no. XCVII).

1 CrumOMSC, 5.

LAWES.indb 290

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

291

Inventory Fols

No. Piece / Title

1r–2v

Signature*

Key

VdGS

Comments

[Blank pages: foliated flyleaves]

[Fantasia-Suites, for violin, bass viol & organ] [Ruled page] ‘The Organ part:∙ / For the Violins:∙ / & Basse Violl:∙’

3r 3v–4r

1 ‘Fantazia’

–

g

{114}

4r

2

–

g

{115}

4v

3 [Aire]

–

g

{116}

4v–5r

4

‘Aire’

–

G

{117}

5v

5 [Aire]

‘Fantazia’

–

G

{118}

6r

[6] [Aire]

–

G

{119}

6v–7r

7

‘Fantazia’

–

a

{120}

7v

8

‘Aire’

–

a

{121}

8r

9

‘Aire’

–

a

{122}

8v–9r

10

‘Fantazia’

–

C

{123}

9v

11 ‘Aire’

–

C

{124} {125}

10r

12

‘Aire’

–

C

10v–11r

13

‘Fantazia’

–

d

{126}

11v

14

‘Aire’

–

d

{127}

12r

15

‘Aire’

–

d

{128}

12v–13r

16

‘Fantazia’

–

D

{129}

13v

17

‘Aire’

–

D

{130}

14r

18 [Aire]

–

D

{131}

14v–15r

19

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{132}

15v

20

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{133}

16r

21 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

{134}

16v–17r

22

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{135}

17v

23

‘Aire’

–

D

{136}

18r

24

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{137}

[Fantasia-Suites, for two violins, bass viol & organ] 18v–19r

25

‘For 2 Violins’ / ‘Fantazia’

–

g

{138}

19v 20r

26

‘Aire’

–

g

{139}

27

‘Aire’

–

g

{140}

20v–21r

28

‘Fantazia’

–

G

{141}

21v

29

‘Aire’

–

G

{142}

22r

30

‘Aire’

–

G

{143}

31 ‘Fantazia’

–

a

{144}

22v–23r 23v

32

‘Aire’

–

a

{145}

24r

33

‘Aire’

–

a

{146}

24v–25r

34

‘Fantazia’

25v

LAWES.indb 291

35 [Aire]

–

C

{147}

–

C

{148}

19/03/2010 10:58

292

the consort music of william lawes

Fols

No. Piece / Title

Signature*

Key

VdGS

26r

36

‘Aire’

–

C

{149}

26v–27r

37

‘Fantazia’

–

d

{150}

27v

38

‘Aire’

–

d

{151}

28r

39

‘Aire’

–

d

{152}

28v–29

40

‘Fantazia’

–

D

{153}

29v

41 ‘Aire’

–

D

{154}

30r

42

‘Aire’

–

D

{155}

30v–31r

43

‘Fantazia’

–

d

{156}

31v

44

‘Aire’

–

d

{157}

32r

45

‘Aire’

–

d

{158}

32v–33r

46

‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{159}

33v

47

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{160}

34r

48

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{161}

Comments

[Harp Consorts] 34v

35r 35v 36r 36v–51r

‘For the Harpe, Base Violl, Violin and Theorbo’ 1 ‘Almane’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{162}

2

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{163}

3

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{164}

4

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{165}

5

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{166}

6

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{167}

7

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{168}

[8]

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{169}

[Unused]

[Reversed end; folios are INV.] 80r–81v

[Blank pages: foliated flyleaves]

[Suites for two bass viols & organ] 79v

‘For the Organ:∙ and 2 Base Viols:∙’ ‘Pauen’

LAWES.indb 292

‘Wjllawes’

g

{101}

79r

‘Aire’

‘W.L.↜’

g

{103}

79r

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{102}

78v

‘Pauen and Almane of Alfonso:∙ Sett to the Organ and /2 division Base Violls. by Wjllawes’ / ‘Pauen’

C

{104}

78r

‘Alman’

–

C

{105}

78r

[Aire; incomplete]

–

C

{106}

78r

‘Aire’ [Corant]

‘Wjllawes’

C

{107}

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Fols

No. Piece / Title

293

Signature*

Key

VdGS

1 ‘a 6’ / ‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{97}

Hand D

2

‘a 6’ / ‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{98}

Hand D / Lawes

[Aire]a

‘Wjllawes’

C

{89}

68v–68r

‘a 6’ / ‘Fantazia’

‘Wjllawes’b

67v–67r

‘a 6’ / ‘Inominy’

‘Wjllawes’

‘Aire a:∙ 6’c

‘Wjllawes’

B↜b

70v–77v

Comments

[Unused]

[Six-part viol consorts] 70r 69v–69r 68v

67r

[Five-part viol consorts]

B↜b B↜b

{94} {96} {95}

66v–66r

‘a. 5 ∙ Fantazy’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{68}

66r–65v

‘Playnesong:∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{69}

‘Aire a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{70}

‘Fantazy:∙ a ∙5’d

‘Wjllawes’

a

{71}

65r 65r–64v 64r–63v 63v 63r–62v

‘Fantazy:∙ a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{72}

‘Aire:∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{73}

‘Fantazy:∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{74}

62v

‘Aire. a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{75}

62r

‘Pauen ∙ a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{76}

61v

‘Aire. a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’e

c

{77}

61v–61r

‘Fantazy:∙ a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{78}

60v

‘Pauen ∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{79}

60r

‘Aire ∙ a∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{80}

‘Fantazy:∙ a ∙5’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{81}

‘Pauen:∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{82}

‘Aire ∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{83}

60r–59v 59v–59r 59r

[Six-part viol consorts] 58v–58r

‘Inominy ∙ a ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{99}

58r–57v

‘Pauen ∙ a ∙6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{84}

57r–56v

‘Fantazy a ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{85}

56r

‘Aire ∙ A ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{86}

55v

‘Aire A 6’↜f

‘Wjllawes’

c

{100}

55r–54v 54v

‘A ∙6’ / ‘Fantazy’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{87}

‘Aire’g

‘Wjllawes’

C

{89}

a Approximately the last half of the final strain. b Resembles ‘short L’ signature; the base of the ‘L’ is missing from under the ‘awes’ but is clearly

visible after it, which suggests that the pen simply did not make full contact with the page.

c Squashed in and written over a large form of his signature from the previous piece. d Substantial crossing-out and revisions in the last stave. e The signature is written over an erased title (‘Aire’). f This title is written in large letters, covering two staves. g Written over the erased original title ‘Fantazy’↜.

LAWES.indb 293

19/03/2010 10:58

294

the consort music of william lawes

Fols 54r–53v 53v 53r–52v 52v 52r–51v

No. Piece / Title

Signature*

Key

VdGS

‘A ∙ 6’ / ‘Fantazy’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{88}

‘Aire A ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{91}

‘A 6’ / ‘Fantazy’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{90}

–

F

{92}

‘Wjllawes’

F

{93}

‘Aire’ ‘A ∙ 6’ / ‘Fantazy’

Comments

↜* Signatures in bold indicate the ‘short L’ form, the rest are in the ‘mature’ form.

LAWES.indb 294

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

295

london, british library, add. ms 17798 Description Repaired. ii╃+╃ii╃+╃25╃+╃i╃+╃original vellum covers╃+╃ii. Modern pencil foliation: fols 1r–25r (ruled pages only). No music entered on flyleaves. Leaves abstracted between fols 3r–4r (replacement mounted on stub). Numbered throughout by Lawes: 1–16 (five-part) and 23–39 (six-part; confusion with page nos., no. 16 is also numbered [p.] 22); several leaves contain a second numbering sequence in ink (Lawes?): fols 1r–2v, numbered 1–3; fol. 10v–11v, numbered 13–15.

Additional Scribes Hand E: fols 4r–4v

Format and Dimensions Upright quarto; c. 160 × 204â•‹mm (vellum covers); 155 × 200â•‹mm (paper)

Watermarks Ruled pages: Basilisk throughout except fol. 4r (Peacock 3); measurements not possible because of the upright quarto format. Flyleaves: Circles

Rastrology Marginal rulings on both sides. Rastrum 1: A 8; B 2; C 32; D 11(10.5)10.5 Rastrum 2 (fol. 4r–4v only): A 8; B 2; C 33; D 11(11)11

Collation Mounted on guards, giving rise to the following collation: a2 (flyleaves), A10 [A1–2? removed; A4 removed and fol. 4r pasted onto the stub in its place], B8, C6, D4? [D4? removed]

Binding Modern British Museum binding (c. 1966); original limp vellum covers preserved at end: ‘BASSVS’ in gold lettering (front); central oval-shaped design in gold (both covers) enclosed by gold tooling, with gold fillets (at corners); outer gold tooling also.

Provenance Purchased for the British Museum on 25 June 1849 at the sale of the library of Professor William Ayrton (Puttick and Simpson; lot 571). The sale catalogue boasted ‘rare and early editions of madrigals, antiquarian and ecclesiastical music, history, and theory treatises, including some very rare works’;1 MS 17798 and the unidentified lot 568 were described as Lawes holographs in the sale catalogue.

╇ 1 Music at Auction: Puttick and Simpson (of London), 1794–1971, ed. J. Coover (Warren, MI, 1988), 145–6, at 146. Coover does not give further information on the item descriptions; the catalogues are published on microfilm (copy in Cambridge University Library): Literature, Music and Art: The Annotated Sale Catalogues of Puttick and Simpson, 1846–1870. Parts 1–4 (Reading, 1989–90).

LAWES.indb 295

19/03/2010 10:58

296

the consort music of william lawes

Inventory Fols

No.

Piece / Title

Signature

Key

VdGS

‘Wjllawes’

g

{70}

[Five-part viol consorts] 1r

1

‘Aire:∙ A ∙ 5’

1v–2r

2

[Fantazia]

–

g

{68}

2v–3r

3

[On the Playnsong]

–

g

{69}

3v–4r

4

[Fantazia]

‘Wm Lawes’a

a

{71}

4v–5r

5

[Fantazia]

–

a

{72}

5v

6

[Aire]

–

a

{73}

6r

7

[Aire]

–

c

{75}

6v–7r

8

[Fantazia]

–

c

{74}

7v

9

[Pavan]

–

c

{76}

8r

10

[Aire]

–

c

{77}

8v–9r

11

[Fantazia]

–

F

{78}

9v

12

[Pavan]

–

F

{79}

10r

13

[Aire]

–

F

{80}

10v

14

[Fantazia]

–

C

{81}

11r

15

[Pavan]

–

C

{82}

11v

16/22

[Aire] ‘A ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{83}

[Six-part viol consorts] 12r

23

[Aire] ‘A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{100}

12v–13r

24

‘Fantazy:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{97}

13v–14r

25

‘Fantazy:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{98}

14v–15r

26

‘Inominy:∙ A ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{99}

15v–16r

27

‘Fantazia:∙ A 6’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{87}

16v–17r

28

‘Fantazy:∙ A ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{88}

17v

29

‘Aire:∙ A ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{89}

18r

30

‘Aire:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

18v–19r

31

‘Fantazy:∙ A ∙ 6’

‘Wjllawes’

19v–20r

32

‘Inominy:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

20v–21r

33

‘Pauen:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

21v–22r

34

‘Fantazy:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

B↜b B↜b B↜b

{95} {94} {96}

g

{84}

g

{85}

22v

35

‘Aire:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{86}

23r

36

‘Aire:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{91}

23v–24r

37

‘Fantazy:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{90}

24v–25r

38

‘Fantazy:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{93}

25v

39

‘Aire:∙ A . 6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{92}

a Later, non-autograph, addition.

LAWES.indb 296

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

297

oxford, bodleian library, ms mus. sch. b.2 Description Repaired. i╃+╃viii╃+╃i╃+╃114. Modern pencil pagination: pp. 1–114 (rear flyleaves, pp. 111– 14); front flyleaves paginated i–viii; manuscript fragments (no music) mounted on an unnumbered partial leaf after p. viii. No music entered on pp. i–viii, 111–14. Leaves abstracted (number of abstractions is ‘at least’ in each case): one gathering before p. 1, one page after pp. 6, 8, 14, 18, three pages after p. 36, one page after pp. 38, 40, 42, two gatherings after p. 44, three pages after p. 76, two pages after p. 86, three after p. 98, one after p. 100, three after p. 106, several after p. 110.

Inscriptions P. viii: five letters, appear to be ‘a’ and ‘g’↜, no pattern or word formed (Lawes?). P. 114: ‘Regie Regis Regnum / Arcana Canto’ (Lawes).

Format and Dimensions Upright folio: c. 410 × 277 (paper); c. 416 × 285 (cover). Coloured edges.

Watermarks Flyleaves: Arms of Austria and Burgundy Ruled pages: Grapes 1

Rastrology Five-line staves (12 per page; except pp. 26 and 37, which have thirteen) drawn one line at a time with a straightedge. Marginal rulings left and right. Pre-ruled barlines, 7 bars per stave (no breaks between staves). Extra hand-drawn staves at the bottom of p. 17 and top of p. 18.

Collation Difficult to determine; many abstractions, original gatherings appear to have been sheets of six (i.e. 12 pages).1 a4, A10 [removed], B8 [1, 5, 7, 8 removed], C10 [4–5, 8 removed], D12 [8–10, 12 removed], E10 [1, 3–6, 9–10 removed], F12–G8 [removed], H12 [1–4, 11 removed], J12 [10–12 removed], K12 [1, 5, 8–10 removed], L12? [1?, 3, 7–10, 12? removed],2 M8 [3, 5–8 removed], N6 [1, 4–6 removed], O2 (rear flyleaves).

Binding Repaired. Calf leather binding, blind and gold tooling at outer edges; SRA VII in gold, flanked by letters ‘W’ and ‘L’ (both covers).

Provenance Presumably given to the Music School by Henry Lawes: in 1682 catalogue: MS XXX, 2 vols (i.e. with B.3) B.6.25–6 (with B.3).

╇ 1 Collation largely based on that given on a note pasted into the manuscript (before p. i), derived from visible stubs and information gathered when the manuscript was removed from its binding for repair. ╇ 2 Collation given in MS as L10 [2, 6–9 removed].

LAWES.indb 297

19/03/2010 10:58

298

the consort music of william lawes

Inventory Grey bars indicate abstracted pages. Page

Piece / Title*

Scoring

i–vii

[Blank; paginated flyleaves]

Signature† Key‡

VdGS Comments§

Abstractions Several leaves before p. 1

[Six-Part Viol Consorts] 1–3 ‘Fatazia [sic] ∙ a 6’ 3–6 ‘Fantazia ∙ a.6’

c

{97}

–

c

{98} Incompletea

‘Wjllawes’

7–9 ‘Fantazia ∙ a 6’

‘Wjllawes’

10–13 ‘Inominy:∙ a ∙ 6’ 14

‘Wjllawes’

‘Wjllawes’

‘Aire ∙ a 6’

One leaf after p. 6

B↜b

{94}

B↜b

{96}

B↜b

One leaf after p. 8 {95} Several leaves after p. 14

[Royall Consort related] 15

‘Alman. a 5∙ For the Violins ∙ of 2 ∙ trebles’b

‘Wjllawes’

D

{38}

[Britannia Triumphans (1638); text by William D’Avenant]c 16(–18) ‘Part of the Kings Masque’ 16

‘Britanocles [the great and good]’d

5vv

‘Why move these Princes’

v╃+╃Bc (‘Fame’)

‘’Tis fitt you moue’e

v╃+╃Bc (‘Fame’)

‘Soe pay ye expectation’

‘Moue then in such’ ‘O with what Joy’

2vv╃+╃Bc (‘Arts and Science’)↜渀屮f 4vv 5vv (‘Full Cho’)

a Lacks ending due to abstracted page. b Another version of Royall Consort Alman {38}: cf. B.3, p. 95. c All masque pieces in the manuscript are given in condensed form; texts given only in incipits,

all edited in LawesCVM4.

d ‘Full Song:∙ a 5’↜. e ‘Ciacona’↜. f ‘2 Boyes’↜.

LAWES.indb 298

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Page 17

Piece / Title*

Scoring

‘Soe Well Britanocles’g

v╃+╃Bc (‘Galatea’)

‘On euer mouing waues they dance’

3vv

‘But Now’

Signature† Key‡

VdGS Comments§

299

Abstractions

v╃+╃Bc (‘Galatea’)

‘When you he shall lead 5vv (‘Cho’) wth Harmony’ 18

‘Wise Nature’ / ‘May euery whisper’h

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Were but to tempt’

3vv

‘To Bed to Bed’

5vv (‘Grand Chorus’) One leaf after p. 18

[Five-Part Viol Consorts] 19–21 ‘Fantazya ∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{68}

22–5 ‘On the Playnsong:∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{69}

26–7 ‘For the Violls:∙ a 4’ [Fantazia]

‘Wjllawes’

c

{108}

[Four-Part Viol Consorts]

28–9 ‘Aire:∙ a 4’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{109}

29–30 ‘Aire:∙ a 4’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{110}

31–2 ‘Aire:∙ a 4’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{111}

‘Aire:∙ a 4’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{112}

34–5 ‘Aire:∙ a 4’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{113}

33

[Miscellaneous Poem Settings] 35–6 ‘Cease warring thoughts’i 36

‘Goe bleeding hart’↜j

3vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

3vv╃+╃Bc

–

Fragment Several leaves after p. 36

37

‘Feare not deare loue’k

5vv

‘Wjllawes’

Fragment

g Begins with 3-part ‘Simfony’↜. h Page headed ‘Valediction’; begins with 3-part ‘Simfony:’↜. i Text by James Shirley, printed as part of his private masque The Triumph of Beauty (1646).

Text underlay in incipits only; full text given in blocks on p. 36.

j Opening only. Text author unknown. Text underlay in incipits only. k Ending only. Text by Thomas Carew. Text underlay in incipits only; full text in block.

LAWES.indb 299

19/03/2010 10:58

300

the consort music of william lawes

Page

Piece / Title*

Scoring

Signature† Key‡

VdGS Comments§

Abstractions

[The Triumph of Peace (1634); text by James Shirley]l 38(–41) ‘The howres descending’ / ‘Simfony’m

Tr–B

‘Hence hence ye prophane’

v╃+╃Bc (‘Irene’)

‘Hence, hence ye prophane’

4vv (‘Cho’)

[‘Wherefore do my sisters stay?’]n

v╃+╃Bc (‘Irene’) One leaf after p. 38

39

‘See where she shines’o ‘In her Celestiall’

39–40 ‘Thinke not’↜p

40

‘Irene Enters like’

v╃+╃Bc 3vv 2vv╃+╃Bc [Eunomia & Irene] 4vv (‘Cho:’)

[Here ends] ‘The first part of the / Inns of Court Masque’

‘Wjllawes’

One leaf after p. 40 41

Fragment↜q

‘That all’ [Here ends] ‘The Last Part of the Inns / of Court / Masque’

‘Wjllawes’

[The Triumph of the Prince d’Amour (1636); text by William D’Avenant]r 41(–4) ‘Part of the Prince D’mour his Masque at the Middle Temple’↜s 41

‘Simfony’ ‘Behold how’t

42

‘Come strew this ground’

Tr–B 2vv╃+╃Bc 4vv (‘Cho’) ‘Wjllawes’

l Text underlay in incipits throughout. m Page headed: ‘First Song of the Inns of Court Masque:’↜. n No text given. o ‘3 Voc. From ye Cho:’↜. p ‘Eunomia descends ∙ and Sings’ with Irene, first exchanging phrases then together; prefaced

by Tr–B ‘Simfony’↜.

q Ending only. r Texts given only in incipits. s Presented by the King on 24 February 1635/6; includes text. Begins with Tr–B ‘Simfony’↜. t ‘The Banquet descends out of the/Sceane/the Songe’↜.

LAWES.indb 300

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Page

Piece / Title*

Scoring

Signature† Key‡

VdGS Comments§

301

Abstractions

‘The last Song or / Valediction’ ‘Simfony’ ‘The Angry stead’u ‘Till you as Glorious’ ‘Last part of / the Simfony / Playes and / the Priests / of Venus / descend’

Tr–B v╃+╃Bc 4vv (‘Cho:’) Tr–B

One leaf after p. 42 43

‘The Balmes rich Sweet’ ‘The Balmes’ ‘Last part of the / Simfony And / the Priests of / Apollo descend / to the State’

2vv╃+╃Bc 4vv (‘Cho’) Tr–B

‘And May your language’ 3vv╃+╃Bc ‘Soe full of Wonder’ ‘the whole Sinfony / and all retire from / the State to ye Sceane and sing / the Grand / Cho:’ 44

‘May our three Gods’ ‘Simfony’v

4vv (‘Cho:’) Tr–B

4vv (‘Grand ‘Wjllawes’ Cho:’) Tr–B

c

Complete

[Partsong] 44

‘Deere leve thy home’w

4vv╃+╃Bc

Fragment 2 gatherings after p. 44

[Five-Part Viol Consorts] 45–8

[Fantazia] ‘a ∙ 5 for ye Violls’x

48–51 ‘Fantazia:∙ a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{71} {72}

‘Wjllawes’

a

52

‘Aire a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{70}

53

[Aire] ‘a :∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

a

{73}

54–7 ‘Fantazia a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

c

{74}

–

c

{76}

‘Wjllawes’

c

{75}

58–9 ‘Pauen:∙ a 5’ 60

‘Aire:∙ a. 5’

u ‘Priests of Mars/descend from/the Sceane to the/State’/‘The Song’↜. v In a different ink to the preceding masque music. w Opening only; text in incipits. x Most of p. 47 is crossed out.

LAWES.indb 301

19/03/2010 10:58

302 Page 61

the consort music of william lawes Piece / Title*

Signature† Key‡

Scoring

‘Wjllawes’

c

{77}

62–5 ‘Fantazy:∙ a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{78}

65–7 ‘Pauan:∙ a. 5’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{79}

68–9 ‘Aire a ∙ 5’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{80}

‘Wjllawes’

C

{81}

70–1 ‘Pauen a 5’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{82}

72–4

‘Wjllawes’

C

{81}

‘Wjllawes’

C

{83}

‘W: Lawes’

D

{135}

69

‘Aire:∙ a ∙ 5’

VdGS Comments§

‘Fantazy:∙ a 5’↜渀屮y [Fantasy {81} continued]

74–5 [Aire] ‘a ∙ 5’

Abstractions

[Fantasia-Suite Fantazia] 76–81 ‘For the Organ:∙ Base Viole and Violin’ / ‘Fantazia’

Several leaves after p. 76 [Suites for two bass viols and organ] 81–5 ‘Pauen’ / ‘For 2 Base Violls and Organ’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{101}

[Lute Duets] 86

‘For 2 lutes’ ‘Alman’

‘Wjllawes’

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’ Several leaves after p. 86

[Suites for two bass viols and organ, continued] 87–8 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{102}

88–91 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{103}

91–2 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{107}

93–9 ‘Pauen: and 2 Almane of Alfonso. sett to the Organ / and 2 diuison BaseViolls by:∙ Wjllawes’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{104} & {105}

Several leaves after p. 98 100

[Aire]

–

C

{106} Incomplete One leaf after p. 100

y Lawes revised the piece by halving the time values (filling noteheads etc.).

LAWES.indb 302

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Page

Piece / Title*

Scoring

Signature† Key‡

VdGS Comments§

303

Abstractions

[Miscellaneous] 101

[Unidentified 3-part fragment; vocal?; no text] ‘A 3 · Voc:∙ In the Memory of my Freind:∙ John. Tomkins’a

–

3vv

Fragment↜z

a

‘Wjllawes’

Complete

[Six-Part Viol Consort] 102–5 ‘Inomine a. 6’ 105

‘Wjllawes’

[Unidentified 5?-part piece]

c

{99}

–

Incomplete

–

Fragment↜b

[Sacred Vocal] 106

‘Psalm:∙ 71: Mr Sands:∙ 3 Voc:∙ to the Organ:∙ First Part’ / ‘I to thy Wing’

3vv╃+╃Bc

Several leaves after p. 106 [Catches & Songs]c 107

108

‘Regi Regis Regnum’↜d

4vv

–

‘Regi Regis Regnum’e

4vv

–

‘Some drink, Boy’↜f

3vv

–

‘Harke Jolly Lads’

3vv

–

‘Lord thou hast’↜g

3vv

‘Wjllawes’

‘Happy Sons [of Israel]’h

3vv

‘Wjllawes’ ‘Wjllawes’

‘She Weepeth’

4vv

‘Call for the Ale’

4vv

‘Wjllawes’

‘Lets Cast away Care’

3vv

‘Wjllawes’

‘Stand still’

3vv

‘Wjllawes’

z Ending only. a Printed in H. Lawes, Choice Psalmes (1648). b Opening only. c This begins a series of catches and canons, mostly for three or four voices; only the first few

bars are given for each piece. Several were published posthumously; see LawesCVM2–3 for concordances. d Canon ‘in the 5. 8. and 5 below’; Lawes also erased another setting on p. 109 and wrote the first text lines on one of the back flyleaves. e Canon ‘in the Vnison’↜. f From Suckling’s play The Goblins performed at the Blackfriars by the King’s Men (c. 1637–41). Â�g ‘Canon … in the Vnison’↜. h ‘Canon … in the 4 and 8’; Psalm 66.

LAWES.indb 303

19/03/2010 10:58

304

the consort music of william lawes Piece / Title*

109

‘If we shall drink Canary’

3vv

‘Wjllawes’

‘I doe Confesse’

3vv

‘Wjllawes’

‘Whither go yee’

3vv

‘Wjllawes’

‘Re me re ut’i

3vv

–

110

Scoring

Signature† Key‡

Page

‘Regi Regis Regnum’

[3vv?]↜渀屮j

–

‘Come my Lads’

2–6vv↜k

‘W. L.↜’ ‘W. L.↜’

‘Tom Ned and Jack’

3vv

‘Never Let a man’

3vv

‘W. L.↜’

‘Though I am not Bacchus Priest’

3vv

‘W. L.↜’

‘Brisk Clarett and Sherry’

3vv

‘W. L.↜’

‘Warrs ar our delight’

6vv

‘W. L.↜’

VdGS Comments§

Abstractions

Incomplete

Several leaves after p. 110 111–14 [Blank; paginated flyleaves]

*

Crossed-out pieces are shown thus; reasons for crossings-out are not always clear: they often appear to be linked to the excision of leaves.

† Signatures in bold indicate the ‘short L’ form, the rest are in the ‘mature’ form. ‡ Given for consort music only. § ‘Incomplete’ implies that a piece is unfinished in some way; ‘Fragments’ are due to abstractions. All texts are given in inciptits only.

i ‘Canon in ye 5 and 8th’↜. j One line of text, two bars of music (one stave only): mostly rubbed out; no indication of

scoring.

k ‘For 2. 3. 4. 5. or 6 pts in One’; three parts written in score.

LAWES.indb 304

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

305

oxford, bodleian library, ms mus. sch. b.3 Description Repaired. i╃+╃iv╃+╃102╃+╃i. Modern pencil pagination: pp. 1–102 (rear flyleaf, pp. 101–2); front flyleaves paginated i–iv; remnants of vellum covers before p. i and after p. 102 (unnumbered). No music entered on pp. i–iv, 101–2. Leaves abstracted (number of abstractions is ‘at least’ in each case): one gathering before p. 1, one page after pp. 18, 20, three pages after p. 22, two after p. 24, one after p. 78, three after p. 100, one after p. 102.

Inscriptions (Flyleaf) p.â•‹i: several signatures in light pencil, apparently authentic: ‘Leonard Â�Tace[?]’↜, ‘Monsieur’↜, ‘Wjllawes’ and ‘Teodor Stoeffken’↜. The identities of the first two persons are unknown. The Lawes signature is his ‘mature form’ and appears to be genuine, as does that of StoeffÂ� ken comparable to his signature in the Longleat documents relating to The Triumph of Peace.1 The ‘vellum’ remnant at the rear end of B.3 contains an inscription (outside) apparently in the hand of Lawes: ‘Coh Cho / I C C / Brokgam[?]’↜. The inside of the corresponding remnant at the start of the manuscript reads (Lawes?): ‘Chos[?] / C— / Mr holmes / Chorus’↜. ‘Mr Holmes’ is presumably Thomas Holmes (1606– 1638), who took part in The Triumph of Peace in February 1634 (he was an excellent bass singer). The annotations may refer to The Triumph of Peace, wherein Holmes sang in the twenty-nine strong chorus and was one of the five ‘constellations’ (which also included Henry Lawes). The part of Amphiluche was originally intended for Holmes but was performed by a boy trained by William Lawes.2

Format and Dimensions Upright folio: c. 410 × 277 (paper); c. 416 × 285 (cover). Coloured edges.

Watermarks Flyleaves: Arms of Austria and Burgundy Ruled pages: Grapes 1

Rastrology Five-line staves (12 per page) drawn one line at a time with a straightedge. Marginal rulings left and right. Pre-ruled barlines, 7 bars per stave (no breaks between staves).

Collation Difficult to determine: many abstractions, original gatherings appear to have been sheets of six (i.e. 12 pages).

Binding Repaired. Calf leather binding, blind and gold tooling at outer edges (as B.2); SRA VII in gold, flanked by letters ‘H’ and ‘L’ (both covers). ╇ 1 For Stoeffken see A. Ashbee, ‘Stoeffken, Dietrich/Theodore’↜, BDECM, ii. 1049–52. His signature is reproduced in Lefkowitz, ‘Longleat Papers’↜, plate I. ╇ 2 See Lefkowitz, ‘Longleat Papers’↜.

LAWES.indb 305

19/03/2010 10:58

306

the consort music of william lawes

Provenance Presumably given to the Music School by Henry Lawes: in 1682 catalogue; see notes for B.2.

Inventory Grey bars indicate abstracted pages. Page

Piece / Title

i–iv

[Blank; paginated flyleaves]

Signature

Key

VdGS Abstractions At least one gathering before p. 1

[Six-Part Viol Consorts] 1–3

‘Fantazy:∙ A 6’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{87}

4–7

‘Fantazy:∙ A∙6’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{88}

8–9

‘Aire. A∙6’

‘Wjllawes’

C

{89}

10–13 ‘Fantazy:∙ A∙6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{85}

14–16 ‘Pauen:∙ A∙6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{84}

17–18 ‘Aire:∙ a 6’

‘Wjllawes’

g

{86}

19–20 ‘Aire∙ A.6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{91}

‘Wjllawes’

F

{92}

‘Wjllawes’

F

{90}

One leaf after p. 18 One leaf after p. 20 21

‘Aire∙ A∙6’

22–5 ‘Fantazy↜∙ A∙6’a

At least 2 leaves after p. 22 At least 2 leaves after p. 24 26–9 ‘Fantazy A∙6’

‘Wjllawes’

F

{93}

‘Wjllawes’

G

{187}

31–4 ‘Fantazy:∙ For the Harpe Violin Base ‘Wjllawes’ Violl and theorbo’

d

{191}

35–8 ‘Pauen’ / ‘DiVisyon Uppon the Pauen’

‘Wjllawes’

G

{188}

39–43 ‘Pauen’ / ‘Diuisions on the Pauen / for Violin and Base Violl’

‘Wjllawes’

D

{189}

44–7 ‘Pauen’ / ‘Deuision on this Pauen / for the Violin and Base Violl’

–

g

{190}

–

D

6/{37}b

–

D

6/{39}

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{1}

[Harp Consorts] 30

[Aire]

[Royall Consort (‘new’ version)] 48

‘Aire’

49

‘Corant’

50–3 ‘Fantazy’ / ‘For 2 Violins 2 Base Violls and 2 theorboes’

a Some passages were revised in half time values: note-heads are filled in, beams added, and

minim rests changed to crotchet rests.

b For ease of reference, in the Royall Consort pieces the VdGS number is preceded by the

modern sett/suite number (as in LawesRC).

LAWES.indb 306

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Page

Piece / Title

Signature

Key

54

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{2}

VdGS Abstractions

55

‘Alman’

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{3}

56

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{4}

57

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{5}

58

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{6}

59–60 ‘Ecco’

‘Wjllawes’

d

1/{7}

61–2 ‘Ecco’

‘Wjllawes’

D

6/{40}

63–5 ‘Pauen’ / ‘For Two Violins, 2 Base Violls / and 2 theorboes’

‘Wjllawes’

d

2/{8}

65–6 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

2/{9}

66–7 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

2/{10} 2/{11}

67–8 ‘Aire’ [Corant]

‘Wjllawes’

d

69–70 ‘Corant

‘Wjllawes’

d

2/{12}

70–1 ‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

d

2/{13}

71–2 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

3/{15}

–

d

3/{16}

–

d

3/{17}

d

3/{18}

73

‘Aire’

74–5 ‘Corant’

307

75

‘Corant’ [continued on p. 78]

76

‘Alman’

‘Wjllawes’

d

3/{19}

77

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

d

3/{20}

78

[Corant; continued from p. 75]

‘Wjllawes’

d

79

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

d

3/{21}

80–1 ‘Pauen’

At least 2 leaves after p. 78 ‘Wjllawes’

D

4/{22}

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

4/{23}

83–4 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

4/{24}

84–5 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

4/{25}

86–7 ‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

D

4/{26}

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

D

4/{27}

88–9 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

5/{29}

89–90 ‘Aire’

–

D

5/{30}

82

87

90–1 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

5/{31}

91–2 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

5/{32}

92–3 ‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

D

5/{33}

93–4 ‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

5/{34}

94

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

D

5/{35}

95

‘Alman’

‘Wjllawes’

D

6/{38}

‘Wjllawes’

D

6/{36}

96–9 ‘Fantazy’ 99

‘Sarabd’

‘Wjllawes’

d

2/{14}

100

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

D

6/{41}

101–2 [Blank; paginated flyleaves]

LAWES.indb 307

At least 3 leaves after p. 100

19/03/2010 10:58

308

the consort music of william lawes

london, british library, add. ms 31432 Description Repaired. iii╃+╃i╃+╃71╃+╃iii. Foliated twice in modern pencil: (1) now crossed out: fols 1r–70r (ruled pages only; fol. 65r is repeated); (2) fols 1r–49r (begins on original flyleaf; used pages only). As the second foliation only covers the used pages, the original foliation has been favoured to allow the fullest description. Contemporary numeration of songs 1–20 (not Lawes), no. 12 is the middle of no. 11 (‘When Each Lynes a faithfull drinker’). No music entered on fols 5v–22r, 63v–[71]r, nor on any flyleaves. No obvious signs of abstractions due to tightness of the binding.

Additional Scribes Hand F: fols 1v–5r, Jenkins elegy, c. 1645 Hand G: fol. [71]v (INV.), ?Jenkins bass viol pieces, ?c. 1650

Inscriptions Inside cover: bookplate of William Gostling with ‘Triphook 1809 £3.3.0’ in ink; bookplate of Julian Marshall. (First non-original flyleaf, recto) fol. i: ink stamp ‘purchased of / julian Â�marshall, esq. / 10 july, 1880; 20 march, / 9 april, 1881’↜. Original flyleaf, recto (fol. 1r of second foliation): ‘Musick / Lawes’ (later hand; modern pencil); poem, ‘Sweetest Cloris lend a kisse’ (Lawes):1 Sweetest Cloris lend a kisse the more you spare the lesse you misse were it two, were it three were it ten they may bee ouer done a gen And when breathlesse you Can noe More you Mai be sure of all my store learne betimes liuing loues Misterie weall finde out still varietye tis Ignorance that makes you Coy to fly from what youd faine injoy T[-----] fares are fast as that wee may giue [----------------] fly[--] a way2 Tis Louers food, tis bewtyes Charme scales up our loue and keeps it warme Consider too that youth might wast Hast Cloris and redeeme whats past Loose noe tyme, in your prime for when you’r old Men Neglect and loue grows Cold Best Apetites are soonest starud and such is myne if not preserud. Kisse, tis bewtyes food affections Charm Scales up our loue and keeps it warme ╇ 1 Modernized text in ES1600–75, vol. 12, 224. ╇ 2 Some of this crossed-out text is difficult to decipher.

LAWES.indb 308

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

309

Original flyleaf, verso: (1) ‘Richard Gibbon his booke / giuen to him [originally ‘his’ but amended] by Mr William / Lawes all of his owne pricking / and composeing’; (2) ‘Giuen to me J R by his widdow Mris Gibbon’ / ‘J R:’; (3) ‘a b c d e’; (4) ‘Borrowed of Alderman Fidge / by me Jo. Sargenson’; (5) ‘x35/x{40: Leaus in this book to spare; / to prick outt; L ://:}’↜.

Format and Dimensions Upright folio: c. 336 × 225 (paper); c. 342 × 233 (covers)

Watermarks Ruled pages: Peacock 4 Flyleaves: Pot I/1

Rastrology Ruled margins on both sides. A 12; B 4; C 89.5; D 12.5(13)12(13.5)12.5(13.5)12.5

Collation Difficult to determine due to the tightness of the binding. Coloured edges.

Binding Repaired c.â•‹1959. Brown calf leather, blind and gold tooling. Coat of arms (SRA VII) enclosed within rectangular gold tooling and corner decorations, bordered on both sides by two lines of blind tooling. Gold tooling (no corner decorations), bordered by blind tooling at outer edges.

Provenance3 Gibbon’s widow gave it to ‘J. R.↜’↜, after whom it belonged to Thomas Fidge. Fidge was born in Canterbury in January 1637/8.4 Willetts notes that he was appointed an Alderman of Canterbury in 1662, and was mayor for a year in 1671. The manuscript was ‘Borrowed of Alderman Fidge by me Jo. Sargenson’; John Sargenson (1639–84) was a minor canon of Canterbury from c.â•‹1663. Rev. William Gostling (1696–1773) owned the manuscript in the eighteenth century. Gostling was also a minor canon of Canterbury and a son of John Gostling (1650–1733), the famous bass singer; he also owned Henry Lawes’s autograph songbook (GB-Lbl, Add. MS 53723).5 The London-based antiquarian bookseller Robert Triphook (1782–1868) purchased it in 1809. MS 31432 was subsequently part of the library of the bibliophile, publisher and music scholar (and husband of the composer Louise Farrenc, née Jeanne-Louise Dumont) Aristide Farrenc (1794–1865), sold in 1866. The British Museum acquired it with the Julian Marshall collection in 1881.

╇ 3 The notes on the flyleaf and the bookplate on the inside front cover give a detailed record

of the manuscript’s provenance. The following account is largely based on that in Willetts, ‘Gibbon(s)?’↜, 3–5. See also A. Hughes-Hughes, Catalogue of Manuscript Music in the British Museum, vol. 2 (1908), 473. ╇ 4 www.familysearch.org (accessed 3 March 2009). ╇ 5 See I. Spink, Henry Lawes: Cavalier Songwriter (Oxford, 2000), 9. For Gostling, see R. Ford, ‘Minor Canons at Canterbury Cathedral: The Gostlings and their Colleagues’↜ (PhD diss., University of California, Berkeley, 1984).

LAWES.indb 309

19/03/2010 10:58

310

the consort music of william lawes

Inventory Much of the information in this table is collated from J. Cutts, ‘British Museum Additional MS. 31432 William Lawes’s Writing for the Theatre and the Court’, The Library, 5th series, 7 (1952), 225–34; Crum, ‘Notes on the Texts of 31432’; M. Lefkowitz, ‘Lawes, William’, New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians, 29 vols, ed. S. Sadie (1980), x. 558–66; WoodMfP; D. Pinto, ‘Lawes, William’, GMO. For additional concordances (texts and music) concordances, see Pinto, ‘Lawes’, GMO; LawesCVM1–2. Fols [i]

No. Piece / Title

‘Sweetest Cloris lend a kisse’

[i verso]

[See Inscriptions]

1r

‘Sarabd’

1r

‘Corant’

1v

‘Tis Joy to see’

1v

5v–22r

Setting

Signature* Suggested / Composer dates†

[Unfoliated flyleaf]

[i recto]

2r–5r

Poet / Text source

[Anon.]

[Anon.]

‘Sarabd’ ‘An Elegiack on the sad Losse [Jenkins?] of … M.r William Lawes … by Mr Jenkins’b

Text only

–

LV

‘W: Lawes’

LV

‘Wjllawes’

3vv canona ‘Wjllawes’ LV

‘W L↜’

2vv╃+╃Bc, 3vv Chorus

[Jenkins]

1645?

3vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

1639–41

[Unused folios]

22v–23v

1 ‘A hall a hall’ / ‘Whats at our tongues End’d

[J. Suckling, The Tragedy of Brennoralt]e

23v–24r

2 ‘Now in the Sad declenshion’ [Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

24v

3 ‘Virgins as I aduise forbeare’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

25r

4 ‘Dos’t see how vnregarded Now’↜f

[Suckling]g

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

25v

5 ‘If you a Wrinkle on the Sea haue seane’

[Anon.]

[v╃+╃Bc]h

–

26r

6 ‘Aske Me noe More wher Joue [T. Carew]i bestowes’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

c. 1639

a ‘A∙3∙ -Canon- in the Unison and 5th belowe’↜. b Printed in Choice Psalmes. d ‘Whats at our tongues End’ is part of Suckling’s poem. Lawes added this section (v╃+╃B c; in

a different ink) after the final barline and over his signature; it should come before the line ‘Then it unlocks the breast’↜. e WoodMfP, 56. f Text (written first) is in different ink to the music and signature, the ink of which is consistent to the end of fol. 27r. g Fragmenta Aurea (1646). h Complete text is laid out, but there are only notes for the first line or so. i Poems (1640).

LAWES.indb 310

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Fols

No. Piece / Title

Poet / Text source

Setting

Signature* Suggested / Composer dates†

26v

7 ‘O thinke not Phoebe’

[J. Shirley]j

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

27r

8 ‘Upp Ladyes up’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

27v–29r

9 ‘Dialogue’ / ‘When death shall [A. Marvell]k snatch us’ [Anon.]l

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

30r–30v 11–12‘When Each Lynes a faithfull [Anon.] drinker’m

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

29v

31r

31v–32r

10 ‘Faith be noe longer Coy’

13 ‘Cupids wearie of the Court’

[W. D’Avenant?, The Platonick Lovers?]n

14 ‘It tis hir voice’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

32r

15 ‘Wher did you borrow that last sigh’

[W. Berkeley, The Lost Lady]o

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

32v

16 ‘Why should great bewty’

[D’Avenant]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

33r

17 ‘Come take a Carouse’

[Anon.]

18 ‘what Hoe. Wee Come to be merry’

[J. Ford, The Lady’s Trial]p

33v–34r

311

34r

19 ‘Pleasures, Bewty, loue youth [The Lady’s Trial] attend yee’

34v–35r

20 ‘Whieles I this standing Lake’ [W. Cartwright]q

c. 1639?

1635?

1637–8

v╃+╃Bc, 3vv ‘Wjllawes’ Chorus 3vv

‘Wjllawes’

1638

v╃+╃Bc

‘W. L.↜’

1638

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

35v–36r

‘Dialogue’ / ‘What Softer sounds are these’

[B. Jonson, Entertainment at Welbeck]r

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

36v–37r

‘A Health, … a health to the Northerne lasse’

[Suckling, The Goblins]s

2vv╃+╃Bc, 3vv Chorus

‘Wjllawes’ c.â•‹1637–41

37r

‘To whome shall I Complaine’ [Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

1633

‘Wjllawes’

j Poems (1646); Carew, Poems (1640). Text plagiarized in S. Pick, Festum Voluptatis (1639). k Miscellaneous Poems (1681). l Wit’s Interpreter (1655). m ‘and ye full’ at the bottom of fol. 30r is in a different hand. n See J. Cutts, ‘Drexel Manuscript 4041’↜, Musica Disciplina 18 (1964), 151–201, esp. 170; not

listed in WoodMfP.

o Performed by the King’s Men, at the Blackfriars and at court, before 7 February 1638: Wood-

MfP, 47, 56.

p Licensed 3 May: WoodMfP, 56. q Comedies, Tragi-Comedies, with Other Poems (1651), where the preface states that the ‘Ayres

and Songs [were] set by Mr Henry Laws, Servant to His late Majesty in his Publick and Â�Private Musick’↜. This could refer to a different setting, or (as suggested in Cutts, ‘31432’↜, 231) that the printers duplicated the information from the 1651 edition of Cartwright’s plays. r Given before the King on 21 May 1633, hosted by William Cavendish: WoodMfP, 54. s Performed by the King’s Men at the Blackfriars in 1638: WoodMfP, 45–6, 55.

LAWES.indb 311

19/03/2010 10:58

312

the consort music of william lawes

Fols 37v–38v 39r

No. Piece / Title

Poet / Text source

‘The Catts as Other Creatures’ [Anon.] ‘Had you but herd her Sing’

[Anon.]

Setting

Signature* Suggested / Composer dates†

3vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

‘Far Well faire Saint’

[T. Cary]t

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

40r

‘O draw your Curtaines’

[D’Avenant, Love and Honour]u

[v╃+╃Bc]v

–

40v

‘Loues a Child’

[H. Glapthorne, Argalus and Parthenia]w

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’ c.â•‹1632–8

41r

‘Amphiluce:∙ in a Maske’ / ‘In [Shirley, The Envye of the night’ Triumph of Peace]x

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

39v–40r

41v–42r

‘Dialogue’ / ‘Come heauy hart’ [Anon.]

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

42v–43r

‘Dialogue’ / ‘Tis Not Boy. thy [Anon.] Amorous Looke’

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

43v–44r

‘Erly in the Morne’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

44r

‘Thou that Excellest’y

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

44v

‘Perfect and Endles Circles Are’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

45r

‘Can Bewtyes spring Admitt’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

45v

‘Tell me noe More her eyes’

[H. Moody]z

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’a

46r

‘God of winds’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

46v

‘I would the God of loue would dye’

[Shirley]b

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

47r

‘Ah. Cruell Loue must I endure’

[R. Herrick]c

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

47v

‘Persuasions Not to loue’ / ‘He [Herrick] that will not loue’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

48r

‘To the Dewes’ / ‘I Burne, I burne’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

[Herrick]

1634

c.â•‹1634?

t In R. Fanshawe, Il pastor fido (1647). u LawesCVM1, xiv. v Text only, no music; cf. fol. 54r below. w Performed by Beeston’s Boys at court, and at the Cockpit, Drury Lane: WoodMfP, 41, 55. Text

also printed in Glapthorne’s Poems (1639).

x This may be a later setting as there are some textual differences; see Cutts, ‘31432’↜, 232. No

setting in B.2.

y Block text in different ink. z Wit’s Interpreter (1655). Lawes gives the text for 10 more stanzas; stanzas 3, 4, 7 and 8 are

crossed out (one of which is numbered ‘1’) and the remaining six numbered 2–7.

a Similar to ‘short L’ signature; here ‘L’ curves back up towards the ‘awes’↜. b Poems (1646). c The Herrick poems were all later printed in Hesperides (1648).

LAWES.indb 312

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions Fols 48v 48v–49r

No. Piece / Title

Poet / Text source

Setting

Signature* Suggested / Composer dates†

‘On the Lillyes’ / ‘White though yee be’

[Herrick]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

‘Gather ye Rosebuds’d

[Herrick]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

49r

‘To the Secāmour’ / ‘Ime sick [Herrick] of loue’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

49v–50v

‘Dialogue’ / ‘Charon O Gentle [Herrick] Charon’

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

51r

‘Louers rejoice’

[F. Beaumont & J. Fletcher, Cupid’s Revenge]e

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

51r

‘That flame is borne of Earthly fire’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

‘Beliza shade your shining eyes’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

52v

‘Deerest all faire’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

53r

‘Be not proud’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

53v

‘Loue I obey’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

54r

‘O drawe your Curtaynes’

[Love and Honour]↜f

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

54v–55v

‘Trialogue’ / ‘Orpheus, O Orpheus, gently touch thy Lesbyan lyre’

[Anon.]

3vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

‘O loue, are all those Arrowes [Anon.] gone’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

56v–57r

‘Yee Feinds and Furies’

[D’Avenant, The Unfortunate Lovers]g

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

57v–58r

‘On. On Compassion shall neuer Enter here’

[Anon.]

58r

‘Hence flattring hopes’

[Anon.]

58v–59r

‘Dialogue’ / ‘Come my Daphnee’

59v–60r 60r–60v

51v–52r

56r

313

1637

1637

1638

v╃+╃Bc, 3vv ‘Wjllawes’ Chorus v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

[Shirley, The Cardinal]h

2vv╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

‘Stay Phoebus Stay’

[E. Waller]i

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

‘Cloris, I Wish that Envye were as Just’

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

1641

d Added after the other two songs, the setting runs across the bottom of the two pages. e Originally performed in 1611 by the King’s Revels (Cutts, ‘31432’↜, 233); revived by Beeston’s

Boys on 7 February 1636/7 (WoodMfP, 43, 55); Cutts gives the date of the revival as 1639.

f Performed by the King’s Men at the Blackfriars; WoodMfP, 47, 55 gives the date as 1 January

1636/7; Cutts, ‘31432’↜, 233, gives 1634.

g Licensed 16 April (WoodMfP, 49, 56). h Licensed 25 November (WoodMfP, 41–2, 57). i Poems (1645).

LAWES.indb 313

19/03/2010 10:58

314

the consort music of william lawes

Fols

No. Piece / Title

Poet / Text source

Setting

Signature* Suggested / Composer dates†

[Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

61r–61v

‘Doris, See the Amorous flame’

61v–62v

‘Those Louers only Hapye are’ [Anon.]

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

62v–63r

‘Amarilis Teare thy haire’

v╃+╃Bc

‘Wjllawes’

63v–[71]r

[Anon.]

[Unused: fol. 65r is repeated on fol. 66r; thus, fol. 70r is actually fol. 71r]

[Reversed end; folio is INV.: mid-17th century additions for bass viol? in staff notation]j [71]v

[Aire]

[BV?]

[Jenkins?]

c.â•‹1650?

[Aire]

[BV?]

[Jenkins?]

c.â•‹1650?

[Aire]

[BV?]

[Jenkins?]

c.â•‹1650?

[Aire]

[BV?]

[Jenkins?]

c.â•‹1650?

[Aire]

[BV?]

[Jenkins?]

c.â•‹1650?

↜* Signatures in bold indicate the ‘short L’ form; those underlined indicate the ‘running’ form. † The dates refer to suggested compositional dates, largely based on correlation with collateral evidence from literary or dramatic sources. In the case of plays, the dates refer to first performances as given in WoodMfP, 51–7; as Julia Wood notes, we do not have documentary evidence of all performances of these plays, and cannot assume to connect a Lawes setting with a specific performance. Indeed, it is possible that some of the settings may have no connection to the theatre. j Willetts noted the suggestion by the late Dr Helen Sleeper that they may be by Jenkins:

Â�Willetts, ‘Gibbon(s)?’↜, 12.

LAWES.indb 314

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

315

cambridge, ma, harvard university, houghton library ms mus. 70 Description ii╃+╃Vellum╃+╃iii╃+╃27╃+╃i╃+╃Vellum╃+╃ii. The leaves within the vellum covers are foliated in modern pencil, fols 1r–30r (front inner-flyleaves foliated, but not rear inner-flyleaf, which would be fol. 31r). Partial contemporary numeration (Hand H): 1–8 (fols 4v–7r), 1–11 (fols 11v–16v; fols 13v and 14r mistakenly numbered as separate pieces). No music entered on: outer-flyleaves, fols 1r–3v (blank), 4r, 7v–11r, 20v–30v, [31r] (blank).

Additional Scribe Hand H: fols 4v–7r

Inscriptions Inside front cover: bookplate: ‘Robert Trollap (of Yorke and / Newcastle, Free-Mason) his / Booke, 1657’↜. Under this is written in pencil [Cummings] ‘Binding for Charles I / 24 m.↜’↜. Below this is the Harvard College Library bookplate of William Inglis Morse, curator of Canadian History and Literature. Outer flyleaf 1, recto: note in pencil [Cummings], ‘Ancient Binding / with arms of Charles Ist on each cover / (Charles beheaded 1649)’↜. Outer flyleaf 2 (between calf and vellum covers): note in modern pencil, ‘Harvard College Library / gift of / William Inglis Morse / April 7. 1950’↜. Outside vellum cover [Cummings]: ‘Ancient Music / Mss.↜’; [Lawes:] ‘Three Lyra Vialls’; [Cummings:] ‘Autograph Music / by / William Lawes’↜渀屮. Inside front vellum cover [Cummings]: ‘Pieces for the Lyra-viol / composed by William Lawes / in his Autograph.↜’; ‘William Lawes. gentleman of the Chapel / Royal – took up arms during the Civil wars / in espousing the Royalist side and was / Killed at the siege of Chester 1645. / Charles 1st was so much affected at the / death of Lawes that he “put on / particular mourning.”↜’↜1 Flyleaf 1, inside vellum covers (fol. 1r) [Cummings]: ‘“Upon m. William Lawes, The rare Musitian” / Sho’d I not put on blacks, when each one here / Comes with his cypresse, and devotes a teare? / Sho’d I not grieve, my Lawes, when every lute, / Violl, and voice is, by thy losse, strucke mute? / Thy loss, brave man! Whose numbers have been hurl’d, / And no less prais’d then spread throughout the world: / Some have call’d thee call’d Amphion; some of us / Nam’d thee Terpander, or sweet Orpheus; / Some this, some that, but all in this agree, / Musique had both her birth and death with thee. / Robert Herrick’↜.↜ ╇ 1 Cummings was confusing Lawes with an elder namesake and member of the Chapel Royal

from 1603 to 1611 (see LefkowitzWL, 1–2 n. 1; also A. Ashbee, ‘Lawes, William (?1553–1624)’↜, BDECM, ii. 709–10); he is quoting Thomas Fuller at the end of the passage: FullerW (‘Wiltshire’), 157. This page is badly pasted, there are many air bubbles and creases. One large crease runs from the top left corner down through Cummings’s biographical note. Some of the letter ‘a’ in ‘William’ goes under the crease and is partially cut off by it, suggesting that the page was pasted after Cummings made his notes. A patch of discolouration suggests that another bookplate may be (or have been) between the vellum cover and the pasted leaf. (The flyleaf was also pasted on to the back vellum cover. Again, there are many creases and air bubbles.)

LAWES.indb 315

19/03/2010 10:58

316

the consort music of william lawes

Fol. 31r (rear flyleaf): ‘Rathe’[?].

Format and Dimensions Upright folio: c. 296 × 183 (pages); c. 303 × 194 (covers)

Watermarks Front inner flyleaves: Pillars II/1 Rear inner flyleaf: Pot I/2 (5 lobes) Ruled pages: Pot I/3 (7 lobes), Pot I/2 (5 lobes) Pot I/2 is found between fols 9r–16v and on a rear flyleaf (fol. 31v); Pot I/3 is found in the rest of the manuscript (ruled pages). Fols 9r–14v were ruled with a different rastrum to that used for the rest of the manuscript.

Rastrology A 8 (six-line staves), B 4. Ruled margins on either side; inner margin is approximately 21â•‹mm. Inconsistent outer margins, vary between c. 20â•‹mm (fols 4r–8v, 15r–30v) and c.â•‹3â•‹mm (fols 9r–14v). Rastrum 1 (fols 4r–8v, 15r–30v): C 113, D 16(16)15.5(17)16(17)15.5 Rastrum 2 (fols 9r–14v): C 111 D 16(15)16(16)15.5(16)16.5

Collation Difficult to determine due to the tightness of the binding.

Binding Original limp vellum binding preserved within contemporary reversed calf covers, blind and gold tooling; SRA VII (cf. D.229 and MS 31432).

Provenance Robert Trollop owned Mus. 70 by 1657; thence until the early twentieth century, its whereÂ� abouts are unknown. Mus. 70 is likely to be the Lawes autograph reputed to be among the Nanki collection in Japan. In 1970, Lefkowitz claimed that ‘At least fifteen books of William Lawes’s autographs are known to have survived .… the last is reported to be in the Nanki Library in Tokyo’↜.2 (The Nanki Library was founded in 1917 by Yorisada Tokugawa (1892–1954), and is mainly comprised of some 400 volumes purchased at the sale of Cummings’s library.) The Lefkowitz reference appears to be the ‘Pieces for the lyra-viol [in the autograph of the composer]’ listed in the Nanki Library Cummings catalogue of 1925.3 This is presumably the Lawes manuscript advertised in the Cummings sale catalogue (lot 982): ‘Lawes (Wm.) Pieces for the Lyra-Viol, manuscript, in the autograph of the composer, rough calf, with the arms of Charles I on the sides, old vellum

╇ 2 LawesSCM, xvii. Lefkowitz did not specify the manuscripts; he counted individual partbooks

(which would give a total of fourteen) and then included the Nanki MS (although this now appears to be Mus. 70). For the Nanki collection, see H. McLean, ‘Blow and Purcell in Japan’↜, MT 104 (1963), 702–5; O. Albracht, rev. S. Roe, ‘Collections (private): Japan’↜, GMO (accessed 2 March 2009). ╇ 3 Catalogue of the W. H. Cummings Collection in the Nanki Music Library (Tokyo, 1925), 7.

LAWES.indb 316

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 1: source descriptions

317

covers bound in folio’; the catalogue also describes to the Trollap bookplate.4 According to the annotated copy of the sale catalogue in the Library of Congress, Washington, DC, the manuscript was purchased by ‘Canning’ who appears to have been responsible for purchasing most of the items listed in the 1925 Nanki catalogue. Whether Mus. 70 was erroneously included in the catalogue or whether it subsequently passed out of the collection is unclear. Indeed, the 1925 catalogue may have been partly compiled from the sale catalogue, without first-hand examination of the collection, leading to the erroneous inclusion of Mus. 70.5 Some time after the Cummings sale the Vienna-born rare book dealer Herbert Reichner, who lived in New York and Massachusetts, purchased the manuscript.6 William Inglis Morse (1874–1952) presented it to the Houghton Library in 1950.7

Inventory [See table on following page.]

╇ 4 Catalogue of the Famous Musical Library of Books, Manuscripts, Autograph Letters, Musical

Scores, etc. the property of the late W. H. Cummings (Sotheby’s, 17–24 May 1917), 93. I am grateful to Susan Clermont, Senior Music Specialist (Music Division), Library of Congress (Washington, DC) for providing me with a copy of the annotated sale catalogue (US-Wc, ML 138.C9 (Case)). ╇ 5 No reference is made to the manuscript in Nanki Ongaku Bunko Tokubetsu KōKai (Tokyo, 1967), or in Catalogue of Rare Books and Notes: the Ohki Collection, Nanki Music Library (Tokyo, 1970). ╇ 6 See Music Manuscripts at Harvard, ed. Wolff, 96; I have been unable to trace Reichner’s ownerÂ�ship of the manuscript. ╇ 7 A note in pencil on the inside flyleaf reads ‘Harvard College Library gift of William Inglis Morse April 7. 1950’↜.

LAWES.indb 317

19/03/2010 10:58

318

the consort music of william lawes

Inventory Fols*

No.

Title

Composer

Key

Tuning

VdGS

[Hand H] [Blank flyleaves, including Cummings annotations]

1r–3v 4r

[Unused]

4v

1a

[Corant]

[Anon.]

D

fhfhf

{555}

4v

2

[Alman]

[Anon.]

d

fhfhf

{556}

5r

3

[Aire]

[Anon.]

D

fhfhf

{557}

5r

4

[Alman]

[Anon.]

d

fhfhf

{558}

5v

5

[Alman]

[Anon.]

d

fhfhf

{559}

6r

6

‘The Trumpet’

[Anon.]

D

fhfhf

{560}

6v

7

‘Fubeters Ayre’ [Anon.]

g

fhfhf

{561}

7r

8

‘corant’

[Anon.]

G

fhfhf

{562}

7v–11r

[Unused]

[Autograph portion 1] 11v

1

‘Pauen’

‘Willawes’

d

fhfhf

{563}†

12r

2

‘Alman’

‘W Lawes’

d

fhfhf

{564}†

12v

3

‘Corant’

‘Willawes’

d

fhfhf

{565}

13r

4

‘Alman’

‘Willawes’

d

fhfhf

{566}

13v–14r

5, 6

‘Fancy’

‘Willawes’

G

fhfhf

{567}†

14v

7

‘Humour’

‘Willawes’

G

fhfhf

{568}†

8

‘Sarabd’

[Lawes]

D

fhfhf

{569}†

fhfhf

{570}

fhfhf

{571}

g

fhfhf

{572}

15r 15v

9

‘Alman’

‘Willawes’

16r

10

‘Corant’

[Lawes]

16v

11

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

B↜b B↜b

[Autograph portion 2] 17r

‘Corant’

‘Wjllawes’

G

defhf

{443}‡

17v

‘Pauen’

‘Wjllawes’

G

defhf

{441}‡

18r

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

G

defhf

{448}‡

18v

‘Sarabd’

‘Wllawes’

G

defhf

{444}‡

18v–19r

‘Pauen’

‘Wjllawes’

d

fedfh

{521}‡

‘Aire’

‘Wjllawes’

d

fedfh

{522}

19v 19v

‘Toy’

‘Wjllawes’

d

fedfh

{523}

20r

‘Thump’

‘Wjllawes’

d

fedfh

{527}‡

20v–30v

[Unused]

31r–31v

[Blank flyleaf]

↜* Foliation applies only within the vellum covers. ↜† Concordances with GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7. ‡ Concordances with GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3. a Also numbered ‘13’ by Hand H, in the same ink as the revisions: seems to relate to the time

signature.

LAWES.indb 318

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 2

Index of Watermarks

T

his index is designed for use with IMCCM, the standard reference text for watermarks in English music manuscripts.1 Watermark types are those given in IMCCM. The specific numbering of individual marks (Arabic numerals) relates only to this study (and not to the numberings in IMCCM);2 pairs are indicated by the letters ‘a’ and ‘b’↜. For example, ‘Pot I/1/b’ indicates that the mark is: of the IMCCM ‘Pot I’ type; here catalogued as no.â•‹1 of that type (with no chronological implications); the second of an identified pair. Heawood nos. refer to E. Heawood, Watermarks, mainly of the 17th and 18th Centuries (Hilversum, 1950).

watermark measurement keys all measuring profiles are taken from IMCCM, vols 1 and 2

arms of austria and burgundy↜3 A P Q X Y

width of main shield between upper corners distance from upper corner to chain line, eagle side distance from upper corner to chain line, tower side distance from lower corner to chain line, eagle side distance from lower corner to chain line, tower side

arms of france and navarre i↜4 A overall height of mark B, C distances from left and right extremities of quatrefoil at top to next chain line outwards: D, E height and width of shield bearing fleurs-de-lys F, G height and width of cross at bottom of mark H, J distances from left and right extremities of cross at bottom of mark to next chain lines outwards ╇ 1 IMCCM gives an excellent bibliography for the study of watermarks etc.;

ThompsonEMM is essential reading for this topic.

╇ 2 This system has been adopted from IMCCM but is not intended to collate with it

except in identifying overall types of marks: e.g. except for broad similarities, ‘Pot I/1/a’ here has no relationship to the mark of the same name given in IMCCM1, 298.

╇ 3 See IMCCM2, 295–7. ╇ 4 See IMCCM1, 258–60.

LAWES.indb 319

19/03/2010 10:58

320

the consort music of william lawes

circles 5 a overall height B overall width of mark (all circles are approximately equal) C, D distances between left- and right-hand extremities of circle and adjacent chain lines

grapes 6 A B C, D E, F

number of rows of circles maximum number of circles in one row height and width of the ‘grapes’ pattern, excluding the stem distances between left- and right-hand extremities of the ‘grapes’ pattern and the adjacent chain lines

peacock 7 A, B width and height of circle C, D distances between left- and right-hand extremities of circle and adjacent chain line

pillars ii 8 A number of rows of circles in ‘grapes’ pattern B maximum number of circles in one row C, D height and width of the ‘grapes’ pattern E, F height of left and right pillars G, H distances between the left and right pillars and the adjacent chain lines; taken from the outer edge of the main part of the pillar at its closest point to the chain line. Obviously distorted sections are disregarded

pot i 9 A overall height of mark B, C maximum external and internal width of crescent D, E distances between outermost left- and right-hand points on crescent and adjacent chain lines F maximum width of pot body G, H distances between outermost left- and right-hand point of the pot body and the adjacent chain lines J height of base of pot along imaginary centre-line ╇ 5 Not included in IMCCM; for illustration of the general type of watermark, see

Heawood 317. I am grateful to Robert Thompson for his advice on this watermark.

╇ 6 IMCCM1, 284–5. ╇ 7 IMCCM1, 290–1. ╇ 8 IMCCM1, 294–5. ╇ 9 IMCCM1, 297–304.

LAWES.indb 320

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 2: index of watermarks

321

ruled papers Watermark

MS

Measurements from folios/ pages

Chains

Measurements Lettering Comments

Basilisk

17798

France and Navarre I/1/a

40658

fol.â•‹30r/ii

22.5/24 along horizontal centre-line of cross

A: 91.5; B: 4; C: 12; D: 18; E: 29; F: 10.5; G: 10.5; H: 3.5; J: 10

DP

France and Navarre I/1/b

40658

fol.â•‹44r/iii

24/24 along horizontal centre-line of cross

A: 92 (along mid-line); B: 14; C: 1; D: 16; E: 28; F: 9.5; G: 10; H: 10; J: 4

DP

‘Left-hand chain passes through lefthand decoration. Centre chain runs just left of centre of right-hand shield; quatrefoil and cross entirely to left of chain line’ (IMCCM1, 260)

Grapes 1/a

B.2–3

B.3, p. 7

37/38 below

A: 10; B: 7; C: 37; D: 30; E: +2; F: 8

AR

Mark intersects with chain line on left side – and hangs over it by approx. 2â•‹mm

Grapes 1/b

B.2–3

B.2, p. 17

36 above

A: 10; B: 7; C: 38; D: 31; E: 2; F: 2.5

AR

Peacock 1/a

D.238–40

D.238, fol.â•‹64r

28/29 above

Obscured by position; circle between chain line

Peacock 1/b

D.238–40

D.239, fol.â•‹20r

27/28 above

Obscured by position; circle intersects with chain lines

Peacock 2/a

D.229

fol.â•‹46r

26.5/28 above A: 54; B: 53; C: 0; D: 0

Peacock 2/b

D.229

fol.â•‹43r

28/27 above

A: 52; B: 53; C: 2; D: 2

Peacock 3

17798

fol.â•‹4r

28/28 below

A: 51; B: not possible; C: 2; D: 1

Peacock 4/a

31432

fol.â•‹10r

28.5/28 below A: 52; B: 53; C: 2; D: 1

LAWES.indb 321

30/30/29/29 below

Obscured by position

Fol.â•‹65r is given twice; here silently amended to fol.â•‹66r (applies to following folios also).

19/03/2010 10:58

322

the consort music of william lawes

Watermark

MS

Measurements from folios/ pages

Chains

Measurements Lettering Comments

Peacock 4/b

31432

fol.â•‹12r

27/28 below

A: 54; B: 52.5; C: 0; D: 0

Pot I/2/a

Mus. 70

fol.â•‹9v

21/20/21.5 above

A: 69 B: 9 C: 4 D: 5 E: 6 F: 18.5 G: 0 H: 1 J: 9

Pot I/2/b

Mus. 70

fol.â•‹15v

23.5/20/21.5 A: 66 B: 11 C: 6 D: 5 E: 3 F: 16 above G: 4 H: 0 J: 10

(7-lobe)† Pot Mus. 70 I/3/a

fol.â•‹29v

20/21/20 above

A: 71 B: 10 C: 5 D: 6 E: 5 F: 17 G: 3.5 H: 0 J: 7

PO

Pot base distorted: leans left to right; variance of approx. 1â•‹mm at extremities

(7-lobe)† Pot Mus. 70 I/3/b

fol.â•‹28v

21/21/19 below

A: 71 B: 10 C: 5 D: 7.5 E: 3 F: 18 G: 3 H: –1 [i.e. goes over c-l; 19 to next c-l] J: 10

PO‡

Pot base distorted; leans left to right

ET over O PO(?)

† The watermark has seven rather than the usual five lobes; measurements are as for Pot I. ‡ The PO is surmounting a short straight line (going towards the imaginary middle of the base (the line and the PO are separated by a horizontal line).

LAWES.indb 322

19/03/2010 10:58

appendix 2: index of watermarks

323

flyleaf papers Watermark

MS

Measurements from folios/ pages

Chains

Measurements

Arms of Austria and Burgundy

B.2–3

B.2, p. iii

28/27/25 above

A: 61; P: 3; Q: 14; X: 3; Y: 13.5

Arms of France and Navarre I/2

D.229

fol.â•‹1r

Circles

17798

Grapes 2 D.238–40 [surmounted by crown with Fleur-de-lys]

Pillars II/1

Pot I/1

Pot I/2/a

Mus. 70

20/18.5/19 A: 79; B, C: n/a; above D: 19; E: 13; F: 13; G: 12.5; H: 2.5; J: 3

fol.â•‹([i verso] 26/25.5 above A: 85; B: 24; C: (bottom); 14; D: 14.5 fol.â•‹[ii recto] (top))

Lettering Comments

AR

CC(?) Middle of mark obscured. See Heawood 266 for an example of the type of watermark. Incomplete; obscured by position.

Fleur-de-lys: D.240, fol.â•‹1r, 2r (top only); D.239, fol.â•‹1r. Grapes: D.238, fol.â•‹92v fol.â•‹3v

21.5/19.5/18.5 A: 5† B: 4 C: 16 above D: 14 E: 31.5 F: 30 G: 8‡ H: 4‡

ML(?) Distorted on right IVL(?) side

31432 Original flyleaf, 20/19.5/20 A: 67; B: 11; C: verso side above 6; D: 6.5; E: 2.5; F: 16; G: 3; H: 1; J: 9.5 Mus. 70

fol.â•‹31v

21/20/21.5 A: 69 B: 9 C: 4 above D: 5 E: 6 F: 18.5 G: 0 H: 1 J: 9

Slight distortion on right side of pot body ET over O

Also found on ruled folsâ•‹9v, 10v, 11v

† Grapes pattern is not symmetrical, no rows of two or one circles at the bottom. ‡ Disregarding circles outside pillars.

LAWES.indb 323

19/03/2010 10:58

Bibliography Place of publication is London, unless otherwise stated.

❧⚧ Books and Articles Andrewes, R., ‘Hidden Treasure in Gloucester?’↜, VdGS Bulletin 28 (January 1968), 13–14 Ashbee, A. ‘Instrumental Music from the Library of John Browne (1608–1691), Clerk of the Parliaments’↜, MLâ•‹58 (1977), 43–59 ‘John Jenkins, 1592–1678, and the Lyra Viol’↜, MTâ•‹119 (1978), 840–3 —— ↜ (ed.), Records of English Court Music, 9â•‹vols (Aldershot, 1986–96) —— ↜ The Harmonious Musick of John Jenkins, vol.â•‹1: The Fantasias for Viols —— ↜ (Surbiton, 1992) —— ↜ ‘Jenkins’s Fantasias for Viols’↜, in A Viola da Gamba Miscellany: Proceedings of the International Viola da Gamba Symposium Utrecht 1991, ed. J. Boer and G. van Oorschot (Utrecht, 1994), 41–54 and P. Holman (eds), John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort —— ↜ Music (Oxford, 1996) and D. Lasocki, assisted by P. Holman and F. Kisby, A Biographical —— ↜ Dictionary of English Court Musicians, 1485–1714, 2 vols. (Aldershot, 1998) (ed.), William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work —— ↜ (Aldershot, 1998) ‘William Lawes and the “Lutes, Viols and Voices”↜’↜, in William Lawes (1602– —— ↜ 1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 1–10 —— ↜ R. Thompson and J. Wainwright (compilers), The Viola da Gamba Society Index of Manuscripts Containing Consort Music, 2â•‹vols (Aldershot, 2001, 2008) —— ↜ ‘Manuscripts of Consort Music in London, c.â•‹1600–1625: Some Observations’↜, VdGSJâ•‹1 (2007), 1–19 The Harmonious Musick of John Jenkins, vol.â•‹2: Suites, Airs and Vocal Music —— ↜ (forthcoming) Aubrey, J., John Aubrey on Education, ed. J.â•‹E. Stephens (1972) Austern, L., Music in English Children’s Drama of the Later Renaissance (Philadelphia, 1992) Aylmer, G. The State’s Servants: The Civil Service of the English Republic, 1649–1660 (1973) The King’s Servants: The Civil Service of Charles I, 1625–1642 (2/1974) —— ↜ Bacon, F., Sylva Sylvarum (1627)

LAWES.indb 324

19/03/2010 10:58

bibliography

325

Baldwin, D., The Chapel Royal, Ancient and Modern (1990) Billinge, M., and B. Shaljean, ‘The Dalway or Fitzgerald Harp (1621)’↜, EMâ•‹15 (1987), 175–87 Blacker, C.â•‹V.â•‹R., and D. Pinto, ‘Desperately Seeking William: Portraits of the Lawes Brothers in Context’↜, EMâ•‹37 (2009), 157–74 Bray, R. (ed.), Music in Britain: The Sixteenth Century (Oxford, 1995) Buch, D., ‘On the Authorship of William Lawes’s Suite for Two Lutes’↜, JLSAâ•‹16 (1983), 12–14 Burch, C.â•‹E.â•‹C., Minstrels and Players in Southampton, 1428–1635 (Southampton, 1969) Burney, C., A General History of Music (1776–89), ed. F. Mercer (1935; r/1957) Butler, C., The Principles of Musick (1636) Butler, M., The Stuart Court Masque and Political Culture (Cambridge, 2008) Butt, J., ‘Towards a Genealogy of the Keyboard Concerto’↜, in The Keyboard in Baroque Europe, ed. C. Hogwood (Cambridge, 2003), 93–110 Carew, T., Poems (1640) Cartwright, W., Comedies, Tragi-Comedies, with Other Poems (1651) Catalogue of Rare Books and Notes: The Ohki Collection, Nanki Music Library (Tokyo, 1970) Catalogue of the Famous Musical Library of Books, Manuscripts, Autograph Letters, Musical Scores, etc. the property of the late W.â•‹H. Cummings (Sotheby’s, 17–24 May 1917) Catalogue of the W.â•‹H. Cummings Collection in the Nanki Music Library (Tokyo, 1925) Charteris, R., ‘Jacobean Musicians at Hatfield House, 1605–1613’↜, RMARCâ•‹12 (1974), 115–36 —— ↜ ‘The Huntingdon Library Part Books, Ellesmere MSS ELâ•‹25a 46–51’↜, HLQâ•‹50 (1987), 59–84 —— ↜ ‘A Rediscovered Manuscript Source with Some Previously Unknown Works by John Jenkins, William Lawes and Benjamin Rogers’↜, Chelysâ•‹22 (1993), 3–29 Clark, J.â•‹B., ‘A Re-emerged Seventeenth-Century Organ Accompaniment Book’↜, MLâ•‹47 (1966), 149–52 Collins, F. (ed.), Register of the Freemen of the City of York from the City Records, II: 1559–1759 (Durham, 1900) Conner, T., ‘The Groundbreaking Treatise of Christopher Simpson’↜, JVdGSAâ•‹36 (1999), 5–39 Coover, J. (ed.), Music at Auction: Puttick and Simpson (of London), 1794–1971 (Warren, MI, 1988) Coprario, J., Giovanni Coperario: Rules How to Compose (c.â•‹1610), facsimile ed. M. Bukofzer (Los Angeles, 1952)

LAWES.indb 325

19/03/2010 10:58

326

the consort music of william lawes

Coral, L., ‘A John Playford Advertisement’↜, RMARCâ•‹5 (1965), 1–12 —— ↜ ‘Music in English Auction Sales, 1676–1750’ (PhD diss., University of London, 1974) Coward, B., The Stuart Age: England, 1603–1714 (3/2003) Crum, M., ‘Notes on the Texts of William Lawes’s Songs in B.â•‹M. MS. Add. 31432’↜, The Library, 5th series, 9 (1954), 122–7 —— ↜ ‘Early Lists of the Oxford Music School Collection’↜, MLâ•‹48 (1967), 23–34 —— ↜ ‘The Consort Music from Kirtling, Bought for the Oxford Music School from Anthony Wood, 1667’↜, Chelysâ•‹4 (1972), 3–10 —— ↜ The Oxford Music School Collection at the Bodleian Library, Oxford: A Guide and Index to the Harvester Microfilm Collection (Brighton, 1979) Cuddy, N., ‘The Revival of the Entourage: The Bedchamber of James 1, 1603–1625’↜, in The English Court, from the Wars of the Roses to the Civil War, ed. D. Starkey (1987), 173–225 —— ↜ ‘Reinventing a Monarchy: The Changing Structure and Political Function of the Stuart Court, 1603–88’↜, in The Stuart Courts, ed. E. Cruickshanks (Stroud, 2000), 59–85 Cunningham, J., ‘A Tale of Two Harps: Issues Arising from Recordings of William Lawes’s Harp Consorts’↜, Early Music Performer 21 (2007), 13–24 —— ↜ ‘Music for the Privy Chamber: Studies in the Consort Music of William Lawes (1602–45)’ (PhD diss., University of Leeds, 2007) —— ↜ ‘↜“Let Them be Lusty, Smart-Speaking Viols”: William Lawes and the Lyra Viol Trio’↜, JVdGSAâ•‹43 (2006; published 2008), 32–68 —— ↜ ‘Review: William Lawes: The Harp Consorts, ed. J. Achtman, et al.↜’↜, VdGSJâ•‹2 (2008), 84–98 —— ↜ ‘↜“Some Consorts of Instruments are sweeter than others”: Further Light on the Harp of William Lawes’s Harp Consorts’↜, GSJâ•‹61 (2008), 147–76 —— ↜ ‘↜“Irish harpers are excellent, and their solemn music is much liked of strangers”: The Irish Harp in Non-Irish Contexts in the Seventeenth Century’↜, in Music, Ireland and the Seventeenth Century, ed. B. Boydell and K. Houston, IMSâ•‹10 (Dublin, 2009), 62–80 —— ↜ ‘Lyra Viol Ecclesiastica: A Neglected Manuscript Source in Archbishop Marsh’s Library, Dublin’↜, VdGSJ 3 (2009), 1–54 (available at http://www.vdgs. org.uk/files/VdGSJournal/Vol-03-1.pdf) —— ↜ ‘A Meeting of Amateur and Professional: Playford’s “Compendious Collection” of Two-Part Airs, Court-Ayres (1655)’↜, in Concepts of Creativity in Seventeenth-Century England, ed. R. Herissone (forthcoming) Cutts, J., ‘British Museum Additional MS. 31432 William Lawes’s Writing for the Theatre and the Court’↜, The Library, 5th series, 7 (1952), 225–34 —— ↜ ‘Drexel Manuscript 4041’↜, Musica Disciplinaâ•‹18 (1964), 151–201

LAWES.indb 326

19/03/2010 10:58

bibliography

327

Cyr, M., ‘Ornamentation in English Lyra Viol Music’↜, Part I, JVdGSAâ•‹34 (1997), 48–66, and Part II, JVdGSA, 35 (1998), 16–34 Dart, T., ‘Jacobean Consort Music’↜, PRMAâ•‹81 (1954–5), 63–75 Davenport, M., ‘The Dances and Aires of William Lawes (1602–1645): Context and Style’ (PhD diss., University of Colorado, 2001) Dawson, G., and L. Kennedy-Skipton, Elizabethan Handwriting, 1500–1650 (New York, 1966) Dodd, G., ‘William Lawes: Royall Consort Suite No.â•‹9 in F’↜, Chelysâ•‹6 (1975–6), 4–9 —— ↜ ‘Alfonso Ferrabosco II – The Art of the Fantasy’↜, Chelysâ•‹7 (1977), 47–53 —— ↜ (compiler), Viola da Gamba Society of Great Britain: Thematic Index of Music for Viols, with revisions and additions by A. Ashbee (2/2004) Donnington, R., ‘James Talbot’s Manuscript (Christ Church Library Music MSâ•‹1187), Part II: Bowed Strings’↜, GSJâ•‹3 (1950), 27–45 Eighteenth Century Collections Online (www.galenet.galengroup.com) Erlebach, R., ‘William Lawes and His String Music’↜, PRMAâ•‹59 (1932–3), 103–19 Field, C.â•‹D.â•‹S., ‘The English Consort Suite of the Seventeenth Century’ (PhD diss., New College, Oxford, 1970) —— ↜ ‘Review: Coprario: Fantasia-Suites, ed. R. Charteris’↜, MLâ•‹66 (1985), 65–7 —— ↜ ‘Consort Music I: Up to 1660’↜, in Music in Britain: The Seventeenth Century, ed. I. Spink (Oxford, 1992), 197–244 ‘Jenkins and the Cosmography of Harmony’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: —— ↜ Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 1–74 —— ↜ ‘Rehabilitating William Lawes’↜, EMâ•‹25 (1997), 149–52 —— ↜ ‘Formality and Rhetoric in English Fantasia-Suites’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 197–249 —— ↜ ‘Stephen Bing’s Copies of Coprario Fantasia-Suites’↜, EMâ•‹27 (1999), 311–17 —— ↜ ‘The Composer’s Workshop: Revisions in the Consort Music of Alfonso Ferrabosco the Younger’↜, Chelysâ•‹27 (1999), 1–39 Finet, J., Finetti Philoxenis: Som Choice Observations of Sr. John Finett (1656) Foot, M., ‘Some Bindings for Charles I’↜, in Studies in Seventeenth-Century English Literature, History and Bibliography: Festschrift for Professor T.â•‹A. Birrell on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday, ed. G.â•‹A.â•‹M. Janssens and F.â•‹G.â•‹A.â•‹M. Aarts (Amsterdam, 1984), 95–106 Ford, R., ‘The Filmer Manuscripts: A Handlist’↜, Notes 34 (1978), 814–25 ‘Osborn 515: A Guardbook of Restoration Instrumental Music’↜, FAMâ•‹30 —— ↜ (1983), 174–83 ‘Minor Canons at Canterbury Cathedral: The Gostlings and their Colleagues’ —— ↜ (PhD diss., University of California, Berkeley, 1984)

LAWES.indb 327

19/03/2010 10:58

328

the consort music of william lawes

Fortune, N., with I. Fenlon, ‘Music Manuscripts of John Browne (1608–91), and from Stanford Hall, Leicestershire’↜, in Source Materials and the Interpretation of Music: A Memorial Volume to Thurston Dart, ed. I. Bent (1981), 155–68 Freeman-Attwood, J., ‘Baroque Distractions: 17th-Century English Instrumental Music is of a Quality We Have Yet to Appreciate’↜, MTâ•‹133 (1992), 174–8 Fuller, T., A History of the Worthies of England (1662/r); ed. P. Nuttall (1840/r) Fulton, C.â•‹A., ‘For the Harpe, Base Violl, Violin and Theorbo: The Consorts of William Lawes (1602–1645)’↜, AHJâ•‹10 (1985), 15–20 Furnas, P., ‘The Manchester Gamba Book: A Primary Source of Ornaments for the Lyra Viol’ (PhD diss., Stanford University, 1978) Grove Music Online, ed. L. Macy (www.grovemusic.com) Harris, C., ‘The Viol Lyra-Way’↜, Chelysâ•‹4 (1972), 17–21 Hawkins, J., A General History of the Science and Practice of Music, 2 vols (1776; r/1853 and 1963) Heawood, E., Watermarks, Mainly of the 17th and 18th Centuries (Hilversum, 1950) Herissone, R., ‘↜“Fowle Â�Originalls” and “Fayre Writeing”: Reconsidering Purcell’s Compositional Process’↜, Journal of Musicology 23 (2006), 569–619 —— ↜ ‘To fill, forbear, or adorne’: The Organ Accompaniment of Restoration Sacred Music (Aldershot, 2006) Herrick, R., Hesperides (1648) Holman, P., ‘The Harp in Stuart England: New Light on William Lawes’s Harp Consorts’↜, EMâ•‹15 (1987), 188–203 —— ↜ ‘Music for the Stage I: Before the Civil War’↜, in Music in Britain: The Seventeenth Century, ed. I. Spink (Oxford, 1992), 282–305 —— ↜ Henry Purcell (Oxford, 1994) —— ↜ Four and Twenty Fiddlers: The Violin at the English Court, 1540–1690 (Oxford, 2/1995) —— ↜ ‘↜“Evenly, Softly, and Sweetly Acchording to All”: The Organ Accompaniment of English Consort Music’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 353–82 —— ↜ ‘Review: P. Walls, Music in the English Courtly Masque, 1604–1640’↜, EMHâ•‹16 (1997), 328–35 —— ↜ Dowland: Lachrimae (1604), Cambridge Music Handbooks (Cambridge, 1999) —— ↜ Life after Death: The Viola da Gamba in Britain from Purcell to Dolmetsch (forthcoming) Houck, S., ‘John Playford and the English Musical Market’↜, in ‘Noyses, sounds, and sweet aires’: Music in Early Modern England, ed. J.â•‹A. Owens (Washington, DC, 2006), 48–61

LAWES.indb 328

19/03/2010 10:58

bibliography

329

Hughes-Hughes, A., Catalogue of Manuscript Music in the British Museum, 3 vols (1906–9; r/1964–6) Hulse, L., ‘The Musical Patronage of Robert Cecil, First Earl of Salisbury (1563– 1612)’↜, JRMAâ•‹116 (1991), 24–40 Johnson, J.â•‹T., ‘The English Fantasia-Suite, c.â•‹1620–1660’ (PhD diss., University of California, Berkeley, 1971) Jonson, B., Ben Jonson, ed. C.â•‹H. Herford and P. and E. Simpson, 11 vols (Oxford, 1925–62) Jorgens, E. (ed.), English Song, 1600–1675: Facsimiles of Twenty-Six Manuscripts and an Edition of the Texts, 12 vols (1986–9) Krummel, D.â•‹W., English Music Printing, 1553–1700 (1975) Lasocki, D., ‘Professional Recorder Players in England, 1540–1740’ (PhD diss., University of Iowa, 1983) —— ↜ ‘The Recorder Consort at the English Court, 1540–1673’↜, The American Recorder 25 (1984), 91–100, 131–5 Lefkowitz, M., ‘New Facts concerning William Lawes and the Caroline Masque’↜, MLâ•‹40 (1959), 324–33 —— ↜ William Lawes (1960) —— ↜ ‘The Longleat Papers of Bulstrode Whitelocke: New Light on Shirley’s “Triumph of Peace”↜’↜, JAMSâ•‹18 (1965), 42–60 —— ↜ ‘Lawes, William’↜, New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians, ed. S. Sadie (1980), x.â•‹558–66 Literature, Music and Art: The Annotated Sale Catalogues of Puttick and Simpson, 1846–1870, Parts 1–4 [microfilm series] (Reading, 1989–90) Loomie, A. (ed.), The Ceremonies of Charles I: The Note Books of John Finnet, 1628–1641 (New York, 1987) Love, H., The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in SeventeenthCentury England (Oxford, 1993) Mace, T., Musick’s Monument (1676) Marvell, A., Miscellaneous Poems (1681) McLean, H., ‘Blow and Purcell in Japan’↜, MTâ•‹53 (1963), 702–5 Munby, L.â•‹M., How Much is that Worth? (Salisbury, 2/1996) Nanki Ongaku Bunko Tokubetsu KōKai (Tokyo, 1967) Neighbour, O., The Consort and Keyboard Music of William Byrd (Berkeley, CA, 1978) Nixon, S., ‘The Sources of Musical Settings of Thomas Carew’s Poetry’↜, RESâ•‹49 (1998), 424–60 Nordstrom, L., ‘The English Lute Duet and Consort Lesson’↜, LSJâ•‹18 (1976), 5–22 North, R., Roger North on Music, ed. J. Wilson (1959) Otterstedt, A., Die englische Lyra-Viol: Instrument und Technik (Kassel, 1989)

LAWES.indb 329

19/03/2010 10:58

330

the consort music of william lawes

—— ↜ ‘Lawes’s Division Viol: Pedigree of an Instrument’↜, trans. H. Reiners in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 307–39 Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, The, ed. L. Goldman (www.oxforddnb.com) Oxford English Dictionary, The (Oxford, 2/1989) Owens, J.â•‹A., Composers at Work: The Craft of Musical Composition, 1450–1600 (Oxford, 1997) Philipps, G.â•‹A., ‘Crown Musical Patronage from Elizabeth to Charles I’↜, MLâ•‹58 (1977), 29–42 Pick, S., Festum Voluptatis (1639) Pinto, D., ‘William Lawes’ Consort Suites for the Viols, and the Autograph Sources’↜, Chelysâ•‹4 (1972), 11–16 —— ↜ ‘William Lawes’ Music for Viol Consort’↜, EMâ•‹6 (1978), 12–24 —— ↜ ‘The Fantasy Manner: The Seventeenth-Century Context’↜, Chelysâ•‹10 (1981), 17–28 —— ↜ ‘William Lawes at the Siege of York, 1644’↜, MTâ•‹127 (1986), 579–83 —— ↜ ‘The Music of the Hattons’↜, RMARCâ•‹23 (1990), 79–108 —— ↜ ‘Thomas Tomkins and a Copyist Associated with Him’↜, MLâ•‹72 (1991), 517–18 —— ↜ ‘Music at Court: Remarks on the Performance of William Lawes’ Works for Viols’↜, in A Viola da Gamba Miscellany: Proceedings of the International Viola da Gamba Symposium Utrecht 1991, ed. J. Boer and G. van Oorschot (Utrecht, 1994), 27–40 —— ↜ ‘Review: John Jenkins, Lyra Consorts, ed. F. Traficante’↜, MLâ•‹75 (1994), 129–31 —— ↜ For ye Violls: The Consort and Dance Music of William Lawes (Richmond, 1995) —— ↜ ‘New Lamps for Old: The Versions of the Royall Consort’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 251–82 —— ↜ ‘The True Christmas: Carols at the Court of Charles I’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 97–120 —— ↜ ‘Pious Pleasures in Early Stuart London’↜, RMARCâ•‹41 (2008), 1–24 Playford, H., ‘A Curious Collection of Musick-Books …’ (1690), GB-Lbl, Harl. 5936, nos.â•‹419–20 Poulton, D., John Dowland (2/1982) Richards, J., ‘A Study of Music for Bass Viol Written in England in the Seventeenth Century’ (BLitt diss., University of Oxford, 1961) Rimbault, E. (ed.), The Old Cheque-Book or Book of Remembrance of the Chapel Royal from 1561 to 1744 (1872; r/1966)

LAWES.indb 330

19/03/2010 10:58

bibliography

331

Rimmer, J., ‘James Talbot’s Manuscript (Christ Church Library Music MSâ•‹1187): VI. Harps’↜, GSJâ•‹16 (1963), 63–72 ‘The Morphology of the Irish Harp’↜, GSJâ•‹17 (1964), 39–49 —— ↜ Ring, L., ‘A Preliminary Enquiry into the Continuo Parts of William Lawes for Organ, Harp and Theorbo’ (MA diss., University of Nottingham, 1972) —— ↜ ‘The Harp for Lawes’↜, EMâ•‹15 (1987), 589–90 —— ↜ ‘Wednesday, 24 September, 1645 – The Death of William Lawes during the Battle of Rowton Heath at the Siege of Chester’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 155–74 Robinson, A., ‘↜“Choice Psalmes”: A Brother’s Memorial’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 175–98 Robson, T., ‘The Irish Harp in Art Music, c.â•‹1550–c.â•‹1650’ (PhD diss., Durham University, 1997) Sabol, A., ‘New Documents on Shirley’s Masque “The Triumph of Peace”↜’↜, MLâ•‹47 (1966), 10–26 Sacks, D., The Alphabet (2003) Salmon, T., A Proposal to Perform Musick in Perfect Mathematical Proportions (1688) Sawyer, J., ‘Music for Two and Three Lyra-Viols’↜, JCAUSMâ•‹1 (1971), 71–96 —— ↜ ‘An Anthology of Lyra Viol Music in Oxford, Bodleian Library, Manuscripts Music School d.â•‹245–7’ (PhD diss., University of Toronto, 1972) Sayce, L., ‘Continuo Lutes in 17th and 18th-Century England’↜, EMâ•‹23 (1995), 667–84. Shackleton, R., Fine Bindings 1500–1700 from Oxford Libraries (Oxford, 1968) Sharpe, K., ‘The Image of Virtue: The Court and Household of Charles I, 1625–42’↜, in The English Court, from the Wars of the Roses to the Civil War, ed. D. Starkey (1987), 226–60 Shaw, W., The Succession of Organists of the Chapel Royal and the Cathedrals of England and Wales from c.â•‹1538 (Oxford, 1991) Shay, R., and R. Thompson, Purcell Manuscripts: The Principal Musical Sources (Cambridge, 2000) Shirley, J., Poems (1646) —— ↜ The Triumph of Beauty (1646) Slack, P., The Impact of Plague in Tudor and Stuart England (1985; r/Oxford, 1990) Slaughter, T. (ed.), Ideology and Politics on the Eve of Restoration: Newcastle’s Advice to Charles II (Philadelphia, 1984) Smith, W.â•‹C., ‘Playford: Some Hitherto Unnoticed Catalogues of Early Music’↜, MTâ•‹67 (1926), 636–39, 701–4

LAWES.indb 331

19/03/2010 10:58

332

the consort music of william lawes

Smuts, M., Court Culture and the Origins of a Royalist Tradition in Early Stuart England (Philadelphia, 1987; r/1999) Spink, I., ‘Correspondence: William Lawes’↜, MLâ•‹41 (1960), 304–5 —— ↜ ‘The Musicians of Queen Henrietta-Maria: Some Notes and References in the English State Papers’↜, AcMâ•‹36 (1964), 177–82 —— ↜ (ed.), Music in Britain: The Seventeenth Century (Oxford, 1992) —— ↜ ‘Review: D. Pinto, For the Violls’↜, MLâ•‹79 (1998), 108–9 —— ↜ Henry Lawes: Cavalier Songwriter (Oxford, 2000) Spring, M., ‘The Lady Margaret Wemyss Manuscript’↜, LSJâ•‹27 (1987), 5–30 —— ↜ The Lute in Britain: A History of the Instrument and its Music (Oxford, 2001) Starkey, D. (ed.), The English Court, From the Wars of the Roses to the Civil War (1987) Stephens, J. (ed.), Aubrey on Education: A Hitherto Unpublished Manuscript by the Author of Brief Lives (1972) Stolzfus, I., ‘The Lyra Viol in Consort: An Example from Uppsala, Universitetsbiblioteket Imhs 4:3’↜, JVdGSAâ•‹17 (1980), 47–59 Strong, R., Henry, Prince of Wales and England’s Lost Renaissance (1986) Suckling, J., Fragmenta Aurea (1646) Tarling, J., The Weapons of Rhetoric: A Guide for Musicians and Audiences (St Albans, 2004) Thompson, R., ‘English Music Manuscripts and the Fine Paper Trade, 1648–1688’ (PhD diss., King’s College, London, 1988) —— ↜ ‘Paper in English Music Manuscripts: 1620–1645’↜, in William Lawes (1602– 1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 143–54 Thurley, S., Whitehall Palace: An Architectural History of the Royal Apartments, 1240–1698 (1999) —— ↜ Hampton Court: A Social and Architectural History (2003) Traficante, F., ‘The Mansell Lyra Viol Tablature’ (PhD diss., University of Pittsburgh, 1965) —— ↜ ‘Music for the Lyra Viol: The Printed Sources’↜, LSJâ•‹8 (1966), 7–24 —— ↜ ‘The Manchester Lyra Viol Tablature: Further Information’↜, JVdGSAâ•‹3 (1966), 52–5 —— ↜ ‘Lyra Viol Tunings: “All Ways have been Tryed to do It”↜’↜, AcMâ•‹42 (1970), 183–205, 256 —— ↜ ‘Music for Lyra Viol: Manuscript Sources’↜, Chelysâ•‹8 (1978–9), 4–22 —— ↜ ‘Lyra Viol Music? A Semantic Puzzle’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 325–51

LAWES.indb 332

19/03/2010 10:58

bibliography

333

Wainwright, J., ‘The Christ Church Viol-Consort Manuscripts Reconsidered: Christ Church, Oxford, Music Manuscripts 2, 397–408, and 436; 417–418 and 1080; and 432 and 612–613’↜, in John Jenkins and His Time: Studies in English Consort Music, ed. A. Ashbee and P. Holman (Oxford, 1996), 189–242 —— ↜ Musical Patronage in Seventeenth-Century England: Christopher, First Baron Hatton (1605–1670) (Aldershot, 1997) —— ↜ ‘The King’s Music’↜, in The Royal Image: Representations of Charles I, ed. T. Corns (Cambridge, 1999), 162–75 Waller, E., Poems (1645) Walls, P., ‘New Light on Songs by William Lawes and John Wilson’↜, MLâ•‹57 (1976), 55–64 —— ↜ ‘London, 1603–49’↜, in The Early Baroque Era, From the Late 16th Century to the 1660s, ed. C. Price (1993), 270–304 —— ↜ Music in the English Courtly Masque, 1604–1640 (Oxford, 1996) Willetts, P., ‘Sir Nicholas Le Strange and John Jenkins’↜, MLâ•‹42 (1961), 30–43 —— ↜ ‘Autograph Music by John Jenkins’↜, MLâ•‹48 (1967), 124–6 —— ↜ ‘John Barnard’s Collections of Viol and Vocal Music’↜, Chelysâ•‹20 (1991), 28–42 —— ↜ ‘Who was Richard Gibbon(s)?’↜, Chelysâ•‹31 (2003), 3–17 Wilson, C. (ed.), A New Way of Making Fowre Parts in Counterpoint by Thomas Campion and Rules how to Compose by Giovanni Coprario (Aldershot, 2003) Wilson, M., Nicholas Lanier: Master of the King’s Musick (Aldershot, 1994) Winternitz, E., Musical Instruments and their Symbolism in Western Art (1967) Wolff, B. (ed.), Music Manuscripts at Harvard (Cambridge, MA, 1992) Wood, J., ‘William Lawes’s Music for Plays’↜, in William Lawes (1602–1645): Essays on his Life, Times and Work, ed. A. Ashbee (Aldershot, 1998), 11–68 Woodfill, W., Musicians in English Society from Elizabeth to Charles I (Princeton, NJ, 1953; r/1969)

❧⚧ Music Banister, J., and T. Low (eds), New Ayres and Dialogues (1678) Brade, W., Newe ausserlesene Paduanen (Hamburg, 1609); Pavans, Galliards, and Canzonas, ed. B. Thomas (1982) Butler, H., Collected Works, ed. E. Philips, RRMBEâ•‹66 (Madison, WI, 1991) Coleman, C., The Six-Part Fantasias for Viol Consort, ed. J. Jeffrey, PRBVCSâ•‹46 (Albany, CA, 2003)

LAWES.indb 333

19/03/2010 10:58

334

the consort music of william lawes

Coprario, J., Fantasia-Suites, ed. R. Charteris, MBâ•‹46 (1980) Twelve Fantasias for Two Bass Viols and Organ and Eleven Pieces for Three —— ↜ Lyra Viols, ed. R. Charteris, RRMBEâ•‹41 (Madison, WI, 1982) The Two-, Three-, and Four-Part Consort Music, ed. R. Charteris (1993) —— ↜ Dowland, J., Collected Lute Music, ed. D. Poulton and B. Lam (3/1981) East, M., The Seventh Set of Bookes (1638) Ferrabosco, A. [II], Lessons for 1. 2. and. 3 viols (1609) —— ↜ Four-Part Fantasias for Viols, ed. A. Ashbee and B. Bellingham, MBâ•‹62 (1992) —— ↜ Consort Music of Five and Six Parts, ed. C.â•‹D.â•‹S. Field and D. Pinto, MBâ•‹81 (2003) Fitzwilliam Virginal Book, ed. J.â•‹A. Fuller Maitland and W. Barclay Squire (1899), corrected and revised by Blanche Winogron, 2â•‹vols (New York, 2/1979) Ford, T., Musicke of Sundrie Kindes (1607); facsimile ed. D. Greer, ELSâ•‹21 (Menston, 1971) —— ↜ Lyra Viol Duets, ed. O. Timofeyev, RRMBEâ•‹90 (Madison, WI, 1998) Gamble, J., Ayres and Dialogues (1659) Hilton, J., Catch that Catch Can (1652) Hume, T., The First Part of Ayres (1605); facsimile ed. F. Traficante, ELSâ•‹25 (Menston, 1969) —— ↜ Captaine Hume’s Poeticall Musicke (1607); facsimile ed. F. Traficante, ELSâ•‹25 (Menston, 1969) Ives, S., The Four-Part Dances (GB-Lbl, Add. MSSâ•‹18940–4), ed. P. Holman and J. Cunningham (Launton, 2008) Jacobean Consort Music, ed. T. Dart and W. Coates, MBâ•‹9 (2/1971) Jenkins, J., Consort Music of Four Parts, ed. A. Ashbee, MBâ•‹26 (1969; r/1975) —— ↜ Six Airs and Divisions For Two Bass Viols and Keyboard, ed. D. Beecher and B. Gillingham (Ottowa, 1979) —— ↜ The Lyra Viol Consorts, ed. F. Traficante, RRMBEâ•‹67–8 (Madison, WI, 1992) —— ↜ Seven Fancy-Air Division Suites for Two Trebles, Bass and Organ, ed. R. Warner, rev. A. Ashbee (1993) —— ↜ Fantasia-Suites: I, ed. A. Ashbee, MBâ•‹78 (2001) —— ↜ Fantasia-Suites: II, ed. A. Ashbee, MBâ•‹90 (forthcoming) Lawes, H., Choice Psalmes (1648) —— ↜ Second Book of Ayres and Dialogues (1655) Lawes, W., Four-Part Aire, ed. G. Dodd, VdGS Supplement 5 (1964; r/2003) —— ↜ Pavan and Two Aires a4 in G Minor, ed. L. Ring (1964) Select Consort Music, ed. M. Lefkowitz, MBâ•‹21 (2/1971) —— ↜ Consort Sets in Five & Six Parts, ed. D. Pinto (1979) —— ↜

LAWES.indb 334

19/03/2010 10:58

bibliography

335

—— ↜ Suite no.â•‹1 in C minor and Suite no.â•‹2 in C major For Two Treble and Two Bass Viols, ed. R. Taruskin (Ottawa, 1983) —— ↜ Fantasia-Suites, ed. D. Pinto, MBâ•‹60 (1991) The Royall Consort (‘Old’ and ‘New’ Versions), 3 vols, ed. D. Pinto (1995) —— ↜ Collected Vocal Music, 4 vols, ed. G. Callon, RRMBEâ•‹120–3 (Madison, WI, —— ↜ 2002) —— ↜ The Three-Part Consorts, ed. M. Davenport (Boulder, CO, 2002) —— ↜ Lessons for Three Lyra Viols, ed. R. Carter and J. Valencia (Kritzendorf, 2006) —— ↜ The Harp Consorts, ed. J. Achtman, et al., PRBVCSâ•‹62 (Albany, CA, 2007) Locke, M., Chamber Music I, II, ed. M. Tilmouth, MBâ•‹31, 32 (1971–2) Lupo, T., The Four-Part Consort Music, ed. R. Charteris and J. Jennings (Clifden, 1983) —— ↜ The Six-Part Consort Music, ed. R. Charteris (1993; r/1999) —— ↜ The Five-Part Consort Music, 2 vols, ed. R. Charteris (1997–8) Mesangeau, R., Œuvres, ed. A. Souris (Paris, 1971) Morley, T., The First Book of Consort Lessons, ed. S. Beck (New York, 1959) Music for Elizabethan Lutes, ed. J. Ward (Oxford, 1992) Music for Mixed Consort, ed. W. Edwards, MBâ•‹40 (1977) Peerson, M., Mottects or Grave Chamber Musique (1630) —— ↜ Private Musicke, or the First Booke of Ayres and Dialogues (1620); ed. R. Rastall, Antico Edition AB4 (Newton Abbot, 2008) —— ↜ Fantasias & Almaines for Six Viols, ed. V. Brookes, PRBVCSâ•‹39 (Albany, CA, c.â•‹2000) Playford, J., A Musicall Banquet (1651) —— ↜ Musicks Recreation on the Lyra Viol (1652) —— ↜ Court-Ayres (1655) —— ↜ Musicks Recreation on the Viol, Lyra-Way (1661) —— ↜ Courtly Masquing Ayres (1662) —— ↜ Musicks Handmaide (1663) —— ↜ A Brief Introduction to the Skill of Musick (1664–83) —— ↜ Musicks Recreation on the Viol, Lyra-Way (1669) —— ↜ Treasury of Musick (1669) —— ↜ Musicks Recreation on The Viol, Lyra-way (1682); facsimile ed. N. Dolmetsch (1960) Puerl, P., Newe Padoan/Intrada. Däntz unnd Galliarda (Nuremberg, 1611) Schein, J., Banchetto musicale (Leipzig, 1617)

LAWES.indb 335

19/03/2010 10:58

336

the consort music of william lawes

Simpson, C., The Division-Violist (1659) A Compendium of Practical Musick (1667); ed. P.â•‹J. Lord (Oxford, 1970) —— ↜ A Compendium of Practical Musick in Five Parts (1678) —— ↜ The Little Consort, ed. I. Stoltzfus, 3â•‹vols, PRBVCSâ•‹43 (Albany, CA, c.â•‹2001–2) —— ↜ Simpson, T., Opus newer Paduanen (Hamburg, 1617); ed. H. Mönkemeyer, Monumenta musicae ad usum practicum 7 (Celle, 1987) —— ↜ Taffel-Consort (Hamburg, 1621); ed. B. Thomas (1988) Taylor, R., Sacred Hymns (1615) —— ↜ Two Almaines for Three Lyra-Viols, ed. R. Carter and J. Valencia (Kritzendorf, forthcoming) Ward, J., Consort Music of Five and Six Parts, ed. I. Payne, MBâ•‹67 (1995) —— ↜ Consort Music of Four Parts, ed. I. Payne, MBâ•‹83 (2005) Webster, M., Complete Consort Music, ed. P. Holman and J. Cunningham (Launton, 2010) White, W., Six Fantasias in 6 Parts, ed. D. Beecher and B. Gillingham (Ottawa, 1982) Wilson, J., Cheerful Ayres (1660)

❧⚧ Discography CDs, except where stated otherwise A High-Priz’d Noise: Violin Music for Charles I, The Parley of Instruments, dir. P. Holman (Hyperion cda66806) Celestial Witchcraft: The Private Music of Henry and Charles Princes of Wales, Fretwork, with M. Padmore and N. North (Virgin Veritas vcâ•‹5â•‹45346â•‹2) Lawes, W., Consort Music for the Harpe, Bass Viol, Violin and Theorbo, C.â•‹A. Fulton, S. Richie, R. Weldon and R. Grossman (Focus Records 843. (LP)) —— ↜ Consorts in Four and Five Parts, Phantasm (Channel Classics ccsâ•‹15698) Consorts in Six Parts, Phantasm (Channel Classics ccsâ•‹17498) —— ↜ —— ↜ Consort Music for Viols, Lutes and Theorbos, Rose Consort of Viols, with T. Roberts (organ), J. Heringman and D. Miller (lute and theorbo) (Naxos 8.550601) —— ↜ and Purcell, H., Exquisite Consorts: Courtly Ensembles and Dramatic Music by William Lawes (1602–1645) and Henry Purcell (1659–1695), The Harp Consort, dir. A. Lawrence-King (Berlin Classics 001â•‹1â•‹552bc) —— ↜ Fantasia-Suites for Two Violins, Bass Viol and Organ, London Baroque (Harmonia Mundi hmaâ•‹1901423)

LAWES.indb 336

19/03/2010 10:58

discography

337

—— ↜ Fantasia-Suites for Two Violins, Bass Viol and Organ, The Purcell Quartet (Chandos Chaconne chan 0552) —— ↜ Fantasia-Suites for Violin, Bass Viol and Organ, Music’s Re-creation (Centaur crcâ•‹2385) —— ↜ For ye Violls: Consort Setts for 5 & 6 Viols and Organ, Fretwork, with P. Nicholson (organ) (Virgin Veritas vcâ•‹7â•‹91187–2) —— ↜ Harp Consorts, M. Eilander, Les Voix Humaines (Atma Classique acd2â•‹2372) —— ↜ In Loving Memory: Psalms, Songs and Elegies, The Consort of Musicke, dir. A. Rooley (Columns Classics 070972) —— ↜ Knock’d on the head: William Lawes, Music for Viols, Concordia, dir. M. Levy (Metronome metâ•‹cdâ•‹1045) —— ↜ and R. Johnson, Orpheus I Am, Tragicomedia (EMI Classics cdcâ•‹7â•‹54311â•‹2) —— ↜ Royall Consort Suites, Sonnerie, dir. M. Huggett (ASV Gaudeamus cdâ•‹gaxâ•‹270 2) —— ↜ Suites pour une et trois lyra-violes, J. Dunford, S. Abramowicz, S. Moquet (Adèsâ•‹750â•‹206502) —— ↜ The Passion of Musicke, Ricercar Consort, dir. P. Pierlot (Flora 1206) —— ↜ The Royal Consort and Lute Songs, R. Jacobs, S. Kuijken, E. Witsenburg. G. Leonhardt (Sony Classical sbk 63179) —— ↜ The Royal Consort Suites, The Purcell Quartet, with N. North and P. O’Dette (Chandos chanâ•‹0584/5) Pioneer Early Music Recordings: The Dolmetsch Family with Diana Poulton, Volumeâ•‹1, The Dolmetsch Family (Dolmetsch Foundation and Lute Society [c.â•‹2005] lsdoL001)

LAWES.indb 337

19/03/2010 10:58

LAWES.indb 338

19/03/2010 10:58

Index of Lawes↜’↜s Works Cited Works are primarily listed in the order suggested by their VdGS Index numbers. ❧╇ Royall Consort {1–67} Fantazia {1}╅╉139–42 (Ex.â•‹4.1), 143, 146–7, 242–3 (Ex.â•‹7.8), 247 Aire {10}╅╉122â•‹n.85, 133 Corant {11}╅╉133 Corant {12}╅╉133 Saraband {13}╅╉133 Saraband {14}╅╉138 Corant {17}╅╉133 Corant {18}╅╉167 Corant {26}╅╉133 Saraband {27}╅╉134â•‹n.34 Corant {28}╅╉133 Corant {33}╅╉258 See also Bass Viol Duos Corant {107} Fantazy {36}╅╉122â•‹n.85, 138, 142–3, 146–7, 160, 242–3 (Ex.â•‹7.8), 247 Aire {37}╅╉137, 138 Alman {38}╅╉137–8, 138 five-part version╅╉63, 70 Corant {39}╅╉138 (2) Ecco {40}╅╉138, 139 Aire {41}╅╉138 (2) Pavan {42}╅╉146–7 Saraband {48}╅╉97â•‹n.21 Pavan {49}╅╉143–5 (Ex.â•‹4.2), 146 (2), 147, 233, 240, 248, 270 Corant {57}, two-part versions╅╉202â•‹n.52 Saraband {61}, two-part versions╅╉202â•‹n.52

❧╇ Five-Part Viol Consorts {68–83} Fantasia {68}╅╉33, 40, 152, 157, 159, 160, 163–4, 166, 167, 169, 174 Fantazia (‘On the Playnsong’) {69}╅╉33, 40, 152, 157, 159, 160, 163–4, 166, 167, 174 Aire {70}╅╉163, 166, 167, 174 four-part version (early stage Royall Consort)╅╉130, 132 Fantazia {71}╅╉55, 160–3 (Ex.â•‹5.4), 166, 167, 174 Fantazia {72}╅╉55, 160 (2), 166, 174, 245 (Ex.â•‹7.10) Aire {73}╅╉163, 166, 167, 174 arrangements of╅╉95â•‹n.18, 98 Fantazia {74}╅╉166, 174 Aire {75}╅╉166, 174 three-part version╅╉133 Pavan {76}╅╉166, 174, 186â•‹n.21 Aire {77}╅╉166, 174 Fantazy {78}╅╉166, 174 Pavan {79}╅╉166, 174, 203–5 four-part version (early stage Royall Consort)╅╉130, 132–3 Aire {80}╅╉166, 174 four-part version (early stage Royall Consort)╅╉130, 132, 133 Fantazy {81}╅╉143, 166, 167, 171â•‹n.61, 174 Pavan {82}╅╉166, 173, 174 Aire {83}╅╉166, 174 three-part version╅╉133

❧╇Miscellaneous pieces associated with early version of Royall Consort Aire {70}╅╉See under Five-Part Viol Consorts Pavan {79}╅╉See under Five-Part Viol Consorts Aire {80}╅╉See under Five-Part Viol Consorts Pavan {101}╅╉See under Bass Viol Duos Aire {103}╅╉See under Bass Viol Duos Aire {264}╅╉131 Alman {320}╅╉130, 133, 203–5 Aire {321}╅╉133 Corant {322–3}╅╉130 Aire {337}╅╉132 (2) Corant {338}╅╉130 Corant {339}╅╉42, 44, 130, 131, 132 (2), 134, 254–5

❧╇ Six-Part Viol Consorts {84–100} Pavan {84}╅╉166, 175 Fantazia {85}╅╉151, 153–5 (Ex.â•‹5.2), 166, 173, 175 Aire {86}╅╉166, 175 Fantazia {87}╅╉166, 167â•‹n.53, 175 Fantazia {88}╅╉166, 169, 175 Aire {89}╅╉166, 168–9, 171, 172, 175 Fantazia {90}╅╉166, 166â•‹n.52, 169, 175 Aire {91}╅╉166, 169, 175 Aire {92}╅╉166, 169, 175 Fantazia {93}╅╉152–3 (Ex.â•‹5.1), 166, 169, 173, 175 Fantazia {94}╅╉166, 168 (2), 171â•‹n.61, 175 Aire {95}╅╉166, 169, 175 In Nomine {96}╅╉152, 166, 169, 171â•‹n.61, 172–3 (Ex.â•‹5.6), 175 Fantazia {97}╅╉50, 166, 167â•‹n.53, 168 (2), 170, 175 Fantazia {98}╅╉50, 166, 168 (3), 171â•‹n.61, 175 In Nomine {99}╅╉164, 166, 167, 171, 172, 175 Aire {100}╅╉167–8, 168

LAWES.indb 339

19/03/2010 10:58

340

the consort music of william lawes

❧╇ Harp Consorts {162–91} Alman HC1 {162}╅╉214, 227 Corant HC2 {163}╅╉214, 228 Corant HC3 {164}╅╉214, 228 Saraband HC4 {165}╅╉214, 224, 228–9 (Ex.â•‹7.2), 231 Aire HC5 {166}╅╉214, 224, 227 Corant HC6 {167}╅╉214 Corant HC7 {168}╅╉214 Saraband HC8 {169}╅╉214, 224 Alman HC9 {170}╅╉214 Corant HC10 {171}╅╉214 Corant HC11 {172}╅╉214 Saraband HC12 {173}╅╉214, 221, 224, 231 Aire HC13 {174}╅╉214 Aire HC14 {175}╅╉214 Corant HC15 {176}╅╉214, 228 Saraband HC16 {177}╅╉214, 224, 228–30 (Ex.â•‹7.3) See also Vocal Music ‘O My Clarissa’ Alman HC17 {178}╅╉214, 231 (2) ❧╇ Four-Part Viol Consorts {108–13} Corant HC18 {179}╅╉214 suites in C/c {108–13}╅╉132, 159–60 Corant HC19 {180}╅╉214 Fantazia {108}╅╉160–1 (Ex.â•‹5.3) Saraband HC20 {181}╅╉214, 224, 231 (2), 233 Aire {109}╅╉132, 160 Alman HC21 {182}╅╉214, 223, 224, 231–2 Aire {110}╅╉36 (2), 131–2, 160 (Ex.â•‹7.4), 268 Alman HC22 {183}╅╉214, 224, 231 Corant HC23 {184}╅╉214, 231 ❧╇Fantasia-Suites {114–61}: One violin, Corant HC24 {185}╅╉214, 231 {114–37}; Two violins, {138–61}) Saraband HC25 {186}╅╉214, 224, 231 Fantazia {114}╅╉179–80 (Ex.â•‹6.1–2), 182, 190 Aire HC26 {187}╅╉214, 223, 233 (2), 234, 247 Fantazia {117}╅╉181–2 (Ex.â•‹6.3) Pavan HC27 {188}╅╉214, 233, 234–6 (Ex.â•‹7.5) Alman {118}╅╉202–5 (Ex.â•‹6.12) Pavan HC28 {189}╅╉214, 227, 231, 233, 234, 236, two-part arrangement╅╉202â•‹n.51 237–40 (Ex.â•‹7.6), 268 Fantazia {123}╅╉206â•‹n.58 Pavan HC29 {190}╅╉214, 227, 233, 234, 236, 237, Fantazia {129}╅╉186–8 (Ex.â•‹6.6) 238–41 (Ex.â•‹ 7.7) Fantazia {135}╅╉49, 59, 71, 115, 137, 140, 156, 164, 160, 214, 233, 234, 240–7 Fantazy HC30 {191}╅╉ 184, 186–8 (Ex.â•‹6.6), 190–200 (Ex.â•‹6.7–10), (Ex.â•‹ 7 .9–11), 247, 248 202, 209 (2), 210, 211, 240, 248, 253, 270, 274 Fantazia {138}╅╉181–3 (Ex.â•‹6.4), 190 ❧╇ Two-Part Consorts Aire {140}╅╉206â•‹n.58 Corant {57}╅╉See under Royall Consort 2 06â•‹ n .58 Fantazia {141}╅╉ Saraband {61}╅╉See under Royall Consort Fantazia {144}╅╉190–1 (Ex.â•‹6.7), 202, 206–8 Alman {118}╅╉See under Fantasia-Suites 6 .13), 209 (Ex.â•‹ Aire {225}╅╉219 Fantazia {150}╅╉210 Pavan {324}╅╉202â•‹n.51 Fantazia {153}╅╉183–5 (Ex.â•‹6.5), 206â•‹n.58 Corant {325}╅╉202â•‹n.51 Fantazia {156}╅╉195, 209â•‹n.61, 245 (Ex.â•‹7.10) Saraband {326}╅╉202â•‹n.51 Aire {353}╅╉219 ❧╇ Bass Viol Duos {101–7} Pavan {101}╅╉249, 253, 254–5, 257–8, 263–6 (Ex.â•‹8.4) four-part version (early version Royall Consort)╅╉130, 131 Aire {102}╅╉249, 254–5, 264, 268 Aire {103}╅╉249, 254–6 (Ex.â•‹8.1), 258 four-part version (early version Royall Consort)╅╉130, 131, 132 (2), 255–6 (Ex.â•‹8.1) Pavan {104}╅╉249, 253, 255–7, 264, 266–7 (Ex.â•‹8.5) See also Ferrabosco, Alfonso II, Pavan {2} Alman {105}╅╉249, 253, 255–7, 266, 268–70 (Ex.â•‹8.6) See also Ferrabosco, Alfonso II, Alman {1} Aire {106}╅╉249, 260–3 (Ex.â•‹8.2–3), 268, 270–1 Corant {107}╅╉249, 258–9, 268, 270–1 See also Royall Consort Corant {33}

LAWES.indb 340

19/03/2010 10:58

index of lawes’s works cited ❧╇ Three-Part Consorts Aire {75}╅╉See under Five-Part Viol Consorts Aire {83}╅╉See under Five-Part Viol Consorts Aire {206}╅╉33 Aire {207}╅╉36 Aire {227}╅╉41 ❧╇ Four-Part Consorts Aire {306}╅╉33, 132 Aire {318}╅╉132 Aire {319}╅╉132 ❧╇ Miscellaneous Four-Part Consorts Corant {399}╅╉203–5 Saraband {400}╅╉203–5 ❧╇ Lyra-Viol Solos GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432 pieces╅╉73–4, 95–7 (Ex.â•‹3.1) Aire {73}╅╉See under Five-Part Viol Consorts Symphony {343}╅╉95â•‹n.18 Saraband {345}╅╉95â•‹n.18 Alman (‘faire fidelia’/‘Elizium’) {346}╅╉95â•‹n.18, 98 (2) See also Vocal Music ‘Clorinda, when I go away’ Country Call {421}╅╉97 Jig {422}╅╉97 Alman {464}╅╉97 Corant {465}╅╉97 Saraband {466}╅╉97 Almain {511}╅╉97–8 Corant {512}╅╉97 Corant {513}╅╉97 Saraband {514}╅╉97 Corant {545}╅╉98 ❧╇ Lyra-Viol Duo (incomplete) Corant {541}╅╉95â•‹n.19

LAWES.indb 341

341

❧╇ Lyra-Viol Trios Pavan {441}╅╉121–2 Corant {443}╅╉121–2 Saraband {444}╅╉80, 121–2 Aire {448}╅╉121–2, 122–3 (Ex.â•‹3.6) Fantazia {476}╅╉198–9 (Ex.â•‹6.11) Pavan {521}╅╉121–2 Toy {523}╅╉86 Thump {527}╅╉86, 121–2 Pavan {563}╅╉112, 117, 118 Alman {564}╅╉80, 117 (Ex.â•‹3.4), 118 Fantazy {567}╅╉108, 112, 115–17, 118 Humour {568}╅╉85, 108, 117, 118–19 (Ex.â•‹3.5) Saraband {569}╅╉117, 118 Alman {570}╅╉97â•‹n.24 Fantazy {573}╅╉112, 115–16 (Ex.â•‹3.3), 125, 200 ❧╇ Lute Lute duet suite╅╉73–4, 82–4, 104–5, 106, 110, 164, 249, 271 ❧╇ Vocal Music ‘A Health, … a health to the Northerne lasse’ (Suckling)╅╉66 ‘Cease warring thoughts’ (Shirley)╅╉63–6 ‘Clorinda, when I go away’ (anon.)╅╉98 See also Lyra-Viol, Solo Alman (‘faire fidelia’/‘Elizium’) {346} ‘Cloris, I Wish that Envye were as Just’ (anon.)╅╉ 74 Elegy on the death of John Tomkins (‘Music, the master of thy art is dead’)╅╉ 112, 164, 271 ‘Goe bleeding hart’ (anon.)╅╉64 ‘If you a Wrinkle’ (anon.)╅╉73 ‘O draw your Curtaines’ (D’Avenant)╅╉73 ‘O My Clarissa’ (anon.)╅╉228 See also Harp Consorts Saraband HC16 {177} ‘Pleasures, Bewty, youth attend yee’ (Ford)╅╉41 Psalm 6╅╉170 Psalm 71╅╉156â•‹n.17, 164–5 ‘Secresie protested’ (Carew)╅╉64 ‘Some Drink, Boy’ (Suckling)╅╉66 ‘Sweetest Cloris lend a kisse’ (anon.)╅╉73 ‘Warrs ar our delight’ (anon.)╅╉66

19/03/2010 10:58

General Index References to pages with illustrations appear in bold. Anne of Denmark, Queen╅╉2 musical performance in Bedchamber of╅╉╉ 16, 216–17 musicians of╅╉6 Anonymous ‘Consort For 2 Treble Viollins 2 Basses and 2 Theorboes’╅╉128 Fantazia {9424} (lyra-viol trio)╅╉198â•‹n.36 Ashbee, Andrew╅╉15, 99, 158, 184, 186, 197, 249, 251–2 Aubrey, John╅╉91 Auditor’s Debenture Books╅╉29 Aylmer, Gerald╅╉22 Ayrton, Professor William╅╉295 Bacon, Francis╅╉215, 217 Bailes, Anthony╅╉105â•‹n.51 Bales, Alfonso╅╉5 Ball, Richard╅╉11 Ballard, John╅╉5 Ballard, Pierre, Tablature de luth de different autheurs╅╉105 Banister, John and Thomas Low, New Ayres and Dialogues╅╉163, 198, 218â•‹n.27 Banqueting House, the╅╉15–16, 148 Barley, William╅╉106 Barnard, John╅╉112 Bassano family╅╉9, 21 Bassano, Andrea╅╉17 bastarda╅╉197, 252 Bedchamber, the╅╉2, 6–7, 16 bindings and cover stamps╅╉24, 47–8, 48, 58, 76, 86–7, 108, 280, 285, 290, 295, 297, 305, 309, 316 Bing, Stephen╅╉See under copyists Block, Francis╅╉98â•‹n.27, 218–19 Brade, William╅╉126 Brewer, Thomas╅╉130â•‹n.25 Britton, Thomas, sale catalogue of (1714)╅╉91, 101 Browne, John╅╉See under copyists Bull, John╅╉32, 131 Burdett, Angela╅╉280 Burdett, Sir Robert╅╉280 Burwood, John╅╉17–18 Butler, Henry╅╉225 Butler, Martin╅╉21 Byrd, William╅╉106

LAWES.indb 342

Caccini, Giulio, Le nuove Musiche╅╉140–1 Callon, Gordon╅╉60, 64â•‹n.57, 65â•‹n.60 Carew, Thomas Poems╅╉64 ‘Secresie protested’╅╉64 Carleton, Sir Dudley╅╉216 Cawse, John╅╉120, 121 Cecil, Robert╅╉216 Chapel Royal, the╅╉2, 3, 10, 13, 14, 21, 58, 135, 315â•‹n.1 attendance on the king╅╉14 Children of╅╉11–12 Charles I, King character╅╉1, 149 households of╅╉4–6, 6–7, 21–2, 99, 249 Jenkins performing for╅╉184 musical tastes╅╉1, 14, 148–9, 175–6, 178, 206, 273–4, 275 pupil of Coprario╅╉1 stammer╅╉184â•‹n.18 Charles II, King household of as Prince of Wales╅╉156 payments to musicians╅╉22 Charteris, Richard╅╉108, 203, 211 citterns╅╉98 Cockpit-at-Court, the╅╉15 Cofferer of the Household, the╅╉8 Coleman, Charles╅╉126–7, 129, 135, 151, 156–7, 219 Confesse, Nicolas╅╉60 consort music, scorings╅╉99–100, 102, 126–8, 132, 134, 152, 211 consort, terminology╅╉3–4 ‘Consorte, the’╅╉3, 4–5, 17, 20, 156 contreparties╅╉104–6, 114, 124 Cooke, Henry (Captain), Master of the Children of the Chapel╅╉11–12 Coprario, John╅╉22, 31, 92, 109, 176, 216, 273 bass viol duos╅╉249–50, 251, 271 Fantazia {7}╅╉236–7 ‘Cooprario’s musique’╅╉10, 14, 206, 208 court posts╅╉5, 99 fantasia-suites╅╉139, 177–9, 180, 181 chronology╅╉200 influence on Jenkins╅╉178, 184, 198, 200 influence on Lawesâ•… 115, ╉178, 184, 198, 200 popularity at court╅╉14, 178, 275 sources╅╉108, 112, 177–8, 201, 209, 211

19/03/2010 10:58

general index (Coprario, John continued) hand (text)/signature╅╉29, 30 influence on Lawes╅╉176 lyra-viol music╅╉98, 99, 107, 113, 125 teacher of Charles I╅╉1 teacher of William Lawes╅╉10, 29 two-part (Tr–T) music╅╉250 viol consorts╅╉150, 151, 152, 161 copyists Bing, Stephen╅╉134, 146â•‹n.61 Browne, John╅╉96, 126, 157, 158, 201–2, 211, 255 Cartwright╅╉96 Charteris ‘Scribe A’/Willetts ‘Hand B’╅╉108, 110–14, 110, 111, 115 Ellis, William╅╉129â•‹n.21 Hand B (Shirley partbooks)╅╉32, 35, 36, 44, 131, 279 Hand C (Shirley partbooks)╅╉32, 279 Hand D (D.229)╅╉See ‘Tomkins copyist’ Hand E╅╉55, 295 Hand F╅╉308 Hand G╅╉308 Hand H (Mus. 70, anon. copyist)╅╉76, 77, 84, 315 Leycester, Peter╅╉96 Lilly, John╅╉96 Marsh, Narcissus╅╉96 Merro, John╅╉96, 98, 114–15, 124, 252, 255, 257 Myriell, Thomas╅╉50–1 Read, Henrie╅╉96 ‘Tomkins copyist’ (Hand D)╅╉50–1, 51, 168–70, 173, 175, 290 Withy, Francis╅╉251â•‹n.14 cornetts╅╉3, 13, 18 Corporation of Music, the╅╉19–20 cost of living╅╉18–19 court administrative structure of╅╉1–2 performance of music at╅╉2–3, 7, 15–17, 125, 148–9, 156, 175–6, 273–4 court musicians acquisition of posts╅╉8–12 administrative structure of╅╉2–3 admissions process╅╉8–9 apprentices to╅╉10–11 attendance at court╅╉6 diet╅╉12–13, 20, 22 employment outside court╅╉18–19, 21 payments to╅╉8, 10, 22 pluralism╅╉6, 10 privileges of╅╉18–21 reversion of posts╅╉8, 9 sharing of posts╅╉17 wages╅╉5, 6, 11, 12, 17, 19, 60

LAWES.indb 343

343

cover stamps and bindings╅╉24, 47–8, 48, 58, 76, 86–7, 108, 280, 285, 290, 295, 297, 305, 309, 316 Craddock, Thomas╅╉17 Cranford, William╅╉151 Crum, Margaret╅╉129 Cuddy, Neil╅╉6 Cummings╅╉W. H., 76, 78, 315–17 Dallam, Robert╅╉17 Dart, Thurston╅╉211 Davis, Mr╅╉135 Day, Thomas╅╉5â•‹n.28, 11 Derham, household╅╉184 Dering, Richard╅╉6, 14, 127 division-fantasia╅╉197–200 divisions╅╉92, 97, 98, 127, 136, 215–17, 225, 227, 259 accompaniment of╅╉252–3 extemporization of╅╉15, 106, 148–9, 220–1, 222, 223–4, 251 in bass viol duos╅╉251, 253, 272 Jenkins’s use of╅╉197–200, 225 bass viol duos╅╉251–2, 253, 271–2 fantasia-suites╅╉186–90 (Ex.â•‹6.6), 198–200 Lawes’s use/incorporation of╅╉15, 176, 211–12, 248, 249, 273–7 bass viol duos╅╉252–3, 253–4, 263–71 (Ex.â•‹8.4–6), 271–2 fantasia-suites╅╉179–80 (Ex.â•‹6.2), 183–4, 186, 193–200 (Ex.â•‹6.9), 206 Harp Consorts╅╉223–4, 227–41 (Ex.â•‹7.2–7), 244, 247–8 Royall Consort╅╉137–8, 140, 141–6 (Ex.â•‹4.2), 148 viol consorts╅╉170 solo bass viol╅╉252–3 terminology╅╉4 See also Simpson, Christopher, DivisionViolist, The Dodd, Gordon╅╉32â•‹n.13, 42, 136, 137 Dolmetsch, Arnold╅╉121 Dowland, John, ‘Lord Willoughby’ (lute duet)╅╉ 106 Dowland, Robert╅╉9 Drew, William╅╉127 Duvall, Nicholas╅╉6 East, Michael╅╉251 Edwards, Warwick╅╉4 Elizabethan mixed consort╅╉139, 216 Eltham Ordinances, the╅╉7 Evans (Williams), Lewis╅╉11 Exchequer, the╅╉8

19/03/2010 10:58

344

the consort music of william lawes

extemporization╅╉224, 253, 275–6 of consort ensembles╅╉216–17, 220–2 of contreparties╅╉104, 106, 124 of divisions╅╉15, 106, 144, 146, 148–9, 220–1, 222, 223–4, 251, 259, 270, 272, 273 of organ accompaniments╅╉211, 250–1 from tablature╅╉97 Fanshawe, Sir Henry╅╉151 Farnaby, Giles╅╉106 Farnaby, Nicholas╅╉19 Farrant, Daniel╅╉5, 14, 156 Farrenc, Aristide╅╉309 Farrenc, Louise╅╉309 Ferrabosco, Alfonso I╅╉93 Ferrabosco, Alfonso II╅╉21, 22, 31 anniversary of death╅╉271 court posts/activities╅╉5, 6, 14, 60, 99, 217, 273 teacher to Prince Henry╅╉7 divisions on Palestrina’s ‘Sound out my voice’╅╉252 lyra-viol music╅╉92, 98, 99, 107, 113, 125 Lessons for 1. 2. and 3. Viols╅╉94, 99, 104, 106 purchaser of instruments╅╉18, 107 viol consorts╅╉150–1, 151, 152, 164, 176, 249 Alman {1} (five-part)╅╉253, 255, 257 Pavan {2} (five-part)╅╉237, 253, 255, 257 Ferrabosco, Alfonso III╅╉9, 14 Ferrabosco, Henry╅╉9, 273 Fidge, Thomas╅╉309 (2) Field, Christopher╅╉49â•‹n.28, 104â•‹n.50, 178, 191–2, 202, 206, 208, 275, 280 Filmer family╅╉218–19 Flelle, Jean le, consort of╅╉217 flutes╅╉3 Foot, Mirjam╅╉48 Forcer, Francis╅╉222 Ford, Robert╅╉32 Ford, Thomas╅╉5, 6, 156, 273 Musicke of Sundrie Kindes╅╉99, 104 Fox, John╅╉10 Friend (or Frend), John╅╉4–5, 14, 156 Friend (or Frend), Lucretia╅╉4 Fuller, Thomas╅╉3, 315â•‹n.1 Fulton, Cheryl Ann╅╉213 Gamble, John, Ayres and Dialogues╅╉65 Gaultier, Jacques╅╉6, 10 Gibbon(s), Richard╅╉7 1, 309 Gibbons, Orlando╅╉14, 22, 176, 275 Fantazies of III Parts╅╉209â•‹n.62, 222 popularity of his music at court╅╉14 treble viol duos╅╉250 viol consort fantasias╅╉150–1

LAWES.indb 344

Giles, Nathaniel╅╉11 gists╅╉276–7 Gloucester Cathedral, catalogue╅╉101 Goodge, Thomas╅╉97 Gostling, John╅╉309 Gostling, William╅╉308, 309 Grabu, Louis╅╉133 Great Chamber, the╅╉2, 15 Greenbury, Richard╅╉18 Groom of the Stool, the╅╉7 Guard Chamber, the╅╉2, 15–16 Hampton Court╅╉1, 17 Children of the Chapel, schooling at╅╉12 harp consort, development of╅╉215–18 harpers╅╉11, 216–17, 236, 252, 253 at court╅╉3, 5 harps╅╉3, 213 Dalway harp, the╅╉215 Irish harp╅╉11, 213–15, 216–17, 221, 222 ‘Lawes’s harp’╅╉215 (Ex.â•‹7.1) triple harp╅╉213–15 harpsichords╅╉12, 100, 101–2â•‹n.42 Hawkins, Sir John╅╉57 hayle╅╉4 Henlake, Robert╅╉17 Henrietta Maria, Queen, musicians of╅╉6, 17–18, 217 Henry, Prince of Wales household of╅╉11, 99 musical taste╅╉1 pupil of Ferrabosco╅╉7 Herbert, Sir Gerald╅╉216–17 Herne, Jeremy╅╉60 Herrick, Robert╅╉72, 315 Hilton, John, Catch that Catch Can╅╉66 Hingeston, John╅╉17, 128, 251 Holman, Peter╅╉8, 10, 11, 12–13, 14–15, 15, 100, 114â•‹n.77, 126–7, 129, 144, 156, 186â•‹n.20, 210, 214–15, 217, 220, 237, 252, 276 Holmes, John╅╉21 Holmes, Thomas╅╉21, 113, 151, 305 Hume, Tobias╅╉98–100 The First Part of Ayres╅╉99–100 Poeticall Musicke╅╉100 Hutchinson, Colonel John╅╉156 Hutchinson, Lucy╅╉156–7 Iles, William╅╉96 Ives, Simon╅╉92, 112 Aire {50} (solo lyra-viol)╅╉95â•‹n.18–19 bass viol duos╅╉250–1 arrangements of consort pieces╅╉259 consort music╅╉151 lyra-viol trios╅╉98, 108, 109, 110, 121, 125 ‘Mris Mary Brownes Choyce’╅╉114, 115

19/03/2010 10:58

general index

345

(Lawes, Henry continued) Jackson, Thomas╅╉129 ‘Corinna false! It cannot be’ (H. Brandreth)╅╉ James I, King 163 death of╅╉1 payments to╅╉29, 75â•‹n.77 household of╅╉1–2, 6–7 possession of William Lawes’s manuscripts╅╉ musicians of╅╉4–5 47, 55, 57–8, 286, 290, 297, 306 Jenkins, John settings of Sandys’ Paraphrases╅╉165 bass viol music╅╉225, 251–4, 271–2, 308 Triumph of the Prince d’Amour, The╅╉60 Aire {1} (duo)╅╉251 Lawes, William (?1553–1624)╅╉315â•‹n.1 Aire {2} (duo)╅╉251 Lawes, William╅╉5, 9, 22, 31 consort music╅╉133, 135, 150–1, 152 activities at court╅╉7 1 fantasias╅╉227 and Jenkins Fantazia {11} (six-part)╅╉151 bass viol duos╅╉252–3, 271–2 four-part╅╉128 influenced by Gibbons╅╉151 fantasia-suites╅╉186–90, 197–200 two- and three-part╅╉219–20 viol consorts╅╉151 copying activities╅╉178 and Simpson╅╉225–8, 253–4 divisions, use of╅╉197–200, 225 compositional process╅╉73, 147–8, 195–6, 275–6 bass viol duos╅╉251–2, 253, 271–2 bass viol duos╅╉257–63 fantasia-suites╅╉186–90 (Ex.â•‹6.6), 198–200 Elegy on death of Lawes╅╉71, 308 Harp Consorts╅╉222–3, 247–8 fantasia-suites╅╉178, 184, 211 incorporation of divisions╅╉137, 183, 191–200, 211–12, 249, 273 chronology╅╉200 revisions╅╉57, 73, 95, 147, 275–6; fantasiaGroup I: Fantazia {12}╅╉186–90 (Ex.â•‹6.7), 197–200; Fantazia {15}╅╉186–90 (Ex.â•‹6.6), suites╅╉191–200, 201–6; lyra-viol trios╅╉ 197–200 117–25; Royall Consort (rescoring)╅╉124, Group III╅╉197 126, 135–7, 258–9; Shirley partbooks╅╉ 42–4; viol consorts╅╉167, 170–3 Group VI╅╉197 viol consorts╅╉55, 164–5, 166–70, 255 influenced by Coprario╅╉184, 200 copying activities╅╉32, 78–82, 86 relationship to Lawes’s fantasia-suites╅╉ copying errors╅╉36–8, 65, 73, 169, 195–6, 186–90, 197–200 use of organ in╅╉198–9 206, 258 lost sources╅╉91, 101–2â•‹n.42, 102–3 court appointment╅╉10, 148 lyra-viol music╅╉99, 100–3, 121, 125 divisions, use/incorporation of╅╉15, 176, 211–12, 248, 249, 273–7 performing for Charles I╅╉184 bass viol duos╅╉252–3, 253–4, 263–71 Johnson, Robert╅╉5 (2), 10, 273 (Ex.â•‹8.4–6), 271–2 Jonson, Ben fantasia-suites╅╉179–80 (Ex.â•‹6.2), 183–4, Cynthia’s Revels╅╉93 186, 193–200 (Ex.â•‹6.9), 206 See also under masques Harp Consorts╅╉223–4, 227–41 (Ex.â•‹7.2–7), 244, 247–8 Kelly, John╅╉5 keyboards/keyboard players╅╉3, 5, 14, 21, 100, Royall Consort╅╉137–8, 140, 141–6 171, 197, 215 (Ex.â•‹4.2), 148 viol consorts╅╉170 arrangements for╅╉98, 163, 247, 252 See also Simpson, Christopher, DivisionKindersley, Robert╅╉4–5, 156 Violist, The hand╅╉25–7, 48–51, 58–60, 66–70, 87, 110–13, Lanier family╅╉9, 21 131–2, 195 Lanier, John╅╉9 Lanier, Nicholas╅╉5, 9, 216, 216–17 accidentals╅╉25 beamings╅╉38, 42, 59 Marshall of the Corporation of Music╅╉20 ‘Master of the Musick’╅╉5, 6, 12–13, 21 clefs: bass╅╉36, 38, 49–51, 55, 68–9, 74, 169–70, 171, 209; c-clefs╅╉33, 36, 44–5, 50, Lasocki, David╅╉3, 13 66–8, 164, 196; treble╅╉32–3, 66 Lawes, Henry╅╉5, 9, 309 crossings-out╅╉36, 38, 55, 73, 131, 163, 164–5, activities/posts at court╅╉10–11, 58, 112 167, 168, 171, 263 appraisal of William Lawes╅╉90, 220 final barlines╅╉38, 51–3, 66, 86, 195, 259 Choice Psalmes╅╉7 1, 90, 112, 165â•‹n.49 key signatures╅╉33, 163 consort music╅╉135

LAWES.indb 345

19/03/2010 10:58

346

the consort music of william lawes

(Lawes, William continued) (hand continued) numbering╅╉26–7, 55 ‘rushed’╅╉44–5, 89, 132 tablature╅╉73–4, 76, 82–5, 110–13 text╅╉84–5, 110 time signatures╅╉27 titling╅╉25, 76, 112–13, 253 homages╅╉236–7, 253, 257–8 incomplete pieces╅╉164–5 (Ex.â•‹5.5) key associations╅╉142–3 lost sources/pieces╅╉85–6, 90–1, 95, 101–2â•‹n.42, 102–3, 122, 129, 134, 148, 200, 206, 210, 255, 261–2, 274 masque music╅╉58, 59–66, 98, 159 musical influences╅╉113, 115, 150, 152, 160, 161, 271–2 Coprario╅╉176, 178, 184, 198, 200 organ, use of bass viol duos╅╉255–9, 263 fantasia-suites╅╉180, 193, 198–9, 209–11 viol consorts╅╉153–6, 166–8, 173–5 payments to╅╉29–31, 75 presentation styles in the autographs╅╉85, 87–9, 166, 193, 195 ‘compositional draft↜’╅╉55, 57, 59–60, 70, 84, 88, 166 ‘formal’╅╉45, 49, 53–4, 55, 57, 66, 70, 85, 88–9, 166, 193, 195, 259, 263 ‘informal’╅╉45, 53–4, 66, 72–3, 84, 88, 89, 166, 193, 195 professional activities (outside Court)╅╉7 1, 75 quotations, musical╅╉105, 216 See also Lawes, homages rearrangements of existing pieces╅╉98, 131–4, 163, 170, 254–63 shorthand symbols (viol consorts)╅╉171–2 signature╅╉28–31, 38, 40–1, 42, 44, 47, 49, 51, 55, 74, 78–80, 89, 132, 169, 279–318 initialling╅╉41–2, 41 ‘mature’╅╉28, 29, 31, 49, 55, 57, 72, 79, 80, 89, 196 ‘running L’╅╉72, 73, 79 ‘short L’╅╉29, 31, 49, 72, 89 ‘un-joined’╅╉28–9 sources, chronology╅╉24, 25, 42, 45, 47, 48–9, 53–5, 57–60, 63–6, 66, 69–71, 72, 74–5, 80–2, 86–7, 89, 90, 105, 117, 134–5, 157–60, 163–6, 173–5, 195–6, 201–2, 206–11, 221–2, 271–2, 274–5 student of Coprario╅╉10, 29 suites╅╉268–71 bass viol duos╅╉268–71 fantasia-suites╅╉178, 181

LAWES.indb 346

(Lawes, William continued) (suites continued) Harp Consorts╅╉223–5 Royall Consort╅╉128–30, 134, 138–9 viol consorts╅╉152, 160, 167–71, 176 text settings╅╉63–6, 72–3 works canons╅╉7 1, 95 catches and drinking songs╅╉41, 66 chronology╅╉48–9, 55, 63–6, 74–5, 122–3, 131–2, 134–5, 157–60, 163–6, 173–5, 178–9, 200, 201–2, 206–11, 217–18, 221–2, 223, 271–2, 274–5 Harp Consorts: formal structure╅╉224–5 three-part music╅╉133–4 two-part (Tr–B) music╅╉218–221, 276–7 See also Index of Lawes’s Works Cited Lawrence, John╅╉5 Le Strange household╅╉184 Le Strange, Nicholas╅╉101, 178, 211, 252 Lefkowitz, Murray╅╉23–4, 57, 63, 76, 90, 95, 125, 126, 135–6, 157, 213, 225, 228, 233, 236–7, 253–4, 264â•‹n.38, 316 Lennox, Duke of╅╉216 Lewis, David╅╉215 Ligon, Richard╅╉178 livery╅╉8, 19, 21 Locke, Matthew╅╉22, 25, 135 bass viol duos╅╉251 Broken Consort, the╅╉224 For Several Friends╅╉219 sources╅╉91, 103 London Waits╅╉5, 18, 113 Lord Chamberlain╅╉3, 7, 15, 17, 148 authority over musicians╅╉2 (2), 12, 13 Philip Herbert, fourth Earl of Pembroke and first Earl of Montgomery╅╉2 Lord Steward╅╉2, 6 Low, Thomas and John Banister, New Ayres and Dialogues╅╉163, 198, 218â•‹n.27 Lowe, Edward╅╉57, 64â•‹n.55, 65, 128, 135, 147, 202, 204, 211, 218 Royall Consort, rescoring╅╉135–6 Lully, Jean-Baptiste de╅╉133 Lupo family╅╉9, 21 Lupo, Theophilus╅╉9, 14, 156 Lupo, Thomas╅╉10, 14, 21, 22, 31, 273 fantasia-airs╅╉115, 128, 160 viol consorts╅╉150, 151, 197 Fantazia {11} (five-part)╅╉44 lute duets╅╉104â•‹n.48, 106, 164, 216, 249, 271, 272 lutenists╅╉3, 5, 6, 9–10, 10, 99, 104–5, 129, 216–17 lutes╅╉3, 12, 17, 18, 93, 98, 100, 104–5, 216, 216–17

19/03/2010 10:58

general index

347

(manuscripts continued) GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 29410–15╅╉157–8, 166â•‹n.51 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 29996╅╉51 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31423╅╉113, 133, 250 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31429╅╉133 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31431╅╉135, 146 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31432╅╉23, 25, 28, 40, 41, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 59, 60 (2), 64, 65–6, 66 (2), 67, 68, 70, 71–5, 73, 74, 75, 76 (2), 79, 82, 83, 84, 86, 88, 89, 90, 95, 96, 111, 134, 169, 171, 196, 308–14, 316, 321–3 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 31433╅╉135, 146 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 36993╅╉126 GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 40657–61 (the Shirley partbooks)╅╉23, 25, 27, 28, 29, 31–47, 34, 35, 37, 39, 40, 41, 43, 44, 49, 51, 59, 67, 68–9, MacDermott, Cormack╅╉11, 216, 217â•‹n.19, 70, 80 (2), 85–6, 87, 88, 89, 90, 108, 110, 113, 236–7, 252, 253 131–4, 151–2, 157, 159–60, 163–4, 193â•‹n.29, Mace, Thomas, Musick’s Monument╅╉97, 100, 205, 209, 255–6, 274, 279–84, 321 156 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 53723╅╉72â•‹n.74, 309 madrigal, influence on consort fantasia╅╉ GB-Lbl, Add. MS 59869╅╉95â•‹n.17–18, 96 150–1, 152 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 63852╅╉96, 98 Major, Roger╅╉5 GB-Lbl, C.83.k.1╅╉48 manuscripts A-ET, Goëss MS B, seq.(93)╅╉96 GB-Lbl, MS R.M.24.k.3╅╉23, 57â•‹n.42, 108, 110, 112, 177–8 Cecil Family and Estate Papers, Box U/60╅╉ 30 GB-Lbl, Mus. MS 249╅╉96 D-Hs, MS ND VI 3193╅╉128â•‹n.14, 203–5 GB-Lcm, MS 921╅╉251–2, 272â•‹n.43 F-Pcnrs, ‘Bullen Reymes’ lute book’╅╉ GB-Lcm, MSS 1045–51╅╉108 105â•‹n.53 GB-Lcm, MS 1146╅╉128 F-Pn, MS Rés. F.770╅╉203, 209 GB-Lpro, E403/2187–98╅╉29 GB-Cfm, Mu. MS 168 (Fitzwilliam Virginal GB-Lpro, E405/543╅╉29 Book)╅╉106 GB-Lpro, E407/10╅╉29 GB-Cfm, Mu. MS 734╅╉57â•‹n.42 GB-Mp, MS BrM832Vu51 (Manchester lyraGB-Ckc, MSS Rowe 112–13╅╉250, 251 viol book)╅╉96, 97, 98 GB-Ctc, MS 0.16.2╅╉105â•‹n.53 GB-Ob, MS Mus. D.238╅╉65 GB-CHEr, MS DLT/B 31╅╉96 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.2╅╉23, 24, 25 (2), 27, GB-En, Sutherland papers, Dep. 314 no. 23╅╉ 28, 38, 40, 41, 45, 49, 50, 53, 55 (2), 57–71, 58, 105â•‹n.53 61–2, 69, 73, 74, 76, 82, 83, 84–5, 85, 87, 88, GB-En, MS 9449╅╉105â•‹n.53 90, 104, 110, 132, 133, 138, 154, 157, 159–60, GB-Eu, MS Dc. I. 69╅╉65 163–6, 167–9, 170–1, 171–3, 174, 191–3, 195–6, GB-HAdolmetsch, MS II.B.3╅╉85–6, 103, 107, 202, 203, 209, 237, 249, 253, 255, 257, 259–63, 118, 120–4, 121, 198â•‹n.36 260, 268, 271, 297–304, 305, 306, 321, 323 GB-Lam, MS 600╅╉96 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. B.3╅╉23, 24, 25, 27, 28, GB-Lam, MS 602╅╉106 38, 44, 45, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57–71, 59, 67, 70, 74, GB-Lbl, Add. MS 10445╅╉135, 146, 203 84, 85, 87, 88, 90, 110, 128, 134, 138–9, 147, 148, 154, 157, 159, 165–6, 167–9, 171–2, 174, GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 17786–91╅╉152 213, 214, 221–2, 223, 233, 234, 248, 258, 274, GB-Lbl, Add. MSS 17792–6╅╉133, 257 297, 305–7, 321, 323 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17798╅╉23, 24, 25, 26, 28, GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. C.59–60╅╉251â•‹n.14 29, 45, 46, 55–7, 56, 59, 68, 70, 85, 87, 88, 89, 90, 158, 166, 167, 169, 175, 295–6, 321–3 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. C.89–90╅╉203, 210 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 17801╅╉57â•‹n.42, 251 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. C.93╅╉51 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 23779╅╉178 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.220╅╉218, 219, 220, 247 GB-Lbl, Add. MS 29290╅╉203, 210–11

‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’, the (LVV) associated groups/sub-sections╅╉5 attendance at court╅╉14, 21 composers to╅╉273 cost of╅╉21–2 daily duties╅╉15 diet╅╉20 formation of╅╉5–6 new places in╅╉10 personnel╅╉5–6, 273, 275 Private Music, the╅╉3, 22 repertoire╅╉5–6, 14, 16, 148–9, 156, 253, 275 status╅╉7, 20–1 wages╅╉5, 19 lyra-viol╅╉See under viols

LAWES.indb 347

19/03/2010 10:58

348

the consort music of william lawes

(manuscripts continued) GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. D.229╅╉23, 24, 26, 28, 34, 38, 41, 44, 45, 47–55, 51, 54, 55–7, 56, 57, 59, 66, 68, 69, 71, 76, 85, 87, 88–9, 90, 154, 157, 166–70, 169, 171, 172, 174–5, 191–3, 193, 195, 200, 202, 203, 206, 208, 209–11, 213, 214, 221–2, 237, 249, 255, 257–8, 259–61, 263, 268, 274, 275, 286, 290–4, 316, 321, 323 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.233–6╅╉133â•‹n.32, 135, 138, 146, 147, 202, 203, 218–19, 254 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.238–40╅╉23, 26, 28, 37, 45, 46, 47–55, 48, 50, 52, 53, 55, 57 (2), 59, 66, 68, 69, 71, 84, 85, 87, 88–9, 90, 169, 190–5, 195, 200, 202, 203, 206, 208–9, 213, 221, 223, 224, 234, 236–7, 247, 249, 257, 259–63, 271, 274, 275, 285–9, 290, 321, 323 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.241–4╅╉135, 146 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. D.245–7 (Merro partbooks)╅╉96, 98, 107, 114–15, 133, 252, 255, 257 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. E.431–6╅╉128â•‹n.14, 129, 129–30, 131, 133 (2), 138, 146, 254, 258 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. E.451╅╉64â•‹n.55, 133â•‹n.32, 135, 146, 202, 203, 218 GB-Ob, MSS Mus. Sch. F.568–9╅╉128â•‹n.14, 129, 129–30, 133 (2), 138, 146, 254, 258 GB-Ob, MS Mus. Sch. F.575╅╉96 GB-Ob, Tenbury MS 302╅╉23, 108, 110, 112, 133, 163 GB-Och, Mus. MS 5╅╉213, 214, 247 GB-Och, Mus. MS 62╅╉51 GB-Och, Mus. MS 67╅╉51 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 367–70╅╉126, 131, 201â•‹n.48, 254–5 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 379–81╅╉126, 201â•‹n.48 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 391–6╅╉135, 146 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 423–8╅╉152 GB-Och, Mus. MS 430╅╉201, 203, 210 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 479–83╅╉135, 146, 158 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 531–2╅╉107 GB-Och, Mus. MS 599╅╉247 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 725–7╅╉23, 40â•‹n.19, 76, 85, 107–15 (MS 727 inventory, 109), 110, 111, 115, 117–20, 125 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 732–5╅╉108 GB-Och, Mus. MSS 754–9╅╉134, 146 GB-Och, Mus. MS 1005╅╉219, 220 IRL-Dm, MS Z3.4.13, 95â•‹n.19╅╉115 IRL-Dm, MS Z3.5.13╅╉96 Longleat House, Whitelocke Papers Parcel II/9 item 6╅╉31 US-CAh, MS Mus. 70╅╉23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 40, 45, 47–8, 48, 53, 72, 76–87, 77, 78–9, 80–1, 82, 87, 88–9, 90, 95â•‹n.18, 97â•‹n.24, 107, 108â•‹n.67, 110–12, 112, 117, 117–20, 121–3, 124, 315–18, 322–3

LAWES.indb 348

(manuscripts continued) US-CAh, MS Mus. 181╅╉98 US-Cn, MS VM.1.A.18.J.52c.╅╉101 US-NH, Filmer MS 3╅╉98â•‹n.27, 133â•‹n.31, 163, 218–19 US-NHub, Osborn MS 515╅╉157–8 US-NYp, Drexel MS 4027╅╉98 US-NYp, MS Mus. Res. *MNZ (Chirk)╅╉65 US-SM, EL 25 A 46–51╅╉32, 279 US-Ws, Ms. V.b.280╅╉106 in the possession of Franklin Zimmerman (the John Browne partbooks)╅╉157–8 in the possession of Layton Ring╅╉201, 203 Marenzio, Luca╅╉31, 151 Marini, Biagio╅╉211 Marshall, Julian╅╉308, 309 Marshe, Robert╅╉5 masques Britannia Triumphans (D’Avenant)╅╉60–3, 61, 70, 138, 159, 164, 166 Gray’s Inn Masque (Beaumont)╅╉109 Oberon (Ben Jonson)╅╉60 Triumph of Beauty, The (Shirley)╅╉63–6 Triumph of Peace, The (Shirley)╅╉19, 31, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64, 65, 70, 86 (2), 89, 151, 156, 159, 184, 217, 305 Triumph of the Prince d’Amour, The (D’Avenant)╅╉60–3, 62, 65, 67, 159, 164 Master of the Great Wardrobe, the╅╉8 Matthew, Richard, Lute’s Apology, The╅╉98 Merro, John╅╉See under copyists Mesangeau, René╅╉104–5 Mico, Richard╅╉127 Monteverdi, Claudio╅╉31, 151 Morley, Thomas╅╉106, 250 Morse, William Inglis╅╉315, 316 Myriell, Thomas╅╉See under copyists Nanki Library, the╅╉316–17 Nau, Stephen╅╉13, 273 Newcastle, Earl of╅╉9–10 Nixon, Scott╅╉24 Norcombe, Daniel╅╉225, 252 Nordstrom, Lyle╅╉216 Norgate, Edward╅╉17 North family/household╅╉101, 186, 210 North, Roger╅╉184, 186, 211 Notari, Angelo╅╉5, 11 organ makers/repairers╅╉17–18 organ continuo╅╉129, 156â•‹n.17, 164â•‹n.46 role of in consort music╅╉154, 173, 177 Coprario’s fantasia-suites╅╉177–8

19/03/2010 10:58

general index (organ continued) extemporization of accompaniments╅╉ 250–1 Jenkins’s fantasia-suites╅╉198–9 Lawes’s bass viol duos╅╉255–9, 263 Lawes’s fantasia-suites╅╉180, 193, 198–9, 209–11 Lawes’s viol consorts╅╉153–6, 166–8, 173–5 organs╅╉12, 14, 100, 190, 216, 217 at Whitehall Palace╅╉15–18 orpharions╅╉100 Osborne, Thomas, sale catalogues of╅╉102–3 Otterstedt, Annette╅╉237

349

Richmond Palace, keeper of the organs╅╉17 Rimmer, Joan╅╉213–15 Robert, Anthony╅╉5, 6 Rogers, Benjamin╅╉129 Rossi, Salamone╅╉211 Royal Music, the╅╉1, 2–3, 9, 12–13, 18, 20–21 royal musicians╅╉See court musicians royal progress, attendance of musicians╅╉12, 13–14 Rubens, Peter Paul╅╉1

sackbuts╅╉3, 13 St James’s palace, keeper of the organs╅╉17 St Paul’s Cathedral, musical circle of╅╉112, 151, 152 Packer, Robert╅╉201 Sandys, George, Paraphrase upon the Psalms Paisible, James╅╉133 and Hymns╅╉164–5, 170 Pallavicino, Benedetto╅╉151 Sawyer, Valentine╅╉99 parties de remplissage╅╉220 Schein, Johann Hermann╅╉126 Peerson, Martin, viol consorts╅╉151, 152, 163, scribal publication╅╉107 176 Seymour, Edward, Earl of Hertford╅╉10, 29 Pinto, David╅╉15, 24, 32, 42, 48, 49, 50–1, 72, shawms╅╉3, 13 76, 87, 97â•‹n.21, 105, 108, 126, 127, 129, 130, Shirley, James 134, 136, 138, 145, 146, 147, 148, 151, 152, 157, Cardinal, The╅╉72 157–8, 163 (2), 165–6, 168, 170, 173, 184â•‹n.18, ‘Cease warring thoughts’╅╉63–6 192, 200â•‹n.39, 201–2, 206, 210, 258, 271, 274 See also under masques Playford, Henry, sale catalogue of (1690)╅╉91, Shirley family, Staunton Harrold, 101, 213 Leicestershire╅╉32, 280 Playford, John╅╉98, 106–7, 198, 247 Brief Introduction to the Skill of Musick, A╅╉1, Shirley, Elizabeth╅╉280 Shirley, Robert, seventh Earl Ferrers╅╉280 140–1â•‹n.54 Shirley, Sir Henry╅╉32, 42, 45, 89 Charles I anecdotes╅╉1–3, 178 Signet Office, the╅╉8 Court-Ayres╅╉126, 202, 203, 218–19, 222, 254 Simpson, Christopher╅╉128, 143, 253 Courtly Masquing Ayres╅╉126, 202, 203, Compendium of Practical Music, A╅╉222 218–19, 222 Division-Violist, The╅╉127, 136, 141–2, 231, Musicall Banquet, A╅╉94, 106, 218, 222 234, 251, 254, 264, 271, 275 Musicks Hand-maide╅╉218, 222 rules for divisions╅╉225–8, 238, 239–40 Musicks Recreation on the Lyra Viol╅╉94–5, Little Consort, the╅╉101 95, 96, 97 (2) lost sources╅╉101–2â•‹n.42 Preaching Place╅╉15 Seasons, the╅╉200â•‹n.41 Presence Chamber, the╅╉2, 7, 15–16, 148 Simpson, Thomas╅╉126 Private Music, the╅╉See under ‘Lutes, Viols Taffel-Consort╅╉127 and Voices’, the (LVV) singer-lutenists╅╉5, 99 Privy Apartments, the╅╉2, 16 singers╅╉3, 10, 129, 305 Privy Chamber, the╅╉2, 6–7, 16, 148 singing boys╅╉11–12 Privy Galleries, the╅╉7, 16 Sleeper, Helen Joy╅╉177 Privy Lodgings, the╅╉7, 15, 17, 18 Slop, Abigail╅╉91 Privy Purse, the╅╉8, 10 Smuts, Malcolm╅╉21 Keeper of╅╉8 Spink, Ian╅╉63 Puerl, Paul╅╉126 Spring, Matthew╅╉105 Purcell, Henry╅╉25, 69 Squire, Philip╅╉11, 217 Stoeffken, Dietrich/Theodore╅╉94, 156, 305 Ravenscroft, Thomas╅╉151 Suckling, Sir John Read, Roger╅╉97 Goblins, The╅╉66 recorders╅╉3 Tragedy of Brennoralt, The╅╉72 Reichner, Herbert╅╉317 suites, development of╅╉126–7 Richards, Janet╅╉250

LAWES.indb 349

19/03/2010 10:58

350

the consort music of william lawes

Talbot, James╅╉215 Tallis, Thomas╅╉106 Taylor, John╅╉9, 14, 17, 103, 156 lost source╅╉102–3 Taylor, Robert╅╉17, 98, 99, 103, 107, 108, 109, 112–14, 125 Alman {25} (lyra-viol trio)╅╉112, 113 Alman {26} (lyra-viol trio)╅╉112, 113–14 (Ex.â•‹3.2), 117 Sacred Hymns╅╉106, 113 theorboes╅╉15, 57, 100, 101–2â•‹n.42, 128, 129, 137, 140, 156, 223 Thompson, Robert╅╉47, 58, 108 Thurley, Simon╅╉16 Tokugawa, Yorisada╅╉316 Tomkins, Giles╅╉9, 14, 21, 51, 112, 156, 168, 253, 290 See also copyists, ‘Tomkins copyist’ (Hand D) Tomkins, John╅╉14, 68, 112, 151, 164, 271 Elegy on the death of (W. Lawes)╅╉112, 164, 271 Tomkins, Robert╅╉4, 9, 112 Tomkins, Thomas╅╉50 Traficante, Frank╅╉92 Treasurer of the Chamber, the╅╉8 Triphook, Robertâ•… 308, 309 Trollap, Henricus╅╉76 Trollap, Robert╅╉76, 315 two-part (Tr–B) music╅╉198, 218–23, 247 arrangements/reductions╅╉254–5, 257, 258 basis for extemporization/elaboration╅╉15, 98, 100, 163, 217–18, 234, 274, 276–7 two-treble scoring╅╉152 development of╅╉126–8

(violins continued) bass╅╉216 cost of╅╉18–19 viols╅╉3, 10, 15, 17, 18, 124, 127 bass╅╉1, 14, 100, 104, 107, 128, 136, 159â•‹n.32, 210, 218, 222, 223, 257, 274 division╅╉48–9, 92, 253 lyra-viols╅╉99, 101–2â•‹n.42, 104, 107 arrangements for╅╉95â•‹n.18 consorts (lyra consorts)╅╉91, 99–101, 220–1, 274 cost of╅╉18, 107 divisions╅╉97, 98 duos╅╉104 graces/ornaments╅╉97, 98, 125 repertoire╅╉93–5, 220–1 solo╅╉73–4, 95–8, 124 sources╅╉94–6, 106–13, 120–1, 124–5; lost╅╉ 102–3 terminology╅╉92–3 trios╅╉85–6, 98–9, 102–3, 107–20, 121–5 tunings╅╉82, 92–4 tenor╅╉100, 128, 136, 159â•‹n.32, 210 treble╅╉99, 100, 156, 186, 212, 218, 222, 257 virginals╅╉16, 17, 100, 106, 216

Walls, Peter╅╉18–19, 65, 75 Ward, John╅╉31 bass viol duos╅╉250, 251, 259â•‹n.35, 271 viol consorts╅╉150, 151 (2) Warwick, Thomas╅╉14 Webb, John╅╉120–1 Webster, Maurice╅╉22, 127 Echo {11}╅╉255 Webster, Noah╅╉29 Vallet, Adam╅╉6, 10, 14 White, William╅╉31, 151, 197, 250 Van Dyck, Anthony╅╉1 ‘Whitelocke’s Corant’╅╉163â•‹n.41 Vecchi, Horatio╅╉151 Willetts, Pamela╅╉7 1, 108, 112, 309 Vere, Robert╅╉18 Wilson, John╅╉5, 9–10, 65, 135 viol players╅╉94, 129, 136–7, 156, 221 wind bands, the╅╉3, 15–16, 17 amateurs╅╉120 diet╅╉20 at court╅╉3, 4–5, 10, 14, 99, 156, 253 provision of music by╅╉13, 15 viola╅╉128, 136 reorganization of╅╉3, 13 violin band, the╅╉3 (2), 138 Withdrawing Chamber, the╅╉7, 15, 16 attendance at court╅╉13 Wise, Michael╅╉12 provision of music by╅╉3, 15–16 Wood, Julia╅╉66 violinists╅╉273 Woodington, John╅╉10, 14, 151, 156, 199 at court╅╉5, 10, 14, 156, 186, 199 violins╅╉12, 15, 100, 101–2â•‹n.42, 128 (2), 176, 177, Wormall, Edward╅╉5, 11 Wrench, Jonas╅╉5 186, 192, 196–7, 211, 217, 228, 270, 274

LAWES.indb 350

19/03/2010 10:58

William Lawes:Layout 1 18/12/2009 16:11 Page 1

R E L AT E D T I T L E S

Hermann Pötzlinger’s Music Book IAN RUMBOLD WITH PETER WRIGHT

A study of one of the most significant medieval manuscripts containing music, and its owner, sheds light on many aspects of contemporary culture. This is an excellent book. EARLY MUSIC REVIEW

Medieval Liturgical Chant and Patristic Exegesis EMMA HORNBY

A sensitive and detailed investigation of the complex relationship between text and music in medieval chant.

William Lawes is arguably one of the finest English composers of the early seventeenth century. Born in Salisbury in 1602, he rose to prominence in the early 1630s; in 1635 he gained a prestigious post among the elite private musicians of Charles I (the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’). With the outbreak of civil war in 1642, Lawes took arms in support of the king; he died during the Siege of Chester in September 1645.

This book will be of interest to scholars working on English music in the Early Modern period, but also to those interested in source studies, compositional process and the function of music in the Early Modern court. J O H N C U N N I N G H A M is a Postdoctoral Fellow at the School

of Music, University College Dublin.

an imprint of Boydell & Brewer Ltd PO Box 9, Woodbridge, Suffolk IP12 3DF and 668 Mt Hope Ave, Rochester NY 14620, USA www.boydell.co.uk www.boydellandbrewer.com

John Cunningham

This book is divided into three sections. The first is a contextual examination of music at the court of Charles I, with specific reference to the arcane group of musicians known as the ‘Lutes, Viols and Voices’; much of Lawes’s surviving consort music appears to have been written for performance of this group. The remainder of the book deals with William Lawes the composer. The second section is a detailed study of Lawes’s autograph sources: the first of its kind. It includes 62 black and white facsimile images, and complete inventories of all the autographs, and presents ground-breaking new research into Lawes’s scribal hand, the sources and their functions, and new evidence for their chronology. The third section comprises six chapters on Lawes’s consort music; in these chapters various topics are examined, such as chronology, Lawes’s compositional process, and the relationship between Lawes’s music and the court context from which it arose.

The Consort Music of William Lawes 1602–1645

MUSIC IN BRITAIN SERIES 1600 –1900

The Consort Music of William Lawes 1602–1645

John Cunningham

Jacket: Circle of Pieter Jacobsz Codde (1599–1678), Portrait of a young man (believed to be William Lawes), c.1635–40, oil on canvas. © The Sullivan Collection/The Bridgeman Art Library. JACKET DESIGN: SIMON LOXLEY